04 - Driver Components - Fuji Electric

PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES
SELECTOR SWITCHES
EMERGENCY STOP PUSHBUTTON
SWITCHES
PILOT LIGHTS
MULTI DISPLAY LIGHTS
TERMINAL BLOCKS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
LOW
VOLTAGE
EQUIPMENT
Up to 600 Volts
INDIVIDUAL CATALOG
from D&C CATALOG 20th Edition 04
AR22
Pushbutton switches
Terminal blocks
AR22
Emergency stop pushbutton
AR30
Selector switches
DR30
Pilot lights
Multi display lights
AH164, AH165
Pushbutton switches
AR16
Illuminated pushbutton
AR16
Selector switches(Key)

Command Switches
AR16•DR16, AF16•DF16
28.4mm
42.5mm
2
Ø16
An integrated structure with
built-in contacts that can
reduce control panel depth.
A wide variety of sockets are
available to simplify wiring.
Operator • Contacts Mounting panel
Supporting smaller and thinner operator’s panels
A structure that integrates operator and contacts to reduce panel-mounting depth. Terminals extending to the rear of the switch
ensure easy wiring work.
Integrated contact structure (Standard type)
AR16/DR16 series
Contact separated type
AH164 series
AH165 series
AH165-2 series
A wide variety of sockets reduce wiring work
Switches combine with a variety of sockets to simplify wiring.
Fast-connection socket Connector socket Socket for PC board
Lock lever
Insertion
slot button
• Applicable as a fast-connection
terminal switch by combining the
socket with a switch.
• Easily wired by simply removing the
wire sheath and inserting the wires
while pressing the insertion slot button
(no soldering required).
• Incorporates a branch terminal for easy
branching.
• Applicable as a connector by
combining the socket with
receptacles.
• The socket holds the receptacles,
making it easy to connect the
receptacle to the switch with a single
operation.
• Applicable as a switch for PC board by
combining the socket with a switch.
• Pattern wiring reduces the number of
wiring man-hour and helps prevent
faulty wiring.
is a nickname for the AR16/AF16 series of integrated command switches with built-in contacts.
Receptacle
Lock lever

Washer Tightening nut
Contributes to attractive
panel designs
Brighter illuminated
surface
Less power consumption
helps to save energy.
A longer service life
helps to reduce
maintenance costs.
Dedicated LED lamp
Highly reliable
contact mechanism
Gold-plated contacts and a snap-action
mechanism enables IC-level
applications (with a switching current
of 1 mA at 5 V).
Fast-Connection socket
3
In addition to the standard type, a thin type
with a panel protrusion of only 2 mm is
available, allowing high-density mounting for
attractive panel designs.
Integrated contact structure(Thin type)
AF16/DF16 series
2mm
Connector socket
Socket for PC board
Degrees of
protection IP65
The operator has IP65 protection for
smooth operation without adverse
effects from oil, water, or dusts.
Applicable to a wide variety of
equipment, from machine tools to
OA equipment.
Meets EU RoHS
requirements
Standard models meet RoHS
requirements
(EU Directive 2002/95/C).
Standard models meet international standards
Standard models meet UL/CSA requirements, China Compulsory Certification (CCC)
standards, and TÜV EN standards, making them ideal for equipment for export.
Note: Command switches shipped as single articles to China must conform to the Product Quality Law. Check
with your Fuji Electric representative.
Bezel
(Standard)
• Keep in mind that the panel cutout size
for the thin type depends on the operator
shape. See page 04/167 for details.
• The panel depth is unified to 35.9mm.
The insertion/extraction
life of the key is greatly
extended
The key selector
switch incorporates
a pin tumbler type key
(reversible type) to
improve the insertion/
extraction performance of the key.
• Six key types are available.
• The pin tumbler construction improves security.
The operating angle position of the selector
switch can be easily changed.
The bezel is separate from the knob (key), so the operating angle position can be easily
changed in 45° increments (with the AR16 series rectangular or square type only).
The following figure shows a knob type example. Same applies to the key type.
• Two-position model example.
（a） 90°
90° 90°
1
1
1
2
2
2
（b）（c）
AR16
DR16
AF16
DF16
(Standard)

Ø22（Ø25）
AR22 and DR22
Command Switches
The use of a release arm enables easy mounting.
Easy attachment and
detachment with a
release arm
The separate structure with a unique
wedge mechanism enables one-step
attachment and detachment of the
operating section and contact section,
without the use of any tool.
Improved work
efficiency through
bi-directional wiring
Terminals can be wired from two
directions. This is ideal for wiring
crossovers or wiring in narrow spaces.
Square washers are used to enable
wiring with solid wires.
One-step lock!
Panel thickness need
not be adjusted
Utility
1NO 1NC Lamp terminals and
Buzzers are also
available
Because the back surface of the
operating section is mounted with a
tightening nut, there is absolutely no
need to adjust the panel thickness.
Also, the operator
can be mounted on
the panel along with
a previously installed
button and knob.
Electronic or
electromagnetic
buzzers provide
audible feedback
on the status of the
equipment.
Splash-proof
buzzers that conform to EN 60204-1
(degrees of protection) are also available
(enclosure used in general industry:
IP54).
4
Blue Red One
Touch!
Transformer Unit
Detachment
Wiring from
two directions
Color coding of contact blocks, lamp
terminal and transformer unit makes
wiring and checking easy.
Push
One-step release!
Mounting panel
Contact block and
transformer unit can
also be added or
replaced in a single
step
All contact block and transformer unit
are designed with snap-on mounting, so
no tools are required.
One Step!
Superior contact
reliability
All the contacts are double break type
and feature self-cleaning action.
Every time the switch is operated,
the contact surfaces are wiped with a
sliding movement, thus ensuring high
contact reliability even at low voltage
and small current levels (5V, 5mA).
Easy
One
Touch!
Attachment
Attachment
Detachment
Operator • Contacts Mounting panel
Black

Switches with IP2X
-compliant terminals
are also available
Switches with IP2X-compliant terminals
with a finger protection structure
conforming to EN 60204-1 (Protection
against electric shock) are available.
(A test finger that simulates a human
finger does not come into contact with
live parts.)
High brightness LED
illuminated model,
“PIKARI-KUN”
1. Standard models feature
(1) higher equipment grade,
(2) enhanced safety that enables easy
identification of the status, and
(3) adoption of pure green illumination
color through a major improvement
in visibility (Luminance) through the
adoption of four elements LED.
2. Along with a significant improvement
in Luminance, energy is saved through
a reduction in power consumption.
3. The maintenance cost is also reduced
by increasing the service life.
Features 30 × 50 mm
tight mounting
Tightening nut
Depth of the short body
A short design enables full use of the
available depth of the equipment.
Short
Lamp base shape
facilitates easy
replacement
The same lamp base shape of BA9s/13
for both high brightness LED lamps
and incandescent lamps facilitates
application.
5
Safety
Panel cutout dimensions
of 22.3 mm and 25.5 mm
diameter
By providing a projection on the tightening
nut, one switch can be mounted on two
different panel cutout dimensions.
Therefore, switches do not need to be
purchased to match the panel cutout
dimensions.
Units can be mounted on a 25.5-mm diameter hole
simply by turning over the tightening nut.
30mm
50mm
Note: Not applicable to all models.
Illuminated
Puchbutton
Switch
(1NO+1NC
with transformer)
Selector
Switch
(1NO+1NC)
Pilot light
(models for
full voltages)
61mm
❶ The Short-body Pilot light is 21.5mm
long.
41mm
37mm ❶
Note: For details, refer to AR22 and DR22-series
Special Products.
Ø 22.3 + 0.4 mm
0 Ø 25.5 + 0.5 mm
0
Terminal cover for
charged parts provided
as a standard accessory
A terminal cover that covers the terminals
is provided as a standard accessory to
help prevent electric shock by reducing
exposure to charged parts.
Note: Not provided on all models.
Standard models meet
international standards
Standard models meet UL/CSA
requirements and TÜV EN standards,
making them ideal for equipment for
export.
Chinese CCC-compliant
models are also available.
Note: For details, refer to List of Models.
See page 04/3 to 04/6
Global
Standardization
Release arm
Contact section
Contacts Transformer unit
Lamp terminal
for pilot light
AR22
DR22

16 to 30 mm diameter
Command Switch Emergency Stop (Illuminated) Pushbutton Switches
Compliance with International Standards
The emergency stop pushbuttons employ FUJI's original Trigger Action mechanism.
They are suitable for emergency stop and safety.
This mechanism prevents the contacts from moving until the button is pushed and locked.
• Provided with a Trigger Action mechanism conforming to EN 480.
• Provided with direct opening action (approved by TÜV) conforming to EN60947-5-1 and EN60947-5-5.
Button section Not pushed Being pushed Locked
Contact operation
transitions
NC contacts Closed Closed Open
NC contacts
open
（OFF）
Emergency stop pushbutton switches available with an integrated contact
structure
Emergency stop pushbutton switches are available with an integrated contact structure in which the operating section and contact
section are combined into one unit (AH165-V, AR16V, and AR22VG).By arranging the contacts in an integrated structure, the reliability of
the safety protection function is increased.
6
AR22VGF
• The AR16V types feature a panel depth dimension of 28 mm for non-illuminated
models and can have up to four sets of contacts.
• The AR22VGF types are equipped with a lamp circuit
interlocking structure in which a lamp lights when the switch
is locked.
11 21 X1
12 22 X2
AR16V0R AR16V0L
AR16V0R
Safety equipment
Operation characteristics and
contact operation for NC contacts
Locked
Being pushed
Lock position
Not pushed
Operation force
NC contact ON OFF
These pushbutton switches comply
with various international standards,
so they can be reliably used as
emergency stop devices.
Ø16（AH165，AR16）
Non-illuminated Illuminated
28mm 31.5mm

Ø22（AR22，AM22） Ø30（AR30）
AR22V0L AM22VME AR30V1R
A mechanical indicator mechanism
by which the operating status can be
seen at a single glance is available.
In AM22VME types, the operating status is indicated
mechanically in the form of green and red colors in three button
display windows
SEMI-compliant guard rings are also
available
This guard ring can be combined with our emergency stop
switches to comply with the SEMI standards required for
semiconductor manufacturing devices.
• Ideal for mechanical control panels in which display power AR22V3R Z286
supply is difficult to ensure.
Standard models meet international
standards
Combination of
an AR9R008 guard ring
with an AR22V2R switch
Combination of
an AR9R008 guard ring
with an AR22V3R Z286 switch
• Emergency stop switches with
the “EMO” mark are available
(AR22V3R Z286).
• EMERGENCY OFF labels are
available.
Emergency stop pushbutton switches
with IP2X -compliant terminals are
also available Standard models meet UL/CSA requirements and TÜV, EN
Standard are available and exhibit CE marking.
Chinese CCC-compliant models are also available.
Emergency stop pushbutton switches with IP2X-compliant
terminals with a finger protection structure conforming to EN
60204-1 (protection against electric shock) are available. (A test
finger that simulates a human finger does not come in contact
with live parts.)
Note: The AR16V types is IP2X compliant when used with a terminal cover for charged
parts (AR9Y262, sold separately). Switches from the AH165-V types are not
IP2types compliant. For details on the AR22, 30V, Q, and AM22V types, refer to
Special Products.The standard AR22VG types are IP2X compliant.
7
Note: For details, refer to SEMI-compliant guard rings.
Note: For details, refer to the list of models.
S
AR9R008
Reset status
(no operation being performed): Green
Locked status
(during operation): Red
Button display window
→ Green
Button display window
→ Red
Tightening ring
→ Groove is visible
Tightening ring
→ Groove is hidden
SAFETY
16 to
30 mm
diameter

General information
Command Series
Series Type Features Command Series AR22 and DR22 • Standard models feature illumination with high brightness LEDs.
• No adjusting of panel thickness is necessary.
• The button and lens can be mounted on a panel while the operator is engaged.
• Easy replacing contact block and transformer.
• Wiring from two directions is possible.
• The shortest among industrial pushbuttons. The transformer now occupies far less
space.
• A terminal cover are provided, assuring safety and security.
• The emergency stop pushbuttons employ FUJI’s original Trigger Action mechanism.
• Mountable even on panel cutout 25mm diameter.
• AR22 and DR22 series of the ø22 Command Switches are approved by UL/CSA
CCC and TÜV (EN standard).
• Bearing CE markings.
AR30 and DR30 • Standard models feature illumination with high brightness LEDs.
space.
• AR30 and DR30 series of the ø30 Command Switches are approved by UL/CSA,
AR16 and AF16 • An integrated operator component and contact mechanism that reduces control
panel’s depth. A unified depth of 28.4mm for the Standard type and 35.9mm for the
Thin type.
• Thin type and Standard types available for your control panel design. Select an
optimum one to match your control panel design.
• A wide variety of sockets help to reduce wiring.
• Incorporating a gold-flashed SPDT or 2PDT contact mechanism with a snap-action
structure that makes and breaks 1mA at 5V.
• A key selector switch with a pin tumbler key and reversible type mechanism
provides improved key insertion and removal (extraction) performance.
• Complies with RoHS (EU Directive 2002/95/EC).
• The standard AR16 and DR16, AF16 and DF16 series of the ø16 Command
Switches are approved by UL/CSA, CCC and TÜV (EN standard).
AH164 and AH165
AH165-2
• Standard models feature illumination with high brightness LEDs.
• Unified depth dimension of 24 mm for type with indicator and 42.5 mm for other
types.
• Application possible at 1 mA, 5 V due to gold-plated contacts and sliding structure.
• Incandescent, neon and LED lamps are available.
• Easy replacing contact block.
• AH165-2 series are about twice as large as the AH165 series.
• AH164 and AH165, AH165-2 series of the ø16 Command Switches are approved
by UL/CSA, CCC and TÜV (EN standard).
AM22 and DM22 • Standard models feature illumination with high brightness LEDs.
• Easy addition or replacement of text plates with front tightening nut mounting
system.
space.
• AM22 and DM22 series of the ø22 Command Switches are approved by UL/CSA,
8
Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd./D & C Catalog
Information subject to change without notice

General information
Command Series
Page
Type AR22 DR22
Degree of protection IP65
Illuminated pushbutton switches ●
Pushbutton switches ● -
Emergency stop pushbutton switches ● -
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switches ● -
Selector switches ● -
Illuminated selector switches ● -
Joy stick selector switches ● -
Buzzer - ● (IP00, IP54)
Pilot lights - ●
04/2
Type AR30 DR30
Illuminated pushbutton switches ● -
Joy stick selector switches ● -
Buzzer - ● (IP00, IP54)
Pilot lights - ●
04/55
Type AR16 DR16 AF16 DF16
Illuminated pushbutton switches ● - ● -
Pushbutton switches ● - ● -
Emergency stop pushbutton switches ● - - -
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switches ● - - -
Selector switches ● - ● -
Pilot lights - ● - ●
04/129
Type AH164 AH165 AH165-2
Degree of protection IP40 IP65 IP65
Illuminated pushbutton switches ● ● ●
Pushbutton switches ● ● ●
Emergency stop pushbutton switches - ● -
Selector switches ● ● ●
Pilot lights ● ● ●
Buzzer ● (IP00) ● (IP54) -
04/186
Type AM22 DM22
Illuminated pushbutton switches ● -
Pilot lights - ●
04CD/2/1
9
04

General information
Command Series
Series Type Features Command Series AH25 • Standard models feature illumination with high brightness LEDs.
• The standard AH25 series of the ø25 Command Switches are approved by UL/
CSA.
AG22 and AG23 • Application possible at 1 mA, 5 V due to gold-plated contacts and sliding structure.
• Easy replacing contact block.
• Compact design with a short depth.
• Solder/tab terminals.
• The standard AG22 and AG23 series are approved by UL/CSA.
Multi Display AP30F and AP40F • High brightness for more vivid colors
• Newly added blue and pure white LEDs improve visibility.
• Transformer-free design for lighter structure and shorter depth (for 100-V and 200-
V models)
• Easy color and voltage changes.
• Wide window size selection. A wide selection, including half-size windows.
• UL/CSA-compliant models also available.
Rotary Switches AB09, AB16 and AB32 • Rotary switches with code output.
• Three types of code output are available.
• Select either soldered or connector connections. Cam Type RC310 • A wide range of models available for control, instrumentation, and motor starting
and with bifurcated contacts, keys, and indicators.
Panel Switches NS387 • Ideal for switching all types of electric circuits.
Terminal Blocks • FUJI can supply a variety of terminal blocks for switchboard or switchgear use. 10

General information
Command Series
Page
Type AH25
Degree of protection IP40 IP65
Illuminated pushbutton switches ● (Square type) ●
Pushbutton switches ● (Square type) ●
Selector switches ● (Square type) ●
Pilot lights ● (Square type) ●
Mechanical interlocked pushbutton switches - ●
04CD/3/1
Mounting hole dimensions 23.5×22.5 23.5×30.5
Type AG22 AG23
Illuminated pushbutton switches ● (Square type) ●
Pilot lights ● (Square type) ●
Illuminated lever switches ● (Square type) ●
Illuminated rocker switches ● (Square type) ●
04CD/1/1
Type Illuminated face Face size Type Illuminated face Face size
AP30F Half size (H) 15×30 AP40F Half size (H) 20×40
Square (S) 30×30 Square (S) 40×40
Rectangular horizontally
30×60
Rectangular horizontally
40×80
long (T)
long (T)
Rectangular vertical
long (V)
60×30
Rectangular vertical
long (V)
80×40
Mixtture of S, T, V (X) - Mixtture of S, T, V (X) -
04/235
Type Type of code
Real binary code Complementary binary code Real gray code
AC09 ● ● ●
AC16
AC32
04/256
Type Mounting Rated insulation
voltage
Rated thermal
current
Remarks
RC310-1 40 x 40, mounted with
4 screws
600V 10A The following are also available:
Keys, indicators, bifurcated
contacts, case covers, etc.
04/263
Type Rated thermal current Application
NS387 15A Voltmeter changeover switches
Ammeter changeover switches
Industrial control switches
04/272
Type Rated insulation voltage Rated thermal current Application
AYBN 600V 15 to 600A General purpose terminal blocks
AYBS 600V 49 to 115A High quality terminal blocks
LT4D 660V 20A Rail mounted terminal blocks with isolating switch
SKT 600V 50 to 200A Terminal block with pressure solderless box lug type connector
on one side and screw type connector on the other
LT2E 600V 22 to 600A Rail mounted terminal blocks
LT5 250V 30A Testing terminal and link for VT and CT circuit
04/276
11
04

Pushbuttons, Selector Switches
Pilot Lights, Control Selector Switches
Panel Switches, Terminal Blocks
Command Series AR22 and DR22 General information ........................................................................................04/2
Quick reference guide ....................................................................................04/3
Type number nomenclature ...........................................................................04/7
Ratings and specifications .............................................................................04/12
Pushbuttons, selectors, pilot lights and buzzers............................................ 04/17
Dimensions .....................................................................................................04/40
Notes on use ..................................................................................................04/50
AR30 and DR30 General information ........................................................................................04/55
Dimensions .....................................................................................................04/94
Notes on use ..................................................................................................04/105
Accessories for AR22/DR22 and AR30/DR30...............................................04/108
Special products .............................................................................................04/122
Mass (AR22/DR22 and AR30/DR30).............................................................04/125
AR16, DR16 and General information ........................................................................................04/129
AF16, DF16 Quick reference guide ....................................................................................04/130
Type numbers and dimensions (AR16 and DR16) ........................................04/143
Type numbers and dimensions (AF16 and DF16)......................................... 04/154
Panel cutout and mounting ............................................................................04/167
Notes on use ..................................................................................................04/169
Accessories ....................................................................................................04/175
Integrated contact structure AR16V series ....................................................04/180
AH164 and AH165 General information ........................................................................................04/186
Mounting space ..............................................................................................04/209
AH165-2 General information ........................................................................................04/186
Pushbuttons, selectors and pilot lights ..........................................................04/213
Mounting space ..............................................................................................04/223
Notes on use (AH164, AH165 and AH165-2) ................................................04/224
Accessories for AH164, AH165 and AH165-2 ...............................................04/227
Mass (AH164, AH165 and AH165-2) .............................................................04/233
Multi Display AP30F and AP40F General information ........................................................................................04/235
Lights Type number nomenclature ...........................................................................04/236
Specifications and performance.....................................................................04/237
Dimensions .....................................................................................................04/239
Notes on use ..................................................................................................04/243
Accessories ....................................................................................................04/247
Window layout sheet ......................................................................................04/254
Rotary Switches AC09, AC16 and AC32 Digital code output type..................................................................................04/256
Cam Type RC310 Control selector switches ...............................................................................04/263
Panel Switches NS387 and RC310 Instrument switches........................................................................................04/270
Control switches .............................................................................................04/272
Terminal Blocks General information ........................................................................................04/276
AYBN General purpose terminal blocks ...................................................................04/278
AYBS High quality terminal blocks ...........................................................................04/279
LT4D Channel mounted type terminal blocks with islating switch .......................... 04/280
SKT Power terminal blocks ....................................................................................04/281
LT2E Rail mounted terminal blocks .........................................................................04/283
Testing Terminal TT Testing terminals for VT and CT circuits........................................................04/288
Command Series CCC approved ................................................................................................04/289

Page
Command Series AG22 and AG23 General information ................................................................................04CD/1/1
Quick reference guide ............................................................................04CD/1/2
Type number nomenclature ...................................................................04CD/1/4
Ratings and specifications .....................................................................04CD/1/6
Pushbuttons, pilot lights, lever switches and rocker switches............... 04CD/1/8
Dimensions .............................................................................................04CD/1/12
Notes on use ..........................................................................................04CD/1/13
Accessories ............................................................................................04CD/1/17
Mass .......................................................................................................04CD/1/19
AM22 and DM22 General information ................................................................................04CD/2/1
Pushbuttons, selectors and pilot lights ..................................................04CD/2/13
Dimensions .............................................................................................04CD/2/29
Notes on use ..........................................................................................04CD/2/36
Accessories ............................................................................................04CD/2/39
Special products .....................................................................................04CD/2/46
Mass .......................................................................................................04CD/2/49
CCC approved ........................................................................................04CD/2/50
AH25 General information ................................................................................04CD/3/1
Pushbuttons, selectors and pilot lights ..................................................04CD/3/10
Notes on use ..........................................................................................04CD/3/27
Accessories ............................................................................................04CD/3/30
Mass .......................................................................................................04CD/3/34
Command box AHX9 ......................................................................................................04CD/4/1

MINIMUM ORDERS
Orders amounting to less than ¥10,000 net per order will
be charged as ¥10,000 net per order plus freight and
other charges.
WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
Weights and dimensions appearing in this catalog are the
best information available at the time of going to press.
FUJI ELECTRIC FA has a policy of continuous product
improvement, and design changes may make this
information out of date.
Please confirm such details before planning actual
construction.
INFORMATION IN THIS CATALOG IS SUBJECT TO
CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

04/1
KKD07-157
04
AH164, 165
SK-1103
• 16mm diameter hole, finger-sized
button
• Incandescent, neon and LED
lamps are available.
• Block type contact
• AH165 series is oil-tight
• UL, CSA, TÜV and CCC
approved
SK-1138
Command Series
General information
■ Command series
AR30/DR30
• 30mm diameter hole
• Provided with terminal cover for
safety and security
approved
AR22/DR22
• Mountable even on panel cutout
25mm in diameter.
• Provided with newly developed
release arm
• Provided with terminal cover for
safety and security
approved
AF94-320
AF95-4
AF95-6
AF98-88
AF98-195
AF94-310
AH165-2
AF87-211
• AH165-2 series are about twice
as large as the AH165 series
• Incandescent, neon and LED
lamps are available.
• Block type contact
• AH165-2 series is oil-tight
approved
AF87-208
AR16/DR16, AF16/DF16
• 16mm diameter hole,
finger-sized button
• Integrated contact structure
• AR16 series is standard type.
• AF16 series is thin type.
approved
KKD07-171 KKD07-183

04/2
AF94-318 AF94-319 AF94-333
AF94-357 AF94-297
KKD06-335
KKD05-023b AF94-310
Pushbuttons/Selectors/Pilot Lights/Buzzers
AR22 and DR22
General information
The AR22 now uses a release arm with
a wedge mechanism developed by Fuji
Electric FA. This enables you to mount
or remove the operator and contact
block without using any tools. When
fitting the switch to a panel, you can
ignore the panel thickness.
You have only to secure the operator
with a locking nut from behind the panel
without any need for adjustment. The
improved locking nut is capable of
mounting the operator in both 22.3mm
and 25.5mm dia. panel cutout holes.
■ Features
Facilitated mounting
• No adjusting of panel thickness is
necessary.
• The button and lens can be mounted
on a panel while the operator is
engaged.
• Mountable even on a panel cutout
25.5mm in diameter.
Panel cutting
Miniaturization
• Pushbuttons and selector switches
with 1NO+1NC: 41mm deep
Pilot lights: 37mm deep
• The transformer now occupies far less
space.
Illuminated pushbuttons Pushbuttons Pilot lights
AR22F0L AR22E0R DR22D0L
AR22E0M AR22E0Y DR22D0L- 8, 9
Easy replacing contact block and
transformer
• Because of a snap-on mounting,
replacement or addition of the contact
block and transformer unit is very
simple.
• The contact block is common to all the
pushbuttons of this series.
• Contact block is easily replaced even
when the pushbuttons are mounted
closely together.
• Replacement of the contact block can
be done with a screwdriver, without the
need for any special tool.
Wiring
• Wiring in both vertical and lateral
directions facilitates wiring in narrow
spaces.
• Color coding of contact blocks
makes wiring easy.
1NO: Blue, 1NC: Red
Lamp terminal and
transformer unit: Black
Safety
• A terminal cover is provided, assuring
safety and security.
• FUJI’s original Trigger Action
mechanism is used in the emergency
stop pushbuttons. They are suitable
for emergency stop and safety. This
mechanism prevents the contacts from
moving until the button is pushed and
locked.
• Reliability of safety functions increased
by integrated operator and contact
block construction. (AR22VG)
Protection
• Excellent oil-tight construction (IP65) of
the operator.
• Closure of the contact block has been
improved.
■ Approvals
AF98-88
Selectors
AR22V0L AR22VGE AR22PR
Panel thickness
Min. 1 mm
No adjusting
Max. 6 mm
ø22.3 mm
ø25.5 mm
41 mm
Pushbutton
switch
Selector switch
Illuminated
pushbutton
switch with
transformer
Pilot light/
Standard
Pilot light/
Short body
transformer
61 mm*
37 mm
21.5 mm
* 230V and over:
65mm
Connecting to the operator Detaching
Snap-fitting of contact blocks Detaching
S
Emergency stop pushbuttons
For further information related to
approved type, see page 04/3 to 04/06.

See page 04/17, 04/40 See page 04/17, 04/40 See page 04/18, 04/40
AF94-318 AF99-319 AF94-315
AF94-317 AF02-70 AF94-314
AF94-367 KKD06-335 AF94-440
04/3
Flush round head AR22F0L, F5L
S
Extended round head AR22E0L, E5L
S
Mushroom head
(40mm dia.)
AR22M0L, M5L
S
Mushroom head
(29mm dia.)
AR22M4L, M9L
See page 04/17, 04/40 See page 04/18, 04/40
S
Extended with
transparent full guard
(24mm dia.)
AR22G4L, G9L
See page 04/17, 04/40 See page 04/18, 04/40
S
Extended with full guard
(24mm dia. with
openings)
S
(24mm dia.)
S
Push-lock, turn-reset
(40mm dia. with white
arrow)
Flush square head AR22F0M, F5M
S
Extended square head AR22E0M, E5M
S
04
AR22 and DR22
Quick reference guide
■ Illuminated pushbutton switches
Operator Type Operator Type Operator Type
AR22G2L, G7L
Flush round head
with square bezel
AR22F0P, F5P
S
AR22G1L, G6L
Extended round head
with square bezel
AR22E0P, E5P
S
AR22V5L Mushroom head with
square bezel
(29mm dia.)
AR22M4P
S
■ Pushbutton switches
Flush round head AR22F0R, F5R
S
Flush round head
Symbol mark type
AR22FAR, FBR Mushroom head
(40mm dia.)
AR22M0R, M5R
S
Extended round head AR22E0R, E5R
S
Extended round head
Symbol mark type
AR22EAR, EBR Mushroom head
(29mm dia.)
AR22M4R, M9R
S
AF94-369 AF97-68
AF94-294 AF94-357
AF94-320 AF98-193 AF94-293
AF94-319 AF98-192 AF94-321
Note S : See page 04/289
S
S

(24mm dia.)
Pushbutton with
selector ring (2-position)
AR22S1R, S2R, S3R,
S6R
Flush with full guard
(24mm dia.)
S AF97-507
arrow)
AR22V5R
Extended with
half guard
S KKD08-042
See page 04/20, 04/41 See page 04/20, 04/41
See page 04/23, 04/42 See page 04/23, 04/42
See page 04/23, 04/42 See page 04/23, 04/42
04/4
Flush round head
with square bezel
AR22F0Y, F5Y
AF94-292 S
AF94-295
Extended round
head with square
bezel
AR22E0Y, E5Y
AF02-68 S
AF94-297
Flush square head AR22F0S, F5S
Mushroom head with
square bezel
(29mm dia.)
AR22M4Y
AF96-236 AF94-316 S
AF94-298
Extended square head AR22E0S, E5S
AR22 and DR22
AR22G3R, G8R
S
AR22G2R, G7R
S
AR22G0R, G5R
S
S
S
■ Emergency stop pushbutton switches (conform to EN418)
(Soft-touch 40mm dia.
with white arrow)
AR22V0R
S
(29mm dia.)
AR22V4R Unibody push-lock,
turn-reset
with white arrow)
AR22VGE
(40mm dia.)
AR22V2R Key release push-lock,
turn-reset
(40mm dia.)
AR22V7R
S
AF94-296
KKD08-042 KKD06-339 KKD05-023b
KKD05-020b KKD09-020
with white arrow)
AR22VSR
S
Push-lock, pull-reset
(35mm dia.)
AR22Q2R
S KKD06-346 KKD06-334
Mushroom head with
full guard (40mm dia.)
AR22M3R, M8R
S AF94-372
Note: AR22M8R: Not approved standard
Notes: Provided with the (Direct opening action) : See page 04/289 S
S
(40mm dia.
with "EMO" charactor)
AR22V3R-■■RZ286
KKD05-261
See page 04/120
S
S

■ Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switches (conform to EN418)
with white arrow)
KKD06-335 KKD06-342 KKD06-344
Lever with square bezel AR22WY, WCY
S AF94-323
S AF94-362
04/5
Key (Long durability) AR22JAR
Note: Provided with the (Direct opening action)
04
KKD09-018
AR22 and DR22
Cylindrical knob
with square bezel
AR22RY, RCY
Key with square bezel AR22JY, JCY
S KKD09-019
Lever AR22WR, WCR
S AF94-324
Cylindrical knob AR22RR, RCR
S AF94-308
S KKD09-015
Knob with square bezel AR22PY, PCY
S AF94-309
■ Illuminated selector switches
Operator Type Operator Type
Knob AR22PL
S
Knob with square bezel AR22PP
S AF94-306 AF94-318
AR22V0L
S
transparent in all colors
with white arrow)
AR22VDL
S
(Soft touch 29mm dia.
with white arrow)
AR22VSL
S
(40mm dia.)
AR22V2L
S
(40mm dia. transparent
in all colors)
AR22VAL
S
Unibody push-lock,
turn-reset
with white arrow)
AR22VGF
KKD06-337 KKD06-340 KKD05-150
■ Selector switches
Knob AR22PR, PCR
S AF94-310
See page 04/32, 04/45 See page 04/32, 04/45
S
Key AR22JR, JCR
S

Note: With resistor unit type: Not approved standard
04/6
AF94-333 AF94-330 AF94-380
AF94-332 AF94-443
Rubber cap type AR22A2, A7
AF97-56
Ball type with lock AR22A1, A6
AF97-45
AR22 and DR22
■ Pilot lights
Lens Type Lens Type Lens Type
Dome DR22D0L
S
Flush square DR22F3M
S
Extended square DR22E3M
S
Extended round DR22E3L
S
Flush square
(Transparent lens)
DR22F4M
S
Faceted DR22K0L
S
Flush square
(12mm high frame)
DR22F5M
S AF96-189 AF95-658
Flush rectangular DR22E3N
S AF96-237
Extended round
with square bezel
DR22E3P
S AF94-331
■ Joy stick selector switches
Handle Type Handle Type Handle Type
Ball type AR22A0, A5
AF97-49
■ Buzzers
Sound Type Sound Type Sound Type
Electronic sound DR22B5 * Magnetic sound DR22B3 Electronic sound
(IP54)
DR22B8 *
KKD08-053 AF96-376 AF96-244
Note: * 6V AC, 110V DC types: Not approved standard

• Neon lamp (For AR22VGF)
H1: 110V AC, without transformer
K1: 120V AC, without transformer
M1: 220V AC, without transformer
P1: 240V AC, without transformer
04/7
04
AR22 and DR22
Type number nomenclature
Illuminated pushbuttons
AR22 E0L – 10 E3R
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
➀ Product category
AR22: 22mm-dia. illuminated pushbutton
22mm-dia. emergency stop illuminated pushbutton
➁ Operator
• Illuminated pushbutton
F0L: Flush round head
F5L: Flush round head (Alternate)
E0L: Extended round head
E5L: Extended round head (Alternate)
M0L: Mushroom head (40mm dia.)
M5L: Mushroom head (40mm dia. alternate)
G4L: Extended with transparent full guard (24mm dia.)
G9L: Extended with transparent full guard (24mm dia. alternate)
G2L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia. with openings)
G7L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia. with openings, alternate)
G1L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia.)
G6L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia. alternate)
V5L: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with white arrow) *1
F0M: Flush square head
F5M: Flush square head (Alternate)
E0M:Extended square head
E5M:Extended square head (Alternate)
F0P: Flush round head with square bezel
F5P: Flush round head with square bezel (Alternate)
E0P: Extended round head with square bezel
E5P: Extended round head with square bezel (Alternate)
M4P:Mushroom head with square bezel (29mm dia.)
• Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton
V0L: Push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 40mm dia. with white arrow)
V2L: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
VDL: Push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 40mm dia. transparent in all
colors with white arrow)
VAL: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. transparent in all colors)
VSL: Push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 29mm dia. with white arrow)
VGF:Unibody push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 40mm dia. with white
arrow)
➂ Contact arrangement
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 40: 4NO
20: 2NO 04: 4NC
02: 2NC 50: 5NO
22: 2NO+2NC 05: 5NC
➃ Lamp voltage
• Incandescent lamp
54: 5.5V AC/DC, without transformer
C4: 15V AC/DC, without transformer
D4: 20V AC/DC, without transformer
E4: 24V AC/DC, without transformer
H4: 100-110V AC, with transformer
L4: 115-127V AC, with transformer
M4: 200-220V AC, with transformer
Q4: 230-254V AC, with transformer
S4: 350-380V AC, with transformer
T4: 400-440V AC, with transformer
V4: 480V AC, with transformer
W4: 500-550V AC, with transformer
• LED lamp
A3: 6V AC, without transformer
63: 6V DC, without transformer
B3: 12V AC/DC, without transformer
➄ Color of lens
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red *2 A: Orange
W: White S: Blue
➅ Special product
Z9: Resisting water-soluble cutting oils and heat
Z8: With a contact protection cover
Z4: Resisting sulfuration gas
ZB: Meeting IP2X finger-protection standards
Notes: *1 Products with no trigger action mechanism. These products cannot be
used as emergency stop switches that comply with EN standards.
*2 Button color of emergency stop illuminated switches are Red only.
• The manufacturing range varies depending on the model. For details,
refer to the contents of this catalog.

04/8
Fuji Electric FA Components Systems Co., Ltd./D C Catalog
AR22 and DR22
Pushbuttons
AR22 E0R – 10 R
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
AR22: 22mm-dia. pushbutton
22mm-dia. emergency stop pushbutton
➁ Operator
• Pushbutton switch
F0R: Flush round head
F5R: Flush round head (Alternate)
E0R: Extended round head
E5R: Extended round head (Alternate)
FAR: Flush round head (Symbol mark type)
FBR: Flush round head (Symbol mark type, alternate)
EAR:Extended round head (Symbol mark type)
EBR:Extended round head (Symbol mark type, alternate)
M0R: Mushroom head (40mm dia.)
M5R: Mushroom head (40mm dia. Alternate)
G3R:Extended with full guard (24mm dia.)
G8R:Extended with full guard (24mm dia. Alternate)
G2R:Flush with full guard (24mm dia.)
G7R:Flush with full guard (24mm dia. Alternate)
G0R:Extended with half guard
G5R:Extended with half guard (Alternate)
M3R:Mushroom head with full guard (40mm dia.)
M8R:Mushroom head with full guard (40mm dia. Alternate)
S1R: Push-button with selector ring (2-position)
V5R: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with white arrow) *1
F0S: Flush square head
F5S: Flush square head (Alternate)
E0S: Extended square head
E5S: Extended square head (Alternate)
F0Y: Flush round head with square bezel
F5Y: Flush round head with square bezel (Alternate)
E0Y: Extended round head with square bezel
E5Y: Extended round head with square bezel (Alternate)
M4Y:Mushroom head with square bezel (29mm dia.)
• Emergency stop pushbutton switch
V0R: Push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 40mm dia. with white arrow)
V2R: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
VSR:Push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 29mm dia. with white arrow)
V7R: Key-release push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
Q2R:Push-lock, pull-reset (35mm dia.)
VGE:Unibody push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 40mm dia. with white
arrow)
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 50: 5NO
05: 5NC
➃ Color of button
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red*2 A: Orange
B: Black S: Blue
W: White C: Clear
T: Green, Red, Black (For AR22F0R) (For AR22FAR, FBR,
EAR, EBR)
➄ Symbol mark (For AR22FAR, FBR, EAR, EBR)
Symbol mark I T I T
Color of button White Black White Black White Black Clear
Color of mark Red Green Green Black
Code 01 02 03 04 11 12 02B 04B 12B
➅ Special product
*2 Button color of emergency stop switches are Red only.

04/9
04
AR22 and DR22
Selector and illuminated selector switches
AR22 PL – 2 10 E3 G
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈
AR22: 22mm dia. selector switch and illuminated selector switch
➁ Operator
• Selector switch
PR: Knob
PCR: Knob operated control type
WR: Lever
WCR: Lever operated control type
RR: Cylindrical knob
RCR: Cylindrical knob operated control type
JR: Key
JCR: Key operated control type
JAR: Key (Long durability)
PY: Knob with square bezel
PCY: Knob operated control type with square bezel
WY: Lever with square bezel
WCY: Lever operated control type with square bezel
RY: Cylindrical knob with square bezel
RCY: Cylindrical knob operated control type with square bezel
JY: Key with square bezel
JCY: Key operated control type with square bezel
• Illuminated selector switch
PL: Knob
PP: Knob with square bezel
➂ Operation
2: 2-position, maintained
0: 2-position, spring return
6: 3-position, spring/manual return (Left to center)
7: 3-position, spring/manual return (Right to center)
4: 4-position, maintained (For AR22PCR, WCR, RCR)
5: 5-position, maintained (For AR22PCR, WCR, RCR)
➃ Key removable position
A: Left
B: Left and right
C: Left, right and center
D: Right
E: Center
F: Right and center
G: Left and center
➄ Contact arrangement
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 50: 5NO
05: 5NC
Note: Control type: See page 04/29 to 04/31
➅ Lamp voltage
• LED lamp
➆ Color of knob
B: Black (Not available for illuminated selector switch)
G: Green
R: Red
W: White (Not available for selector switch)
Y: Yellow (Not available for selector switch)
A: Orange (Not available for selector switch)
S: Blue (Not available for selector switch)
➇ Key type No.
A, B, C, D, E or F
(“A” is standard)
➈ Special product
Note: • The manufacturing range varies depending on the model. For details, refer
to the contents of this catalog.

04/10
AR22 and DR22
Pilot lights
DR22 D0L – E3W
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄
DR22: 22mm dia. pilot light
➁ Lens
D0L: Dome
E3L: Extended round
K0L: Faceted
F3M: Flush square
F4M: Flush square (Transparent lens)
F5M: Flush square (12mm high frame)
E3M:Extended square
E3N: Flush rectangular
E3P: Extended round with square bezel
➂ Lamp voltage
• LED lamp
H7: 110V DC, with resistor unit
➃ Color of lens
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red A: Orange
W: White S: Blue
➄ Special product
58: 5.5V AC/DC, short-body without transformer
C8: 15V AC/DC, short-body without transformer
D8: 20V AC/DC, short-body without transformer
E8: 24V AC/DC, short-body without transformer
H8: 100-110V AC, short-body with transformer
L8: 115-127V AC, short-body with transformer
M8: 200-220V AC, short-body with transformer
A9: 6V AC, short-body without transformer
69: 6V DC, short-body without transformer
B9: 12V AC/DC, short-body without transformer
C9: 15V AC/DC, short-body without transformer
E9: 24V AC/DC, short-body without transformer

04/11
Locked position Ex. AR22A0N-A0A0B
04
AR22 and DR22
Buzzers
DR22B 5 – E B
➀ ➁ ➂➃
DR22B: 22mm-dia. buzzer
➁ Sound
5: Electronic sound
3: Magnetic sound
8: Electronic sound (IP54)
➂ Operating voltage
A: 6V AC (Type “5”, “8”)
6: 6V DC (Type “5”, “8”)
E: 12-24V AC/DC (Type “3” : 24V AC/DC)
F: 35-48V AC/DC (Type “5”, “8”)
H: 100-110V AC
M: 200-220V AC
1: 100-110V DC (Type “5”, “8”)
➃ Color of head
B: Black
Joy stick selector switches
AR22A 0 N – A0A0 B
➀ ➁➂ ➃ ➄
AR22A: 22mm-dia. Joy stick selector switch
➁ Handle
0: Ball type (without lock, manual return)
1: Ball type with lock (manual return)
2: Rubber cap type (without lock, manual return)
5: Ball type (without lock, spring return)
6: Ball type with lock (spring return)
7: Rubber cap type (without lock, spring return)
➂ Terminal
N: Screw
H: Solder/tab
➃ Contact arrangement
Contact arrangement Blank 1NO 1NC 1NO+1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO+2NC
Code Screw 0 A B 1 D E –
Solder/tab 0 – – 1 – – 2
Operating direction code of contacts
1
2
3
4
1: Upper 2: Right
3: Lower 4: Left
1 2 3 4
➄ Handle color
B: Black
■ Ordering information
Specify the following:
1. Type number
For the CCC approved product, add the suffix (CCC) to the
type number
Example: Pushbutton switch AR22F0R-11B(CCC)

■ Standards approved
UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
04/12
AR22 and DR22
Ratings and specifications
EN60947-5-5
File No. E44592
File No. LR20479
cUL File No. E44592 (For AR22VG)
Pushbutton, Illuminated pushbutton: R9551062,
Selector, Illuminated selector: R9551060
Pilot lights: R9551061
Joy stick selector switch: R2050803
(Lever switch)
Buzzer: J9950091
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton
: R50028146, R50028137 (For AR22VG)
■ Specifications (Indoor use)
Description Pushbutton switch
Illuminated pushbutton switch
Emergency stop pushbutton switch
switch
Selector switch
Illuminated selector switch
Joy stick selector
(Lever switch)
Pilot light
Rated insulation voltage
Mechanical durability
Electrical durability
Operating frequency
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Rated impulse dielectric strength
Conditional short-circuit current
Short-circuit protective device
Pollution degree
Vibration
Shock
Ambient temperature
(No condensation or no icing)
Storage temperature
Humidity
Degree of protection
600V AC/DC *1
See page 04/13
500,000 operations at 220V AC 6A
1 million operations at 220V AC 3A
(AR22VG type: 100,000 operations)
1200 operations/hour (On-load factor: 40%)
AR22VG type: 1800 operations/hour (On-load factor: 40%)
2500V AC, 1 minute *3
100MΩ or more (500V DC megger)
6kV (AR22VG type: 4kV)
1000A
Fuse 15A
3
Resonance: 10 to 55Hz, double amplitude 0.1mm *5
Constant: 16.7Hz, double amplitude 3mm
Malfunction durability: 100m/s2 *6
Mechanical durability: 500m/s2
-20 to +70°C *7
-40 to +80°C
45 to 85% RH (within -5 to +40°C)
IP65
250V AC/DC
250,000 operations
100,000 operations
at 220V AC 1A
(Res. load)
–
1000A
Fuse 1A
-5 to +70°C
250V AC/DC *2
–
–
–
6kV
–
–
: 500m/s2
-20 to +50°C
Notes: *1 Illuminated type without transformer and AR22VG type: 250V AC/DC
*2 Pilot light with transformer: 600V AC
*3 Illuminated type without transformer: 2000V AC, 1 minute (except AR22VGF type)
*4 Pilot light with transformer: 2500V AC, 1 minute
*5 Emergency stop type: 10 to 500Hz, double amplitude 0.7mm (acceleration 50m/s2), according to the test condition of EN60947-5-5 (1997)
*6 Emergency stop type: 150m/s2
*7 AR22VGE type: -20 to +60°C, illuminated type: -20 to +50°C

04/13
● Mechanical durability
Description Operations
Pushbutton switch Momentary action 5 million
Illuminated pushbutton switch Alternate action 1 million
Emergency stop pushbutton switch With selector ring 100,000
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton Push-lock, turn-reset 100,000
Push-lock, pull-reset 30,000
Selector switch Maintained 1, 2, 3, 4-contact 1 million
Maintained 5, 6-contact 500,000
Control type, spring return, spring/manual return 200,000
Illuminated selector switch Maintained
Without transformer 1, 2, 3-contact 1 million
With transformer 1, 2-contact 1 million
Spring return, spring/manual return 200,000
Note: Key insertion/removal durability for selector switch key types
• Key type 10,000
• Key (Long durability) type 20,000
04
AR22 and DR22
4-contact 500,000
3-contact 500,000
● Buzzers
Item DR22B5 DR22B3 DR22B8
Rated insulation voltage Without transformer: 60V AC/DC With transformer: 250V AC
Sound level 90dB (0.1m) 80 to 90dB (0.1m) 80dB (0.1m)
70dB (1m) 60 to 70dB (1m) 60dB (1.0m)
Durability 1000h 200h 1000h
Frequency 2.4 to 3.3kHz
Intermittent cycle Approx. 170-cycle/min
Current consumption See the table below
Dielectric strength Without transformer: 1000V AC 1 minute With transformer: 2000V AC 1 minute
Insulation resistance 100MΩ or more (500V DC megger)
Pollution degree 3
Vibration Resonance: 10 to 55Hz, double amplitude 0.1mm
Constant: 16.7Hz, double amplitude 3.0mm
Shock Mechanical durability: 500m/s2
Ambient temperature –20 to +60°C (No condensation or no icing)
(with resistor unit: –20 to +40°C)
Storage temperature –30 to +70°C
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (within –5 to 40°C)
• Current consumption
Operational voltage
6V AC
6V DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
110V AC
110V DC
220V AC
Current consumption
DR22B5, DR22B8
70mA AC
35mA DC
40mA AC, 25mA DC
65mA AC, 20mA DC
30mA AC
30mA DC
15mA AC
DR22B3
–
–
30mA AC, 20mA DC
–
30mA AC
–
15mA AC

■ Contact ratings
● UL/CSA standards
AC (COS ø=0.35)
Contact rated code 120V 240V 480V 600V
Making Breaking Making Breaking Making Breaking Making Breaking
current current current current current current current current
A600 60A 6.0A 30A 3.0A 15A 1.5A 12A 1.2A
B300 (AR22VG) 30A 3.0A 15A 1.5A – – – –
DC T0.95= 6P (Max. 300ms)
Description Contact rated Making current · Breaking current
Note: Joy stick selector switches (Lever switches): 250V AC, 5A (Res. load) 125V DC, 0.2A 24V DC, 1A (Res. load)
04/14
AR22 and DR22
● EN standard/TÜV approved
Description Rated operational current
Rated thermal Rated operational AC15 (Ind. load) DC13 (Ind. load)
current voltage Rated operational current Rated operational current
Illuminated pushbutton switch 10A 24V 6.0A 4.0A (AR22VG: 1.5A)
Pushbutton (Except the selector ring type) 120V 6.0A (AR22VG: 3A) –
Emergency stop pushbutton switch 125V – 1.3A (AR22VG: 0.3A)
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch 240V 6.0A (AR22VG: 3A) –
Selector switch (2-position) 250V – 0.45A(AR22VG: 0.15A)
Illuminated selector switch (2-position) 480V 2.5A (AR22VG: –) –
600V 2.0A (AR22VG: –) –
Selector switch (3, 4, 5-position) 10A 24V 6.0A 2.0A
Illuminated selector switch (3-position) 120V 6.0A –
Pushbutton with selector ring 125V – 0.65A
240V 6.0A –
250V – 0.23A
480V 2.5A –
600V 2.0A –
Joy stick selector switch (Lever switch) 5A 24V – 0.7A
120V 0.3A –
125V – 0.15A
240V 0.3A –
code
125V 250V 301V–600V
Illuminated pushbutton switch P600 1.1A 0.55A 0.2A
Pushbutton
(Ring type selector switch: AR22S2R only)
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch Q300 0.55A 0.27A –
(Except the overlap contact types) (AR22VG)
Overlap contact types of products shown above Q600 0.55A 0.27A 0.1A
Pushbutton
(Ring type selector switch: AR22S1R, S6R only)
Selector switch (2-position only, except the overlap contact types)
(2-position only, except the overlap contact types)
Pushbutton R300 0.22A 0.11A –
Selector switch (2-pos./overlap contact type, 3-, 4-, 5-pos. type)
Illuminated selector switch (2-pos./overlap contact type, 3-pos. type)
Lamp rated voltage UL/CSA standards, TÜV approved
LED lamp Incandescent lamp Neon lamp
Full-voltage (without transformer) Max. 24V AC/DC Max. 30V AC/DC Max. 240V AC
With transformer Max. 550V AC (Short-body type: Max. 220V AC) –

04/15
04
AR22 and DR22
■ Operating characteristic (1NO+1NC)
Description Pushbutton
Ave. required
operating force
Operating travel
Required return
force
9N (Push-lock type: 20N)
Approx. 6mm
(Push-lock type:
Approx. 9mm, operation
angle: Approx. 45°)
–
(Push-lock type: 0.6N•m)
Push-lock type
Selector *2
Illuminated selector
Push-pull type Maintained Spring/manual return Spring return
30N (AR22VG: 22N)*1
Approx. 9mm
(AR22VG:
0.6N•m
(AR22VG: 0.2N•m)
0.15N•m
2-position:
Approx. 90°
3-position:
Approx. 45°
4-position:
Approx. 40°
5-position:
Approx. 30°
0.15N•m
0.13N•m
3-position:
Approx. 45°
0.13N•m
0.1N•m
2-position:
Approx. 60°
3-position:
Approx. 45°
–
45N
Approx. 9mm
30N (pull)
Notes: *1 AR22V2R, V4R, V7R, VAL types: 45N
*2 4-position, 5-position: 2NO+2NC
■ Lamp ratings
• Illuminated pushbuttons, illuminated selectors, pilot lights
Transformer
Without
transformer
With transformer
(Standard type:
AR9T511)
With resistor unit
(AR9T519-H)
Lamp voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
127V AC
220V AC
254V AC
380V AC
440V AC
480V AC
550V AC
110V DC
LED
Type
–
APX510-6
APX510-D6
APX510-12
APX510-15
–
APX510-24
APX510-6
APX510-6
APX510-24
Rated voltage
–
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
–
24V AC/DC
6V AC
6V AC
24V AC/DC
Consumption
–
Green, red, orange, amber, blue: 7mA AC
Yellow: 50mA AC
Green, red, orange, amber, blue: 11mA DC
Yellow: 33mA DC
Green, red, orange, amber, blue: 14mA AC,11mA DC
Yellow: 28mA AC, 22mA DC
Green, red, orange, amber, blue: 13mA AC,11mA DC
–
12mA AC, 11mA DC
1.5VA
2.5VA
1.2W
Incandescent
Type
AHX135
–
–
–
AHX279
AHX144
AHX129
AHX135
AHX135
–
Rated voltage
6.3V AC/DC
–
–
–
18V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
30V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
–
Consumption
0.9W
–
–
–
0.8W
0.9W
0.8W
2VA
2VA
2VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
–
Notes: • Short body pilot lights: 110V AC, 127V AC, 220V AC only
• Replace the mark by the lamp luminous color code, see page 04/16
• Except AR22VGF type
• Emergency stop illuminated pushbuttons (AR22VGF type)
Transformer
Lamp
Without transformer
LED
Neon
Voltage
24V AC/DC
110V AC
120V AC
220V AC
240V AC
Type
AR9L002-ER
AR9N001-HA
AR9N001-KA
AR9N001-MA
AR9N001-PA
Rated voltage
24V AC/DC
110V AC
120V AC
220V AC
240V AC
Consumption
12mA AC
11mA DC
0.19VA
0.21VA
0.30VA
0.30VA
Notes: Lamp base: BA9S/13

Lamp
LED
Incandescent
Neon
Notes: • The operating voltage for incandescent lamps is set at 80 to 90%
Estimated durability for LED lamps
Absolute brightness
04/16
90 100 110
AR22 and DR22
Durability (reference)
Approx. 30000h
Approx. 5000h (AC)
Approx. 5000h
Judgement criterion
When brightness is less than
50% of initial value
When the bulb burns out
When a remarkable blackening
appears in the glass bulb and
the using becomes improper
of the lamp's rated voltage.
• The durability of LED lamp is a mean value in all colors.
1.0
0.5
Durability judgement line
Rated voltage✕1.1 Rated voltage
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
Time✕103[h]
Notes: • Durability at Ta=25°C
• Durability is affected by temperature, humidity, and
voltage fluctuation.
■ Combination of lens color and LED or neon lamp luminous color
[AC voltage100%]
100,000
50,000
20,000
10,000
5,000
2,000
1,000
500
200
70 80
Voltage [%]
100
50
Durability
Luminous
flux
Durability (h)
Luminous flux
[%]
■ Lamp durability Incandescent lamp voltage characteristics
Lens
Color
Green
Red
White
Yellow
Orange *
Blue
Red (AR22VGF)
Code
G
R
W
Y
A
S
R
LED or neon lamp
Luminous color
Green
Red
Orange
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Red
Orange (Neon lamp)
Type
APX510-G
APX510-R
APX510-O
APX510-Y
APX510-A
APX510-S
AR9L002-ER
AR9N001-A
Notes: * DR22F4M: LED lamp color is orange. (APX510-O)
• Replace the mark by the lamp voltage code

04/17
04
Illuminated Pushbuttons
AR22
Operator Trans- Contact LED lamp Incandescent lamp
former Momentary action Alternate action Momentary action Alternate action
Type Type Type Type
Flush round head Without 1NO AR22F0L-10■3 AR22F5L-10■3 AR22F0L-10■4 AR22F5L-10■4
1NC AR22F0L-01■3 AR22F5L-01■3 AR22F0L-01■4 AR22F5L-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22F0L-11■3 AR22F5L-11■3 AR22F0L-11■4 AR22F5L-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22F0L-22■3 — AR22F0L-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22F0L-10■3 AR22F5L-10■3 AR22F0L-10■4 AR22F5L-10■4
1NC AR22F0L-01■3 AR22F5L-01■3 AR22F0L-01■4 AR22F5L-01■4
AF94-318 1NO+1NC AR22F0L-11■3 AR22F5L-11■3 AR22F0L-11■4 AR22F5L-11■4
Extended round head Without 1NO AR22E0L-10■3 AR22E5L-10■3 AR22E0L-10■4 AR22E5L-10■4
1NC AR22E0L-01■3 AR22E5L-01■3 AR22E0L-01■4 AR22E5L-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22E0L-11■3 AR22E5L-11■3 AR22E0L-11■4 AR22E5L-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22E0L-22■3 — AR22E0L-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22E0L-10■3 AR22E5L-10■3 AR22E0L-10■4 AR22E5L-10■4
AF94-317 1NO+1NC AR22E0L-11■3 AR22E5L-11■3 AR22E0L-11■4 AR22E5L-11■4
Mushroom head Without 1NO AR22M0L-10■3 AR22M5L-10■3 AR22M0L-10■4 AR22M5L-10■4
(40mm dia.) 1NC AR22M0L-01■3 AR22M5L-01■3 AR22M0L-01■4 AR22M5L-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22M0L-11■3 AR22M5L-11■3 AR22M0L-11■4 AR22M5L-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22M0L-22■3 — AR22M0L-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22M0L-10■3 AR22M5L-10■3 AR22M0L-10■4 AR22M5L-10■4
1NC AR22M0L-01■3 AR22M5L-01■3 AR22M0L-01■4 AR22M5L-01■4
AF94-367 1NO+1NC AR22M0L-11■3 AR22M5L-11■3 AR22M0L-11■4 AR22M5L-11■4
Mushroom head Without 1NO AR22M4L-10■3 AR22M9L-10■3 AR22M4L-10■4 AR22M9L-10■4
(29mm dia.) 1NC AR22M4L-01■3 AR22M9L-01■3 AR22M4L-01■4 AR22M9L-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22M4L-11■3 AR22M9L-11■3 AR22M4L-11■4 AR22M9L-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22M4L-22■3 — AR22M4L-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22M4L-10■3 AR22M9L-10■3 AR22M4L-10■4 AR22M9L-10■4
1NC AR22M4L-01■3 AR22M9L-01■3 AR22M4L-01■4 AR22M9L-01■4
AF94-369 1NO+1NC AR22M4L-11■3 AR22M9L-11■3 AR22M4L-11■4 AR22M9L-11■4
Extended with transparent Without 1NO AR22G4L-10■3 AR22G9L-10■3 AR22G4L-10■4 AR22G9L-10■4
full guard (24mm dia.) 1NC AR22G4L-01■3 AR22G9L-01■3 AR22G4L-01■4 AR22G9L-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22G4L-11■3 AR22G9L-11■3 AR22G4L-11■4 AR22G9L-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22G4L-22■3 — AR22G4L-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22G4L-10■3 AR22G9L-10■3 AR22G4L-10■4 AR22G9L-10■4
1NC AR22G4L-01■3 AR22G9L-01■3 AR22G4L-01■4 AR22G9L-01■4
AF94-294 1NO+1NC AR22G4L-11■3 AR22G9L-11■3 AR22G4L-11■4 AR22G9L-11■4
Extended with full guard Without 1NO AR22G2L-10■3 AR22G7L-10■3 AR22G2L-10■4 AR22G7L-10■4
(24mm dia. with openings) 1NC AR22G2L-01■3 AR22G7L-01■3 AR22G2L-01■4 AR22G7L-01■4
2NO+2NC AR22G2L-22■3 — AR22G2L-22■4 —
Note: See page 04/19

04/18
AR22
Type Type Type Type
(24mm dia.) 1NC AR22G1L-01■3 AR22G6L-01■3 AR22G1L-01■4 AR22G6L-01■4
2NO+2NC AR22G1L-22■3 — AR22G1L-22■4 —
KK02-127A 1NO+1NC AR22G1L-11■3 AR22G6L-11■3 AR22G1L-11■4 AR22G6L-11■4
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NO — AR22V5L-10■3 — AR22V5L-10■4
(40mm dia. with white 1NC — AR22V5L-01■3 — AR22V5L-01■4
arrow) 1NO+1NC — AR22V5L-11■3 — AR22V5L-11■4
3NC — AR22V5L-03■3 — AR22V5L-03■4
With 1NO — AR22V5L-10■3 — AR22V5L-10■4
1NC — AR22V5L-01■3 — AR22V5L-01■4
KKD06-335 1NO+1NC — AR22V5L-11■3 — AR22V5L-11■4
Flush square head Without 1NO AR22F0M-10■3 AR22F5M-10■3 AR22F0M-10■4 AR22F5M-10■4
1NC AR22F0M-01■3 AR22F5M-01■3 AR22F0M-01■4 AR22F5M-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22F0M-11■3 AR22F5M-11■3 AR22F0M-11■4 AR22F5M-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22F0M-22■3 — AR22F0M-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22F0M-10■3 AR22F5M-10■3 AR22F0M-10■4 AR22F5M-10■4
1NC AR22F0M-01■3 AR22F5M-01■3 AR22F0M-01■4 AR22F5M-01■4
AF97-68 1NO+1NC AR22F0M-11■3 AR22F5M-11■3 AR22F0M-11■4 AR22F5M-11■4
Extended square head Without 1NO AR22E0M-10■3 AR22E5M-10■3 AR22E0M-10■4 AR22E5M-10■4
1NC AR22E0M-01■3 AR22E5M-01■3 AR22E0M-01■4 AR22E5M-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22E0M-11■3 AR22E5M-11■3 AR22E0M-11■4 AR22E5M-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22E0M-22■3 — AR22E0M-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22E0M-10■3 AR22E5M-10■3 AR22E0M-10■4 AR22E5M-10■4
1NC AR22E0M-01■3 AR22E5M-01■3 AR22E0M-01■4 AR22E5M-01■4
AF94-357 1NO+1NC AR22E0M-11■3 AR22E5M-11■3 AR22E0M-11■4 AR22E5M-11■4
Flush round head Without 1NO AR22F0P-10■3 AR22F5P-10■3 AR22F0P-10■4 AR22F5P-10■4
with square bezel 1NC AR22F0P-01■3 AR22F5P-01■3 AR22F0P-01■4 AR22F5P-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22F0P-11■3 AR22F5P-11■3 AR22F0P-11■4 AR22F5P-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22F0P-22■3 — AR22F0P-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22F0P-10■3 AR22F5P-10■3 AR22F0P-10■4 AR22F5P-10■4
1NC AR22F0P-01■3 AR22F5P-01■3 AR22F0P-01■4 AR22F5P-01■4
AF94-315 1NO+1NC AR22F0P-11■3 AR22F5P-11■3 AR22F0P-11■4 AR22F5P-11■4
Extended round head Without 1NO AR22E0P-10■3 AR22E5P-10■3 AR22E0P-10■4 AR22E5P-10■4
with square bezel 1NC AR22E0P-01■3 AR22E5P-01■3 AR22E0P-01■4 AR22E5P-01■4
1NO+1NC AR22E0P-11■3 AR22E5P-11■3 AR22E0P-11■4 AR22E5P-11■4
2NO+2NC AR22E0P-22■3 — AR22E0P-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22E0P-10■3 AR22E5P-10■3 AR22E0P-10■4 AR22E5P-10■4
1NC AR22E0P-01■3 AR22E5P-01■3 AR22E0P-01■4 AR22E5P-01■4
AF94-314 1NO+1NC AR22E0P-11■3 AR22E5P-11■3 AR22E0P-11■4 AR22E5P-11■4

04/19
Note: AR22V5L type: Red, yellow only
04
AR22
Type Type Type Type
Mushroom head with Without 1NO AR22M4P-10■3 — AR22M4P-10■4 —
square bezel 1NC AR22M4P-01■3 — AR22M4P-01■4 —
(29mm dia.) 1NO+1NC AR22M4P-11■3 — AR22M4P-11■4 —
2NO+2NC AR22M4P-22■3 — AR22M4P-22■4 —
With 1NO AR22M4P-10■3 — AR22M4P-10■4 —
1NC AR22M4P-01■3 — AR22M4P-01■4 —
AF94-440 1NO+1NC AR22M4P-11■3 — AR22M4P-11■4 —
• Lens color
Replace the mark by the lens color code
Color Green Red White Blue Yellow Orange
Code G R W S Y A
• Voltage
Replace the ■ mark by the lamp voltage code
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
Without transformer 6V DC 6 —
6V AC A —
5.5V AC/DC — 5
12V AC/DC B —
15V AC/DC C C
20V AC/DC — D
24V AC/DC E E
With transformer 100-110V AC H H
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W
• Contact arrangements
Contact arrangements other than above are available
Contact 1NO 1NC 1NO+1NC 2NO 2NC 3NO
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30
Contact 3NC 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC 5NO 5NC
arrangement
Code 03 22 40 04 50 05
Available numbers of contact blocks
Operation Without transformer With transformer
Momentary action 5-contact block 3-contact block
Alternate action 3-contact block 2-contact block

04/20
Pushbuttons
AR22
Operator Contact Momentary Alternate
action action
Type Type
Flush round head 1NO AR22F0R-10 AR22F5R-10
1NC AR22F0R-01 AR22F5R-01
1NO+1NC AR22F0R-11 AR22F5R-11
2NO AR22F0R-20 AR22F5R-20
AF94-320 2NO+2NC AR22F0R-22 AR22F5R-22
Extended round head 1NO AR22E0R-10 AR22E5R-10
1NC AR22E0R-01 AR22E5R-01
1NO+1NC AR22E0R-11 AR22E5R-11
2NO AR22E0R-20 AR22E5R-20
AF94-319 2NO+2NC AR22E0R-22 AR22E5R-22
Flush round head 1NO AR22FAR-10C■ AR22FBR-10C■
symbol 1NC AR22FAR-01C■ AR22FBR-01C■
mark 1NO+1NC AR22FAR-11C■ AR22FBR-11C■
type 2NO AR22FAR-20C■ AR22FBR-20C■
2NC AR22FAR-02C■ AR22FBR-02C■
AF98-193 2NO+2NC AR22FAR-22C■ AR22FBR-22C■
Extended round head 1NO AR22EAR-10C■ AR22EBR-10C■
symbol 1NC AR22EAR-01C■ AR22EBR-01C■
mark 1NO+1NC AR22EAR-11C■ AR22EBR-11C■
type 2NO AR22EAR-20C■ AR22EBR-20C■
2NC AR22EAR-02C■ AR22EBR-02C■
AF98-192 2NO+2NC AR22EAR-22C■ AR22EBR-22C■
Mushroom head 1NO AR22M0R-10 AR22M5R-10
(40mm dia.) 1NC AR22M0R-01 AR22M5R-01
1NO+1NC AR22M0R-11 AR22M5R-11
2NO AR22M0R-20 AR22M5R-20
2NC AR22M0R-02 AR22M5R-02
AF94-293 2NO+2NC AR22M0R-22 AR22M5R-22
AF94-321 2NO+2NC AR22M4R-22 AR22M9R-22
Extended with full 1NO AR22G3R-10 AR22G8R-10
guard (24mm dia.) 1NC AR22G3R-01 AR22G8R-01
1NO+1NC AR22G3R-11 AR22G8R-11
2NO AR22G3R-20 AR22G8R-20
2NC AR22G3R-02 AR22G8R-02
AF94-292 2NO+2NC AR22G3R-22 AR22G8R-22
action action
Type Type
Flush with full guard 1NO AR22G2R-10 AR22G7R-10
(24mm dia.) 1NC AR22G2R-01 AR22G7R-01
AF02-68 2NO+2NC AR22G2R-22 AR22G7R-22
Mushroom head with 1NO AR22M3R-10 AR22M8R-10
full guard (40mm dia.) 1NC AR22M3R-01 AR22M8R-01
AF94-372 2NO+2NC AR22M3R-22 AR22M8R-22
Extended with half 1NO AR22G0R-10 AR22G5R-10
guard 1NC AR22G0R-01 AR22G5R-01
AF96-236 2NO+2NC AR22G0R-22 AR22G5R-22
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NO — AR22V5R-10
(40mm dia. with white 1NC — AR22V5R-01
arrow) 1NO+1NC — AR22V5R-11
2NO — AR22V5R-20
2NC — AR22V5R-02
KKD08-042 2NO+2NC — AR22V5R-22
Flush square head 1NO AR22F0S-10 AR22F5S-10
1NC AR22F0S-01 AR22F5S-01
1NO+1NC AR22F0S-11 AR22F5S-11
2NO AR22F0S-20 AR22F5S-20
2NC AR22F0S-02 AR22F5S-02
AF94-316 2NO+2NC AR22F0S-22 AR22F5S-22
Extended square head 1NO AR22E0S-10 AR22E5S-10
1NC AR22E0S-01 AR22E5S-01
1NO+1NC AR22E0S-11 AR22E5S-11
2NO AR22E0S-20 AR22E5S-20
2NC AR22E0S-02 AR22E5S-02
AF94-296 2NO+2NC AR22E0S-22 AR22E5S-22
Flush round head 1NO AR22F0Y-10 AR22F5Y-10
with square bezel 1NC AR22F0Y-01 AR22F5Y-01
1NO+1NC AR22F0Y-11 AR22F5Y-11
2NO AR22F0Y-20 AR22F5Y-20
2NC AR22F0Y-02 AR22F5Y-02
AF94-295 2NO+2NC AR22F0Y-22 AR22F5Y-22

Pushbuttons
AR22
04/21
action action
Type Type
Extended round head 1NO AR22E0Y-10 AR22E5Y-10
with square bezel 1NC AR22E0Y-01 AR22E5Y-01
1NO+1NC AR22E0Y-11 AR22E5Y-11
2NO AR22E0Y-20 AR22E5Y-20
2NC AR22E0Y-02 AR22E5Y-02
AF94-297 2NO+2NC AR22E0Y-22 AR22E5Y-22
04
• Available numbers of contact blocks
Momentary action Alternate action
6-contact block 4-contact block
• Button color
Replace the mark by the button color code
Color Green Red White Blue Yellow Orange Black
Code G R W S Y A B
action action
Type Type
Mushroom head 1NO AR22M4Y-10 —
with square bezel 1NC AR22M4Y-01 —
(29mm dia.) 1NO+1NC AR22M4Y-11 —
2NO AR22M4Y-20 —
2NC AR22M4Y-02 —
AF94-298 2NO+2NC AR22M4Y-22 —
Contact 1NO 1NC 1NO+1NC 2NO 2NC 3NO 3NC
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30 03
Contact 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC 5NO 5NC 3NO+3NC
arrangement
Code 22 40 04 50 05 33
• Symbol mark (For AR22FAR, FBR, EAR, EBR)
Replace the ■ mark by the symbol mark code
Symbol mark I T I T
Code 01 02 03 04 11 12 02B 04B 12B
Note: AR22V5R type: Red, yellow, black only

04/22
Pushbuttons
AR22
Operator Contact Button Type Contact operation
color
Contact block Left Right
Mounting Type Free Depressed Free Depressed
position
(The following
contact is only
available.)
Pushbutton with 2NO+2NC Green AR22S1R-22G (1) NC — — ● —
selector ring Red AR22S1R-22R
(2-position) Black AR22S1R-22B (2) NC — — ● —
White AR22S1R-22W
Yellow AR22S1R-22Y (3) NO — ● — ●
Orange AR22S1R-22A
Blue AR22S1R-22S (4) NO — ● — ●
2NO Green AR22S2R-20G (1) NO — ● — —
Red AR22S2R-20R
Black AR22S2R-20B (2) NO — — — ●
White AR22S2R-20W
Yellow AR22S2R-20Y
Orange AR22S2R-20A
Blue AR22S2R-20S
2NO+2NC Green AR22S2R-22G (1) NC ● —
Red AR22S2R-22R
Black AR22S2R-22B (2) NC ● —
White AR22S2R-22W
Yellow AR22S2R-22Y (3) NO — ● — —
Orange AR22S2R-22A
Blue AR22S2R-22S (4) NO — — — ●
2NO+2NC Green AR22S3R-22G (1) NC — —
Red AR22S3R-22R
Black AR22S3R-22B (2) NC — —
White AR22S3R-22W
Yellow AR22S3R-22Y (3) NO — ● — —
Orange AR22S3R-22A
Blue AR22S3R-22S (4) NO — — — ●
2NO+2NC Green AR22S6R-22G (1) NC ● — —
Red AR22S6R-22R
Black AR22S6R-22B (2) NC ● — —
White AR22S6R-22W Locked
Yellow AR22S6R-22Y (3) NO — ● ●
Orange AR22S6R-22A
Blue AR22S6R-22S (4) NO — ● ●
AF94-355
• Position of contact block
● Contact closed
— Contact open
Note: (1) to (4): Contact block mounting position
Release arm
Operator
Contact block
(3) (1)
(4) (2)

Emergency Stop Pushbuttons
AR22
04/23
04
Operator Contact Type
Key release push-lock, 1NC AR22V7R-01R
turn-reset 1NO+1NC AR22V7R-11R
(40mm dia.) 2NC AR22V7R-02R
3NC AR22V7R-03R
2NO+2NC AR22V7R-22R
KKD09-020 4NC AR22V7R-04R
Push-lock, pull-reset 1NC AR22Q2R-01R
(35mm dia.) 1NO+1NC AR22Q2R-11R
2NC AR22Q2R-02R
KKD06-334
Unibody push-lock, 1NC AR22VGE-01R
turn-reset (Soft-touch 1NO+1NC AR22VGE-11R
40mm dia. with 2NC AR22VGE-02R
white arrow) KKD05-023b
■ Emergency stop pushbutton switches
(Direct opening action), conform to EN418
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NC AR22V0R-01R
(Soft-touch 1NO+1NC AR22V0R-11R
40mm dia. With 2NC AR22V0R-02R
white arrow) 3NC AR22V0R-03R
2NO+2NC AR22V0R-22R
(40mm dia.) 1NO+1NC AR22V2R-11R
2NC AR22V2R-02R
3NC AR22V2R-03R
2NO+2NC AR22V2R-22R
KKD05-020b 4NC AR22V2R-04R
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NC AR22VSR-01R
(Soft-touch 1NO+1NC AR22VSR-11R
29mm dia. with 2NC AR22VSR-02R
white arrow) 3NC AR22VSR-03R
2NO+2NC AR22VSR-22R
KKD06-346 4NC AR22VSR-04R
2NC AR22V4R-02R
3NC AR22V4R-03R
2NO+2NC AR22V4R-22R
Notes: • Button color : Red only
• Contact arrangements indicated in the table can be supplied.

Emergency Stop Illuminated Pushbuttons
AR22
■ Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switches
Operator Transformer Contact LED lamp Incandescent lamp Neon lamp
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR22V0L-01■3R AR22V0L-01■4R —
(Soft-touch 40mm dia. 1NO+1NC AR22V0L-11■3R AR22V0L-11■4R —
with white arrow) 2NC AR22V0L-02■3R AR22V0L-02■4R —
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR22V2L-01■3R AR22V2L-01■4R —
(40mm dia.) 1NO+1NC AR22V2L-11■3R AR22V2L-11■4R —
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR22VDL-01■3R AR22VDL-01■4R —
(Soft-touch 40mm dia. 1NO+1NC AR22VDL-11■3R AR22VDL-11■4R —
transparent in all 2NC AR22VDL-02■3R AR22VDL-02■4R —
colors with 3NC AR22VDL-03■3R AR22VDL-03■4R —
white arrow)
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR22VAL-01■3R AR22VAL-01■4R —
(40mm dia. 1NO+1NC AR22VAL-11■3R AR22VAL-11■4R —
transparent in all 2NC AR22VAL-02■3R AR22VAL-02■4R —
colors) 3NC AR22VAL-03■3R AR22VAL-03■4R —
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR22VSL-01■3R AR22VSL-01■4R —
(Soft-touch 29mm dia. 1NO+1NC AR22VSL-11■3R AR22VSL-11■4R —
with white arrow) 2NC AR22VSL-02■3R AR22VSL-02■4R —
Unibody push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR22VGF-01E3R — AR22VGF-01■1R
with white arrow) 1NO+1NC AR22VGF-11E3R — AR22VGF-11■1R
Notes: • Button color: Red only • AR22VGF type: Lamp circuit contacts are provided, see page 04/43. • Contact arrangements indicated in the table can be supplied.
04/24
Type Type Type
3NC AR22V0L-03■3R AR22V0L-03■4R —
With 1NC AR22V0L-01■3R AR22V0L-01■4R —
1NO+1NC AR22V0L-11■3R AR22V0L-11■4R —
KKD06-335 2NC AR22V0L-02■3R AR22V0L-02■4R —
2NC AR22V2L-02■3R AR22V2L-02■4R —
3NC AR22V2L-03■3R AR22V2L-03■4R —
With 1NC AR22V2L-01■3R AR22V2L-01■4R —
1NO+1NC AR22V2L-11■3R AR22V2L-11■4R —
KKD06-337 2NC AR22V2L-02■3R AR22V2L-02■4R —
With 1NC AR22VDL-01■3R AR22VDL-01■4R —
1NO+1NC AR22VDL-11■3R AR22VDL-11■4R —
KKD06-342 2NC AR22VDL-02■3R AR22VDL-02■4R —
With 1NC AR22VAL-01■3R AR22VAL-01■4R —
1NO+1NC AR22VAL-11■3R AR22VAL-11■4R —
KKD06-340 2NC AR22VAL-02■3R AR22VAL-02■4R —
3NC AR22VSL-03■3R AR22VSL-03■4R —
With 1NC AR22VSL-01■3R AR22VSL-01■4R —
1NO+1NC AR22VSL-11■3R AR22VSL-11■4R —
KKD06-344 2NC AR22VSL-02■3R AR22VSL-02■4R —
KKD05-150
2NC AR22VGF-02E3R — AR22VGF-02■1R
• Voltage
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent Neon
Without 6V DC 6 — —
6V AC A — —
5V AC/DC — 5 —
12V AC/DC B — —
15V AC/DC C C —
20V AC/DC — D —
24V AC/DC E E —
110V AC — — H
120V AC — — K
220V AC — — M
240V AC — — P
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
With 100-110V AC H H
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W
Notes: AR22VGF: LED 24V AC/DC and neon only

● Contact closed
04/25
04
2-position
Operator Operation Knob color or Contact Type Contact operation (Example)
key removable Switch with Switch with
position round bezel square bezel Contact Operator position
arrangement
Left Right
Knob Maintained Color code: 1NO AR22PR-210B AR22PY-210B 1NO (1) Upper contact
B: Black 1NC AR22PR-201B AR22PY-201B
(Standard) 1NO+1NC AR22PR-211B AR22PY-211B ➂ ● ➃
Color other than 2NO AR22PR-220B AR22PY-220B
above are 2NC AR22PR-202B AR22PY-202B
each 90° available 2NO+2NC AR22PR-222B AR22PY-222B
G: Green 1NC (1) Upper contact
Spring return R: Red 1NO AR22PR-010B AR22PY-010B
1NC AR22PR-001B AR22PY-001B ➀ ● ➁
1NO+1NC AR22PR-011B AR22PY-011B
2NO AR22PR-020B AR22PY-020B
2NC AR22PR-002B AR22PY-002B
AF94-310 60° 2NO+2NC AR22PR-022B AR22PY-022B 1NO+1NC Upper contact
Lever Maintained 1NO AR22WR-210B AR22WY-210B ➂ ● ➃
1NC AR22WR-201B AR22WY-201B
1NO+1NC AR22WR-211B AR22WY-211B
2NO AR22WR-220B AR22WY-220B Lower contact
each 90° 2NO+2NC AR22WR-222B AR22WY-222B ➀ ● ➁
Spring return 1NO AR22WR-010B AR22WY-010B
1NC AR22WR-001B AR22WY-001B 2NO+2NC Upper contact
2NO AR22WR-020B AR22WY-020B ➂ ● ➃
AF94-324 60° 2NO+2NC AR22WR-022B AR22WY-022B
➂ ● ➃
Cylindrical knob Maintained 1NO AR22RR-210B AR22RY-210B
1NC AR22RR-201B AR22RY-201B
1NO+1NC AR22RR-211B AR22RY-211B Lower contact
2NO AR22RR-220B AR22RY-220B
2NC AR22RR-202B AR22RY-202B ➀ ● ➁
each 90° 2NO+2NC AR22RR-222B AR22RY-222B
Spring return 1NO AR22RR-010B AR22RY-010B ➀ ● ➁
1NO+1NC AR22RR-011B AR22RY-011B
2NO AR22RR-020B AR22RY-020B
AF94-308 60° 2NO+2NC AR22RR-022B AR22RY-022B
Key Maintained ■: Key 1NO AR22JR-2■10( ) AR22JY-2■10( )
removable 1NC AR22JR-2■01( ) AR22JY-2■01( )
position 1NO+1NC AR22JR-2■11( ) AR22JY-2■11( )
( ): Key type 2NO AR22JR-2■20( ) AR22JY-2■20( )
2NC AR22JR-2■02( ) AR22JY-2■02( )
each 90° See page 04/27 2NO+2NC AR22JR-2■22( ) AR22JY-2■22( )
Spring return 1NO AR22JR-0A10( ) AR22JY-0A10( )
1NC AR22JR-0A01( ) AR22JY-0A01( )
1NO+1NC AR22JR-0A11( ) AR22JY-0A11( )
2NO AR22JR-0A20( ) AR22JY-0A20( )
2NC AR22JR-0A02( ) AR22JY-0A02( )
KKD09-018 60° 2NO+2NC AR22JR-0A22( ) AR22JY-0A22( )
Selector Switches
AR22
(1)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
Notes: • (1) to (4): Contact block mounting position
• ➀ – ➁, ➂ – ➃: Contact block terminal No.
• Contact arrangements: See page 04/27
Release arm
Upper contact
Lower contact
Operator
Contact block
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
• Operator
Replace the mark by the cylinder key type code
Standard type: Blank
Long durability type: A

04/26
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
Selector Switches
AR22
3-position
Operator Operation Knob color Contact Type Contact operation (Example)
Switch with Switch with
round bezel square bezel Contact Operation position
arrange-ment
L C R L C R
Knob Maintained 1NO+1NC AR22PR-311B AR22PY-311B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
2NO AR22PR-320B AR22PY-320B ➂ ➀
2NC AR22PR-302B AR22PY-302B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR22PR-322B AR22PY-322B ➃ ➁
each 45°
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22PR-611B AR22PY-611B
return 2NO AR22PR-620B AR22PY-620B
2NC AR22PR-602B AR22PY-602B
2NO+2NC AR22PR-622B AR22PY-622B
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22PR-711B AR22PY-711B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AR22PR-720B AR22PY-720B ➂ ➀
2NC AR22PR-702B AR22PY-702B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR22PR-722B AR22PY-722B ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AR22PR-122B AR22PY-122B 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
Lever Maintained 1NO+1NC AR22WR-311B AR22WY-311B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
2NO AR22WR-320B AR22WY-320B ➂ ➀
2NC AR22WR-302B AR22WY-302B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR22WR-322B AR22WY-322B ➃ ➁
each 45°
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22WR-611B AR22WY-611B
return 2NO AR22WR-620B AR22WY-620B
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22WR-711B AR22WY-711B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AR22WR-720B AR22WY-720B ➂ ➀
2NC AR22WR-702B AR22WY-702B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR22WR-722B AR22WY-722B ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AR22WR-122B AR22WY-122B 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
Cylindrical knob Maintained 1NO+1NC AR22RR-311B AR22RY-311B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
2NO AR22RR-320B AR22RY-320B ➂ ➀
2NC AR22RR-302B AR22RY-302B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR22RR-322B AR22RY-322B ➃ ➁
each 45°
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22RR-611B AR22RY-611B
return 2NO AR22RR-620B AR22RY-620B
2NO+2NC AR22RR-622B AR22RY-622B
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22RR-711B AR22RY-711B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AR22RR-720B AR22RY-720B ➂ ➀
2NC AR22RR-702B AR22RY-702B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR22RR-722B AR22RY-722B ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AR22RR-122B AR22RY-122B 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
AF94-310
AF94-324
AF94-308

● Contact closed
Operator
Contact block
04/27
each 45°
04
Selector Switches
AR22
Operator Operation Key removable Contact Type Contact operation (Example)
position Switch with Switch with
round bezel square bezel Contact Operator position
arrange-ment
L C R L C R
Key Maintained ■: Key 1NO+1NC AR22JR-3■11( ) AR22JY-3■11( ) 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
removable 2NO AR22JR-3■20( ) AR22JY-3■20( ) ➂ ➀
position 2NC AR22JR-3■02( ) AR22JY-3■02( ) ● ●
(1) (2)
( ): Key type 2NO+2NC AR22JR-3■22( ) AR22JY-3■22( ) ➃ ➁
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22JR-6■11( ) AR22JY-6■11( )
return 2NO AR22JR-6■20( ) AR22JY-6■20( )
2NC AR22JR-6■02( ) AR22JY-6■02( )
2NO+2NC AR22JR-6■22( ) AR22JY-6■22( )
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR22JR-7■11( ) AR22JY-7■11( ) 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AR22JR-7■20( ) AR22JY-7■20( ) ➂ ➀
(1) (2)
2NC AR22JR-7■02( ) AR22JY-7■02( ) ● ●
2NO+2NC AR22JR-7■22( ) AR22JY-7■22( ) ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AR22JR-1E22( ) AR22JY-1E22( ) 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
Notes: • Operator position L:Left, C:Center, R:Right
• (1) to (4): Contact block mounting position
• Key removable positions
Code A B C D E F G
Removable
position
AR22JR-2 ● ● – ● – – –
AR22JR-0 ● – – – – – –
AR22JR-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AR22JR-6 – – – ● ● ● –
AR22JR-7 ● – – – ● – ●
AR22JR-1 – – – – ● – –
●: Available –: Not available
(1) (2)
• Key code No.
Replace the ( ) mark with one of the following key code.
A, B, C, D, E and F
Standard key code is A.
(3) (4)
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
KKD09-018
Release arm
Upper contact
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Lower contact
• Operator
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30 03
Contact 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC 5NO 5NC 3NO+3NC
arrangement
Code 22 40 04 50 05 33
Mainted Spring return
Spring/manual return

Selector Switches
AR22
■ Selector switches (control type)
3-position
Operator Operation Knob color or Contact Type
Knob Maintained Replace the ■ AR22PCR-3■B AR22PCY-3■B
04/28
key removable arrangement Switch with Switch with
position round bezel square bezel
mark by the contact
arrangement code
each 45°
Spring/manual (shown on next page). AR22PCR-6■B AR22PCY-6■B
return
Spring/manual AR22PCR-7■B AR22PCY-7■B
return
Spring return AR22PCR-1■B AR22PCY-1■B
Lever Maintained Replace the ■ AR22WCR-3■B AR22WCY-3■B
mark by the contact
arrangement code
each 45°
Spring/manual (shown on next page). AR22WCR-6■B AR22WCY-6■B
return
Spring/manual AR22WCR-7■B AR22WCY-7■B
return
Spring return AR22WCR-1■B AR22WCY-1■B
Cylindrical knob Maintained Replace the ■ AR22RCR-3■B AR22RCY-3■B
mark by the contact
arrangement code
each 45°
Spring/manual (shown on next page). AR22RCR-6■B AR22RCY-6■B
return
Spring/manual AR22RCR-7■B AR22RCY-7■B
return
Spring return AR22RCR-1■B AR22RCY-1■B
Key Maintained Replace the Replace the ■ AR22JCR-3 ■( ) AR22JCY-3■ ( )
mark by the mark by the contact
key removable arrangement code
each 45°
Spring/manual position code: (shown on next page). AR22JCR-6 ■( ) AR22JCY-6■ ( )
return A, B, C, D, E
F or G
Spring/manual AR22JCR-7 ■( ) AR22JCY-7■ ( )
return
Spring return AR22JCR-1E■( ) AR22JCY-1E■( )
Code A B C D E F G
Removable
position
AR22JCR-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AR22JCR-6 – – – ● ● ● –
AR22JCR-7 ● – – – ● – ●
AR22JCR-1 – – – – ● – –
• Key code No.
A, B, C, D, E and F
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
AF94-435
AF94-436
AF94-433
KKD09-016

04/29
(Maintained
only)
04
Selector Switches
AR22
Contact Contact Contact operation
arrange- arrange-ment
ment Contact block Operator position
code
Mounting Type Left Center Right
position
2NO+2NC 064 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ● ●
1NO+1NC 07F (1) NC
(2) NO ●
– – – – –
– – – – –
2NO+2NC 07C* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 084 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 094* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 104 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ● ●
2NO+2NC 11C* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
code
position
2NC 01F (1) NC
(2) NC
– – – – –
– – – – –
2NO+2NC 014 (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
4NC 01J (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NC
(4) NC
2NO+2NC 024 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ● ●
2NO+2NC 03C* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 044* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 054 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
Notes: ●: Contact closed Blank: Contact open
* There may be some overlap in the contact when switching between
notches.
(Maintained
only)
(Maintained
only)
• Contact arrangement code (Typical example)
Release arm
Operator
Contact block
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

04/30
Selector Switches
AR22
code
position
2NO+2NC 124* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 134* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
3NO+1NC 14D* (1) NO ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
3NO+1NC 15A* (1) NO ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 164 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 174* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 184 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
notches.
code
position
2NO+2NC 194 (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
4NO 20B (1) NO ●
(2) NO ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
(Maintained
only)
Release arm
Operator
Contact block
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

04/31
04
Selector Switches
AR22
4, 5-position
Operator Contact Operation Knob color Contact Type
arrangement Switch with Switch with
round bezel square bezel
Knob 2NO+2NC 4-position Replace the ■ AR22PCR-4■B AR22PCY-4■B
maintained mark by the contact
arrangement code
(shown below)
5-position AR22PCR-5■B AR22PCY-5■B
maintained
Lever 2NO+2NC 4-position AR22WCR-4■B AR22WCY-4■B
maintained
5-position AR22WCR-5■B AR22WCY-5■B
maintained
Cylindrical knob 2NO+2NC 4-position AR22RCR-4■B AR22RCY-4■B
maintained
5-position AR22RCR-5■B AR22RCY-5■B
maintained
● Contact arrangement code
Position Contact Contact Contact operation
code
Mounting Type
position 1 2 3 4 5
4-position 2NO+2NC 41C*
(1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
(1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
Operator position
4-position 5-position
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
(The following
contact is only
available.)
(Main-tained
only)
(Main-tained
only)
40° 30°
AF94-435
AF94-436
AF94-433
Release arm
Operator
Contact block
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Notes: ●: Contact closed
* There may be some overlap in the contact when switching between notches.

04/32
Illuminated Selector Switches
AR22
2-position
Operator Operation Contact LED lamp Incandescent lamp
Transformer Type Transformer Type
Knob Maintained 1NO Without AR22PL-210■3 Without AR22PL-210■4
1NC AR22PL-201■3 AR22PL-201■4
1NO+1NC AR22PL-211■3 AR22PL-211■4
2NO+2NC AR22PL-222■3 AR22PL-222■4
1NO With AR22PL-210■3 With AR22PL-210■4
each 90° 1NC AR22PL-201■3 AR22PL-201■4
1NO+1NC AR22PL-211■3 AR22PL-211■4
2NO AR22PL-220■3 AR22PL-220■4
Spring return 1NO Without AR22PL-010■3 Without AR22PL-010■4
1NC AR22PL-001■3 AR22PL-001■4
1NO+1NC AR22PL-011■3 AR22PL-011■4
2NO AR22PL-020■3 AR22PL-020■4
60° 1NC AR22PL-001■3 AR22PL-001■4
1NO+1NC AR22PL-011■3 AR22PL-011■4
2NO AR22PL-020■3 AR22PL-020■4
Knob with square Maintained 1NO Without AR22PP-210■3 Without AR22PP-210■4
bezel 1NC AR22PP-201■3 AR22PP-201■4
1NO+1NC AR22PP-211■3 AR22PP-211■4
2NO+2NC AR22PP-222■3 AR22PP-222■4
1NO With AR22PP-210■3 With AR22PP-210■4
each 90° 1NC AR22PP-201■3 AR22PP-201■4
1NO+1NC AR22PP-211■3 AR22PP-211■4
2NO AR22PP-220■3 AR22PP-220■4
Spring return 1NO Without AR22PP-010■3 Without AR22PP-010■4
1NC AR22PP-001■3 AR22PP-001■4
1NO+1NC AR22PP-011■3 AR22PP-011■4
2NO AR22PP-020■3 AR22PP-020■4
1NO With AR22PP-010■3 With AR22PP-010■4
60° 1NC AR22PP-001■3 AR22PP-001■4
1NO+1NC AR22PP-011■3 AR22PP-011■4
2NO AR22PP-020■3 AR22PP-020■4
AF94-306
AF94-360
3-position
Knob Maintained 1NO+1NC Without AR22PL-311■3 Without AR22PL-311■4
2NO+2NC AR22PL-322■3 AR22PL-322■4
1NO+1NC With AR22PL-311■3 AR22PL-311■4
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC Without AR22PL-611■3 Without AR22PL-611■4
return 1NO+1NC With AR22PL-611■3 With AR22PL-611■4
1NO+1NC Without AR22PL-711■3 Without AR22PL-711■4
1NO+1NC With AR22PL-711■3 With AR22PL-711■4
Knob with square Maintained 1NO+1NC Without AR22PP-311■3 Without AR22PP-311■4
bezel 2NO+2NC AR22PP-322■3 AR22PP-322■4
1NO+1NC With AR22PP-311■3 AR22PP-311■4
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC Without AR22PP-611■3 Without AR22PP-611■4
return 1NO+1NC With AR22PP-611■3 With AR22PP-611■4
1NO+1NC Without AR22PP-711■3 Without AR22PP-711■4
1NO+1NC With AR22PP-711■3 With AR22PP-711■4
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
AF94-306
AF94-360
Note: , See page 04/33

04/33
04
AR22
• Replace the ■ mark by the following lamp voltage code
Transformer Voltage Code
LED Incandescent
Without 5V AC/DC – 5
6V DC 6 –
6V AC A –
12V AC/DC B –
15V AC/DC C C
20V AC/DC – D
24V AC/DC E E
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W
• Replace the mark by the following knob color code
Code G R W S Y A
• Up to 4-contact of contact arrangement can be made.
Available numbers of contacts are as follow.
No. of Operation Without With
position transformer transformer
2-position Maintained 4-contact 3-contact
Spring return 3-contact 2-contact
Spring/manual return 3-contact 2-contact
● Contact arrangement and operator position
2-position
Transformer Contact Contact block Operator position
arrangement
Mounting Type Left Right
position
With/without 1NO (1) NO – ●
With/without 1NC (1) NC ● –
Without 1NO+1NC (1) NO – ●
(2) NC ● –
With 1NO+1NC (1) NC ● –
(2) NO – ●
(2) NO – ●
*1 (2) NC ● –
(3) NO – ●
(4) NC ● –
● Position of contact block
Without transformer
3-position
arrangement
position
Without 1NO+1NC (1) NO ● – –
*1 (2) NC – – ●
1NO+1NC (1) NO – – ●
*2 (2) NC ● – –
2NO+2NC (1) NO ● – –
*3 (2) NC – – ●
(3) NO ● – –
(4) NC – – ●
With 1NO+1NC (1) NC – – ●
*1 (2) NO ● – –
1NO+1NC (1) NC ● – –
*2 (2) NO – – ●
Notes: *1 : AR22PL-3, 6 AR22PP-3, 6 *3 : AR22PL-3 AR22PP-3
*2 : AR22PL-7, AR22PP-7
● : Contact closed, – : Contact open
With transformer
Release arm
Operator
Lamp terminal
(3) (1)
(4) (2)
Release arm
Operator
Transformer
(2) (1)
Notes: *1 : AR22PL-2, AR22PP-2

Lens Transformer LED lamp Incandescent lamp
Dome Without 6V AC DR22D0L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR22D0L-54
Extended round Without 6V AC DR22E3L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3L-54
Faceted Without 6V AC DR22K0L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR22K0L-54
Flush square Without 6V AC DR22F3M-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR22F3M-54
(Transparent 6V DC DR22F4M-63 — —
lens) 12V AC/DC DR22F4M-B3 15V AC/DC DR22F4M-C4
(12mm high 6V DC DR22F5M-63 — —
frame) 12V AC/DC DR22F5M-B3 15V AC/DC DR22F5M-C4
Extended square Without 6V AC DR22E3M-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3M-54
Flush rectangular Without 6V AC DR22E3N-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3N-54
Extended round with Without 6V AC DR22E3P-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3P-54
square bezel 6V DC DR22E3P-63 — —
04/34
Lamp voltage Type Lamp voltage Type
6V DC DR22D0L-63 — —
12V AC/DC DR22D0L-B3 15V AC/DC DR22D0L-C4
24V AC/DC DR22D0L-E3 24V AC/DC DR22D0L-E4
With 100–110V AC DR22D0L-H3 100–110V AC DR22D0L-H4
200–220V AC DR22D0L-M3 200–220V AC DR22D0L-M4
6V DC DR22E3L-63 — —
12V AC/DC DR22E3L-B3 15V AC/DC DR22E3L-C4
24V AC/DC DR22E3L-E3 24V AC/DC DR22E3L-E4
With 100–110V AC DR22E3L-H3 100–110V AC DR22E3L-H4
200–220V AC DR22E3L-M3 200–220V AC DR22E3L-M4
6V DC DR22K0L-63 — —
12V AC/DC DR22K0L-B3 15V AC/DC DR22K0L-C4
24V AC/DC DR22K0L-E3 24V AC/DC DR22K0L-E4
With 100–110V AC DR22K0L-H3 100–110V AC DR22K0L-H4
200–220V AC DR22K0L-M3 200–220V AC DR22K0L-M4
6V DC DR22F3M-63 — —
12V AC/DC DR22F3M-B3 15V AC/DC DR22F3M-C4
24V AC/DC DR22F3M-E3 24V AC/DC DR22F3M-E4
With 100–110V AC DR22F3M-H3 100–110V AC DR22F3M-H4
200–220V AC DR22F3M-M3 200–220V AC DR22F3M-M4
200–220V AC DR22F5M-E3 200–220V AC DR22F5M-M4
6V DC DR22E3M-63 — —
12V AC/DC DR22E3M-B3 15V AC/DC DR22E3M-C4
24V AC/DC DR22E3M-E3 24V AC/DC DR22E3M-E4
With 100–110V AC DR22E3M-H3 100–110V AC DR22E3M-H4
200–220V AC DR22E3M-M3 200–220V AC DR22E3M-M4
6V DC DR22E3N-63 — —
12V AC/DC DR22E3N-B3 15V AC/DC DR22E3N-C4
24V AC/DC DR22E3N-E3 24V AC/DC DR22E3N-E4
With 100–110V AC DR22E3N-H3 100–110V AC DR22E3N-H4
200–220V AC DR22E3N-M3 200–220V AC DR22E3N-M4
12V AC/DC DR22E3P-B3 15V AC/DC DR22E3P-C4
24V AC/DC DR22E3P-E3 24V AC/DC DR22E3P-E4
With 100–110V AC DR22E3P-H3 100–110V AC DR22E3P-H4
200–220V AC DR22E3P-M3 200–220V AC DR22E3P-M4
Pilot Lights
DR22
■ Pilot lights/standard
AF94-333
AF94-332
AF96-189
AF94-330
AF94-443
AF95-685
AF94-380
AF96-237
AF94-331

04/35
■ Pilot lights/short-body without transformer
04
Pilot Lights
DR22
Lens LED lamp Incandescent lamp
Lamp Type Lamp Type
voltage voltage
Dome 5.5V AC/DC — 5.5V AC/DC DR22D0L-58
6V AC DR22D0L-A9 6V AC —
6V DC DR22D0L-69 6V DC —
AF98-88
Extended round 5.5V AC/DC — 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3L-58
6V AC DR22E3L-A9 6V AC —
6V DC DR22E3L-69 6V DC —
AF98-90
Faceted 5.5V AC/DC — 5.5V AC/DC DR22K0L-58
6V AC DR22K0L-A9 6V AC —
6V DC DR22K0L-69 6V DC —
AF98-89
Flush square 5.5V AC/DC — 5.5V AC/DC DR22F3M-58
6V AC DR22F3M-A9 6V AC —
6V DC DR22F3M-69 6V DC —
AF98-92
(Transparent lens) 6V AC DR22F4M-A9 6V AC —
6V DC DR22F4M-69 6V DC —
AF98-92
(12mm 6V AC DR22F5M-A9 6V AC —
high 6V DC DR22F5M-69 6V DC —
frame) 12V AC/DC DR22F5M-B9 15V AC/DC DR22F5M-C8
AF98-94
Extended square 5.5V AC/DC — 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3M-58
6V AC DR22E3M-A9 6V AC —
6V DC DR22E3M-69 6V DC —
12V AC/DC DR22E3M-B9 15V AC/DC DR22E3M-C8
24V AC/DC DR22E3M-E9 24V AC/DC DR22E3M-E8
AF98-93
Flush rectangular 5.5V AC/DC — 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3N-58
6V AC DR22E3N-A9 6V AC —
6V DC DR22E3N-69 6V DC —
12V AC/DC DR22E3N-B9 15V AC/DC DR22E3N-C8
24V AC/DC DR22E3N-E9 24V AC/DC DR22E3N-E8
KK02-234B
Extended round with 5.5V AC/DC — 5.5V AC/DC DR22E3P-58
square 6V AC DR22E3P-A9 6V AC —
bezel 6V DC DR22E3P-69 6V DC —
12V AC/DC DR22E3P-B9 15V AC/DC DR22E3P-C8
24V AC/DC DR22E3P-E9 24V AC/DC DR22E3P-E8
AF98-91

04/36
Pilot Lights
DR22
■ Pilot lights/short-body with transformer
Dome 100–110V AC DR22D0L-H9 100–110V AC DR22D0L-H8
AF97-137
Extended round 100–110V AC DR22E3L-H9 100–110V AC DR22E3L-H8
AF97-138
Faceted 100–110V AC DR22K0L-H9 100–110V AC DR22K0L-H8
KK02-130A
Flush square 100–110V AC DR22F3M-H9 100–110V AC DR22F3M-H8
AF97-134
(Transparent lens) 200–220V AC DR22F4M-M9 200–220V AC DR22F4M-M8
AF97-133
(12mm high 200–220V AC DR22F5M-M9 200–220V AC DR22F5M-M8
frame)
AF97-136
Extended square 100–110V AC DR22E3M-H9 100–110V AC DR22E3M-H8
200–220V AC DR22E3M-M9 200–220V AC DR22E3M-M8
KK02-134A
Flush rectangular 100–110V AC DR22E3N-H9 100–110V AC DR22E3N-H8
200–220V AC DR22E3N-M9 200–220V AC DR22E3N-M8
KK02-235B
Extended round with 100–110V AC DR22E3P-H9 100–110V AC DR22E3P-H8
square bezel 200–220V AC DR22E3P-M9 200–220V AC DR22E3P-M8
AF97-135

04/37
• Lens color
04
Pilot Lights
DR22
Color
Code
Green
G
Red
R
White
W
Blue
S
Yellow
Y
Orange
A
Replace the mark by the following lens color code
• Lamp voltage
Available lamp voltage are as follow.
Description
Without transformer
With transformer
With resistor unit
Voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
110V DC
Code
Standard type
LED
–
A3
63
B3
C3
–
E3
H3
L3
M3
Q3
S3
T3
V3
W3
H7
Incandescent
54
–
–
–
C4
D4
E4
H4
L4
M4
Q4
S4
T4
V4
W4
–
Short-body type
LED
–
A9
69
B9
C9
–
E9
H9
L9
M9
–
–
–
–
–
–
Incandescent
58
–
–
–
C8
D8
E8
H8
L8
M8
–
–
–
–
–
–

Joy Stick Selector Switches
AR22
4 Left 2 Right
04/38
Handle Terminal Operating directions Contact Type
arrangement Manual return Spring return
Ball type without lock Screw 1NO ✕ 2 AR22A0N-A0A0B AR22A5N-A0A0B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 2 AR22A0N-1010B AR22A5N-1010B
1NO ✕ 4 AR22A0N-AAAAB AR22A5N-AAAAB
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR22A0N-1111B AR22A5N-1111B
Solder/tab 1NO + 1NC ✕ 2 AR22A0H-1010B AR22A5H-1010B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 2 AR22A0H-2020B AR22A5H-2020B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR22A0H-1111B AR22A5H-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 4 AR22A0H-2222B AR22A5H-2222B
AF97-49
Ball type with lock Screw 1NO ✕ 2 AR22A1N-A0A0B AR22A6N-A0A0B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 2 AR22A1N-1010B AR22A6N-1010B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR22A1N-1111B AR22A6N-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 2 AR22A1H-2020B AR22A6H-2020B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR22A1H-1111B AR22A6H-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 4 AR22A1H-2222B AR22A6H-2222B
AF97-45
Rubber cap type Screw 1NO ✕ 2 AR22A2N-A0A0B AR22A7N-A0A0B
without lock
1NO + 1NC ✕ 2 AR22A2N-1010B AR22A7N-1010B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR22A2N-1111B AR22A7N-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 2 AR22A2H-2020B AR22A7H-2020B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR22A2H-1111B AR22A7H-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 4 AR22A2H-2222B AR22A7H-2222B
AF97-56
• Operating direction
• Directions other than those shown in the table
above can be provided.
• For types AR22AN- 1 2 3 4 B, designate the
contact arrangement codes for the necessary
operating directions ( 1 : Upper, 2 : Right,
3 : Lower, 4 : Left). Designate 0 for unnecessary
directions.
• Contact arrangement
Contact arrangement
Manual return
Spring return
Screw
Solder/Tab
– 1NO 1NC 1NO+1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO+2NC
A
–
0
0
B
–
1
1
D
–
E
–
–
2
1 Upper
3 Lower
• Spring/manual return are also available, contact FUJI.

04/39
• Sound volume adjustment
• Sound level: 80 to 90dB (0.1m)
60 to 70dB (1m)
04
Sound Description
Electronic sound
Magnetic sound
Electronic sound (IP54)
Transformer
Without
With
With resistor unit
Without
With
Without
With
With resistor unit
Operating voltage
6V AC
6V DC
12 to 24V AC/DC
35 to 48V AC/DC
100 to 110V AC
200 to 220V AC
100 to 110V DC
24V AC/DC
100 to 110V AC
200 to 220V AC
6V AC
6V DC
12 to 24V AC/DC
35 to 48V AC/DC
100 to 110V AC
200 to 220V AC
100 to 110V DC
Type
DR22B5-AB
DR22B5-6B
DR22B5-EB
DR22B5-FB
DR22B5-HB
DR22B5-MB
DR22B5-1B
DR22B3-EB
DR22B3-HB
DR22B3-MB
DR22B8-AB
DR22B8-6B
DR22B8-EB
DR22B8-FB
DR22B8-HB
DR22B8-MB
DR22B8-1B
• Intermittent/continuous sound selection (DR22B5, B8)
See the Short-circuit terminal in the dimensions diagram on the 04/49
page, and select as follows:
• Short-circuit terminal mounted Intermittent sound
• Short-circuit terminal not mounted Continuous sound
Notes: • Sound volume adjustment (DR22B3)
Use a flat-bladed screwdriver with a narrow tip to gently turn Control knob
shown in the dimensions diagram on the 04/49 page, as follows.
• Clockwise Increase sound pressure
• Counterclockwise Decrease sound pressure
• LED operation indicator (Red)
• Intermittent/continuous sound
selection
• Sound level: 90dB (0.1m)
70dB (1m)
selection
60dB (1m)
KKD08-053
AF96-376
AF96-244
■ Buzzers
Buzzers
DR22

Flush/Extended
Terminal cover Release arm
37
44
04/40
AR22M0L, M5L
1 80 17.5 (Extended) 25
AR22M4L, M9L AR22M4P
ø30
ø29
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Illuminated pushbutton switches
AR22F0M, F5M
AR22E0M, E5M
AR22F0P, F5P
AR22E0P, E5P
AR22F0L, F5L
AR22E0L, E5L
With transformer
Without transformer Mushroom (40mm dia.)
Mushroom (29mm dia.)
Extended with full guard (with openings)
AR22G4L, G9L
AR22G1L, G6L
AR22G2L, G7L
AR22V5L
1 80 17.5 (Extended)
12 (Flush)
37
44
ø30
Nut
Transformer Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Note: *230V and over
64*
22.5
37
ø24
30
22.5
37
24sq.
30sq.
22.5
37
ø24
30sq.
22.5
37
30
ø40
1 80
44
37
Terminal screw M3.5 Lamp
terminal
40
60
Nut
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
12 (Flush)
ø30
Nut
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5
40
60
Lamp
terminal
1 80
Terminal cover
44
37
terminal
Nut
Packing
40
Packing
60
ø30
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Release arm
25
22.5
37 30
ø29
22.5
30sq.
37
22.5
ø24
30
37
80
Release arm
17.5
ø30
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Nut
40
60
Lamp
terminal
44
37
1
Terminal cover
Terminal screw M3.5 ø30
17.5
22.5
ø24
30
37
Release arm
1
Terminal cover
44
37
Terminal screw M3.5
60
Lamp
terminal
Nut
Packing
40
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
80
40
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Nut
terminal
44
37
1 60 31
22.5
37
ø18
30
ø40
1 60
24.5*

ø24
Flush/Extended with full guard
AR22M0R, M5R AR22G3R, G8R
AR22G2R, G7R
04/41
ø29
AR22G0R, G5R
1
Nut
Nut
1 80
Terminal cover
Nut
Terminal cover
04
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Pushbutton switches
AR22F0R, F5R
AR22E0R, E5R
AR22FAR, FBR
AR22EAR, EBR
AR22F0S, F5S
AR22E0S, E5S
AR22F0Y, F5Y
AR22E0Y, E5Y
1
44
37
AR22M4R, M9R AR22M4Y
AR22M3R, M8R
AR22V5R
AR22S1R, S2R
AR22S3R, S6R
Ui 600V
Ith 10A
JIS
Release arm
60 31
Ui 600V
Ith 10A
JIS
80 17.5 (Extended)
12 (Flush)
17.5 (Extended)
12 (Flush)
ø30
40
60
44
37
Panel thickness
Packing 1 to 6
Panel thickness
Packing 1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5
22.5
37
30
22.5
37
24sq.
30sq.
22.5
37
ø24
30sq.
37
44
60
40
Terminal screw M3.5
Release arm
Terminal cover
ø30
25
22.5
30
ø40
37
60
80
Terminal cover
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut
Packing
40
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Release arm
44
60
1 80
37
40
25
ø30
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut
Packing
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
22.5
37
30
30sq.
37
22.5
ø29
Release arm
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut Panel thickness
1 to 6
60
80
37
1
44
17.5
ø30
40
22.5
ø24
37
30
60
80
Terminal cover
37
1
44
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut
Packing
40
25
Panel thickness
1 to 6
ø40
ø47
37
1
44
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
40
22.5
37
ø18
30
ø40
Release arm
Panel thickness
Packing 1 to 6
ø28
ø30
1
44
Terminal screw M3.5
60
37
22.5
30
37
40
Flush/Extended
Extended with half guard Mushroom with full guard (40mm dia.)
Pushbutton with selector ring Push-lock, turn-reset

Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.) Push-lock, turn-reset (29mm dia.)
Release arm
Nut
44
37
(V2R: 30) (V4R: 30)
Key release push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
60
Nut Panel thickness
Unibody push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
04/42
60
Push-lock, pull-reset (35mm dia.)
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Emergency stop pushbutton switches
AR22Q2R
AR22VGE
AR22V0R, V2R
AR22V7R
AR22VSR, V4R
1 11 21 1 3
2 12 22 2 4
3 4
Wiring diagrams
1NC 2NC 1NO+1NC
60 31
Panel thickness
Packing 1 to 6
Terminal
cover
Terminal
cover
1
40
Terminal screw M3.5
30
ø40
22.5
37
ø18
22.5
30
37
Release arm
Terminal cover
44
37
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut Panel thickness
1 to 6
31
ø29
Packing
1
40
Release arm
37
1
44
Terminal screw M3.5 Terminal screw M3.5
1 to 6
55.4
32
Packing
40
22.5
37
30
ø40
22.5
30
37
ø35
ø40
ø30
Terminal cover
IP2X
Terminal cover
1
44
37
Nut
Nut
Packing
Packing
Washer
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
40 30
Release arm
57 32
55
Terminal No.2
(12)
Terminal No.3 (21)
Terminal Terminal No.4 (22)
No.1(11)
Terminal screw M3.5
Note: Terminal No. shown in ( ) are for contact arrangement 2NC.

60
31
1 X1 11 21 X1 1 3 X1
04/43
44
37
1 60
Note: *1 230V and over
*2 AR22V2L and VAL types only
IP2X
Terminal cover
Terminal No. 3 (21)
Terminal No. 4 (22)
Lamp terminal screw M3.5
ø30
30
57 32 ø40
55
Terminal No. X2
Washer
24.5*1
Terminal cover
04
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switches
AR22V0L, V2L
AR22VDL, VAL
AR22VSL
2 4 X2
2 X2 12 22 X2
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
With transformer
Without transformer
Unibody push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
Without transformer
Without transformer
3 4
Terminal No. 2 (12)
Terminal No. 1 (11)
Terminal screw M3.5
Note: Terminal No. shown in ( ) are for contact arrangement 2NC.
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Nut
Terminal No. X1
Wiring diagrams
1NC 2NC 1NO+1NC
Terminal cover
31
30*2
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Nut
Terminal screw M3.5 Transformer
Packing
64*1
ø18
ø40
37
22.5
Release arm
Terminal cover
44
1
37
Nut
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Lamp
terminal 40
30*2
1 60 31
ø18
37
22.5
30
Release arm
37
44
Nut
Packing
Lamp
terminal
Panel thickness
1 to 6
ø29
40
AR22VGF

AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
1
Terminal cover
44
37
04/44
AR22PR, PCR AR22PY, PCY
AR22WR, WCR AR22WY, WCY
ø24
AR22RR, RCR AR22RY, RCY
ø24
ø24 ø24
■ Dimensions, mm
• Selector switches
Release arm
Nut Panel thickness
40
ø30
23
Terminal screw M3.5
80
Terminal cover
44
37
60
Packing
1 to 6
1
ø24
30
37
22.5
22.5
37
ø24
30sq.
Nut
Packing
40
80
60
37
44
1
Terminal cover
Terminal screw M3.5
Release arm
23
ø30
Panel thickness
1 to 6
37
22.5
ø24
30
27
22.5
30sq.
37
27
Release arm
Packing
40
80
60
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut
23
ø30
Panel thickness
1 to 6
ø24
30
37
22.5
22.5
30sq.
37
Packing
40
80
60
Nut
37
44
1
Terminal cover
Terminal screw M3.5
Release arm
Panel thickness
1 to 6
ø30
20 24
22.5
30
37
22.5
37
30sq.
AR22JR, JCR
AR22JAR
AR22JY, JCY
Knob
Lever
Cylindrical knob
Key

04/45
Terminal cover
23
Note: * 230V and over
1 80
Release arm
Nut
Packing
With transformer, with resistor unit Without transformer
Short body/with transformer Short body/without transformer
ø30 17.2
04
■ Dimensions, mm
• Illuminated selector switches
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
Nut
60
1 80
1
37
44
24.5*
Terminal screw M3.5 Transformer
64*
Panel thickness
Packing 1 to 6
ø30
Release arm
22.5
ø24
30
37
22.5
37
ø24
30sq.
60
40
terminal
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal cover
37
44
23
ø30
With transformer
AR22PL AR22PP
Without transformer
• Pilot lights
60
64*
1
Terminal cover
Terminal screw M3.5
17.2
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
1 36 ø30
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Nut
Lamp (BA9S)
ø30
ø24
17.2
Packing
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
Terminal
cover
Terminal screw M3.5
ø24
17.2
Packing
40
Terminal screw
M3.5
Terminal cover
18.3
20.8 Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
20
ø24
Packing
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
21.5
Terminal screw M3.5
ø30
ø24
30
29
Note: * Except for the types 110V AC, 127V AC and 220V AC.
Dome
DR22D0L DR22D0L
DR22D0L DR22D0L

Terminal cover
Nut Nut
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
04/46
Terminal screw M3.5
1 36
Terminal
cover
DR22E3L DR22E3M DR22E3P
30sq. 30sq.
ø30 1 36 17.2
Lamp (BA9S)
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Pilot lights
60
64*
1
Lamp (BA9S)
Terminal screw M3.5
12 ø30
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Packing
30sq.
ø24 24sq.
30sq.
ø24
Legend plate: E3L, E3P ø19.7
E3M 20sq.
12
Packing
E3M 20sq.
Lamp (BA9S)
30sq.
ø24
30sq.
24sq.
ø30
ø24
E3M 20sq.
12
Nut
Lamp (BA9S)
40
Terminal screw
M3.5
Terminal cover
20 18.3
20.8
Packing
ø30
ø24
30sq.
30sq.
24sq. ø24
12
Packing
E3M 20sq.
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
Terminal screw
M3.5
21.5 ø30
ø24 24sq.
ø24
30
29
60
64*
1
Terminal cover
17.2
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
ø24
Terminal screw
M3.5
Terminal
cover Packing
Nut
ø30
ø24
40 17.2
Packing Packing
Terminal cover Terminal screw
M3.5
Nut
20.8
20 18.3
Lamp (BA9S)
ø30
ø24
21.5 17.2
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
Terminal screw M3.5
ø30
ø24
30
29
Extended
Faceted
With transformer, with resistor unit DR22K0L Without transformer DR22K0L
Short body/with transformer DR22K0L Short body/without transformer DR22K0L

04/47
Flush
With transformer, with resistor unit DR22F3M, F4M Without transformer DR22F3M, F4M
30sq. 30sq.
Terminal cover
Terminal
cover
Nut
Nut
Packing
Packing
Legend plate:
20.8sq.
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Legend plate:
20.8sq.
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Short body/with transformer DR22F3M, F4M Short body/without transformer DR22F3M, F4M
Nut
Terminal cover
Packing Packing
Nut
Legend plate:
20.8sq.
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Legend plate:
20.8sq.
Panel thickness
1 to 6
12 30sq. 30sq.
Terminal cover
Legend plate:
20sq.
04
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Pilot lights
60
64*
Lamp (BA9S)
Lamp (BA9S)
Lamp (BA9S)
Terminal screw
M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw
M3.5
Terminal screw
M3.5
1 8.5
24sq.
24sq.
1 36 8.5
30sq.
24sq.
8.5
18.3
20.8
20
40
8.5 30sq.
24sq.
30
29
21.5
Lamp (BA9S)
Packing
60
64*
1
Terminal screw
M3.5
Terminal screw
M3.5
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
24sq.
24sq.
12
Packing
1 36
Terminal
cover
Terminal screw
M3.5
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
Terminal screw M3.5
30sq.
24sq.
12
Packing
40
Terminal cover
20 18.3
20.8
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
Nut
30sq.
24sq.
12
Packing
21.5
Lamp (BA9S)
29
30
Flush (12mm high frame)
With transformer, with resistor unit DR22F5M Without transformer DR22F5M
Short body/with transformer DR22F5M Short body/without transformer DR22F5M
Legend plate:
20sq.
Legend plate:
20sq.
Legend plate:
20sq.

Flush rectangular
With transformer, with resistor unit DR22E3N DR22E3N
Screw terminal AR22A0N, A5N
Direction 1
Direction 4
Solder/tab terminal AR22A0H, A5H
04/48
12 36.5
Packing
1 36
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
DR22E3N DR22E3N
Terminal screw
M3.5
Lamp (BA9S)
Packing
1
Nut
Nut
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Lock piece * Solder/tab terminal
20°
Lock piece *
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Pilot lights
Packing
60
64*
1
Terminal screw
M3.5
Terminal cover
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
36.5
31
Legend plate 19.7×26.7
24
30
31
24
30
12
Terminal
cover
Terminal screw
M3.5
Lamp (BA9S)
Nut
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Nut
Lamp (BA9S)
36.5
31
24
30
12
20.8
20 18.3
M3.5
40 36.5
31
24
30
12
21.5
Nut
30
29
Without transformer
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
• Joy stick selector switches
37sq.
Terminal screw M3.5 Packing
Solder/tab terminal Packing
Nameplate side
Center
20°
20°
ø25
Approx. 70
68.5 Approx. 80
4 2
3
53.5
20°
20°
ø25
Approx. 70
Approx. 80
Terminal screw M3.5
20°
20°
ø25
Approx. 70
Packing
68.5 Approx. 80
53.5
Packing
20°
ø25
Approx. 70
Approx. 80
Ball type without lock
Ball type with lock
Screw terminal AR22A1N, A6N Solder/tab terminal AR22A1H, A6H
Nut Nut
Panel
thickness
1 to 6
Direction 2
Direction 3
Notes * The contact arrangement is operable in the designated
direction by pulling the lock piece in the central position
with the fingers. The lock piece will return automatically
and locks when the lock piece is released in the central
position.
The lock piece locks in the central position only.

04/49
20°
Packing
20°
Solder/tab terminal AR22A2H, A7H
24.5
LED lamp
(Red)
Magnetic sound
With transformer Without transformer
Transformer
Lamp terminal
04
AR22 and DR22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Joy stick selector switches
• Buzzers
20°
Panel
thickness 1 to 6
68.5 Approx. 76
ø10 ø10
Approx. 60
Nameplate side
1
4 2
3
37sq.
Nut
Solder/tab terminal
53.5
20°
Approx. 76
Approx. 60
Nut
Rubber cap type without lock
Screw terminal AR22A2N, A7N
Electronic sound
With transformer DR22B5 Without transformer
DR22B5
DR22B3 DR22B3
Panel thickness
1 to 6
DR22B8 DR22B8
65 13
ø20.5 ø20.5
ø29.5
Transformer
Short-circuit terminal Short-circuit terminal
LED lamp
(Red)
30
37
ø29.5
23.5
Nut
1.5 50.5 13
37
30
Nut Lamp terminal
Packing Panel thickness Packing
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
ø20.5 ø20.5
13
ø29.5
Packing
Nut Control knob Control knob
85
24.5
Terminal screw M3.5
37
30
23.5
13
Nut
Packing
ø29.5
1.5 70.5
Terminal screw M3.5
37
Panel thickness 30
1 to 6
1.5 50.5
23.5
Transformer 65
Nut
Packing
24.5
Terminal screw M3.5
18.5
ø24
ø30
37
30
Lamp terminal
Nut
Terminal screw
M3.5
Packing
18.5
ø24
ø30
30
37
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
Short-circuit terminal Short-circuit terminal 1 to 6

04/50
Nut
Correct Incorrect
Groove with mark
AR22 and DR22
Notes on use
Notes on use
■ Fit two sizes of panel cutout holes
* The unique nut with a step allows switch to be mounted in
either 22.3mm- or 25.5mm-dia. holes as shown in Fig. 1 without
any extra adapter.
Fig. 1 Panel cutout
➁ In a 25.5mm-dia. panel cutout hole
As shown in Fig. 4, with the nut step-out side oriented to the
panel, use the wrench to tighten the nut and secure the
operator.
Fig. 4 Mounting a operator in a 25.5mm-dia. hole
Note: 1. Recommended tightening torque is from 1 to 1.5N•m
2. Ensure that the step-out portion of the nut is correctly fitted in the
cutout hole.
For easier mounting in the 25.5mm-dia. hole, the AR9Y718
adapter is also available separately.
Fig. 5 Mounting with an adapter and locking nut
■ Mounting contact block to the operator
As shown in Fig. 6, align the protruding part of the contact block
release arm with the operator groove at the mark. Then,
insert the contact block into the operator until it clicks.
Fig. 6 Mounting the contact block to the operator
The switch mounted as a
φ25mm diameter unit.
The switch mounted as a
φ22mm diameter unit.
ø25.5+0.5 0 mm
* 3.2+0.2mm
0
rmax=0.8mm
ø22.3+00.4mm
24.1+00.4mm
Note: * If key-washer or legend plate are not used, 3.2mm-wide location holes
need not be cutout.
■ Detaching contact block from the operator
While keeping the white release arm pressed with one finger,
pull-out the contact block in the direction by the arrow.
Fig. 2 Detaching contact block from the operator
Release arm Pressed
Operator Contact block
■ Mounting operator to panel
Pull-out
➀ In a 22.3mm-dia. panel cutout hole
Insert the operator into the cutout hole from the panel front as
shown in the Fig. 3.
Then, fit section “A” of the AR9A004 wrench from behind the
panel and secure the operator with nut. (See page 04/108 for
the wrench)
Fig. 3 Mounting an operator in a 22.3mm-dia. hole
Wrench (AR9A004, Section A)
Panel
Operator
Packing Nut
Note: Recommended tightening torque is from 1 to 1.5N•m
Panel Wrench (AR9A004, Section A)
Operator
Packing Nut
Panel
Adapter for 25.5mm-dia.
Operator
Panel Panel
View from above
Release arm
Contact block
Operator
Groove with mark
Packing

AR22 and DR22
Notes on use
04/51
04
■ Applicable panel thickness
The AR22/DR22 series switches are mountable to panels with
thickness as given in Table below.
Mounting condition Applicable panel thickness (mm)
Without accessories 1 to 6
With Protective cover, water-proof
1 to 4
accesories cap, legend plate
Key washer without hole 1 to 4
with hole 1 to 5
Adapter for a 25.5mm-dia. hole 1 to 5.5
■ VG type panel mounting
As shown in the illustration, remove the live section cover, nut,
and washer, and insert the main unit into a panel which has
been cut from the front side of the panel. Place the type number
AR22 facing upward, and secure the main unit with the nut
using a wrench AHX701. The appropriate tightening torque is 1
to 1.5N•m.
■ Joy stick selector switch mounting on panel
(1) Twist and remove the ball from the operator.
(2) Loosen the nut and remove the switch if the switch is
provided with a lock.
(3) If no locking nut is provided, loosen the nut and remove the
switch after the packing part (A) shown in the illustration is
stretched to the lever groove.
(4) Mount the switch in the order opposite to removal. Set the
packing to the notch on the lever as a reference. Do not
separate the nut from the packing.
(5) Use a torque wrench AR9A006 to tighten the nut from the
front of the panel.
Note: Recommended tightening a torque is 1 to 1.5N•m.
■ Buzzer mounting on panel
(1) Remove the nut, and insert the main unit into the mounting
hole from the back of the panel.
(2) Tighten the buzzer using a wrench AR9A006 from the front
side of the panel.
Note:
• Recommended tightening torque is 1 to 1.5N•m.
• Electronic sound (IP54) type has a all-in-one unit with nut and cap.
Terminal cover
Nut
Washer
Panel
Packing
Switch main unit
AR22 type number
Ball
Lever notch
Lever groove
Ring packing
Panel
Packing (A)
Nut
Packing
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
• When using a joy stick selector switch and buzzer
The applicable panel thickness is 1 to 6mm. Five 1.3mm
packings (single-piece type) are included as standard
equipment. Insert as many as required depending on the panel
thickness, using the following table as a guide. When using a
key washer, legend plate, or adapter, their thickness will have
to be added to the values in the guide.
Panel thickness (mm)
Number of packings
(plus key washer, legend plate)
(reference)
1.0 to 1.6
1.6 to 2.8
2.8 to 3.8
3.8 to 4.8
4.8 to 6.0
5
4
3
2
1

AR22 and DR22
Notes on use
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
04/52
1.6mm dia. max.
8mm
8mm max.
Width: 6.4mm max.
Flat plate width: 11.1mm max.
Example 1 Example 2
Transformer
R C R
C: Capacitor
R: Resistor
Example 3
Resistor unit
C R
C: Capacitor
R: Resistor
■ Minimum mounting space, mm
(1) Minimum mounting space
Illuminated pushbuttons,
Pushbutton Selectors
Pilot Light
42*1 30*4 *6
Notes: *1 AR22M0 , M5 , V5 , V0 , V2 , V7R, VG : 42mm
AR22M3R, M8R: 49mm
AR22Q2R, WR, W0R, WY, WCY: 40mm
*2 When mounting contact blocks at 30mm pitch, use it circuit of
380V or less.
*3 Short body with transformer types: 50mm.
*4 Rectangular types: 36.5mm (except for short body without
transformer types).
*5 Short body without transformer types: 60mm.
*6 Rectangular short body without transformer types: 60mm.
*7 This dimension applies when transformer units or contact blocks
face each other.
*8 This dimension applies when transformer unit or contact block is
mounted on only one side.
When mounting operators on a panel, orient all ▼ marks on the
operator upwards.
(The operator release arms are oriented upwards.) This aligns
the terminals of all contact blocks, thus making wiring easy.
(2) Detaching contact blocks from operators
As shown in Fig. 10, insert a flat-head screw driver into the
groove of the white release arm on the contact block. Then,
while inserting the driver in hole A of the operator base, lower
the driver grip and take out the contact block.
Note: Use a flat head screwdriver as shown
at the right.
6mm or less
30*2
50*7 42*1 *8
30
*3
*5
Release arm
Hole A on the
operator base
Pull-out
Operator Contact block
■ Products with blue and green LEDs
The LED devices on products with high-brightness (blue and
green) LEDs are very sensitive to static electricity. When
replacing LED lamps do not allow static electricity to come into
direct contact with the metal frame on the upper side of the LED
lamp. The LED device may be damaged if this part is subjected
to static electricity. When installing or removing an LED lamp, it
is recommended that you use the lamp changer (AHX790).
■ Wiring
(1) The terminal screws are M3.5 pan head screws. Solid wires,
stranded wires, or crimp terminals can be connected.
(2) Two crimp terminals can be used by putting one of them on
top of the other. If fork-type crimp terminals are used in the
horizontal direction, however, use ones as shown in the
figure below. (i.e., Toei Tanshi's F2-3.5S or an equivalent).
(3) The terminal washers are a self-lifting type.
(4) Tighten the terminal screws to a tightening torque of 0.8 to
1N•m.
(5) Keep the terminals free of external force while wiring or after
wiring, or operational failures may result.
(6) Do not use screws other than the provided terminal screws.
Notes:
• If solid wires are connected to the lamp terminals in the horizontal direction
(on the side), be sure to insert the solid wires into the square washers.
• Terminal layout., see page 04/54
• See page 04/53 for the wiring of the joy stick selector switch and VG type.
■ LED Indicator
(1) LED Lamp Malfunctioning
The LED lamp is lit by a very small level of current.
Therefore, it may be erroneously lit by a leaking current from the
surge absorption circuit or semiconductor circuit or due to stray
capacitance between cables. In that case, provide a
countermeasure (e.g., connect a resistor in parallel with the LED
lamp).
• Countermeasure for Malfunctioning
The LED lamp malfunctions can be prevented by connecting a
shunt resistor (R) or CR elements (a capacitor and resistor) in
parallel with the LED lamp terminal. The resistance and CR
values vary depending on the model and the operating
conditions.
Lamp
Shunt
resistor
X1 X2 X1 X2
• 24V DC
R: 10kΩ (0.5W)
• 24V AC
R: 2kΩ (2W)
• 100V AC
C: 0.33μF (250V AC)
R: 120Ω (0.25W)
• 220V AC
C: 0.1μF (250V AC)
R: 120Ω (0.25W)
X1 X2
• 110V DC
C: 4700pF (250V DC)
R: 100Ω (0.5W)
Metal frame
LED lamp
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Fig. 11
(2) Incoming surge
High luminance LED products use an element sensitive to static
electricity. They may not be lit by an abnormal voltage like
surge. Please note it.

04/53
Fig. 15 Fig. 16
7.5mm max.
04
AR22 and DR22
Notes on use
■ Joy stick selector switch
• Screw terminal wiring
(1) The terminals use M3.5 pan head screws. Use crimp
terminals to wire the terminals.
(2) The terminal washers are a self-lifting type.
(3) Tighten the terminal screws to a tightening torque of 0.8 to
1.0N•m. Keep the terminals free of external force during and
after wiring, or operational failures may result.
• Solder (tab terminal) wiring
(1) Pay attention to the following items when soldering the
terminals.
Use a soldering iron with a power consumption of 30W.
Use resin-core solder.
If a 30W soldering iron is used, finish soldering the terminals
within five seconds. If a 20W soldering iron is used, finish
soldering the terminals within 10 seconds. Make sure that
the soldering iron tip length is at least 20mm long. Do not
apply external force to the terminals. Because lead-free
solder's melting point is slightly high, soldering work may be
difficult. Use a soldering iron whose tip is rather large or
whose calorie is rather high.
(2) When using adjacent terminals, use insulation tubes to
prevent the terminals from short-circuiting. Utmost attention
must be paid to the solder terminals if especially thick wires
are used or if a large quantity of solder is used.
(3) Connectable wires
Solid wire: 2 wires, 0.8mm dia. max.
Stranded wire: 1 wire, 0.75mm2 max.
(4) Use the 110 (2.8mm) series receptacle for the tab terminals.
(5) Wire the tab terminals with the contact unit connected to the
main unit.
• Operation
Operation shall be made after the joy stick operation lever is
surely returned to the center position. Do not apply excessive
force to the operation lever. The maximum permissible force is
100N.
• Use of contact blocks
If NO and NC contacts are used in the same contact block,
check that there is no difference in potential. Do not connect
different type of power source different in type.
■ Buzzer
• Noise
If the application circuit is likely to generate excessively strong
noise, connect a surge absorber (e.g., FUJI's ENC390D,
provided that the switch is a 24V type) in parallel with the
buzzer.
• Place of Use
The buzzer does not have a drip-proof construction. Do not use
the buzzer in places where oil or water is sprayed or where dust
accumulates. If the buzzer is a splash-proof type, it will resist
sprays of water.
• Do not use the buzzer in places that are subject to an
excessive amount of corrosive gas.
• Note that the buzzer is likely to sound erroneously due to
leakage current or the like.
■ AR22VG type
• As shown in Fig. 16 (a), engage the tip of the wrench
(AHX8003) with the groove in the center to mount or remove
the locking unit. The recommended tightening torque is 0.6 to
1N•m.
• As shown in Fig. 16 (b), insert the lamp changer (AHX790) and
press the lamp changer to mount or remove the lamp. Turn the
lamp changer clockwise when mounting the lamp and
counterclockwise when removing it.
Central groove
(a)
Lamp
Mounting
Dismounting/(b)
Clamp wrench
(AHX8003)
Lamp changer
(AHX790)
Note: The lamp and neon lamp are special models for the AR22VGF. Use only
these special lamps for replacement.
• Wiring
The terminals use M3.5 pan head screws. Use crimp terminals
for wiring and cover the crimp terminals with insulation tubes.
7.5mm max.
Fork-type crimp terminal
Round-type crimp terminal
Fig. 17
• The terminal washers are a self-lifting type.
• Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.8 to 1N•m. Keep
the terminals free of external force during and after wiring, or
operational failures may result.
• Wiring precautions
(1) Use of round-type crimp terminal
• Remove the live section cover, and half-tighten to the point
parallel with the terminal rib white marks in the direction of the
arrows as shown in the illustration below.
• Mount the live section cover and tighten the terminals securely.
Terminal rib white marks
Fig. 18
As shown in the illustration below, mount the live section cover
so that the mounting legs of the cover engage with the concave
parts of the main unit.
Mounting legs
Concave
Fig. 19
(2) If fork-type crimp terminals are used, wiring will be possible
without removing the live section cover.

AR22 and DR22
Notes on use
NO contact (AR9B290)
Blue
Pilot light
(without transformer)
X1 X1
Pilot light
(short-body without transformer)
PUSH PUSH
Joy stick selector switch
(screw)
1NO or 1NC
04/54
X1 X2
Resistor unit (AR9T519-H)
Voltage stabilizing unit
(AR9T001-E)
Flicker unit (AR9T002)
Transformer (AR9T511)
(230V or more)
Transformer (AHX511)
(For buzzer)
Terminal No.X1, X2
Note: * The positive and negative terminals are
used for DC applications where the order
of polarity is required.
(solder/tab)
2NO + 2NC
3 4
■ Operation
• Do not use a hitting or bouncing action to operate the button,
or the switch may break. Always operate the switch by hand.
Do not pull mushroom head pushbuttons or alternate buttons
other than the Q2.
• Do not rotate the selector ring type while the button is pressed,
or the mechanism may break.
• The control type incorporates make-before-break contacts.
Prepare a protection circuit for the application.
• The dial of the selector switch rotates with a light force. Do not
apply force in excess of 1N•m. Please do not pull out or insert
the key forcibly.
• To release the lock of the push-lock type, rotate the button
clockwise as shown by the arrow. Do not pull the button, or the
latch may break and the lock may fail to work.
• Do not lock the emergency stop pushbutton switch and
emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch in use. Push
and lock the switch in case of an emergency only.
X1 X2
3 4
X1
(+) (-)
(+) (-)
X1 X2
2
2
1 2
Terminal No.3, 4
1 2
3 4 1 2
Lamp terminal (AR9B292)
Black
Terminal No.X1 (+), X2 (–)*
NC contact (AR9B291)
Red
Terminal No.1, 2
Lamp terminal (For buzzer)
(AHX291L) Brown
X1 X2
Transformer (AR9T511)
(220V or less)
X2
X1
X2 X2 X1
X2
Terminal No.X1 (–), X2 (+)*
X2
X1 X2
Pilot light
(short-body with transformer)
Terminal No.X1, X2
1-2 (NC)
or
3-4 (NO)
Terminal No. 1-2 or 3-4
1-2
(NC)
3-4
(NO)
1-2
(NC)
3-4
(NO)
(solder/tab)
1NO + 1NC
Terminal No. 1-2, 3-4
(screw)
1NO + 1NC
3-4 (NO)
1-2 (NC)
X1 X2
Terminal No.X1, X2
X2
X1
X1 X2
X2 X1
3 1 4
3 1 4 3 1 2 4
■ Terminal layout
Fig. 20

AF95-4 AF95-10 AF95-18
Selectors
AF95-6 AF95-12 AF95-13
04/55
AR30E0L AR30E0R DR30D0L
AR30G3L AR30M0R AR30PR
AR30V0L AR30V0R AR30V1R
transformer
Movable
contact
04
AR30 and DR30
General information
The full range of the contact blocks and
transformer units suitable for the AR22
and DR22 series may also be fitted to
the AR30 and DR30 series.
■ Features
Quick-replacement contact blocks
and transformer units
The snap-on construction makes
replacement and addition of contact
blocks and transformer units very simple
and straightforward.
Oil-and dust-proof operator module
construction
The protection level of the AR30/DR30
operator modules conforms to IEC
Standard IP65. The special seals
protect the operator modules and switch
mechanisms against oil, dust, and grime,
thus ensuring high performance in dusty
and moist environments.
Miniaturization
• Selector switches with 1NO+1NC:
41mm deep
space.
Metal nut
Safer model with metal nut is also
available
Wiring
spaces.
makes wiring easy.
1NO: Blue, 1NC: Red
Lamp terminal and
Safety
locked.
Protection
the operator.
improved.
■ Approvals
KKD06-348
KKD08-051
KKD06-052
approved type, see page 04/56 to 04/59.
41mm
Selector switch
Illuminated
pushbutton
switch with
transformer
Pilot light/
Standard
62.5mm*
34mm
* 230V and over:
66.5mm
Self-cleaning contacts
Every time the switch is operated, the
contact surfaces are wiped with a
Stationary
contact
Return
spring
S

Extended round head
Extended with
(24mm dia.)
KKD05-164 AF95-6 AF96-185
Extended round head AR30E0R, E5R
See page 04/73, 04/96
See page 04/73, 04/96
04/56
AR30G2L, G7L
arrow)
AR30V5L
AF95-4 AF99-328 S
KKD06-348
AR30G3L, G8L
Push-pull AR30Q7L
See page 04/73, 04/96
Giant head AR30B0R
See page 04/73, 04/97
S AF95-579
Giant head with guard AR30B1R
See page 04/73, 04/97
S AF95-582
See page 04/73, 04/97
See page 04/74, 04/97
AR30 and DR30
AR30E0L, E5L
S
AR30G4L, G9L
S
(24mm dia. with
openings)
S
(24mm dia.)
S
Flush round head AR30F0R, F5R
S
Flush round head
Symbol mark type
AF95-10
AR30FAR, FBR
Mushroom head
(40mm dia.)
AF98-194
AR30M0R, M5R
S
S
Extended round head
Symbol mark type
AR30EAR, EBR
Mushroom head
(29mm dia.)
AR30M4R
S
AF95-11
AF98-195
AF95-12
AF95-8
See page 04/73, 04/96
See page 04/73, 04/96
See page 04/73, 04/96
See page 04/73, 04/96
See page 04/73, 04/96
See page 04/73, 04/96
See page 04/73, 04/96
S : See page 04/289
S
S
Giant head with full
guard
AR30B2R
S AF95-580
(24mm dia.)
AR30G1R, G6R
S AF95-16
Extended with half
guard
AR30G0R, G5R
S AF95-9
Pin lock AR30GPR
AF96-240
See page 04/73, 04/96
Mushroom head with
full guard (40mm dia.)
AR30M3R, M8R
S AF95-17
Mushroom head with
full guard (35mm dia.
metal nut)
AR30GSR
S AF96-239
Giant head with full
guard
AR30B3R
S AF95-581
Note: AR30M8R: Not approved standard

04/57
Pushbutton with
selector ring (2-position)
AR30S1R, S2R,
S3R, S6R
See page 04/75, 04/97
S AF97-506
Push, turn-lock AR30N0R
Notes: Provided with the (Direct opening action)
04
AR30 and DR30
AR30V0R
with white arrow)
S
(40mm dia.)
AR30V2R
S
(65mm dia.with white
arrow)
AR30V1R Push-lock, pull-reset
(35mm dia.)
AR30Q2R
S KKD08-051
KKD06-353
KKD06-352 KKD06-347
AR30V0L
with white arrow)
S
(40mm dia.)
AR30V2L
S KKD06-348 KKD06-350
See page 04/76, 04/98
See page 04/76, 04/98
See page 04/76, 04/98 See page 04/76, 04/98
See page 04/77, 04/98 See page 04/77, 04/98
S : See page 04/289
arrow)
AR30V5R
S
Pushbutton with
emergency operating
cap
AR30FVR
AF95-583
KKD08-051 AF96-187
See page 04/74, 04/97
See page 04/74, 04/97 See page 04/74, 04/97
S

AR30 and DR30
Knob AR30PR, PCR
See page 04/78, 04/99
See page 04/87, 04/99
■ Pilot lights
Dome DR30D0L
See page 04/89, 04/100 See page 04/91, 04/102
See page 04/90, 04/101 See page 04/91, 04/102
04/58
Key (Long durability) AR30JAR
S KKD09-021
AF95-18 AF02-63 AF97-63
AF95-20 AF97-65
S AF95-13
Lever AR30WR, WCR
S AF95-14
Key AR30JR, JCR
S KKD09-023
Operator Type
Knob AR30PL
S AF95-5
S
S : See page 04/289
Dome with dimmer
control
DR30D1L Flush square
(40mm sq. transparent
lens)
DR30M4M *
S
Extended round DR30E3L
S
Flush square
(34mm sq. transparent
lens)
DR30F4M *
S
Faceted DR30K0L
S
Flush rectangular
(Transparent lens)
DR30F4N *
S AF95-19 AF97-64
Note: With resistor unit and resistor types: Not approved standard
* LED 12V AC type: Not approved standard
■ Lever type selector switches
Operator Type
Lever
AR30HR
(metal type)
KKD05-115
See page 04/85, 04/099

AF97-57
04/59
Ball type with lock AR30A1, A6
Electronic sound
(economy)
DR30B6
KK02-17
See page 04/93, 04/104
04
AR30 and DR30
Handle Type Handle Type Handle Type
Ball type AR30A0, A5
AF97-48
Rubber cap type AR30A2, A7
AF97-44
■ Buzzers
Electronic sound DR30B5* Magnetic sound DR30B0 Electronic sound
(IP54)
DR30B8 *
KKD08-058 AF96-378 AF96-245
Note: * 6V AC, 110V DC types: Not approved standard

04/60
AR30 and DR30
AR30 E0L – 10 E3R
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
AR30: 30mm-dia. illuminated pushbutton
➁ Operator
G4L: Extended with transparent full guard (24mm dia.)
G9L: Extended with transparent full guard (24mm dia. alternate)
G2L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia. with openings)
G7L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia. with openings, alternate)
G3L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia.)
G8L: Extended with full guard (24mm dia. alternate)
V5L: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with white arrow) *1
Q7L: Push-pull
V0L: Push-lock, turn-reset (Soft-touch 40mm dia. with white arrow)
V2L: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 50: 5NO
05: 5NC
➃ Lamp voltage
• LED lamp
➄ Color of lens
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red *2 A: Orange
W: White S: Blue
➅ Special product
ZM: Metal nut

04/61
04
AR30 and DR30
Pushbuttons
AR30 E0R – 10 R
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
AR30: 30mm-dia. pushbutton
30mm-dia. emergency stop pushbutton
➁ Operator
FAR: Flush round head (Symbol mark type)
FBR: Flush round head (Symbol mark type, alternate)
EAR:Extended round head (Symbol mark type)
EBR:Extended round head (Symbol mark type, alternate)
G6R:Extended with full guard (24mm dia. Alternate)
GPR:Pin lock
G0R:Extended with half guard
G5R:Extended with half guard (Alternate)
M8R:Mushroom head with full guard (40mm dia. Alternate)
GSR:Mushroom head with full guard (35mm dia. metal nut)
B0R: Giant head
B1R: Giant head with guard
B2R: Giant head with full guard
B3R: Giant head with full guard
S1R: Pushbutton with selector ring (2-position)
N0R: Push, turn-lock
V5R: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with white arrow) *1
FVR: Pushbutton with emergency operating cap
Q2R:Push-lock, pull-reset (35mm dia.)
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 44: 4NO+4NC
50: 5NO
05: 5NC
➃ Color of button
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red*2 A: Orange
B: Black S: Blue
W: White C: Clear
T: Green, Red, Black (For AR30F0R) (For AR30FAR, FBR,
EAR, EBR)
➄ Symbol mark (For AR30FAR, FBR, EAR, EBR)
Symbol mark I T I T
Code 01 02 03 04 11 12 02B 04B 12B
➅ Special product
ZM: Metal nut
*2Button color of emergency stop switches are Red only.

04/62
AR30 and DR30
AR30 PL – 2 10 E3 G
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈
AR30: 30mm dia. selector switch and illuminated selector switch
➁ Operator
• Selector switch
PR: Knob
WR: Lever
JR: Key
JAR: Key (Long durability)
HR: Lever (Metal type)
PL: Knob
➂ Operation
4: 4-position, maintained (For AR30PCR, WCR)
5: 5-position, maintained (For AR30PCR, WCR)
A: Left
B: Left and right
D: Right
E: Center
F: Right and center
G: Left and center
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 44: 4NO+4NC
50: 5NO
05: 5NC
Note: Control type: See page 04/82 to 04/84
➅ Lamp voltage
• LED lamp
➆ Color of knob
G: Green
R: Red
➇ Key type No.
A, B, C, D, E or F
➈ Special product
ZM: Metal nut

04/63
04
AR30 and DR30
Pilot lights
DR30 D0L – E3W
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄
DR30: 30mm dia. pilot light
➁ Lens
D0L: Dome
E3L: Extended round
K0L: Faceted
D1L: Dome with dimmer control
F4M: Flush square (34mm sq. transparent lens)
F4N: Flush rectangular (Transparent lens)
M4M: Flush square (40mm sq. transparent lens)
➂ Lamp voltage
FQ: 50V DC, with resistor*
HQ: 110V DC, with resistor*
MQ: 220V DC, with resistor*
• LED lamp
FR: 50V DC, with resistor*
HR: 110V DC, with resistor*
MR: 220V DC, with resistor*
• LED unit
(For DR30F4M, F4N, M4M type)
25: 12V AC, without transformer
HE: 110V DC, with resistor unit
Note: * DR30D0L, K0L type only
➃ Color of lens or color plate
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red A: Orange
W: White S: Blue
➄ Special product
ZM: Metal nut

04/64
AR30 and DR30
Buzzers
DR30B 5 – E B
➀ ➁ ➂➃
DR30B: 30mm-dia. buzzer
➁ Sound
5: Electronic sound
6: Electronic sound (economy)
0: Magnetic sound
8: Electronic sound (IP54)
➂ Operating voltage
A: 6V AC (Type “5”, “8”)
6: 6V DC (Type “5”, “8”)
E: 12-24V AC/DC (Type “6” : 24V DC)
F: 35-48V AC/DC (Type “5”, “8”)
G: 24V AC (Type “6”)
H: 100-110V AC
M: 200-220V AC
1: 100-110V DC (Type “5”, “8”)
➃ Color of head
B: Black
AR30A 0 N – A0A0 B
➀ ➁➂ ➃ ➄
AR30A: 30mm-dia. Joy stick selector switch
➁ Handle
0: Ball type (without lock, manual return)
1: Ball type with lock (manual return)
2: Rubber cap type (without lock, manual return)
5: Ball type (without lock, spring return)
6: Ball type with lock (spring return)
7: Rubber cap type (without lock, spring return)
➂ Terminal
N: Screw
H: Solder/tab
Contact arrangement Blank 1NO 1NC 1NO+1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO+2NC
Code Screw 0 A B 1 D E –
Solder/tab 0 – – 1 – – 2
Operating direction code of contacts
1
Locked position Ex. AR30A0N-A0A0B
2
3
4
1: Upper 2: Right
3: Lower 4: Left
1 2 3 4
➄ Handle color
B: Black
1. Type number
For the CCC approved product, add the suffix (CCC) to the
type number
Example: Pushbutton switch AR30F0R-11B(CCC)

04/65
UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
EN60947-5-5
File No. E44592
File No. LR20479
Pushbutton, Illuminated pushbutton: R9551062
Joy stick selector switch: R2050803
(Lever switch)
Buzzer: J9950091
: R50028146
04
AR30 and DR30
switch
Selector switch
Joy stick selector
(Lever switch)
Pilot light
Operating frequency
Dielectric strength
Pollution degree
Vibration
Shock
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity
600V AC/DC *1
See page 04/66
6kV
1000A
Fuse 15A
3
-20 to +70°C
-40 to +80°C
45 to 85% RH (within -5 to +40°C)
IP65 *7
250V AC/DC
250,000 operations
100,000 operations
at 220V AC 1A
(Res. load)
–
1000A
Fuse 1A
-5 to +70°C
250V AC/DC *2
–
–
–
6kV
–
–
Mechanical durability:
500m/s2
-20 to +50°C
Notes: *1 Illuminated type without transformer: 250V AC/DC
*2 Pilot light with transformer: 600V AC
*3 Illuminated type without transformer: 2000V AC, 1 minute
*4 Pilot light with transformer: 2500V AC, 1 minute
*5 Emergency stop type: 10 to 500Hz, double amplitude 0.7mm (acceleration 50m/s2), according to the test condition of EN60947-5-5 (1998)
*7 AR30Q7L and DR30D1L type: IP40

Emergency stop pusubutton switch With selector ring 100,000
Emergency stop illuminated pusubutton Push-lock, turn-reset 100,000
04/66
Push-lock, pull-reset 30,000
Maintained 5, 6, 7, 8-contact 500,000
AR30 and DR30
● Buzzers
Item DR30B5 DR30B6 DR30B0 DR30B8
Rated insulation voltage Without transformer: 60V AC/DC With transformer: 250V AC *1
Sound level 90dB (0.1m) 80dB (0.1m)
70dB (1m) 60dB (1.0m)
Durability 1000h 80h 1000h
Frequency 2.4 to 3.3kHz 1.9 to 2.5kHz 2.4 to 3.3kHz
Intermittent cycle Approx. 170-cycle/min – – Approx. 170-cycle/min
Current consumption See the table below
Dielectric strength Without transformer: 1000V AC 1 minute With transformer: 2000V AC 1 minute *2
Pollution degree 3
Constant: 16.7Hz, double amplitude 3.0mm
Shock Mechanical durability: 500m/s2
Ambient temperature –20 to +60°C (No condensation or no icing)
(with resistor unit: –20 to +40°C)
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (within –5 to 40°C)
Note: *1 DR30B0 (without transformer): 250V AC
*2 DR30B0 (without transformer): 2000V AC 1 minute
4-contact 500,000
3-contact 500,000
• Key type 10,000
• Key (Long durability) type 20,000
• Current consumption
Operational voltage
6V AC
6V DC
24V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
110V AC
110V DC
220V AC
Current consumption
DR30B5, DR30B8
70mA AC
35mA DC
–
–
40mA AC, 25mA DC
65mA AC, 20mA DC
30mA AC
30mA DC
15mA AC
DR30B6
–
25mA AC
45mA AC
30mA DC
30mA AC, 20mA DC
–
30mA AC
–
15mA AC
DR30B0
–
–
–
–
–
–
30mA AC
–
20mA AC

04/67
■ Contact ratings
• UL/CSA standards
AC (COS ø=0.35)
A600 60A 6.0A 30A 3.0A 15A 1.5A 12A 1.2A
DC T0.95= 6P (Max. 300ms)
Description Contact rated Making current · Breaking current
Pushbutton
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch
(Except the overlap contact types)
Pushbutton
(Ring type selector switch: AR30S1R, S6R only)
Pushbutton R300 0.22A 0.11A –
Selector switch (2-pos./overlap contact type, 3-, 4-, 5-pos. type)
Note: Joy stick selector switches (Lever switches): 250V AC, 5A (Res. load) 125V DC, 0.2A 24V DC, 1A (Res. load)
04
AR30 and DR30
code
• EN standard/TÜV approved
Description Rated operational current
125V 250V 301V–600V
Illuminated pushbutton switch 10A 24V 6.0A 4.0A
Pushbutton (Except the selector ring type) 120V 6.0A –
Emergency stop pushbutton switch 125V – 1.3A
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch 240V 6.0A –
Selector switch (2-position) 250V – 0.45A
600V 2.0A –
Pushbutton with selector ring 125V – 0.65A
240V 6.0A –
250V – 0.23A
480V 2.5A –
600V 2.0A –
Joy stick selector switch (Lever switch) 5A 24V – 0.7A
120V 0.3A –
125V – 0.15A
240V 0.3A –
Lamp rated voltage UL/CSA standards, TÜV approved
LED lamp Incandescent lamp
Full-voltage (without transformer) Max. 24V AC/DC Max. 30V AC/DC
With transformer Max. 550V AC (Short-body type: Max. 220V AC)

04/68
AR30 and DR30
Description Pushbutton
Ave. required
operating force
Operating travel
Required return
force
9N (Push-lock type: 20N)
Approx. 6mm
(Push-lock type:
–
(Push-lock type: 0.6N•m)
Push-lock type
Selector *2
Push-pull type Maintained Spring/manual return Spring return
30N *1
Approx. 9mm
(Operation angle:
Approx. 45°)
0.6N•m
0.15N•m
2-position:
Approx. 90°
3-position:
Approx. 45°
4-position:
Approx. 40°
5-position:
Approx. 30°
0.15N•m
0.13N•m
3-position:
Approx. 45°
0.13N•m
0.1N•m
2-position:
Approx. 60°
3-position:
Approx. 45°
–
45N
Approx. 9mm
30N (pull)
Notes: *1 AR30V2R type: 45N
*2 4-position, 5-position: 2NO+2NC
■ Lamp ratings
• Illuminated pushbuttons, illuminated selectors, pilot lights (round type)
Transformer
Without
transformer
With transformer
(Standard type:
AR9T511)
With resistor unit
(AR9T519-H)
Lamp voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
127V AC
220V AC
254V AC
380V AC
440V AC
480V AC
550V AC
110V DC
LED (lamp base: BA9S/13)
Type
–
APX510-6
APX510-D6
APX510-12
APX510-15
–
APX510-24
APX510-6
APX510-6
APX510-24
Rated voltage
–
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
–
24V AC/DC
6V AC
6V AC
24V AC/DC
Consumption
–
Yellow: 50mA AC
Yellow: 33mA DC
Green, red, orange, amber, blue: 14mA AC, 11mA DC
–
12mA AC, 11mA DC
1.5VA
2.5VA
1.2W
Incandescent (lamp base: BA9S/13)
Type
AHX135
–
–
–
AHX279
AHX144
AHX129
AHX135
AHX135
–
Rated voltage
6.3V AC/DC
–
–
–
18V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
30V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
–
Consumption
0.9W
–
–
–
0.8W
0.9W
0.8W
2VA
2VA
2VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
–
• Pilot lights with resistor
Lamp Voltage
50V DC
110V DC
220V DC
LED (lamp base: E12/15)
Type
APX507-24 *
Rated voltage
24V AC/DC
Consumption
0.8W
1.7W
3.3W
Rated voltage
18V AC/DC
Consumption
5W
10W
20W
Incandescent (lamp base: E12/15)
Type
AHX130
Notes: * White: APX509-24O

04/69
• Pilot lights (DR30F4M, F4N, M4M types)
04
AR30 and DR30
Transformer
Without
transformer
With
transformer
unit
(LED:
AR9T557)
(Incandes-cent:
AR9T511)
With resistor
unit
(AR9T519-H)
Type
–
DR9Q005-6
DR9Q005-2
DR9Q005-B
–
–
DR9Q005-E
DR9Q005-2
DR9Q005-E
Lamp voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V DC
12V AC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
127V AC
220V AC
254V AC
380V AC
440V AC
480V AC
550V AC
110V DC
Rated voltage
–
6V DC
12V AC
12V AC/DC
–
–
24V AC/DC
12V AC
24V AC/DC
Consumption
–
Green, red, amber: 20mA DC
White: 33mA DC
Yellow: 48mA DC
Red, amber: 18mA AC
Green: 10mA AC
White: 30mA AC
Yellow: 50mA AC
Red, amber: 22mA AC, 20mA DC
Green: 13mA AC, 10mA DC
White: 36mA AC, 30mA DC
–
–
Green, red, amber: 11mA AC, 10mA DC
White: 12mA AC, 11mA DC
3VA
1.4W
Type
AHX135
–
Rated voltage
6.3V AC/DC
–
–
–
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
30V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
–
Consumption
0.9W
–
–
–
0.8W
0.9W
0.8W
2VA
2VA
2VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
–
–
–
AHX279
AHX144
AHX129
AHX135
–
Notes: • Replace the mark by the lamp luminous color code, see page 04/70

Lamp
LED
Incandescent
Notes: •The operating voltage for incandescent lamps is set at 80 to 90%
Absolute brightness
04/70
90 100 110
AR30 and DR30
Approx. 30000h
Approx. 5000h (AC)
Judgement criterion
•The durability of LED lamp is a mean value in all colors.
1.0
0.5
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
Time✕103[h]
■ Combination of lens color and LED luminous color
[AC voltage100%]
100,000
50,000
20,000
10,000
5,000
2,000
1,000
500
200
70 80
Voltage [%]
100
50
Durability
Luminous
flux
Durability (h)
Luminous flux
[%]
Button color
(lens or color plate)
Color
Green
Red
White
Yellow
Orange
Blue
LED lamp
(high-brightness)
Luminous color
Green
Red
Orange
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Type
APX510-G
APX510-R
APX510-O
APX510-Y
APX510-A
APX510-S
Type *1
APX507-24G
APX507-24R
APX509-24O
APX507-24Y
APX507-24A
APX507-24S
Code
G
R
W
Y
A
S
Type *2
DR9Q005-G
DR9Q005-R
DR9Q005-W
DR9Q005-Y
DR9Q005-A
–
LED lamp
(high-brightness)
Luminous color
Green
Red
White
Yellow
Amber
–
Notes: *1 For pilot light with resistor
*2 For DR30 F4M, F4N, M4M type
• Replace the mark by the lamp voltage code, see page 04/68, 04/69

04/71
04
AR30
Type Type Type Type
Extended round head Without 1NO AR30E0L-10■3 AR30E5L-10■3 AR30E0L-10■4 AR30E5L-10■4
1NO+1NC AR30E0L-11■3 AR30E5L-11■3 AR30E0L-11■4 AR30E5L-11■4
2NO+2NC AR30E0L-22■3 — AR30E0L-22■4 —
With 1NO AR30E0L-10■3 AR30E5L-10■3 AR30E0L-10■4 AR30E5L-10■4
AF95-4 1NO+1NC AR30E0L-11■3 AR30E5L-11■3 AR30E0L-11■4 AR30E5L-11■4
Extended with transparent Without 1NO AR30G4L-10■3 AR30G9L-10■3 AR30G4L-10■4 AR30G9L-10■4
full guard (24mm dia.) 1NC AR30G4L-01■3 AR30G9L-01■3 AR30G4L-01■4 AR30G9L-01■4
2NO+2NC AR30G4L-22■3 — AR30G4L-22■4 —
KKD05-164 1NO+1NC AR30G4L-11■3 AR30G9L-11■3 AR30G4L-11■4 AR30G9L-11■4
(24mm dia. with openings) 1NC AR30G2L-01■3 AR30G7L-01■3 AR30G2L-01■4 AR30G7L-01■4
2NO+2NC AR30G2L-22■3 — AR30G2L-22■4 —
(24mm dia.) 1NC AR30G3L-01■3 AR30G8L-01■3 AR30G3L-01■4 AR30G8L-01■4
2NO+2NC AR30G3L-22■3 — AR30G3L-22■4 —
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NO — AR30V5L-10■3 — AR30V5L-10■4
(40mm dia. with white 1NC — AR30V5L-01■3 — AR30V5L-01■4
arrow) 1NO+1NC — AR30V5L-11■3 — AR30V5L-11■4
3NC — AR30V5L-03■3 — AR30V5L-03■4
With 1NO — AR30V5L-10■3 — AR30V5L-10■4
1NC — AR30V5L-01■3 — AR30V5L-01■4
KKD06-348 1NO+1NC — AR30V5L-11■3 — AR30V5L-11■4
Push-pull Without 1NO+1NC AR30Q7L-11■3 — AR30Q7L-11■4 —
(35mm dia.)
With 1NO+1NC AR30Q7L-11■3 — AR30Q7L-11■4 —
AF96-185

Note: AR30V5L type: Red, yellow only
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30
Contact 3NC 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC 5NO 5NC
arrangement
Code 03 22 40 04 50 05
04/72
(2) (1)
AR30
• Lens color
Code G R W S Y A
• Voltage
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
6V AC A —
5.5V AC/DC — 5
12V AC/DC B —
15V AC/DC C C
20V AC/DC — D
24V AC/DC E E
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W
• Contact operation (AR30Q7L)
Contact block Button position
No. Type Pull Free
NC
NC
Contact closed
Push
(1)
(2)
AR30Q7L (without transformer)
(1)
(2)
Lamp terminal
Transformer
Operator
Name plate side
Operator
Name plate side
AR30Q7L (with transformer)
Note: AR30Q7L type: 1NO + 1NC only

04/73
04
Pushbuttons
AR30
action action
Type Type
Flush round head 1NO AR30F0R-10 AR30F5R-10
1NO+1NC AR30F0R-11 AR30F5R-11
2NO AR30F0R-20 AR30F5R-20
AF95-11 2NO+2NC AR30F0R-22 AR30F5R-22
Extended round head 1NO AR30E0R-10 AR30E5R-10
1NO+1NC AR30E0R-11 AR30E5R-11
2NO AR30E0R-20 AR30E5R-20
AF95-10 2NO+2NC AR30E0R-22 AR30E5R-22
Flush round head 1NO AR30FAR-10C■ AR30FBR-10C■
symbol 1NC AR30FAR-01C■ AR30FBR-01C■
mark 1NO+1NC AR30FAR-11C■ AR30FBR-11C■
type 2NO AR30FAR-20C■ AR30FBR-20C■
2NC AR30FAR-02C■ AR30FBR-02C■
AF98-195 2NO+2NC AR30FAR-22C■ AR30FBR-22C■
Extended round head 1NO AR30EAR-10C■ AR30EBR-10C■
symbol 1NC AR30EAR-01C■ AR30EBR-01C■
mark 1NO+1NC AR30EAR-11C■ AR30EBR-11C■
type 2NO AR30EAR-20C■ AR30EBR-20C■
2NC AR30EAR-02C■ AR30EBR-02C■
AF98-194 2NO+2NC AR30EAR-22C■ AR30EBR-22C■
AF95-12 2NO+2NC AR30M0R-22 AR30M5R-22
Mushroom head 1NO AR30M4R-10 —
(29mm dia.) 1NC AR30M4R-01 —
1NO+1NC AR30M4R-11 —
2NO AR30M4R-20 —
2NC AR30M4R-02 —
AF95-8 2NO+2NC AR30M4R-22 —
Extended with full 1NO AR30G1R-10 AR30G6R-10
guard (24mm dia.) 1NC AR30G1R-01 AR30G6R-01
AF95-16 2NO+2NC AR30G1R-22 AR30G8R-22
action action
Type Type
Extended with half 1NO AR30G0R-10 AR30G5R-10
guard 1NC AR30G0R-01 AR30G5R-01
AF95-9 2NO+2NC AR30G0R-22 AR30G5R-22
Pin lock 1NO AR30GPR-10 —
1NC AR30GPR-01 —
1NO+1NC AR30GPR-11 —
2NO AR30GPR-20 —
2NC AR30GPR-02 —
AF96-240 2NO+2NC AR30GPR-22 —
Mushroom head with 1NO AR30M3R-10 AR30M8R-10
full guard (40mm dia.) 1NC AR30M3R-01 AR30M8R-01
AF95-17 2NO+2NC AR30M3R-22 AR30M8R-22
Mushroom head with 1NO AR30GSR-10 —
full guard (35mm dia. 1NC AR30GSR-01 —
metal nut) 1NO+1NC AR30GSR-11 —
2NO AR30GSR-20 —
2NC AR30GSR-02 —
AF96-239 2NO+2NC AR30GSR-22 —
Giant head 1NO AR30B0R-10 —
1NC AR30B0R-01 —
1NO+1NC AR30B0R-11 —
2NO AR30B0R-20 —
2NC AR30B0R-02 —
AF95-579 2NO+2NC AR30B0R-22 —
Giant head with guard 1NO AR30B1R-10 —
1NC AR30B1R-01 —
2NO AR30B1R-20 —
2NC AR30B1R-02 —
AF95-582 2NO+2NC AR30B1R-22 —
Giant head with full 1NO AR30B2R-10 —
guard 1NC AR30B2R-01 —
2NO AR30B2R-20 —
2NC AR30B2R-02 —
AF95-580 2NO+2NC AR30B2R-22 —

Giant head with full 1NO AR30B3R-10 —
guard 1NC AR30B3R-01 —
Push, turn-lock 1NO AR30N0R-10 —
04/74
action action
Type Type
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NO — AR30V5R-10
(40mm dia. with white 1NC — AR30V5R-01
arrow) 1NO+1NC — AR30V5R-11
2NO — AR30V5R-20
2NC — AR30V5R-02
KKD08-051 2NO+2NC — AR30V5R-22
Pushbutton with 1NO AR30FVR-10 —
emergency operating 1NC AR30FVR-01 —
cap 1NO+1NC AR30FVR-11 —
2NO AR30FVR-20 —
2NC AR30FVR-02 —
AF96-187 2NO+2NC AR30FVR-22 —
• Symbol mark (For AR30FAR, FBR, EAR, EBR)
Replace the ■ mark by the symbol mark code
action action
Type Type
2NO AR30B3R-20 —
2NC AR30B3R-02 —
AF95-581 2NO+2NC AR30B3R-22 —
1NC AR30N0R-01 —
1NO+1NC AR30N0R-11 —
2NO AR30N0R-20 —
2NC AR30N0R-02 —
AF95-583 2NO+2NC AR30N0R-22 —
• Button color
Code G R W S Y A B
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30 03
Contact 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC 5NO 5NC 3NO+3NC 4NO+4NC
arrangement
Code 22 40 04 50 05 33 44
Symbol mark I T I T
Code 01 02 03 04 11 12 02B 04B 12B
Pushbuttons
AR30
Note: AR30V5R type: Red, yellow, black only

04/75
AF97-506
(The following
contact is only
available.)
04
Pushbuttons
AR30
Operator Contact Button Type Contact operation
color
Mounting Type Free Depressed Free Depressed
position
Pushbutton with 2NO+2NC Green AR30S1R-22G (1) NC — — ● —
selector ring Red AR30S1R-22R
(2-position) Black AR30S1R-22B (2) NC — — ● —
White AR30S1R-22W
Yellow AR30S1R-22Y (3) NO — ● — ●
Orange AR30S1R-22A
Blue AR30S1R-22S (4) NO — ● — ●
2NO Green AR30S2R-20G (1) NO — ● — —
Red AR30S2R-20R
Black AR30S2R-20B (2) NO — — — ●
White AR30S2R-20W
Yellow AR30S2R-20Y
Orange AR30S2R-20A
Blue AR30S2R-20S
2NO+2NC Green AR30S2R-22G (1) NC ● —
Red AR30S2R-22R
Black AR30S2R-22B (2) NC ● —
White AR30S2R-22W
Yellow AR30S2R-22Y (3) NO — ● — —
Orange AR30S2R-22A
Blue AR30S2R-22S (4) NO — — — ●
2NO+2NC Green AR30S3R-22G (1) NC — —
Red AR30S3R-22R
Black AR30S3R-22B (2) NC — —
White AR30S3R-22W
Yellow AR30S3R-22Y (3) NO — ● — —
Orange AR30S3R-22A
Blue AR30S3R-22S (4) NO — — — ●
2NO+2NC Green AR30S6R-22G (1) NC ● — —
Red AR30S6R-22R
Black AR30S6R-22B (2) NC ● — —
White AR30S6R-22W Locked
Yellow AR30S6R-22Y (3) NO — ● ●
Orange AR30S6R-22A
Blue AR30S6R-22S (4) NO — ● ●
● Contact closed
— Contact open
Note: (1) to (4): Contact block mounting position
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Name plate side
Operator

Emergency Stop Pushbuttons
AR30
04/76
40mm dia. with 2NC AR30V0R-02R
2NO+2NC AR30V0R-22R
2NC AR30V2R-02R
3NC AR30V2R-03R
2NO+2NC AR30V2R-22R
65mm dia. with 2NC AR30V1R-02R
2NO+2NC AR30V1R-22R
Push-lock, pull-reset 1NC AR30Q2R-01R
(35mm dia.) 1NO+1NC AR30Q2R-11R
2NC AR30Q2R-02R
KKD06-347
Notes: • Button color: Red only

Emergency Stop Illuminated Pushbuttons
04/77
04
Operator Transformer Contact LED lamp Incandescent lamp
Type Type
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR30V0L-01■3R AR30V0L-01■4R
(Soft-touch 40mm dia. 1NO+1NC AR30V0L-11■3R AR30V0L-11■4R
with white arrow) 2NC AR30V0L-02■3R AR30V0L-02■4R
3NC AR30V0L-03■3R AR30V0L-03■4R
With 1NC AR30V0L-01■3R AR30V0L-01■4R
1NO+1NC AR30V0L-11■3R AR30V0L-11■4R
KKD06-348 2NC AR30V0L-02■3R AR30V0L-02■4R
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AR30V2L-01■3R AR30V2L-01■4R
(40mm dia.) 1NO+1NC AR30V2L-11■3R AR30V2L-11■4R
2NC AR30V2L-02■3R AR30V2L-02■4R
3NC AR30V2L-03■3R AR30V2L-03■4R
With 1NC AR30V2L-01■3R AR30V2L-01■4R
1NO+1NC AR30V2L-11■3R AR30V2L-11■4R
KKD06-350 2NC AR30V2L-02■3R AR30V2L-02■4R
AR30
• Voltage
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
Without 6V DC 6 —
6V AC A —
5V AC/DC — 5
12V AC/DC B —
15V AC/DC C C
20V AC/DC — D
24V AC/DC E E
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W

04/78
Operator
Upper contact
Name plate side
● Contact closed
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Lower contact
Selector Switches
AR30
2-position
key removable Switch with
position round bezel Contact Operator position
arrangement
Left Right
Knob Maintained Color code: 1NO AR30PR-210B 1NO (1) Upper contact
B: Black 1NC AR30PR-201B
(Standard) 1NO+1NC AR30PR-211B ➂ ● ➃
Color other than 2NO AR30PR-220B
above are 2NC AR30PR-202B
each 90° available 2NO+2NC AR30PR-222B
G: Green 1NC (1) Upper contact
Spring return R: Red 1NO AR30PR-010B
1NC AR30PR-001B ➀ ● ➁
1NO+1NC AR30PR-011B
2NO AR30PR-020B
2NC AR30PR-002B
AF95-13 60° 2NO+2NC AR30PR-022B 1NO+1NC Upper contact
Lever Maintained 1NO AR30WR-210B ➂ ● ➃
1NC AR30WR-201B
1NO+1NC AR30WR-211B
2NO AR30WR-220B Lower contact
2NC AR30WR-202B
each 90° 2NO+2NC AR30WR-222B ➀ ● ➁
Spring return 1NO AR30WR-010B
1NC AR30WR-001B 2NO+2NC Upper contact
1NO+1NC AR30WR-011B
2NO AR30WR-020B ➂ ● ➃
2NC AR30WR-002B
AF95-14 60° 2NO+2NC AR30WR-022B
➂
●
➃
Key Maintained ■: Key 1NO AR30JR-2■10( )
removable 1NC AR30JR-2■01( )
position 1NO+1NC AR30JR-2■11( ) Lower contact
( ): Key type 2NO AR30JR-2■20( )
2NC AR30JR-2■02( ) ➀ ● ➁
each 90° See page 04/80 2NO+2NC AR30JR-2■22( )
Spring return 1NO AR30JR-0A10( ) ➀ ● ➁
1NC AR30JR-0A01( )
1NO+1NC AR30JR-0A11( )
2NO AR30JR-0A20( )
2NC AR30JR-0A02( )
KKD09-023 60° 2NO+2NC AR30JR-0A22( )
(1)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
• Contact arrangements: See page 04/80
• Operator

Selector Switches
AR30
04/79
each 45°
each 45°
04
3-position
Switch with
round bezel Contact Operation position
arrange-ment
L C R L C R
Knob Maintained 1NO+1NC AR30PR-311B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
2NO AR30PR-320B ➂ ➀
2NC AR30PR-302B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR30PR-322B ➃ ➁
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR30PR-611B
return 2NO AR30PR-620B
2NC AR30PR-602B
2NO+2NC AR30PR-622B
(1) (2)
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR30PR-711B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AR30PR-720B ➂ ➀
2NC AR30PR-702B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR30PR-722B ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AR30PR-122B 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
(3) (4)
Lever Maintained 1NO+1NC AR30WR-311B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
2NO AR30WR-320B ➂ ➀
2NC AR30WR-302B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR30WR-322B ➃ ➁
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR30WR-611B
return 2NO AR30WR-620B
2NC AR30WR-602B
2NO+2NC AR30WR-622B
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR30WR-711B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AR30WR-720B ➂ ➀
2NC AR30WR-702B ● ●
2NO+2NC AR30WR-722B ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AR30WR-122B 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
AF95-13
AF95-14
Note: • Contact arrangements: See page 04/80 ● Contact closed

04/80
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
● Contact closed
Selector Switches
AR30
position Switch with
round bezel Contact Operator position
arrange-ment
L C R L C R
Key Maintained ■: Key 1NO+1NC AR30JR-3■11( ) 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
removable 2NO AR30JR-3■20( ) ➂ ➀
position 2NC AR30JR-3■02( ) ● ●
( ): Key type 2NO+2NC AR30JR-3■22( ) ➃ ➁
each 45°
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR30JR-6■11( )
return 2NO AR30JR-6■20( )
2NC AR30JR-6■02( )
2NO+2NC AR30JR-6■22( )
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AR30JR-7■11( ) 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AR30JR-7■20( ) ➂ ➀
2NC AR30JR-7■02( ) ● ●
2NO+2NC AR30JR-7■22( ) ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AR30JR-1E22( ) 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
Notes: • Operator position L: Left, C: Center, R: Right
Code A B C D E F G
Removable
position
AR30JR-2 ● ● – ● – – –
AR30JR-0 ● – – – – – –
AR30JR-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AR30JR-6 – – – ● ● ● –
AR30JR-7 ● – – – ● – ●
AR30JR-1 – – – – ● – –
• Key code No.
A, B, C, D, E and F
(3) (4)
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
KKD09-023
• Operator
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30 03
arrangement
Code 22 40 04 50 05 33 44
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator
Upper contact
Lower contact

04/81
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
04
3-position
key removable arrangement Switch with
position round bezel
Knob Maintained Replace the ■ AR30PCR-3■B
mark by the contact
arrangement code
Spring/manual (shown on next page). AR30PCR-6■B
return
Spring/manual AR30PCR-7■B
return
Spring return AR30PCR-1■B
Lever Maintained Replace the ■ AR30WCR-3■B
mark by the contact
arrangement code
Spring/manual (shown on next page). AR30WCR-6■B
return
Spring/manual AR30WCR-7■B
return
Spring return AR30WCR-1■B
Key Maintained Replace the Replace the ■ AR30JCR-3 ■( )
Spring/manual position code: (shown on next page). AR30JCR-6 ■( )
F or G
Spring/manual AR30JCR-7 ■( )
return
Spring return AR30JCR-1E■( )
Code A B C D E F G
Removable
position
AR30JCR-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AR30JCR-6 – – – ● ● ● –
AR30JCR-7 ● – – – ● – ●
AR30JCR-1 – – – – ● – –
• Key code No.
A, B, C, D, E and F
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°45°
45°
45°
AF95-475
KK02-140A
KKD09-022
Selector Switches
AR30

04/82
Selector Switches
AR30
code
position
2NO+2NC 064 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ● ●
1NO+1NC 07F (1) NC
(2) NO ●
– – – – –
– – – – –
2NO+2NC 07C* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 084 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 094* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 104 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ● ●
2NO+2NC 11C* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
code
position
2NC 01F (1) NC
(2) NC
– – – – –
– – – – –
2NO+2NC 014 (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
4NC 01J (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NC
(4) NC
2NO+2NC 024 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ● ●
2NO+2NC 03C* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
(Maintained
only)
2NO+2NC 044* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 054 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
notches.
(Maintained
only)
(Maintained
only)
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator

04/83
04
code
position
2NO+2NC 124* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 134* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
3NO+1NC 14D* (1) NO ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
3NO+1NC 15A* (1) NO ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 164 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 174* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 184 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
notches.
code
position
2NO+2NC 194 (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
4NO 20B (1) NO ●
(2) NO ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
(Maintained
only)
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator
Selector Switches
AR30

04/84
Selector Switches
AR30
4, 5-position
arrangement Switch with
round bezel
Knob 2NO+2NC 4-position Replace the ■ AR30PCR-4■B
arrangement code
(shown below)
5-position AR30PCR-5■B
maintained
Lever 2NO+2NC 4-position AR30WCR-4■B
maintained
5-position AR30WCR-5■B
maintained
code
Mounting Type
position 1 2 3 4 5
(1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
(1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
Operator position
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
(The following
contact is only
available.)
(Main-tained
only)
(Main-tained
only)
40° 30°
AF95-475
KK02-140A
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator

04/85
■ Lever type selector switches
04
2-position
Operator Operation Contact Type Contact operation
Contact Operator position
arrangement
Left Right
Lever (metal type) Maintained 1NO AR30HR-210 1NO (1) Upper contact
➂ ➃
each 90° 1NC AR30HR-201 1NC (1) Upper contact
➀ ➁
1NO+1NC AR30HR-211 1NO (1) Upper contact
➂ ➃
1NC (2) Lower contact
➀ ➁
2NO AR30HR-220 1NO (1) Upper contact
➂ ➃
1NO (2) Lower contact
➂ ➃
2NC AR30HR-202 1NC (1) Upper contact
➀ ➁
➀ ➁
1NO (3)
➂ ➃
➂ ➃
1NC (4)
Notes: • Contact arrangements in the table can be supplied.
➀ ➁
➀ ➁
● Contact closed
KKD05-115
Selector Switches
AR30
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator
Upper contact
Lower contact
Name plate side

AR30
04/86
➂ ➃
➀ ➁
➂ ➃
➂ ➃
➀ ➁
➀ ➁
➁
➂ ➃
➀ ➁
➂ ➃
3-position
Operator Operation Contact Type Contact operation
Contact Operator position
arrangement
Left Center Right
Lever (metal type) Maintained 1NO+1NC AR30HR-311 1NO (1) Upper contact
each 45° 1NC (2) Lower contact
1NO (3)
1NC (4)
Spring 2NO+2NC AR30HR-122 1NC (1) Upper contact
return
each 60° 1NO (3)
1NO (4)
Notes: • Contact arrangements in the table can be supplied.
• Contact arrangements. The NO contacts at (1) and (2) use special parts. Do not interchange these parts.
● Contact closed
➀
KKD05-114
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator
Upper contact
Lower contact
Name plate side

04/87
04
AR30
2-position
Knob Maintained 1NO Without AR30PL-210■3 Without AR30PL-210■4
1NC AR30PL-201■3 AR30PL-201■4
1NO+1NC AR30PL-211■3 AR30PL-211■4
2NO+2NC AR30PL-222■3 AR30PL-222■4
each 90° 1NC AR30PL-201■3 AR30PL-201■4
1NO+1NC AR30PL-211■3 AR30PL-211■4
2NO AR30PL-220■3 AR30PL-220■4
Spring return 1NO Without AR30PL-010■3 Without AR30PL-010■4
1NC AR30PL-001■3 AR30PL-001■4
1NO+1NC AR30PL-011■3 AR30PL-011■4
2NO AR30PL-020■3 AR30PL-020■4
60° 1NC AR30PL-001■3 AR30PL-001■4
1NO+1NC AR30PL-011■3 AR30PL-011■4
2NO AR30PL-020■3 AR30PL-020■4
AF95-5
3-position
Knob Maintained 1NO+1NC Without AR30PL-311■3 Without AR30PL-311■4
2NO+2NC AR30PL-322■3 AR30PL-322■4
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC Without AR30PL-611■3 Without AR30PL-611■4
return 1NO+1NC With AR30PL-611■3 With AR30PL-611■4
1NO+1NC Without AR30PL-711■3 Without AR30PL-711■4
each 45°
each 45°
AF95-5
Note: , See page 04/88

04/88
AR30
LED Incandescent
6V DC 6 –
6V AC A –
12V AC/DC B –
15V AC/DC C C
20V AC/DC – D
24V AC/DC E E
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W
Code G R W S Y A
2-position
arrangement
position
(2) NC ● –
(2) NO – ●
(2) NO – ●
*1 (2) NC ● –
(3) NO – ●
(4) NC ● –
*1 (2) NC ● –
(3) NO – ●
(4) NO – ●
Notes: *1 : AR30PL-2
Without transformer
3-position
arrangement
position
*1 (2) NC – – ●
1NO+1NC (1) NO – – ●
*2 (2) NC ● – –
2NO+2NC (1) NO ● – –
*3 (2) NC – – ●
(3) NO ● – –
(4) NC – – ●
*1 (2) NO ● – –
1NO+1NC (1) NC ● – –
*2 (2) NO – – ●
2NO+2NC (1) NC – – ●
*3 (2) NC – – ●
(3) NO ● – –
(4) NO ● – –
Notes: *1 : AR30PL-3, 6 *3 : AR30PL-3
*2 : AR30PL-7
With transformer
Lamp terminal
Name plate side
(3) (1)
(4) (2)
Transformer
Name plate side
(4) (3) (2) (1)

Pilot Lights
04/89
04
Dome Without 6V AC DR30D0L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR30D0L-54
6V DC DR30D0L-63 — —
With 100–110V AC DR30D0L-H3 100–110V AC DR30D0L-H4
Dome With resistor 50V DC DR30D0L-FR 50V DC DR30D0L-FQ
110V DC DR30D0L-HR — —
220V DC DR30D0L-MR — —
Dome With resistor — — 110V DC DR30D0L-HQ
— — 220V DC DR30D0L-MQ
Extended round Without 6V AC DR30E3L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR30E3L-54
6V DC DR30E3L-63 — —
With 100–110V AC DR30E3L-H3 100–110V AC DR30E3L-H4
Faceted Without 6V AC DR30K0L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR30K0L-54
6V DC DR30K0L-63 — —
With 100–110V AC DR30K0L-H3 100–110V AC DR30K0L-H4
Faceted With resistor 50V DC DR30K0L-FR 50V DC DR30K0L-FQ
110V DC DR30K0L-HR — —
220V DC DR30K0L-MR — —
Faceted With resistor — — 110V DC DR30K0L-HQ
— — 220V DC DR30K0L-MQ
Dome with dimmer control Without 6V AC DR30D1L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DR30D1L-54
6V DC DR30D1L-63 — —
12V AC/DC DR30D1L-B3 — —
15V AC/DC DR30D1L-C3 15V AC/DC DR30D1L-C4
With 100V–110V AC DR30D1L-H3 100V–110V AC DR30D1L-H4
200V–220V AC DR30D1L-M3 200V–220V AC DR30D1L-M4
DR30
AF95-18
AF97-674
AF97-672
AF95-20
AF95-19
AF97-673
AF97-671
KK02-144A

• Lens color
04/90
Pilot Lights
DR30
Dome 100–110V AC DR30D0L-H9 100–110V AC DR30D0L-H8
Extended round 100–110V AC DR30E3L-H9 100–110V AC DR30E3L-H8
Faceted 100–110V AC DR30K0L-H9 100–110V AC DR30K0L-H8
KK02-141A
KK02-142A
KK02-143A
Color
Code
Green
G
Red
R
White
W
Blue
S
Yellow
Y
Orange
A
• Lamp voltage
Description
Without transformer
With transformer
With resistor unit
With resistor
Voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
110V DC
50V DC
110V DC
220V DC
Code
Standard type
LED
–
A3
63
B3
C3
–
E3
H3
L3
M3
Q3
S3
T3
V3
W3
H7
FR
HR
MR
Incandescent
54
–
–
–
C4
D4
E4
H4
L4
M4
Q4
S4
T4
V4
W4
–
FQ
HQ
MQ
Code
Short-body type
LED
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
H9
L9
M9
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Incandescent
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
H8
L8
M8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

04/91
• Color plate
Color
Green
Red
Code
G
R
Note: * Incandescent lamp only
White
W
04
Pilot Lights
DR30
Lens Transformer LED unit Incandescent lamp
Flush square (34mm sq. Without 6V DC DR30F4M-65 5.5V AC/DC DR30F4M-54
transparent 15V AC/DC DR30F4M-C5 15V AC/DC DR30F4M-C4
lens) 24V AC/DC DR30F4M-E5 24V AC/DC DR30F4M-E4
Flush rectangular Without 6V DC DR30F4N-65 5.5V AC/DC DR30F4N-54
(Transparent 15V AC/DC DR30F4N-C5 15V AC/DC DR30F4N-C4
lens) 24V AC/DC DR30F4N-E5 24V AC/DC DR30F4N-E4
With 100–110V AC DR30F4N-H5 100–110V AC DR30F4N-H4
200–220V AC DR30F4N-M5 200–220V AC DR30F4N-M4
Flush square (40mm sq. Without 6V DC DR30M4M-65 5.5V AC/DC DR30M4M-54
transparent 15V AC/DC DR30M4M-C5 15V AC/DC DR30M4M-C4
lens) 24V AC/DC DR30M4M-E5 24V AC/DC DR30M4M-E4
With 100–110V AC DR30M4M-H5 100–110V AC DR30M4M-H4
200–220V AC DR30M4M-M5 200–220V AC DR30M4M-M4
AF97-65
AF97-61
AF97-63
Replace the mark by the following color plate color code
• Lamp voltage
Blue*
S
Yellow
Y
Orange
A
Description
Without transformer
With transformer
With resistor unit
Voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
110V DC
Code
Standard type
LED
–
A5
65
25
B5
C5
–
E5
H5
L5
M5
Q5
S5
T5
V5
W5
HE
Incandescent
54
–
–
–
–
C4
D4
E4
H4
L4
M4
Q4
S4
T4
V4
W4
–

Joy Stick Selector Switches
AR30
04/92
Handle Terminal Operating directions Contact Type
arrangement Manual return Spring return
Ball type without lock Screw 1NO ✕ 2 AR30A0N-A0A0B AR30A5N-A0A0B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 2 AR30A0N-1010B AR30A5N-1010B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR30A0N-1111B AR30A5N-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 2 AR30A0H-2020B AR30A5H-2020B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR30A0H-1111B AR30A5H-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 4 AR30A0H-2222B AR30A5H-2222B
AF97-48
Ball type with lock Screw 1NO ✕ 2 AR30A1N-A0A0B AR30A6N-A0A0B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 2 AR30A1N-1010B AR30A6N-1010B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR30A1N-1111B AR30A6N-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 2 AR30A1H-2020B AR30A6H-2020B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR30A1H-1111B AR30A6H-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 4 AR30A1H-2222B AR30A6H-2222B
AF97-44
Rubber cap type Screw 1NO ✕ 2 AR30A2N-A0A0B AR30A7N-A0A0B
without lock
1NO + 1NC ✕ 2 AR30A2N-1010B AR30A7N-1010B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR30A2N-1111B AR30A7N-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 2 AR30A2H-2020B AR30A7H-2020B
1NO + 1NC ✕ 4 AR30A2H-1111B AR30A7H-1111B
2NO + 2NC ✕ 4 AR30A2H-2222B AR30A7H-2222B
AF97-57
• Operating direction
• Directions other than those shown in the table
above can be provided.
• For types AR30AN- 1 2 3 4 B, designate the
contact arrangement codes for the necessary
operating directions ( 1 : Upper, 2 : Right,
3 : Lower, 4 : Left). Designate 0 for unnecessary
directions.
• Contact arrangement
Contact arrangement
Manual return
Spring return
Screw
Solder/Tab
– 1NO 1NC 1NO+1NC 2NO 2NC 2NO+2NC
A
–
0
0
B
–
1
1
D
–
E
–
–
2
1 Upper
4 Left 2 Right
3 Lower
• Spring/manual return are also available, contact FUJI .

04/93
70dB (1m)
70dB (1m)
KK02-145A
04
■ Buzzers
Buzzers
DR30
Sound Description
Electronic sound
Electronic sound
(economy)
Magnetic sound
Transformer
Without
With
With resistor unit
Without
With
Without
Without
With
With resistor unit
Operating voltage
6V AC
6V DC
12 to 24V AC/DC
35 to 48V AC/DC
100 to 110V AC
200 to 220V AC
100 to 110V DC
6V DC
24V AC
24V DC
100 to 110V AC
200 to 220V AC
100 to 110V AC
200 to 220V AC
6V AC
6V DC
12 to 24V AC/DC
35 to 48V AC/DC
100 to 110V AC
200 to 220V AC
100 to 110V DC
Type
DR30B5-AB
DR30B5-6B
DR30B5-EB
DR30B5-FB
DR30B5-HB
DR30B5-MB
DR30B5-1B
DR30B6-6B
DR30B6-GB
DR30B6-EB
DR30B6-HB
DR30B6-MB
DR30B0-HB
DR30B0-MB
DR30B8-AB
DR30B8-6B
DR30B8-EB
DR30B8-FB
DR30B8-HB
DR30B8-MB
DR30B8-1B
• Intermittent/continuous sound selection (DR30B5, B8)
See the Short-circuit terminal in the dimensions diagram on the 04/104.
page, and select as follows:
• Short-circuit terminal mounted Intermittent sound
• Short-circuit terminal not mounted Continuous sound
Notes:
• LED operation indicator (Red)
selection
70dB (1m)
selection
60dB (1m)
KKD08-058
AF96-378
AF96-245

Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
04/94
AR30E0L, E5L AR30E0L, E5L
ø24
101.5
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5 17
1
Terminal cover
37
44
Lamp
terminal
1
101.5
AR30G4L, G9L AR30G2L, G7L
Nut
Lamp
terminal
Terminal cover
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Extended
30
ø35
ø41
37
1 101.5
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5 17
24.5 *1
Transformer
37
44
1 61.5
65.5 *1
ø24
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
30
ø35
ø41 37
Nut
Panel thickness
Terminal screw M3.5 Packing 1 to 6
Extended with transparent full guard (24mm dia.)
ø24
37
30
ø35
ø41
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5
1 101.5
44
37
17.5
17
Lamp
terminal
Nut
Guard ring
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Extended with full guard (24mm dia. with openings)
ø24
37
30
ø35
ø41
61.5
41.5
21.5
44
37
17.2
17
81.5
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Extended with full guard (24mm dia.)
AR30G3L, G8L
ø24
37
30
ø35
ø41
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5
1 101.5
37
44
17.2
17
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Lamp
terminal
Note: *1 Except for the types 110V AC, 127V AC and 220V AC.

04/95
67.4
Nut
Nut
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
ø40
04
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Push-pull
With transformer
Without transformer
Without transformer
ø35
ø39
41sq.
24.5 *1
44
37
1
91.4 *1
1
47.4
87.4
87.4
25.8
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5 Transformer Packing
ø35
ø39
41sq.
67.4
47.4
87.4
Terminal cover
37
44
Nut
25.8
1
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Lamp
terminal
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with white arrow)
With transformer
37
ø18
30
ø41
1 61.5
41.5
21.5
61.5
65.5 *1
37
44
24.5 *1
29.5
1
Panel thickness
1 to 6
30
ø40
ø41
37
ø18
61.5
41.5
21.5
1
37
44
29.5
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5 Packing Lamp
terminal
Terminal cover
AR30V5L AR30V5L
AR30Q7L AR30Q7L

Flush/Extended Mushroom (40mm dia.)
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
04/96
AR30F0R, F5R, FAR,
FBR, E0R, E5R,
EAR, EBR AR30M0R, M5R
22.5
30
Terminal cover
AR30M4R AR30G1R, G6R
30
ø35
Terminal cover 17.2
AR30G0R, G5R AR30GPR
Nut
1 107.3
AR30M3R, M8R AR30GSR
30
Terminal cover
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Pushbuttons
17(Extended)
11.5(Flush)
Nut
Panel thickness
1 101.5
37
ø24
30
ø35
ø41
44
37
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6 ø40
37
44
41.5
21.5
1 101.5
81.5
61.5
37
ø41
Nut
ø29
37
30
ø35
ø41
Panel thickness
1 to 6
37
44
41.5 22.5
21.5
61.5
1 101.5
81.5
Nut
ø24
37
ø41
17
Panel thickness
1 to 6
37
44
41.5
21.5
1 101.5
81.5
61.5
Nut
Extended with half guard
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
17.5
17
37
44
41.5
21.5
101.5
81.5
61.5
ø24
37
30
ø35
ø41
1
Terminal cover
Pin lock
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Pin
Terminal screw M3.5
7.3
23.6
44
37
87.3
67.3
27.3
30
ø23.4
41sq.
ø35
47.3
Terminal cover
Note:
The enclosed pin can be inserted to lock the pushbutton in a pushed
or not pushed state.
Mushroom with full guard (40mm dia.)
30
37
44
1
22.3
Guard ring
ø40
ø50
101.5
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5
22
37
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Mushroom with full guard (35mm dia. metal nut)
ø35
1
Guard ring
44
37
25
101.5
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5
ø44.5
37
Panel thickness
1 to 6

04/97
Dimensions, mm
Pushbuttons
Nut
33
27.6
47.3
87.3
1
ø24
1
Terminal screw M3.5 Packing Nut
30
ø35
Nut
Terminal cover
04
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Giant
44
37
27.6
1 107.3
87.3
67.3
47.3
27.3
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal
cover
41sq.
ø65
Giant with guard
18
Guard ring
47.3
27.3
27.6
87.3
67.3
1 107.3
37
44
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal
cover
41sq.
ø65
ø75
Giant with full guard
Guard ring
27.3
67.3
107.3
37
44
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal
cover
41sq.
ø65
ø75
Giant with full guard
29
Guard ring
47.3
27.3
27.6
87.3
67.3
1 107.3
Terminal
cover
37
44
Panel thickness
1 to 6
41sq.
ø65
ø75
Pushbutton with selector ring (2-position)
ø32
37
ø41
ø35
44
37
23
60
40
30
20
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal cover
Push, turn-lock
107.3
87.3
67.3
47.3
27.3
41sq.
ø40
1
28.4
Terminal cover
37
44
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Note:
When the push button is pressed in the left position, it resets
automatically (momentary operation).
When pressed and turned to the right it locks, and to the left it resets.
1
ø18
ø40
ø41
61.5
41.5
21.5 29.5
44
37
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Emergency operating cap
37
30
ø35
ø41
1 101.5
81.5
61.5
41.5
21.5
Cap
(AHX539-1)
15.5 ø24.5
44
37
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal cover
Note:
This is pushbutton switch is operated while holding the cap with the fingertips.
The cap (AHX539) can be exchanged.
AR30B0R
AR30B1R
AR30B2R AR30B3R
AR30S1R, S2R,
S3R, S6R AR30N0R
AR30V5R AR30FVR

Terminal cover
Emergency stop illuminated pushbuttons
Terminal cover
04/98
30
ø41
1
Nut
Terminal cover
1
41.5
ø18
ø40
Nut
Lamp
terminal
Terminal cover
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
1
37
44
41.5
21.5 29.5
61.5
30
ø41
37
ø40
ø18
28.5*
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Note: * AR30V2R type
Push-lock, turn-reset (65mm dia. with white allow)
32.5
ø65
61.5
41.5
21.5
44
37
37
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Push-lock, pull-reset (35mm dia.)
37
AR30Q2R
30
ø41
41.5
21.5 28.5
1
Terminal cover
44
37
ø35
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
28.5 *2
37
ø18
30
ø40
ø41
1 61.5
41.5
21.5
61.5
65.5 *1
1
37
44
24.5 *1
29.5
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
29.5
44
37
21.5
61.5
28.5*2
37
30
ø41
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Notes: *1 Except for the types 110V AC, 127V AC and 220V AC.
*2 AR30V2L type
AR30V0R, V2R AR30V1R
AR30V0L, V2L AR30V0L, V2L

04/99
Dimensions, mm
Selector switches
30
ø35
Nut
Terminal
cover
Nut
100
80
30
30
Nut
Terminal cover
Packing
04
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Knob
1
44
37
ø41
37
20 ø24
40
60
80
100
23
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Lever
1
Terminal
cover
44
37
20
40
60
80
100
23
ø24
27
37
30
ø35
ø41
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Key
Illuminated selector switches
Knob
With transformer
Panel thickness
1 to 6
37
44
1
37
ø35
ø41
60
40
20
20 24
Terminal
cover
24.5*1
37
44
1
64*1
1
ø24
37
ø35
ø41
20
40
60
80
100
60
23
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5 Packing Transformer
Without transformer
1
37
44
ø24
37
30
ø35
ø41
40
60
80
100
23
20
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5 Lamp Packing
terminal
Terminal cover
AR30PR, PCR AR30WR, WCR
AR30JR, JCR, JAR
AR30PL AR30PL
Lever type selector switches
1 69
49
50
44
37
41 41 41
90°
45°
45°
6 0°
60°
Terminal screw M3.5
28 AR30HR-2 AR30HR-3 AR30HR-1
Terminal
cover
Panel thickness 1 to 6

Terminal cover
Without transformer
With transformer, with resistor unit
Short-body / with transformer
04/100
Nut Nut
Transformer
Packing Packing
Terminal screw M4 Terminal screw M4
ø24
Terminal screw M3.5
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Pilot lights
Dome
ø24
ø41
61.5 *1
1 33 20
ø35
100.5 25
ø24
ø35
41sq.
60
99.5 25
115.5 *2
38 20
ø24
ø35
ø41
1 57.5 20
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Nut Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing Packing
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
With resistor LED, incandecent (50V DC)
With resistor Incandescent (110, 220V DC)
Extended
ø35
1 57.5
61.5 *1
ø41
15
Nut
Legend plate
ø19.7
1 33 15
Legend plate
ø19.7
ø24
ø35
ø41
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Transformer
38 15
Nut
Legend plate
ø19.7
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Without transformer
*2 Incandecent (50V DC) type only
DR30D0L
DR30D0L
DR30D0L
DR30E3L
DR30E3L

04/101
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5
Packing
With resistor LED, incandescent (50V DC)
DR30K0L
Nut Nut
Terminal screw M4 Packing Panel thickness
ø24
Nut
Nut
Nut
04
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Pilot lights
Faceted
ø24
ø41
1 57.5
61.5 *1
1 33
100.5 25
60 25 99.5
DR30K0L
ø24
ø35
ø35
41sq.
38 20
ø35
ø41
115.5 *2
20 20
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
1 to 6
1 to 6
Terminal screw M4 Packing
Transformer
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
With resistor LED, incandescent (110, 220V DC)
Dome with dimmer control
ø24
ø41
33 *4 32
68 *3
Rotating ring
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Transformer
Terminal cover
*2 Incandecent (50V DC) type only
*3 With transformer, with resistor unit type only
*4 For without transformer types, add 1 mm when mounting
the terminal cover.
DR30K0L
DR30D1L

Flush rectangular (Transparent lens)
Flush square (40mm sq. transparent lens)
04/102
1 to 6
1 to 6
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Pilot lights
Flush square (34mm sq. transparent lens)
61
61
61
12
1 to 6
12
1 to 6
12
65 *1
65 *1
65 *1
Legend plate
Legend plate
Legend plate
1
1
1
30 sq.
34 sq.
30
34
36 sq.
40 sq.
36
40
12
12
12
Legend plate
Legend plate
Legend plate
32
32
32
1
1
1
Panel thickness
Panel thickness
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Panel thickness
Panel thickness
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Nut
Nut
Nut
Nut
Nut
Nut
Packing
Packing
Packing
Packing
Packing
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Transformer
Transformer
Transformer
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Without transformer
Without transformer
Without transformer
DR30F4M
DR30F4N
DR30M4M

04/103
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Ball type (without lock)
AR30A0N, A5N: Screw terminal
Terminal screw M3.5
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5
Rubber cap type (without lock)
04
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Ball type with lock
Nameplate side
[3]
[3]
Nameplate side
Solder/tab terminal
20°
20°
68.5 Approx. 76
ø10
ø41
Approx. 60
37sq.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
53.5
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5
20°
Lock piece* Nameplate side
[4]
[1]
[2]
37sq.
ø41
[4]
[1]
[2]
37sq.
ø41
20°
ø25
Approx. 70
68.5 Approx. 80
Direction [4]
Direction [3]
Direction [1]
Direction [2]
Direction [4]
Direction [3]
Direction [1]
Direction [2]
Direction [4]
Direction [3]
Direction [1]
Direction [2]
20°
20°
ø25
Approx. 70
68.5 Approx. 80
Solder/tab terminal: AR30A H
Notes * The contact arrangement is operable
in the designated direction by pulling
the lock piece in the central position
with the fingers. The lock piece will
return automatically and locks when
the lock piece is released in the
central position.
The lock piece locks in the central
position only.

Transformer
04/104
Lamp terminal
23.5
30
AR30 and DR30
Dimensions
Dimensions, mm
Buzzers
Electronic sound
ø20.5 LED lamp *2
(Red)
Short-circuit terminal *1
Nut
ø35
30
37
ø41
65
24.5
13
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
ø20.5
1.5 50.5
ø35
23.5
ø41
37
30
LED lamp *2
(Red)
13
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Magnetic sound
46 sq.
54 13
Nut
ø24
ø35
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut *3
ø24
18.5
ø35
30
ø41
37
24.5
65
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Terminal screw M3.5
Packing
Transformer
18.5
ø35
ø24
1.5 50.5
37
ø41
Nut *3
Terminal screw M3.5
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Lamp terminal
Notes: *1 There are no short-circuit terminals with DR30B6. (Continuous sound only)
*2 There are no LED lamps with DR30B6.
*3 The nut and cap are united with DR30B8.
DR30B5, B6 DR30B5, B6
DR30B0
DR30B8 DR30B8

04/105
4.8+0.5mm
Button
04
Operator
Panel
Nut
Wrench (AHX001)
Pushbuttons/Selectors/Pilot Lights
AR30 and DR30
Notes on use
■ Panel cutout hole
Fig. 1 Panel cutout hole dimensions, mm
Note : If key-washer or legend plate are not used, 4.8mm-wide. location holes
shown in Fig. 1 need not be cutout.
1. Pushbutton with a round bezel (ordinary mounting)
Insert the operator into the cutout hole from the back of the
panel, and tighten the nut with the AHX001 wrench from the
front of the panel to secure the operator as shown in Fig.2.
Fig. 2 Pushbutton with a round bezel
AF95-465
Note : Recommended tightening torque is from 1.5 to 2N·m.
2. AR30V0R, V0L, V2R, V2L, V5R, V5L
(1) The button is removed after loosening the center button by
inserting the end of the AR9A002 tightening wrench or the
AR9A005 wrench (enclosed with pushbutton) into the holes in the
center button and turning counterclockwise, as shown in Fig.3.
(2) Attach the operator in the same manner as described in step 1.
panel, and as shown in Fig.4, insert the pushbutton into the
operator cylinder while aligning the grooves inside the
pushbutton with the protrusions on the operator.
Fig. 4 Setting pushbutton to operator cylinder
Pushbutton inside groove Setting Cylinder inside protrusion
AF95-414
rmax=0.8mm
ø30.5+00.5mm
0
33+00.5mm
3. AR30WR, WCR
(1) As shown in the following figure, insert the tip of a flathead
screwdriver into the selector tip groove. Rotate the
screwdriver in the direction indicated by the arrow until the
selector tip rises, and draw out the knob.
(3) Insert the knob, with the selector tip in the floated state, into
the original position of the rotation tube, and push the
selector tip into place.
Fig. 5
Small flathead screwdriver
(I-shaped, 4mm wide)
Selector tip groove
4. AR30M0R, M4R, M5R, B0R, Q7L
(1) Loosen the button by hand.
(2) Attach the operator in the same manner as
described in step 1.
(3) Screw in the button by hand, making
sure that the button is screwed in all the
way. (Recommended tightening torque:
0.3 to 0.5 N•m)
Fig. 6
Button
Notes on use
C
Wrench
(AR9A005)
Wrench
(AR9A002)
Wrench
(AR9A004)
The center button can be attached or
removed using the C portion of the
AR9A004 tightening wrench as well.
Loosen
Tighten
Holes in center button
Fig. 3
5. AR30M3R, M8R, B1R, B2R and B3R
The outer circumference of the nut is threaded, so be careful not
to cut your hand on it.
(1) Loosen and remove the guard ring by hand.
(2) Loosen and remove the button and nut by hand.
(3) Insert the operator into the cutout hole from the back of the
panel, and tighten the nut to secure it in place.
(Recommended tightening torque: 0.3 to 0.5 N•m)
(4) Screw in the button by hand, making sure that it is screwed
in all the way.
(5) Loosen and remove the guard ring by hand. (Recommended
tightening torque: 1.5 to 2.5 N•m)
Fig. 7
Guard ring
Button
Nut

04/106
45°
AR30 and DR30
Notes on use
6. AR30N0R, V1R, Q2R
(1) Loosen and remove the screw on the side of the button,
taking care not to loosen the screw.
(3) Attach and secure the button in place with the screw, making
sure that the head of the screw does not protrude from the side.
(4) Recommended tightening torque: N0R, V1R 0.5 to 1.0N•m
Q2R 0.3 to 0.5N•m
Fig. 8
Screw hole
Philips head screwdriver
(No. 2, 6-mm dia.)
7. AR30GSR
(1) Insert the tips of the AR9A001 wrench into the indentations
around the button center, and turn the wrench to loosen and
remove the button.
(2) Loosen and remove the guard ring by hand.
(3) Insert the switch operator into the cutout hole from the back
of the panel, and secure it with the guard ring from the front
of the panel. (Recommended tightening torque: 1.5 to 2.5
N•m)
(4) Attach and secure the button with the AR9A001 wrench.
Fig. 9
Button
Screw (M3.5)
Guard ring
Button
Indentations around
button center
Wrench
(AR9A001)
Panel
Packing
9. Mounting a 22mm-dia. command switch with a square
button and a square bezel, or with a round button and a
square bezel, to a panel cutout hole for a 30mm-dia.
command switch using an adapter
As shown in Fig. 11, mount an adapter and packing onto a
22mm-dia. command switch (AR22, DR22 series) with a square
button and a square bezel or one with a round button and a
square bezel. Then, insert the switch operator into the panel
cutout hole from the front of the panel. Use AR9A004 wrench
section A to tighten the locking nut from behind the panel to
secure the switch.
Use the adapter accessory nut for this purpose. Do not use the
command switch accessory nut.
Fig. 11 Command switch with a square button and a square bezel,
and command switch with a round button and a square bezel
Note : • Recommended tightening torque is from 1 to 1.5N•m.
• Panel thickness: 2.5 to 5mm
This adapter can be used with the following 22mm-dia.
Command switches :
• AR22F0M, F5M, E0M, E5M, F0P, F5P, E0P, E5P, M4P
• AR22F0S, F5S, E0S, E5S, F0Y, F5Y, E0Y, E5Y, M4Y
• AR22PY, PCY, WY, WCY, RY, RCY, JY, JCY, PP
• DR22F3M, F4M, F5M, E3M, E3P
10. AR30S1R, S2R, S3R, S6R
(2) Attach the rosette assembly to the operator.
(3) Pressing the rosette from the directions indicated by the
arrows, insert the selector tip in the groove.
(4) Make sure that the selector tip is inserted completely.
(5) To remove the rosette, use a small flathead screwdriver to
remove the selector tip as described in step 3, and then
remove the rosette.
Fig. 12
AF94-405
22mm-dia. command switch
(with a square or round
pushbutton and a square bezel)
Wrench
(AR9A004, section A)
Nut
Panel
Adapter Packing
Square adapter
(AR9Y003)
Rosette Selector tip
8. DR30F4M, F4N, M4M
Insert the pilot lights from the front of the panel and fix it with the
AHX536 tightening wrench from the back of the panel.
(1) Recommended tightening torque: 1 to 1.5N•m
(2) For pilot lights with transformers and resistance units,
remove the transformer or resistance unit in advance.
(Fig.10)
Fig. 10
Pull
Push
Push

04/107
Packing
Tightening nut
Lever
Packing
Tighten
5mm
Cap
04
■ Applicable panel thickness
The AR30/DR30 series switches are mountable to panels with
the thickness given in the table below.
Switch mounting condition Applicable panel thickness
Without accessories 1 to 6mm
With accessories AR9Y003 adapter 2.5 to 5mm
■ Using accessory ring-packings
Use the required number of ring-packings (1.6mm-thick, 4
pieces, resin mold).
Table below is a guideline for using the packings.
If a locking nut or legend plate is used, the thickness must be
counted as an additional panel thickness.
Panel thickness vs. number of packings (reference data)
Number of packings
1.0mm to less than 2.0mm
The minimum mounting spaces required for AR30/DR30
command switches are given below. (Fig. 16)
Fig. 16
• Illuminated pushbutton and pushbutton
and emergency stop pushbutton
• Illuminated and non-illuminated selectors
Notes: *1 AR30M3R, M8R, GSR: 55mm
*2 AR30B R, GPR, V1R: 80mm
AR30 and DR30
Notes on use
Effective panel thickness
including lock-ring and
legend plate thicknesses
• Pilot light
42 *1 *2
50
42 *4
*1 *2 42 *3
11. AR30A (joy stick selector)
(1) Remove the clamp ring as shown in the following figure.
Note: Even if a lock type is used, remove the clamp ring in the same manner.
Fig. 13
12. AR30HR
(1) The lever is removed after loosening the nut by hand.
(2) Loosen and remove the tightening nut by hand.
(3) Insert the operator into the cutout hole from the back of the
panel, and tighten the tightening nut with the AHX001
wrench or AR9A006 wrench from the front of panel to
secure the operator as shown in Fig. 14.
(Recommended tightening torque : 1.5 to 2.5N • m)
(4) Attach the lever assembly to the operator.
(5) Screw in the nut by hand, making sure that it is screwed in
all the way.
Fig. 14
Nut
Panel
Type *3 *4
F4M 34 34
F4N (Vertical lengthwise mounting) 40 34
(Horizontal lengthwise mounting) 34 40
M4M 40 40
Pilot lights short-body with transformer 50 42
Pilot lights with resistor 80 42
■ Water-proof and dust-proof cap
Applicable type: Water-proof cap AHX052
Dust-proof cap AHX032, 033, 034, 113, 157
When attached to the panel in combination with a water-proof or
dust-proof cap, the water-proof cap or dust-proof cap may sink
downward and prevent the depressed button from returning to
its original position.
As shown in the following figure, cut an approximately 5-mm air
outlet in the portion of the ring packing touching the panel
surface. Also, reduce the number of packing rings by one below
the standard number. The clamp ring tightening torque is 1.5 to
2.5 N•m.
Fig. 15
The water-proof cap or dust-proof cap seals the panel surface to
provide IP65 protection.
Other items are the same as for the AR22 and DR22 series,
see page 04/50 to 04/54.
Operator
Nut Packing
Tightening nut
Wrench
(AR9A006 or AHX001)
Loosen

04/108
For ø30
AF96-241
AR22/DR22 and AR30/DR30
Accessories
Description
Wrench
KK02-261
Wrench for
AR22, DR22
AR9A701
Dimensions, mm: ø28 x 70
Application:
AR22, DR22 nut tightening
Wrench
KK02-098A
Wrench for
AR22,30 and DR22, 30
SG-873
AF95-21
Wrench for
AR30, DR30
AF95-467
Wrench/Lamp changer
SI-1030
AF95-22
AF03-5
AF93-6
Attaching and removing the center button of
the AR22VGF type.
Wrench
(for center button)
Type
AR9A004
Dimensions, mm: 30 x 100 x 6.5
Remarks
Section “A”
Use this section to tighten the nut for mounting
the operator on a panel.
Section “B”
Use this section to tighten or remove the lens.
Applicable type:
AR22F0L, F5L, E0L, E5L, F0P, F5P, E0P, E5P
AR22G1L, G2L, G4L, G6L, G7L, G9L
DR22E3L, E3P
AR30E0L, E5L, G2L, G3L, G4L, G7L, G8L, G9L
DR30E3L
Section “C”
Fit the tabs on the section “C” in the center
button, and turn the wrench to tighten or
remove the button.
Applicable type:
AR22V (except V4R, VG type)
AR30V (except V1R type)
AR9A001
Application:
AR22, DR22 round-type lens tightening
AR22E0M, E5M oil-proof cap tightening
AR30, DR30 round-type lens tightening
AR30GSR button tightening
Wrench (for center
button)
AR9A002
Application:
AR22V center button tightening
(except V4R, VG type)
AR30V center button tightening
(except V1R type)
Wrench AHX701
Dimensions, mm: ø25 x 72.5
Application:
DR22N, AR22VG nut tightening
Description Type
AHX8003
AR9A006
To mount an AR22, 30 or DR22, 30
command switch to a panel, use this wrench
to tighten the nut securely. It is very easy to fit
this wrench onto the nut.
The wrench with an inside rubber-lining can
be easily used with either your right or left
hand.
For ø22
AHX001
To mount an AR30 or DR30 command
switch to a panel, use this wrench to tighten
the nut securely.
AHX321
For all types except pilot lights
DR9A321-T
Dimensions, mm: 57 x 130 x 30
For pilot lights
• This tool is used to remove contact blocks
and transformer units.
• The AHX321 can remove round color lens
of switches.
Special tool
AHX702
Use this wrench to tighten or remove the lens
and lamp.
Used with:
Lens of DR22D0L, K0L and DR30D0L, K0L
Incandescent lamp of pilot lights and
illuminated pushbuttons
Lamp changer AHX790
• Use this rubber wrench for mounting or
removing lamps from pilot lights and
illuminated pushbutton switches.
• This wrench can be used for both LED and
incandescent lamps.
• One end is for the BA9S/13 lamp, and the
other is for the E12/15 lamp (for use with
30mm dia. pilot lights with resistor).
• For 30mm dia. pilot lights with resistor, this
tool can also be used to attach or remove
incandescent lamps.
■ Accessories
Wrench
KK02-097A
AHX536
Application:
DR30F4M, F4N, M4M, N1, N2 nut tightening
AHX321
DR9A321-T
For BA9S/13 lamp
For E12/15 lamp
B
C
A

04/109
Description Type Description Type
AR9E760
This cover protects against accidental
operation.
The cover lid is returned home with a spring
force. (Packing is provided)
Used with:
AR22F0L, F5L, E0L, E5L, F0M, F5M, E0M, E5M,
F0P, F5P, E0P, E5P
AR22F0R, F5R, E0R, E5R, F0S, F5S, E0S, E5S,
E0Y, E5Y, F0Y, F5Y, FAR, FBR, EAR, EBR
Dimensions, mm:
AR9E538
Inadvertent operation can be prevented by
fitting a transparent cover with chain in the
clamp ring.
Used with:
AR30F0R, F5R, E0R, E5R, E0L, E5L
Dimensions, mm:
A
Stopper
Clamp ring mounting
portion
04
Accessories
Protection cover
AF95-29
Cover for preventing
operating errors with
30mm dia. types
AF91-671
Key washer
for AR22, DR22
AR9Y715
Use this metal washer when securing a
operator in a 22.3mm dia. panel cutout hole.
Dimensions, mm:
AF95-25
Key washer for ø30 AHX082
Use this metal washer when securing an
operator in a 30.5mm dia. panel cutout hole.
Dimension, mm:
SC-1016
Operator base cover
AF95-26
Adapter for
AR22, DR22
ø30.2 1 1.2
ø37
AR9Y718
Use this resin adapter to mount the AR22/
DR22 (switch/pilot light) in a 25.5mm dia.
cutout hole on a panel.
Dimensions, mm:
.AF95-28
20.8
51.8
34
32
Cover for preventing
operating errors with
30mm dia. types
AHX408
This is a metallic cover for preventing
inadvertent operation.
Used with: AR30F0R, F5R
Dimensions, mm:
ø30.5
ø35
ø35
25
50.5
16.2
When attaching the
cover to a vertical
panel, if you attach it
so that the portion
indicated by an A is
at the upper right, the
stopper causes the
cover to stop above
the push button to
halt further rotation.
ø37.7
ø34.7
24.5
Ring: ø10
Length:
Approx. 45mm
30
28
26.5
ø30.2
ø37
Thickness: 1mm
Cover
.AF93-420 The material is steel (zinc plated).
12.6
1 1
ø22.1
30 sq.
20.5
2.9
A B
• When the periphery of the panel cutout
has a hole to stop rotation, use with side A
contacting the panel (except for Joy stick
selector types).
• Even when the periphery of the panel
cutout does not have a hole to stop
rotation, if used with side B contacting the
panel it can serve as a washer for
eliminating play (except for Joy stick
selector types).
AR9Y002
Attach this cover to the operator base of a
pushbutton switch with only one contact
block (1NO or 1NC) to protect against dust.
ø29.5
ø24.9
ø22.3
0.5
1.5

04/110
20.5
ø35
ø29.7
M22
Nut Packing Adapter
1.3
ø34
ø30.5
ø30
Packing for 30mm dia. *1
Adapter for
30mm dia.
AR22 type number
Accessories
Adapter for
AR22 and DR22
AF98-198
AR9Y008
Use this resin adapter to mount the AR22/
DR22 (switch/pilot light) in a 25.5mm dia.
cutout hole on a panel.
Mounting, mm:
Adapter for
AR30 and DR30
Panel cutout, mm:
ø33
ø25
AR9Y003
Mount this adapter onto a 22mm dia.
command switch with a square button and a
square bezel to obtain a 30mm dia.
command switch with a square/round button
and a square bezel.
A resin ring-packing and a nut are
accessories of the adapter.
Dimensions, mm:
AF95-416
Round-frame adapter
for 30mm dia. types
AR9Y004
By using this adapter in combination with
the round type 22mm dia. command switch,
the 22mm dia. command switch can be
used as a 30mm dia. command switch/
round frame type.
Used with:
AR22, DR22 round types
(except for M3R, M8R,VG , Joy stick
selectors, buzzers)
Dimensions, mm
KK02-100A
Round-frame adapter
for 30mm dia. type VG
AF93-4
Equipped with device for stopping rotation
Used with:
AR22, DR22 round head types
(except for M3R, M8R, VG , joy stick
selectors and buzzers)
Dimensions, mm:
AHX958
Using this adapter in combination with model
AR22VG (22mm dia.) allows mounting to a
30.5mm panel cutout hole.
The attachment method is as follows.
• The washer and nut (22.3mm dia.) originally
attached to the operator will not be used, so
remove them.
• Attach the 22mm dia. packing (included),
the 30mm dia. adapter and the 30mm dia.
packing to the operator in that order, and
insert the operator into the cutout hole.
• From the back of the panel cutout hole,
fasten the 30mm-dia. nut using the AHX701
wrench. The correct tightening torque is 1 to
1.5 N•m.
40 sq.
30 sq.
ø35
ø29.7
M22
Nut
1.3 0.5 2.5 7
Note: Panel thickness: 2.5 to 5mm
Note: Panel thickness: 2.5 to 5mm
Note: Panel thickness: 1 to 6mm
Adapter
Operator
Packing
Panel
Nut
Panel thickness
1.0 to 5.5
ø4.5±0.2
ø25.5 +0.5
0
ø22.3
2
5
5.5
Packing Adapter
ø39
ø30
ø22.3
4
ø35
ø30
ø22.3
4 0.5 2.5 11.9
Dimensions, mm:
ø41
1
6
8
1.6
ø30
Nut for
30mm dia.
Packing for
30mm dia.
ø20.5 ø35
ø41
ø30
Panel
Operator
Nut for 30mm dia. *1
Adapter for 30mm dia. *1
Packing for 22mm dia.
Terminal cover
Panel cutout, mm:
ø30.5 +0.5
0
*1 Adapter for 30mm dia. (AHX958)

AR9P713-B AR9P713-A
04/111
Description Type
Legend plate for AR22 AR9P711-➀➁➂ This aluminum
➀ Color legend plate is for a
B: Black 22.3mm dia. panel
A: Aluminum cutout hole. (Packing
provided)
15 30
04
Accessories
AR9P719
Thickness: 0.8mm
Legend Code
➁ ➂
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
A: Partially black cutout hole. (Packing
provided)
Legend Code
➁ ➂
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
Description Type
provided)
Legend Code
➁ ➂
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
SI-1033
Dimensions, mm:
SI-1032
Thickness: 0.8mm
Dimensions, mm:
AF95-114
Thickness: 0.8mm
Dimensions, mm:
Legend plate for AR22 AR9P719-➀➁ This aluminum legend
emergency stop plate is for a 22.3mm dia.
panel cutout hole.
(Packing provided)
Legend Code Letter
➀ ➁ hight
Blank 0 0 –
EMERGENCY 5 A 7mm
STOP 5 B 13mm
EMERGENCY 5 C 13mm
OFF
Dimensions, mm:
EMERGENCY
Thickness: 0.8mm
AR9P711-B AR9P711-A
AR9P712-B AR9P712-A
KK02-265A
Plate color: Yellow
Letter color: Black
STO P
Note: Engraving for making letters is not available.
ø22.5
Aluminum
Black
30
R15
ø22.5
Aluminum
Black
30
15 30
ø22.5
Aluminum
Black
45
15 30
ø22.5
ø70

04/112
Plate color: Yellow
Letter color: Black
Thickness: 0.6mm
STOP
Accessories
Legend plate for AR30 AHX177-➀➁➂➃ This legend plate is
➀ Material and for a 30.5mm dia.
color panel cutout hole.
Code Material Color
S Brass Silver
B Aluminum Black
A Aluminum
➁ Size
H: Standard
S: Short size
Legend Code
➂ ➃
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
Legend plate for AR22
(width: 34mm)
AR9P015-B➀➁ : Hight 36mm
AR9P014-B➀➁ : Hight 40.3mm
Color: black
Legend code
➀ ➁
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
.AF96-190
Optimal for use in combination with a
3-position selector switch.
Legend plates are available in two types:
short, 36 mm; and long, 40.3mm.
AR9P015 AR9P014
AR9P009 AR9P011
AR9P007
Y-1545
AF89-466
SK-598
Dimensions, mm:
Legend plate with Legend plate AR9P009-B
name plate for AR22 Name plate AR9P010-B ➀➁ (34 × 8mm)
Legend plate AR9P011-B
Name plate AR9P012-B ➀➁ (34 × 13mm)
Name Code
plate ➀ ➁
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
Dimensions, mm:
.AF96-190
Legend plate for AR30 AHX720-➀➁ This aluminum legend
emergency stop plate is for a 30.5mm dia.
panel cutout hole.
Legend Code Letter
➀ ➁ hight
Blank 0 0 –
EMERGENCY 5 A 7mm
STOP
AF87-49
Dimensions, mm:
Dimensions, mm:
34
ø22.5
ø22.5
Thickness: 0.6mm
34
25
20.7
15.3
15.3
37
34
45
3 3.6
50
(Name plate)
AR9P010
(Name plate)
AR9P012
13
8
37
34
ø22.3
ø22.3
(Name plate)
AR9P008
50
16
3
0.8 3.6
30
27
ø22.3
40
50
ø30.2
40
50
ø30.2
42
AHX177
AHX177B
AHX177A
AHX177-BS
AHX177-AS
Thickness: 0.6mm
EMERGENCY
ø30.2
28
ø70
Thickness: 0.8mm

04/113
Panel plug for AR30
and DR30
M5
1.6
04
Accessories
Panel plug for AR22
and DR22
SI-1027
T-1993
Group panel for
22mm dia. type
AF97-233
AF95-153
Panel
Dimensions, mm:
Jumper
AF95-27
Round:
AHX725-B Black
AHX725-H Gray
Square:
AHX726-B Black
AHX726-H Gray
Dimensions, mm: ø29.5 x 17 (AHX725)
29.5 sq. x 17 (AHX726)
Use this plug to cover up unused panel
cutout holes.
For oil proof usage, use together with
packing (AR9Y730) and a nut (AR9R744).
AHX004
Color: Silver (metal)
This plug is used to cover up unused panel
cutout hole.
Dimensions, mm:
DR9Y004
These new 22mm dia. command switch/
square types can be neatly aligned side by
side on this group panel at a 30mm pitch to
form a uniform panel face with no
misalignment between mounted switches.
Depending on the number of switches to be
grouped (maximum 12), the panel can be
divided (by cutting at the portion indicated by
an asterisk (*)).
Mounting, mm:
(example showing a group of three)
APCX029 (For pilot light without transformer)
DR9Y001 (For pilot light with transformer)
Use this jumper to connect terminals
allocated in a 30mm pich.
Rated current is 3A
Dimensions, mm:
ø42
ø35
3
20
Panel plug
Packing
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 5.5
Operator
Group
panel
Nut 1 2 1 2 1 2
30 12-ø22.1
30
30 x 11=330
360
Thickness: 0.8mm
29.5
*
7.5
30
37.5
37.5
30
Thickness: 0.5mm
9
7.5
APCX029
DR9Y001

04/114
AF95-32
button
(V and Q types)
Note: * V5L: Red and yellow only
Note: * V5L: Red and yellow only
Type
AR9M006-
Used with
AR22PR, PCR, PY, PCY
AR30PR, PCR
Type
AR9M007-
Used with
AR22WR, WCR, WY, WCY
AR30WR, WCR
Type
AR9M008-
Used with
AR22RR, RCR, RY, RCY
Accessories
Lens for illuminated
pushbutton switch and
pilot lights
AF94-458
Notes: *1 When the main unit code is “W” (white),
use a lens of clear color.
*2 Except for pilot lights with resistor
Button for pushbutton
switch
Type
AR9C001-
AR9C003-
AR9C004-
AR9C005-
AR9C006-
AR9C007-
AR9C024-
AR9C027-C
AR9C028-C
AR9C041-R
AHX539
AF94-461
AF95-31
Type
AR9C020-R
AR9C020-
AR9C018-R
AR9C018-
Used with
AR22V0R, V2R, VSR
AR30V0R, V2R
AR22V5R, AR30V5R
AR22V0L, V2L, VDL, VAL, VSL
AR30V0L, V2L
AR22V5L*, AR30V5L*
AF95-42
Type
AR9C008-R
AR9C010-R
AR9C017-R
AR9C019-R
AR9C021-R
AR9C021-
AR9C026-R
AR9C029-R
AR9C040-R
Used with
AR22V4R
AR22Q2R, AR30Q2R
AR22V2R, V2L, AR30V2R, V2L
AR22VAL
AR22V0R, V0L, AR30V0R, V0L
AR22V5R, V5L*, AR30V5R, V5L*
AR22VDL
AR30V1R
AR22VSR, VSL
Knob
AF95-43
Lever
Cylindrical knob
KK02-101A
KK02-102A
KK02-104A
Type
AR9C011- *1
AR9C012- *1
AR9C013- *1
AR9C014- *1
AR9C015-
AR9C016-
DR9C001-
DR9C002-
DR9C120-C
DR9C121-C
DR9C122-C
DR9C126- *1
DR9C126-C
DR9C127- *1
Used with
AR22F0L, F5L, F0P, F5P
AR22E0L, E5L, E0P, E5P
AR22G1L, G2L, G4L, G6L, G7L, G9L
DR22E3L, E3P
AR30E0L, E5L, G2L, G3L, G4L, G7L, G8L, G9L
DR30E3L
AR22F0M, F5M
AR22E0M, E5M
DR22E3M, F5M
AR22M4L, M4P
AR22M0L, M5L
DR22D0L
DR30D0L*2
DR22K0L
DR30K0L*2
DR30M4M
DR30F4N
DR30F4M
DR22F3M
DR22F4M
DR22E3N
Color Green Red Clear Yellow
Code G R C Y
Color Orange Blue White
Code A S W
Used with
AR22F0R, F5R, F0Y, F5Y, G2R, G7R
AR30F0R, F5R, FVR
AR22S1R, S2R, S3R, S6R
AR30S1R, S2R, S3R, S6R
AR22E0R, E5R, G0R, G3R, G5R, G8R
AR22E0Y, E5Y
AR30E0R, E5R, G0R, G1R, G5R, G6R
AR22F0S, F5S
AR22E0S, E5S
AR22M4R, M9R, M4Y
AR30M4R
AR22M0R, M5R
AR30M0R, M3R, M5R, M8R
AR30B0R, B1R, B2R, B3R
AR22FAR, FBR, AR30FAR, FBR
AR22EAR, EBR, AR30EAR, EBR
AR30N0R
Cap for AR30FVR
KK02-103A
Center button
(For V type)
Color Green Red Black White
Code G R B W
Color Yellow Orange Blue
Code Y A S
Color Red Black Yellow
Code R B Y
Color Red Black Yellow
Code R B Y
Replace the mark by the knob color code
Color Black Green Red
Code B G R
Replace the mark by the lever color code
Code B G R
AF95-44
Code B G R

04/115
AF94-465
Type
AR9P019-
AR9P020-
04
Accessories
AF98-197
Key
Legend plate
(for F type with round
bezel)
AF94-459
Symbol mark plate
:
Used with
AR22FAR, FBR, AR30FAR, FBR
AR22EAR, EBR, AR30EAR, EBR
Symbol I
Plate W B W B W B Clear
Symbol Red Green Green Black
Code 01 02 03 04 11 12 02B 04B 12B
Knob
(for illuminated
selector switch)
KKD09-012
AF94-459
Legend plate
(for E type with round
bezel)
Legend plate and
color plate
(for F type with square
bezel)
AF94-460
Type
DR9P241-W
DR9P242-WP
DR9P242-W
DR9P243-WP
DR9P243-W
DR9P244-WP
DR9P244-W
Used with
AR22F0M, F5M
DR22F3M, F4M
DR30M4M
DR30M4M, LED(W)
DR30F4N
DR30F4N, LED(W)
DR30F4M
DR30F4M, LED(W)
Type
AR9P003-W
DR9P001-W
Used with
AR22E0M, E5M
DR22F5M, E3M
DR22E3N
Type
DR9P241-
DR9P242-
DR9P243-
DR9P244-
Used with
DR22F3M, F4M
DR30M4M
DR30F4N
DR30F4M
KK02-105A
KK02-106A
KK02-107A
Legend plate
(for E type with square
bezel)
AF94-460
• color plate
AF94-460
AF95-34
Types DR9P242, 243 and 244-W are LED
illuminated, and used exclusively with operators
having a “W” in the type number.
Type
AR9M005-
Used with
AR22PL, PP
AR30PL
Color Green Red White
Code G R W
Code Y A S
Type
AR9C022-
AR9C025-
Used with
AR22JR, JCR, AR30JR, JCR,
AR22JAR, AR30JAR
Replace the mark by the key type code.
Code: A, B, C, D, E or F, 6 types.
AR9P001-W
This part is made of acrylic resin.
Use paint or thinner compatible with resin.
Dimensions, mm: ø17.8 x 0.9
AR9P002-W
I T T
W: White, B: black
• Legend plate
Replace the mark by the color code
Code G R W
Code Y A S
Dimensions, mm:
DR9P241: 20.8 sq. x 0.8
DR9P242: 33.4 sq. x 1
DR9P243: 33.4 x 27.4 x 1
DR9P244: 27.4 sq. x 1
Dimensions, mm:
AR9P003-W: 20 sq. x 4.8
DR9P001-W: 19.7 x 26.7 x 4.5
AHX727
Affix this seal to the DR9P241- /AR9P003
legend plate for marking or labeling.
Dimensions, mm: 20 sq. x 0.025
Legend sheet

LED lamp Type Lamp voltage
LED lamp
(for DR30 with resistor)
04/116
Accessories
Replace the mark by the luminous color
code
Luminous Yellow Red Green
color
Code Y R G
Lens color Y R G
Luminous Amber Orange
color
Code Y W
Lens color Y W
KKD06-208
KK02-110A
code
color
Code Y R G
Lens color Y R G
Luminous Amber Orange Blue
color
Code A O S
Lens color A W, A* S
* Orange is available only for the DR22F4M
pilot light.
Lamp base: BA9s/13
Type Lamp voltage
APX507-24 24V AC/DC
APX509-24O
Note:
The symbol in the box indicates the color of light
emitted. (See note APX510.)
When the code is “W” (white), use an LED lamp
((APX.509-24O)
Dimensions, mm:
KKD06-208
KK02-111A
LED lamp
(for AR22VGF type)
Neon lamp
(for AR22VGF type)
KK03-038
APX510-6 6V AC
APX510-D6 6V DC
APX510-12 12V AC/DC
APX510-15 15V AC/DC
APX510-24 24V AC/DC
Dimensions, mm:
Type Lamp voltage
AR9L002-ER 24V AC/DC
Luminous color: Red
Dimensions, mm:
KK02-109A
Type
AR9N001-HA
AR9N001-KA
AR9N001-MA
AR9N001-PA
Lamp voltage
110V AC
120V AC
220V AC
240V AC
Luminous color: Orange
Dimensions, mm:
Seat (gold plated)
Do not use the LED lamp for other types.
19
ø10
ø14 34
ø12 27
Lamp base: E12/15
APX507
APX509
19
ø10
Lamp base: BA9s/13
LED lamp for DR30 Type Lamp voltage
(square type)
DN6Q005-6 6V DC
DN6Q005-2 12V AC
DN6Q005-B 12V AC/DC
DN6Q005-E 24V AC/DC
Lamp base: BA9s/13
Dimensions, mm:
19
ø10

04/117
04
Accessories
Incandescent lamp
AF89-427
Type Lamp Rated voltage,
voltage consumption
AHX135 5.5V AC/DC 6.3V AC/DC,
1W
AHX279 15V AC/DC 18V AC/DC,
1W
1W
1W
Dimensions, mm:
Lamp base: BA9s/13
Dimensions, mm:
Lamp base: E12/15
KK02-115A
KK02-117A
33
30
Type
AR9T511-H
AR9T511-L
AR9T511-M
AR9T511-Q
AR9T511-S
AR9T511-T
AR9T511-V
AR9T511-W
AR9T557-H
AR9T557-L
AR9T557-M
AR9T557-Q
AR9T557-S
AR9T557-T
AR9T557-V
AR9T557-W
30.5 42.6
Primary voltage
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
Transformer unit
• The contact is covered with a silicon
rubber cover to keep out foreign matter
such as dust, etc.
• Section A of the AR9D001 is separate.
* See page 04/122, “AR22 Z8, AR30 Z8”
Dimensions, mm:
Up to 220 V 22.4 x 30 x 45
Over 220 V 25.3 x 29 x 48
KK02-118A
AF94-457
AF95-33
Incandescent lamp
(for DR30 with
resistor)
voltage consumption
2W
Contact block (1NO) AR9B290 Standard
AR9B290-S Overlap
Color: Blue
Dimensions, mm: 19.3 x 29 x 27
AF94-455
Contact block (1NC) AR9B291 Standard
AR9B291-S Overlap
Color: Red
AF94-455
Lamp terminal AR9B292
Color: Black
AF94-456
Contact protection cover Type Used with *
AR9D001-1 AR22, 1-step contact
Dimensions, mm:
Used with
Standard type
(except buzzers)
DR30F4N, F4M,
M4M
Note: Terminal cover is not supplied with this.
Note: With terminal cover
20
ø10
ø14
34 32
12
45
50.5
52
39.5
32.5 35.6
30
4.7
Part A
AR9D001-1
AR9D001-2
AR9D002-1
AR9D002-2

04/118
(Resin types are black,
metallic types are
silver.)
KK2-121A
KK2-122A
KK2-123A
Resin types are black (standard)
Metallic types are silver
Accessories
KK02-118A
Resistor
Voltage stabilizer
Device for LED lamp
flickering
AF95-33
Nut
AF94-462
5
* Used in combination with 12V, 15V, or 24V rated
LED lamp.
Type
AR9R744
DR9R001
Used with
AR22, DR22*
DR30F4M
DR30F4N
DR30M4M
Dimensions, mm
ø29.7 x 4
ø33.8 x 5
* Except AR22VG , Joy stick selectors, buzzers
and numerical indicators
AR9R001:
Resin types are black (standard)
AHX088:
Metallic types are silver
Used with:
AR30F0R, F5R, FAR, FBR, E0R, E5R, EAR,
EBR, E0L, E5L, Q7L
DR30D0L, E3L, K0L
KK2-120A
KK2-124A
AR9T003
Use this base in combination with a
transformer unit. This base unit can be
mounted using screws or rails.
Dimensions, mm
Base unit for
transformer
separate mounting
Resistor: AR9T519-H (110V DC)
Fit this resistor when using LED of 24V DC
rating with 110V DC power.
Voltage stabilizer: AR9T001-E
This unit allows an LED lamp of 24V DC
rating to be used in a circuit with voltage
from 27V to 35V (AC or DC).
Flickering device:
6V AC: AR9T002-A
6V DC: AR9T002-6
12 to 24V AC: AR9T002-G *
12 to 24V DC: AR9T002-E *
KK2-119A
Nut for 30mm dia. types
AR9R002:
AHX093 :
Used with:
AR30M0R, M5R, M4R, G0R, G5R, N0R,
S R, V R, Q2R, V L, PR, PCR, WR, WCR,
JR, JCR, JAR, PL, A N, A H
AR9D797-
This rubber cap protects the operator and
switch mechanism against dust and water.
Use this cap in a dusty or moist environment.
Used with:
AR22E0L,E5L
AR22E0R, E5R
code.
Code Color
G Green
R Red
B Black
Y Yellow
Blank Clear (standard)
Dimensions, mm:
Water-tight cap for
22mm dia. types
Y-1559
Water-tight cap for
30mm dia. types
AHX052
The only color available is transparent.
Used with:
AR30E R, E L
58
48
32
22
2-ø4.5
34
56
60 *
35
Rail: TH35-7.5
TH35-7.5AL
TH35-15AL
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal cover
Transformer
unit
(optional)
Y2 Y1
(Y2)
(Y1)
* Except for the types 110V AC, 127V AC and 220V AC.
ø32
(20)
17.5

04/119
Type
AHX032
AHX033
AHX034
AHX041
AHX042
AHX043
AHX157-R
AHX157-G
AHX157-B
AHX113-R
AHX113-G
AHX113-B
AHX111-R
AHX111-G
AHX111-B
Color
Red
Green
Black
Red
Green
Black
Red
Green
Black
Red
Green
Black
Red
Green
Black
Used with
AR30E0R
AR30F0R
AR30B2R,
B3R
AR30E0R
AR30F0R
Spec.
Oil-proof
Oil-proof
Oil-proof
Weather
resistance
Weather
resistance
Dimensions, mm:
M70
P1.5
04
Accessories
Packing
SC-993
Dust-proof cap for
30mm dia. types
Terminal cover
AF94-466
AF89-772
AF94-462
Type
AR9Y305
DR9Y320
DR9Y321
*1 Applicable up to 220V.
*2 DR22D0L, E3L, K0L, F M, E3M, E3N, E3P,
DR30D0L, E3L, K0L
The terminal cover is provided as standard
with the applicable types listed above.
(Except for joy stick selector switches,
numerical indicators, pilot lights with
resistors, contact block alone and lamp
terminal alone)
KK2-126A
AHX032 to 034, 041 to 043
AHX111, 113
AHX157
AHX305
SG-842
Terminal cover
* 230V and over
AHX426
AF92-339
AHX376
SG-5
Used for sealing the operator from foreign
debris such as dust, oil (oil-proof), and
water (weather resistance) in environments
where the unit is in contact with such
elements.
AR9Y730:
AR22 and DR22 (Rubber)
Note: Except for joystick selector switches, buzzers
AHX282:
AR30 and DR30 (Resin-standerd)
Note: Except for DR30F4M, F4N, M4M, numerical
indicators
AHX149:
AR30 and DR30 (Rubber)
Note: Except for DR30F4M, F4N, M4M, numerical
indicators
KK2-125A
Used with
Contact unit
Lamp terminal
Transformer unit *1
Pilot lights *2
DR30F4M, F4N, M4M
Dimensions, mm
18.4 x 29 x 8.4
ø22 x 5.8
34 sq. x 8.7
Type
AHX305
AHX426
AHX376
Used with
Buzzers
DR30D1L
DR30D1L
(with transformer)
Buzzers (B0 type)
With transformer *
With short-body
transformer
With resistor unit
Dimensions, mm
23.5 x 27.5 x 16
27.5 x 31 x 8
13 x 29 x 6.5
ø40
M30
P1.5
13
22.5
ø80
31
35.5

Semi standard compliant guardring
■ Features
• Combine a guard ring with a Fuji electric emergency stop
pushbutton switches to comply with SEMI (SEMI-S2,
SEMATECH Application Guide for SEMI S2-93).
• EMERGENCY OFF legend plates are available.
• Emergency stop pushbutton switches labeled with “EMO” are
available.
Description
(40mm dia, with
EMO charactor)
04/120
Combination with the AR22V2R
Contact Type
1NO+2NC AR22V3R-12RZ286
3NC AR22V3R-03RZ286
2NO+2NC AR22V3R-22RZ286
Yellow
Yellow
(Black legend)
AR22 Special products
AR9R008
AR9P721-5C
AR22V3R-01RZ286
AR22V3R-11RZ286
AR22V3R-02RZ286
AR22V3R-13RZ286
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NC
1NO+3NC
4NC AR22V3R-04RZ286
Combination with the AR22V3R
(labeled with EMO).
■ Accessories
Operator
Note : Contact arrangements indicated in the table can be supplied.
Type Color
Color
Red
(White legend)
Guardring
Legend plate for AR9R008
emergency off
(KKD05-263)
(KKD05-262)
(KKD05-261)

• Installation
Nut Emergency stop pushbutton
● Legend plate for emergency off (AR9P721-5C) ● Emegency stop pushbutton switches (AR22V3R-RZ286)
04/121
(Operator : AR22V2R, V4R, V2L, VAL)
● Guardring (AR9R008)
■ Notes on use
04
AR22 Special products
Type Panel
thickness
A (Reference)
AR22V2R
AR22V4R
AR22V2L
AR22VAL
AR22V3R
(Z286)
1~2.5
1~2.5
1~2.5
1~2.5
1~3.6
2mm With AR9P721-5C
With AR9P721-5C
With AR9P721-5C
With AR9P721-5C
2mm
2mm
2mm
3mm
22.5
16
37
30
40
Packing
40 30
Release arm
60
Terminal screw M3.5
44
37
1
3.2 +0.2
0
22.3 +0.4
0
24.1+ 0.4
0
8.0 xam r
34 78
ø22.3
ø90
ø76
12.9
20.5
Legend plate for emergency off
(AR9P721-5C)
22.5
70
ø
ø
ø
ø
■ Dimensions, mm
■ Applicable types
• Panel cutout hole dimensions, mm
Packing
Panel
Panel thickness
1 to 2.5
Guardring
Packing
Packing (Accessory for AR9P721-5C)
Thickness : 0.5mm
Terminal cover
Nut
Panel thickness
1 to 6 *
EMO charactor
(Packing is pasted to A (Refar to table)
guardring)
Note : • Engraving for marking letters is not available.
• Letter hight : 13mm
* Without accessories
This guardring conform to SEMI sandard. Please do not use it for the emergency stops other than Semiconductor manufacturing Equipment.
AR22V2R, V4R, V2L, VAL and V3R Z286
* Dimension A (the height difference between the switch and guardring)
depends on the emergency stop (Illuminated) pushbutton switch that is
being used. Refer to the following table.

04/122
Special products
Products equipped with contact protection cover
■ Features
A silicon rubber cover is provided for the contact block to keep
out foreign matter such as dust, etc.
Other ratings and specifications are the same as those of the
standard type.
■ Type
AR22 Z8
AR30 Z8
Specify “Z8” at the end of the type number of the standard type.
■ Dimensions
The only thing different from the standard product is the addition
of a 1-mm thick silicon rubber cover around the contact block.
Type
• Pushbuttons *1
• Emergency stop pushbuttons *2
• Selectors *3
• Illuminated pushbuttons *4
• Emergency stop illuminated
pushbuttons*2 (without transformer)
• Illuminated selectors
Contact arrangement
1NO+1NC,
2NO*5, 2NC
1NO+3NC, 2NO+2NC,
3NO+1NC, 4NO*5, 4NC
1NO*6, 1NC
1NO+2NC, 2NO+1NC,
3NO*6, 3NC
Remarks
For use with a
1-step contact
For use with a
2-step contact
For use with a
1-step contact
For use with a
2-step contact
Notes: *1 Except for AR30B0R, B1R, B2R, B3R, N0R, and GPR.
*2 Except for unibody (VG types)
*3 Except for AR30HR
*4 Except for AR30Q7L
*5 Except for emergency stop pushbutton switch
*6 Except for emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch
Resisting water-soluble cutting oils and heat
■ Features
Safer operation in environments exposed to water-miscible
cutting fluids, machining oils, lubricating oils, cleaning oils and
high humidity (up to 95%) is made possible by using materials
that protect against rust and corrosion of components.
standard type.
■ Type
AR22 Z9, DR22 Z9
AR30 Z9, DR30 Z9
■ Dimensions
Same as those of the standard type
• AR22, DR22 series
AR 22 (Except for joy stick selectors, FAR, FBR, EAR, EBR
types and VG types)
DR22 (Except for pilot lights with resistor unit and buzzers)
AR30 (Except for Q7L, FAR, FBR, EAR, EBR, HR types and joy
stick selectors)
DR30 (Except for D1L, F4M, F4N, M4M types, pilot lights with
resistor/resistor unit and buzzers)

04/123
04
Special products
AR22/Pushbutton switches
Terminal cover
40
Terminal screw
M3.5
Nut
Packing Panel thickness
1 to 6
40
60
17.5 (Extended)
12 (Flush)
38.5 17.2
17.2
Terminal
cover
Terminal cover
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
Nut
Nut
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
63
65.5 *
80
Release arm
DR22/Without transformer
DR22/With transformer
Meeting IP2X finger protection standards
■ Features
Conforms to EN standard EN60204-1 (protecting against
electric shock). The terminal has IEC60529 degree of
protection; IP2X finger protection secured (a mock human finger
used in testing did not come into contact with charged parts).
The contact block and lamp terminal can be easily mounted or
removed with the terminal cover mounted.
■ Type
AR22 ZB, DR22 ZB
AR30 ZB, DR30 ZB
Specify “ZB” at the end of the type number of the standard type.
■ Accessories
• Contact block (plus terminal cover)
NO contact: AR9B290-D
NC contact: AR9B291-D
•Transformer unit (plus terminal cover)
AR9T511- D
■ Ratings and specifications
• Protection degree: IP2X
• Terminal screw: M3.5
Wiring can be done with a solid wire or fork shaped crimp
terminal.
Note: Ring-type crimp terminals cannot be used.
• Other ratings and specifications are the same as those of the
standard type.
AR22 (except for joy stick selectors)
DR22: Without transformer, with transformer (except for short-body
types, buzzers and numerical indicators)
AR30 (except for HR and joy stick selectors)
DR30: Without transformer, with transformer (except for D1L,
F4M, F4N, M4M types and buzzers)
Note: The terminal of the standard type VG has IP2X protection.
■ Dimensions, mm

04/124
Special products
Metal nut (chrome plated) types
■ Features
The nut is a metallic ring (chrome plated).
standard model.
■ Type
AR30 ZM
DR30 ZM
Specify “ZM” at the end of the type number of the standard type.
■ Dimensions, mm
Same as those of the standard types.
AR30 (except for G4L, G9L, GSR*1, GPR*1, BOR*1,and HR*1
types)
DR30 with round bezel (except for IP54 buzzer type B8)*2
Notes: *1 Standard type is a metallic ring (chrome plated).
*2 The nut of types DR30B0, B5 and B6 buzzers are resin (chrome plated).
Resisting sulfuration gas
■ Features
These products can be used in environments having a
concentration of hydrogen sulfide gas of 0.5 ppm or less.
The metallic parts have been subjected to an anti-corrosion
treatment (see note).
The contacts of the AR series are gold plated.
Note: The body is made of resin and cannot be used with gases that affect
resins (plastics).
■ Type
AR22 Z4, DR22 Z4
AR30 Z4, DR30 Z4
■ Notes on use
• This product is resistant to light corrosive gas exposure.
• Other measures, such as covering the entire switch with a box,
and the degree of protection of the panel should be taken into
consideration.
Hydrogen sulfide gas concentration of 0.5 ppm max.
Ambient storage temperature: 8 to 37°C
Humidity: 62 to 81%
standard type.
■ Dimensions, mm
AR22 (except for Joy stick selectors and VG type)
DR22 (except for pilot lights with resistor unit and buzzers)
AR30 (except for HR and Joy stick selectors)
DR30 (except for F4M, F4N, M4M types, pilot lights with
resistor/resistor unit and buzzers)
KKD08-048
KK02-148A KK02-149A
AR30E0R ZM AR30PR ZM DR30D0L ZM

04/125
Type
AR22VSR
V0R, V4R
Q2R
V2R
V7R
VGE
04
Mass, gram
AR22 and DR22
Mass
Type
AR22F0L
F5L
F0M, F0P
F5M, F5P
E0L
E5L
E0M, E0P, M4L, G1L, G2L, G4L
E5M, E5P, M9L, G6L, G7L, G9L
M4P
M0L
M5L
V5L
Without transformer
1NO
(1NC)
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
44
44
48
With transformer *
1NO
(1NC)
85
85
86
86
87
87
88
88
89
90
90
94
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
53
53
57
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
94
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
99
99
103
2NO+2NC
67
–
68
–
69
–
70
–
71
72
–
–
Note: * 230V and over : +17grams
Pushbuttons
Type
AR22F0R, FAR, F5R, FBR
E0R, EAR, F0S, F0Y, G0R
E5R, EBR, F5S, F5Y, G5R
E0S, E0Y, M4R, G2R
E5S, E5Y, M9R, G7R
M0R, M5R
S1R, S2R, S3R, S6R
M3R, M8R
V5R
1NO
(1NC)
27
28
29
31
–
44
49
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
36
37
38
40
43
53
58
2NO+2NC
55
56
57
59
62
72
77
Type
AR22VSL, VDL
V0L
VAL
V2L
VGF
Without transformer
1NC
48
49
50
51
66
With transformer *
1NC
94
95
96
97
–
2NC
(1NO+1NC)
57
58
59
60
70
2NC
(1NO+1NC)
103
104
105
106
–
1NC
34
36
36
38
59
61
2NC
(1NO+1NC)
43
45
45
47
68
65
2NO+2NC
62
64
–
66
87
–

04/126
AR22 and DR22
Mass
Mass, gram
Pilot lights
Type
DR22D0L, K0L
E3L, E3P, F3M, F4M
F5M
E3M
E3N
Without transformer
Standard
18
19
20
21
23
Short-body
23
24
25
26
28
With transformer
Standard *
70
71
72
73
75
Short-body
68
69
70
71
73
With
resistor unit
32
33
34
35
37
Selector switches
Type
AR22PR
PCR
WR
WCR
RR, PY, WY
RCR, PCY, WCY
RY
RCY
JR, JAR
JCR
JY
JCY
1NO
(1NC)
30
–
31
–
32
–
33
–
56
–
57
–
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
65
65
66
66
2NO+2NC
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
83
83
84
84
Type
AR22PL
PP
Without transformer
1NO
(1NC)
42
43
With transformer *
1NO
(1NC)
88
89
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
51
52
2NO+2NC
70
71
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
97
98
Type
AR22A2N, A7N
A0N, A5N
A1N, A6N
1NO x2
89
99
112
(1NO+1NC) x2
99
109
122
(1NO+1NC) x4
136
146
159
1NO x4
116
126
139
Type
AR22A2H, A7H
A0H, A5H
A1H, A6H
(1NO+1NC) x2
72
82
95
(2NO+2NC) x2
75
85
98
(2NO+2NC) x4
88
98
111
(1NO+1NC) x4
82
92
105
• Screw terminal types
• Solder/tab terminal types
Buzzers
Type
DR22B5
B8
B3
Without transformer
50
53
66
With transformer
105
108
121
With resistor unit
52
55
–

04/127
Type
AR30V0R
Q2R
V2R
V1R
04
Mass, gram
AR30 and DR30
Mass
Type
AR30E0L
E5L
G4L
G9L
V5L
G2L
G7L
G3L
G8L
Q7L
Without transformer
1NO
(1NC)
49
49
50
50
56
66
66
72
72
–
With transformer *
1NO
(1NC)
95
95
96
96
102
112
112
118
118
–
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
58
58
59
59
65
75
75
81
81
159
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
104
104
105
105
111
121
121
127
127
205
2NO+2NC
77
–
78
–
–
94
–
100
–
–
Pushbuttons
Type
AR30F0R, FAR, F5R, FBR
E0R, EAR, G0R, E5R, EBR, G5R
M4R
M0R, M5R
V5R
S1R, S2R, S3R, S6R
FVR
G1R, G6R
N0R
GPR
GSR, B0R
M3R, M8R
B1R
B3R
B2R
1NO
(1NC)
36
37
38
40
42
–
54
59
96
116
123
126
241
279
291
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
45
46
47
49
51
53
63
68
105
125
132
135
250
288
300
2NO+2NC
64
65
66
68
70
72
82
87
124
144
151
154
269
307
319
Type
AR30V0L
V2L
Without transformer
1NC
57
59
With transformer *
1NC
103
105
2NC
(1NO+1NC)
66
68
2NC
(1NO+1NC)
112
114
1NC
43
45
46
60
2NC
(1NO+1NC)
52
54
55
69
2NO+2NC
71
–
74
88

• Without transformer type, With transformer type, With resistor unit type
04/128
AR30 and DR30
Mass
Mass, gram
Pilot lights
Type
DR30D0L, K0L
E3L
F4M *2
F4N *2
M4M *2
D1L
Without transformer
Standard
28
29
32 (30)
34 (30)
37 (32)
94
With transformer
Standard *1
80
81
84 (82)
86 (82)
88 (84)
164
Short-body
78
79
–
–
–
–
With
resistor unit
42
43
46
48
50
111
Notes: *1 230V and over : +17grams
*2 ( ): Incandescent lamp
Type
DR30D0L, K0L (LED)
D0L, K0L (incandescent )
50V DC
103
107
110V DC
220V DC
103
179
• With resistor type
Selector switches
Type
AR30PR, WR
PCR, WCR
JR, JAR
JCR
HR
1NO
(1NC)
41
–
67
–
125
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
50
50
76
76
135
2NO+2NC
69
69
94
94
153(166)
Note: ( ) : AR30HR-122
Type
AR30PL
Without transformer
1NO
(1NC)
52
With transformer *
1NO
(1NC)
98
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
61
2NO+2NC
80
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
107
Type
AR30A2N, A7N
A0N, A5N
A1N, A6N
1NO x2
100
110
124
(1NO+1NC) x2
110
120
134
(1NO+1NC) x4
147
157
171
1NO x4
127
137
151
Type
AR30A2H, A7H
A0H, A5H
A1H, A6H
(1NO+1NC) x2
83
93
107
(2NO+2NC) x2
86
96
110
(2NO+2NC) x4
99
109
123
(1NO+1NC) x4
93
103
117
• Screw terminal type
• Solder/tab terminal type
Buzzers
Type
DR30B5, B6
B8
B0
Without transformer
47
48
86
With transformer
102
103
–
With resistor unit
49 (Except B6)
50
–

AR16V1R
Lock lever
AR16F0N
AR16PT
AR16JT
• Fast-connection socket • Connector socket • Socket for PC board
• Applicable as a connector by combining
the socket with receptacles.
• The socket holds the receptacles, making
it easy to connect the receptacle to the
switch with a single operation.
Approvals
For further information related to approved type, see page
04/130 to 04/135
Note : commanded switches shipped as aeticiles to China
must conform to the Product Quality Law. Check with
your Fuji Electric representative.
• An integrated structure with built-in contacts that can reduce
control panel depth.
• A wide variety of sockets are available to simplify wiring.
• Thin type and Standard types available for your control panel
design. Select an optimum one to match your control panel
design.
n Features
Supporting smaller and thinner operator’s panels
A structure that integrates operator and contacts to reduce
panel-mounting depth. Terminals extending to the rear of the
switch ensure easy wiring work.
• Standard type : 28.4mm deep
• Thin type : 35.9mm deep
• Emergency stop : 28mm deep
28mm
35.9mm
2mm
28.4mm
42.5mm
AH164, 5 series
(Contact
separated type)
AR16, DR16 series
(Standard type)
AF16, DF16 series
(Thin type)
AR16V series
(Emergency stop pushbutton
switches)
Receptacle
A wide variety of sockets reduce wiring work
Switches combine with a variety of sockets to simplify wiring.
Lock lever
Insertion slot button
• Applicable as a fast-connection terminal
switch by combining the socket with a switch.
• Easily wired by simply removing the wire
sheath and inserting the wires while pressing
the insertion slot button (no soldering
required).
• Incorporates a branch terminal for easy
branching.
Safety
• FUJI's original Trigger Action mechanism is used in
the emergency stop pushbuttons. They are suitable
for emergency stop and safety. This mechanism
prevents the contacts from moving untill the button
in pushed and locked. (See page 04/180)
• Applicable as a switch for PC board by
combining the socket with a switch.
• Pattern wiring reduces the number of wiring
man-hour and helps prevent faulty wiring.
The operator has IP65
protection for smooth
operation without advere
effects from oil, water, or
dusts.
S
Standard type
Thin type
AF16F0N
AR16E0R
AF16F0R
DR16D0L
DF16F0M
Pushbutton
Selectors Selectors (Key type)
Pushbutton
Pilot lights
Pilot lights
04/129
Command Switches
AR16, DR16 and AF16, DF16
General information
04

n Illuminated pushbutton switches
Operator Flush rectangular Flush rectangular
with guard
Flush square Extended round Flush round
Operator action Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate
Standard
type
Type AR16F0N AR16F5N AR16G0N AR16G5N AR16F0M AR16F5M AR16E0L AR16E5L – –
Appearance
S S S
S
–
See page 04/143 04/143 04/143 04/143
Bezel (mm) 24
18
24
18
18sq. φ18
–
Panel cutting (mm) φ16.2＋0.2
0
Thin type Type AF16F0N AF16F5N – – AF16F0M AF16F5M – AF16F0L AF16F5L
Appearance
S
–
S
–
S
See page 04/155 04/155 04/155
Bezel (mm)
22
28
–
22sq.
–
φ22
Panel cutting (mm) 24.2＋0.2
－0.1
－0.1
19.2＋0.2
–
19.2＋0.2 －0.1 sq.
–
φ19.2＋0.2
－0.1
Legend plate (mm) 19.6×13.6 19.6×13.6 13.6sq. 13.6 13.6
Bezel color Black
Button color (transparent) Green, Red, White *1, Yellow, Orange, Blue
LED
lamp
Color Green, Red, Orange, Yellow, Amber, Blue
Lamp voltage 6V AC/DC, 12V AC/DC, 24V AC/DC
Contact arrangement SPDT, 2PDT
Contact rating 120V AC 1A (AC-13), 24V DC 0.7A (DC-13, T0.95 = 21ms)
240V AC 0.7A (AC-13), 125V DC 0.15A (DC-13, T0.95 = 21ms)
Mechanical durability Momentary action: 1 million operations
Alternate action: 250,000 operations
Electrical durability 100,000 operations (220V AC 0.7A)
Degree of protection (Operator) IP65
Type of terminal Tab (#110) / solder dual-use terminal
Accessories Protective cover *2 ○ *3 – ○ *3 ○ –
Dust-proof cover ○ *4 – ○ *4 ○ –
Terminal cover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Socket Quick
connection
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Connector
use
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PC board
use
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Panel plug ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Notes: *1 A combination of the translucent button and the white legend plate comes to white.
*2 The protective cover and button of the thin type are made of an integral structure.
*3 The protective cover of the thin type is available for momentary action only.
*4 Available for standard type only.
04/130
Command Switches

n Pushbutton switches
Operator Flush rectangular Flush rectangular
with guard
Flush square Extended round Flush round
Operator action Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate
Standard
type
Type AR16F0T AR16F5T AR16G0T AR16G5T AR16F0S AR16F5S AR16E0R AR16E5R – –
Appearance
S S S S
–
See page 04/145 04/145 04/145 04/145
Bezel (mm) 24
18
24
18
18sq. φ18
–
0
Thin type Type AF16F0T AF16F5T – – AF16F0S AF16F5S – AF16F0R AF16F5R
Appearance
S
–
S
–
S
See page 04/157 04/157 04/157
Bezel (mm)
22
28
–
22sq.
–
φ22
－0.1
－0.1
19.2＋0.2
–
19.2＋0.2 －0.1 sq.
–
φ19.2＋0.2
－0.1
Legend plate (mm) 19.6×13.6 19.6×13.6 13.6sq 13.6 13.6
Button color (transparent) Black
Button color Green, Red, Black *1, White *2, Yellow, Orange, Blue
Mechanical durability Momentary action: 1 million operations
Alternate action: 250,000 operations
Accessories Protective cover *3 ○ *4 – ○ *4 ○ –
Dust-proof cover ○ *5 – ○ *5 ○ –
Terminal cover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Socket Quick
connection
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Connector
use
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PC board
use
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Notes: *1 A combination of the translucent button and the black legend plate comes to black button.
*2 A combination of the translucent button and the white legend plate comes to white button.
*3 The protective cover and button of the thin type are made of an integral structure.
*4 The protective cover of the thin type is available for momentary
action only.
*5 Available for standard type only.
04/131
Command Switches
04

n Pilot lights
Lens shape Flush rectangular Flush square Extended round Flush round Dome
Standard
type
Type DR16F0N DR16F0M DR16E0L – DR16D0L
Appearance
S S S
–
S
See page 04/147 04/147 04/147 04/147
Bezel (mm) 24
18
18sq. φ18
–
φ18
0
Thin type Type DF16F0N DF16F0M – DF16F0L –
Appearance
S S
–
S
–
See page 04/159 04/159 04/159
Bezel (mm)
28 22sq.
22
–
φ22
–
－0.1
－0.1
19.2＋0.2
19.2＋0.2 －0.1 sq.
–
－0.1 –
φ19.2＋0.2
Legend plate (mm) 19.6×13.6 13.6sq 13.6 13.6 –
Bezel color Black
Button color (transparent) Green, Red, White *1, Yellow, Orange, Blue
LED
lamp
Color Green, Red, Orange, Yellow, Amber, Blue
Lamp voltage 6V AC/DC, 12V AC/DC, 24V AC/DC
Degree of protection (Lens) IP65
Accessories Terminal cover ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Socket Quick
connection
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Connector
use
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PC board
use
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Note: *1 A combination of the translucent lens and the white legend plate comes to white lens (except for dome type).
04/132
Command Switches

n Selector switches (Knob type)
Operator Knob with
rectangular bezel
Knob with square
bezel
Knob with round
bezel
No. of position 2-position, 3-position 2-position, 3-position 2-position, 3-position
Operator action Maintained,
Spring/manual return,
Spring return
Maintained,
Spring return
Maintained,
Spring return
Standard
type
Type AR16PT AR16PS AR16PR
Appearance
S S S
See page 04/149 04/149 04/149
Bezel (mm) 24
18
18sq. φ18
0
Thin type Type AF16PT AF16PS AF16PR
Appearance
S S S
See page 04/161 04/161 04/161
Bezel (mm)
28 22sq. φ22
22
－0.1
－0.1
19.2＋0.2
19.2＋0.2 －0.1 sq. φ19.2＋0.2
－0.1
Bezel color Black
Color of knob Black
Mechanical durability 250,000 operations
Accessories Terminal cover ○ ○ ○
Socket Quick
connection
○ ○ ○
Connector
use
○ ○ ○
PC board
use
○ ○ ○
Panel plug ○ ○ ○
04/133
Command Switches
04

n Selector switches (Key type)
Operator Key with rectangular
bezel
Key with square
bezel
Key with round
bezel
No. of position 2-position, 3-position 2-position, 3-position 2-position, 3-position
Operator action Maintained,
Spring return
Maintained,
Spring return
Maintained,
Spring return
Standard
type
Type AR16JT AR16JS AR16JR
Appearance
S S S
See page 04/152 04/152 04/152
Bezel (mm) 24
18
18sq. φ18
0
Thin type Type AF16JT AF16JS AF16JR
Appearance
S S S
See page 04/164 04/164 04/164
Bezel (mm)
28 22sq. φ22
22
－0.1
－0.1
19.2＋0.2
19.2＋0.2 －0.1 sq. φ19.2＋0.2
－0.1
Bezel color Black
Key removable position Left (A), Left/Right (B), Left/Center/Right (C), Right (D), Center (E),
Center/Right (F), Left/Center (G)
No. of key types 6 (A, B, C, D, E, F)
Accessories Terminal cover ○ ○ ○
Socket Quick
connection
○ ○ ○
Connector
use
○ ○ ○
PC board
use
○ ○ ○
Panel plug ○ ○ ○
04/134
Command Switches

n Emergency stop pushbutton switches
Operator Illuminated push-lock
(32mm dia)
Illuminated push-lock
(40mm dia)
Push-lock
(32mm dia)
Push-lock
(40mm dia)
Operator action Turn reset or pull-reset Turn reset or pull-reset
Type AR16V0L AR16V1L AR16V0R AR16V1R
Appearance
S S S S
See page 04/182 04/182 04/182 04/182
Button size (mm)
Panel cutting (mm)
φ32 φ40 φ32 φ40
1.7＋0.2mm
0
r max＝0.8mm
φ16.2＋00.2mm
17.9＋00.2mm
Button color Red
LED lamp Color Red -
Lamp voltage 6V AC/DC, 12V AC/DC, 24V AC/DC -
Contact arrangement 1NC, 1NO+1NC, 2NC, 1NO+2NC, 3NC, 1NO+3NC, 4NC
Contact ratings 120V AC 0.3A (AC-15), 24V DC 0.7A (DC-13),
240V AC 0.3A (AC-15), 125V DC 0.15A (DC-13)
Electrical durability 100,000 operations (AC-15, AC-13, AC-12, DC-13, DC-12)
Type of terminal Solder use terminal
Accessories Terminal cover ○ ○ ○ ○
Name plate
(Emergency stop)
○ ○ ○ ○
04/135
Command Switches
04

n Contact ratings
• UL/CSA
• AC (COSø = 0.35)
Contact rating code 120V 240V
Making current Breaking current Making current Breaking current
D300 3.6A 0.6A 1.8A 0.3A
n Specifications (indoor use)
Item • Illuminated pushbutton
switch,
pushbutton switch
• Selector switch • Pilot lights
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250V AC/DC
Durability Mechanical Momentary action:
1 million operations
Alternate action:
250,000 operations
Maintained:
250,000 operations
Spring/manual return:
250,000 operations
Spring return:
250,000 operations
–
Electrical 100,000 operations (at 220V AC 0.7A) –
Operating frequency 1200 operations/hour (On-load factor: 40%) –
Withstand voltage Between live section and grounding 2000V AC, 1 minute
Between opposite polarity live sections 2000V AC, 1 minute –
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2.5kV
Conditional short-circuit current 1000A
Short-circuit protective device gG 2A (IEC60269 Fuse)
Pollution degree 3
Vibration Resonance: frequency 10 to 55Hz, double amplitude 1.0mm
Constant: frequency 16.7Hz, double amplitude 3mm
Shock Malfunction durability; 100m/s2
Mechanical durability; 500m/s2
Operational ambient temperature –10 to +55°C (no icing or no condensation)
Relative humidity (inside control panel) 45 to 85%RH (–5 to + 40°C) (no icing or no condensation)
Degree of protection of operating (displaying) section IP65 (dust-proof, water jet proof): IEC 60529
Degree of protection of terminal section IP2X (Fast-connection socket: AR6S690, Connector socket: AR6S691-C or
Terminal cover: AR2Y261, At the connection)
• TÜV (EN60947-5-1), CCC (GB14048.5), JIS C 8201-5-1
Type of switches Conventional free
air thermal current
Ith
Rated operational current Ie
Rated operational
voltage Ue
AC DC
AC-13
AC-12
(Inductive load)
(Resistive load)
DC-13
(Inductive load)
DC-12
(Resistive load)
Pushbutton switch
Selector switch
5A 24V – – 0.7A *1 1A
120V 1A 1.5A – –
125V – – 0.15A *1 0.2A
240V 0.7A 1A – –
Note: *1 T0.95=21ms
04/136
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16, AF16 and DF16
Ratings and Specifications

n Specifications (Socket)
Item Fast-connection socket Connector socket Socket for PC board
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250V AC/DC 60V AC/DC
Conventional free air thermal current Ith 3A 5A 3A
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2.5kV 0.5kV
Withstand voltage (Between live section and grounding) 2000V AC, 1 minute 1000V AC, 1 minute
Operational ambient temperature -10 to +55°C (no icing or no condensation)
Storage temperature -40 to +70°C
Relative humidity 45 to 85%RH (-5 to +40°C) (no icing or no condensation)
Pollution degree 3
n Degree of protection
• The table below shows the degree of protection stipulated by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) standard (IEC
60529).
Class Degree of protection against human contact or penetration by a
foreign object
Degree of protection against ingress of water
5 • Normal operation secured even if the dust
that can pass through screen of 75μm
mesh invades.
Protection against
water jets
• Protected against water jet from all
directions.
• Water projected by nozzle (6.3mm-inner
dia.) from all directions at 29.4kPa for 3min
at a distance of 3m.
6 • The dust which can pass through screen
of 75μm mesh shall not invade.
Protection against
powerful water
• Protected against powerful water jet from
all directions.
• Water projected by nozzle (12.5mm-inner
dia.) from all directions at 98kPa for 3min
at a distance of 3m.
n Contact reliability
FUJI has confirmed that the product can be used in 1mA circuit conditions at 5V AC or DC. The operable range, however, may
vary depending on the operational ambient conditions and type of load.
04/137
04
Command Switches
Specifications

n Lamp ratings and current consumption
• Illuminated pushbutton switch, Pilot lights
Applied method Lamp operational voltage High-brightness LED lamp
Type Lamp rated voltage Current consumption
without transformer 6V AC/DC DR6L695-A 6V AC/DC Green, Blue: 11mA AC, 7.5mA DC
Red, Amber: 9mA AC, 7.5mA DC
Orange: 10mA AC, 8.5mA DC
12V AC/DC DR6L695-B 12V AC/DC Green, Red, Amber, Blue: 7.5mA AC, 7.5mA DC
Orange: 9mA AC, 8.5mA DC
Yellow: 11mA AC, 8.5mA DC
24V AC/DC DR6L695-E 24V AC/DC Green, Red, Amber, Blue: 7.5mA AC, 7.5mA DC
Orange, Yellow: 9mA AC, 8.5mA DC
Note: A box indicates the luminous color. For details, see the “Combination of Illuminated pushbutton / pilot light color and LED lamp luminous color”.
n Combination of Illuminated pushbutton / pilot light color and LED lamp luminous color
Illuminated pushbutton / pilot light color
(lens color)
Luminous color of high-brightness
LED lamp
Type Type
Green G Green DR6L695-nG
Red R Red DR6L695-nR
White W Orange DR6L695-nW
Yellow Y Yellow DR6L695-nY
Orange A Amber DR6L695-nA
Blue S Blue DR6L695-nS
Note: *1 A box n indicates the lamp operational voltage. For details, see the “Lamp ratings and current consumption”.
n LED durability
Type of lamp Durability (reference) Judgment criterion
LED lamp Approx. 30000h When the brightness is less than 50% of initial value.
Note: The durability of LED lamp is a mean value in all colors.
n Standard approved
UL508 cUL File No.E44592
CSA C22.2 No.14
TÜV: EN60947-5-1 Pushbutton, Illuminated pushbutton: R50116757
Selector: R50116759
CCC: GB14048.5 Switches (except pilot ligths): 2003010305071068
Pilot lights: 2003010305071044
n Standard models approved by international standards
The standard models of AR16 and DR16, AF16 and DF16 series of the φ 16 Command Switches meet UL / CSA requirements,
China Compulsory Certification (CCC) standards, and TÜV EN standards, thus ensuring easier direct or indirect export to North
America and European countries with no safety standard concerns.
04/138
Command Switches
Specifications

AR16 F0N－C2 E3 G
Product category
Category
Standard type
Thin type
Operator shape and action
Code
Standard type
Momentary
F0N
G0N
F0M
E0L
–
Alternate
F5N
G5N
F5M
E5L
–
Contact arrangement and terminal
Color of button
Color
Green
Red
White *1
Yellow
Orange
Blue
LED color
Green
Red
Orange
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Code
GR
WY
AS
Operator shape
Flush rectangular
Flush rectangular with guard
Flush square
Extended round
Flush round
Contact
arrangement
SPDT
2PDT
Code
C1
C2
Type of terminal
Tab (#110) and
solder dual-use terminal
Alternate
F5N
–
F5M
–
F5L
Thin type
Momentary
F0N
–
F0M
–
F0L
Code
AR16
AF16
Note: ・The button is transparent in color.
*1: A combination of the transparent lens
and the white legend plate comes to
white.
Lamp operational voltage and light source
Applied method
Without
transformer
Voltage
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
Code
LED
A3
B3
E3
AR16 F0T－C2 R
Product category
Category
Standard type
Thin type
Code
Standard type
Momentary
F0T
G0T
F0S
E0R
–
Alternate
F5T
G5T
F5S
E5R
–
Color of button
Color
Green
Red
Black *1
White *2
Yellow
Orange
Blue
Code
GRB
WY
AS
Operator shape
Flush rectangular
Flush square
Extended round
Flush round
Contact
arrangement
SPDT
2PDT
Code
C1
C2
Type of terminal
Tab (#110) and
Alternate
F5T
–
F5S
–
F5R
Thin type
Momentary
F0T
–
F0S
–
F0R
Code
AR16
AF16
Notes: ・The button is transparent in color.
*1: A combination of the transparent button
and the black legend plate comes to
black.
*2: A combination of the transparent button
white.
Note: The manufacturing range varies depending on the
model. For details, see “Types and dimensions” of
this catalog.
04/139
04
Command Switches

• Pilot lights
DR16 D0L－E3 W
Product category
Category
Standard type
Thin type
Lens shape
Color of lens
Color
Green
Red
White *1
Yellow
Orange
Blue
LED color
Green
Red
Orange
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Code
GR
WY
AS
Lens shape
Flush rectangular
Flush square
Extended round
Flush round
Dome
Code
Standard type
F0N
F0M
E0L
–
D0L
Thin type
F0N
F0M
–
F0L
–
Code
DR16
DF16
Note: ・The lens is transparent in color.
*1 : A combination of the transparent lens
white (except for dome type).
Lamp operational voltage and light source
Applied method
Without
transformer
Note: The terminal used is a tab (#110) and solder
dual-use terminal.
Voltage
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
Code
LED
A3
B3
E3
Note: The manufacturing range varies depending on the
model. For details, see “Types and dimensions” of
this catalog.
04/140
Command Switches

AR16 PT－2 C1 B
Product category
Category
Standard type
Thin type
Contact
arrangement
SPDT *1
2PDT
Code
C1
C2
Type of terminal
Tab (#110) and
Code
AR16
AF16
Operator shape
Operator shape
Knob with rectangular bezel
Knob with square bezel
Knob with round bezel
Code
PT
PS
PR
Color of knob
Color
Black
Code
B
Note: *1 2-position model only available
No. of positions and operator action
No. of
positions
2-position (90°)
3-position (45°)
Operator action
Maintained
Spring return
(Right to left)
Maintained
(Left to center)
(Right to center)
Spring return
(Left or right to center)
Code
20
36
7
1
• Selector switches (Knob type)
• Key position and contact operation
2-position
Operator action (View form the front) Contact
arrangement
Contact unit Operator position *2
2 0 1 2
1 2
Maintained/90°
1 2
Spring return/90°
SPDT
Left COM
NC
NO
2PDT
Left COM
NC
NO
Right COM
NC
NO
3-position
arrangement
Terminal arrangement
View from the terminal side (the back)
3 6 7 1 1 2 3
2
1 3
Maintained/each
45°
2
1 3
Spring/manual
return/each 45°
2
1 3
Spring/manual
return/each 45°
2
1 3
Spring return/
each 45°
2PDT
Left COM
NC
NO
Right COM
NC
NO
Note: *2 •, : means the contact closed (ON).
NC
NO
COM
Left contact Right contact
04/141
04
Command Switches

AR16 JT－3 E C2 A
Product category
Category
Standard type
Thin type
Contact
arrangement
SPDT *2
2PDT
Code
C1
C2
Type of terminal
Tab (#110) and
Code
AR16
AF16
Operator shape
Operator shape
Key with rectangular bezel
Key with square bezel
Key with round bezel
Code
JT
JS
JR
Types of key
Type *1
Code
A
A
B
B
CC
DD
EE
FF
Note: *2 2-position model only
Key removable position
Key removable
position
Left
Left and right
Left, center and right
Right
Center
Center and right
Left and center
Applicable operator action
2
–
–
–
–
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
3 6
–
–
–
–
7
–
–
–
–
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
Code
ABCDEF
G
Note: *1 “A” is standard.
No. of
positions
2-position (90°)
3-position (45°)
Operator action
Maintained
Spring return
(Right to left)
Maintained
(Left to center)
(Right to center)
Spring return
(Left or right to center)
Code
20
36
7
1
• Selector switches (Key type)
• Key position and contact operation
2-position
arrangement
2 0 1 2
1 2
Maintained/90°
1 2
Spring return/90°
SPDT
Left COM
NC
NO
2PDT
Left COM
NC
NO
Right COM
NC
NO
3-position
arrangement
Terminal arrangement
View from the terminal side (the back)
3 6 7 1 1 2 3
2
1 3
Maintained/each
45°
2
1 3
Spring/manual
return/each 45°
2
1 3
Spring/manual
return/each 45°
2
1 3
Spring return/
each 45°
2PDT
Left COM
NC
NO
Right COM
NC
NO
Note: *3 •, : means the contact closed (ON).
NC
NO
COM
04/142
Command Switches

1. Standard type, AR16 and DR16
n Illuminated pushbutton switches (LED illuminated)
• Type number system
AR16 F0N – C2 E3 G
Product category: Standard type
Color of button
Lamp operational voltage and
light source
• Type
Operator Appearance
(Standard type)
Lamp
operational
voltage
Conntact
arrangement
Momentary action
Type
Alternate action
Type
Flush rectangular AR16F0N, F5N 6V AC/DC SPDT AR16F0N-C1A3 AR16F5N-C1A3
2PDT AR16F0N-C2A3 AR16F5N-C2A3
12V AC/DC SPDT AR16F0N-C1B3 AR16F5N-C1B3
2PDT AR16F0N-C2B3 AR16F5N-C2B3
24V AC/DC SPDT AR16F0N-C1E3 AR16F5N-C1E3
2PDT AR16F0N-C2E3 AR16F5N-C2E3
Flush rectangular
with guard
AR16G0N, G5N 6V AC/DC SPDT AR16G0N-C1A3 AR16G5N-C1A3
2PDT AR16G0N-C2A3 AR16G5N-C2A3
12V AC/DC SPDT AR16G0N-C1B3 AR16G5N-C1B3
2PDT AR16G0N-C2B3 AR16G5N-C2B3
24V AC/DC SPDT AR16G0N-C1E3 AR16G5N-C1E3
2PDT AR16G0N-C2E3 AR16G5N-C2E3
Flush square AR16F0M, F5M 6V AC/DC SPDT AR16F0M-C1A3 AR16F5M-C1A3
2PDT AR16F0M-C2A3 AR16F5M-C2A3
12V AC/DC SPDT AR16F0M-C1B3 AR16F5M-C1B3
2PDT AR16F0M-C2B3 AR16F5M-C2B3
24V AC/DC SPDT AR16F0M-C1E3 AR16F5M-C1E3
2PDT AR16F0M-C2E3 AR16F5M-C2E3
Extended round AF16E0L, E5L 6V AC/DC SPDT AR16E0L-C1A3 AR16E5L-C1A3
2PDT AR16E0L-C2A3 AR16E5L-C2A3
12V AC/DC SPDT AR16E0L-C1B3 AR16E5L-C1B3
2PDT AR16E0L-C2B3 AR16E5L-C2B3
24V AC/DC SPDT AR16E0L-C1E3 AR16E5L-C1E3
2PDT AR16E0L-C2E3 AR16E5L-C2E3
Note: • See page 04/144 for the outline dimensions.
• Button color
Color Green Red White Yellow Orange Blue
Code G R W *1 Y A S
Note: *1 A combination of the transparent button and the white legend plate
comes to white.
04/143
04
Command Switches
Type numbers and dimensions

• Dimensions, mm
24
21
18
15
24
21
18sq.
15sq.
18sq.
18
15
9.5
28.4
7 6.5
Packing
Packing
7
28.4
Packing
7
28.4
7
28.4
15 15
9.5
6.5
9.5
6.5
15
9.5
6.5
2.8
10
2.8
2.8
10
10
2.8
10
5.8
0.5
13.6
0.5
AR16G0N, G5N
5.8
0.5
13.6
0.5
5.8
0.5
13.6
0.5
5.8
0.5
13.6
0.5
Flush rectangular
AR16F0N, F5N
Flush square
AR16F0M, F5M
Extended round
AR16E0L, E5L
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Packing
18
04/144
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

AR16 F0T – C2 G
Color of button
• Type
Operator Appearance
(Standard type)
Conntact
arrangement
• Button color
Color Green Red Black White Yellow Orange Blue
Code G R B *1 W *2 Y A S
Notes: *1 A combination of the transparent button and the black legend plate
comes to black.
*2 A combination of the transparent button and the white legend plate
comes to white.
Momentary action
Type
Alternate action
Type
Flush rectangular AR16F0T, F5T SPDT AR16F0T-C1 AR16F5T-C1
2PDT AR16F0T-C2 AR16F5T-C2
Flush rectangular
with guard
AR16G0T, G5T SPDT AR16G0T-C1 AR16G5T-C1
2PDT AR16G0T-C2 AR16G5T-C2
Flush square AR16F0S, F5S SPDT AR16F0S-C1 AR16F5S-C1
2PDT AR16F0S-C2 AR16F5S-C2
Extended round AR16E0R, E5R SPDT AR16E0R-C1 AR16E5R-C1
2PDT AR16E0R-C2 AR16E5R-C2
04/145
04
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

• Dimensions, mm
24
18
15
21
24
21 18
18sq.
15sq.
18sq.
15
9.5
7 6.5
15
2.8
10
2.8
2.8
10
10
2.8
10
28.4
Packing
7
Nut Washer
Packing
28.4
Packing
7
28.4
7
28.4
5.8
0.5
AR16G0T, G5T
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
9.5
6.5
9.5
6.5
9.5
6.5
15
Flush rectangular
AR16F0T, F5T
Flush square
AR16F0S, F5S
Extended round
AR16E0R, E5R
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Packing
15
18
04/146
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

n Pilot lights (LED illuminated)
DR16 D0L – E3 W
Lens shape
Color of lens
light source
• Type
Lens Appearance
(Standard type)
LED lamp operational
voltage
Type
Flush rectangular DR16F0N 6V AC/DC DR16F0N-A3
12V AC/DC DR16F0N-B3
24V AC/DC DR16F0N-E3
Flush square DR16F0M 6V AC/DC DR16F0M-A3
12V AC/DC DR16F0M-B3
24V AC/DC DR16F0M-E3
Extended round DR16E0L 6V AC/DC DR16E0L-A3
12V AC/DC DR16E0L-B3
24V AC/DC DR16E0L-E3
Dome DR16D0L 6V AC/DC DR16D0L-A3
12V AC/DC DR16D0L-B3
24V AC/DC DR16D0L-E3
• Lens color
Code G R W *1 Y A S
Note: *1 A combination of the transparent lens and the white legend plate
comes to white (except for dome type).
04/147
04
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

• Dimensions, mm
18sq.
Flush rectangular
DR16F0N
Flush square
DR16F0M
Extended round
DR16E0L
Dome
DR16D0L
24
21
18
15
18sq.
15sq.
18sq.
18sq.
9.5
6.5
15
28.4
9.5
6.5
15
9.5
6.5
14
6.5
2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
7
Nut Washer
Packing
28.4
7
Packing
28.4
7
Packing
28.4
7
13.6
0.5
13.6
0.5
13.6
0.5
13.6
0.5
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Packing
15
18
15
04/148
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

AR16 PT – 2 C2 B
Operator shape
Color of knob: Black
• Type
2-position
Operator and
appearance
(Standard type)
No. of
positions
Contact
arrangement
Type Contact operation
Maintained/90° Spring return/90°
Contact unit *1 Operator
position *2
1 2
Knob with rectangular
bezel/AR16PT
2-position SPDT AR16PT-2C1B AR16PT-0C1B
Left COM
NC
AR16PS-2C1B AR16PS-0C1B
AR16PR-2C1B AR16PR-0C1B NO
Knob with square
bezel/AR16PS
2PDT AR16PT-2C2B AR16PT-0C2B
Left COM
NC
AR16PS-2C2B AR16PS-0C2B NO
Knob with round
bezel/AR16PR
Right COM
NC
AR16PR-2C2B AR16PR-0C2B
NO
Note: *1 Terminal arrangement of contact (View from the terminal side (the back)).
NC
NO
COM
*2 •: Means the contact closed (ON).
• See page 04/151 for the outline dimensions.
1 2 1 2
04/149
04
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

3-position
Operator and
appearance
(Standard type)
No. of
positions
Contact
arrangement
2
2
Maintained/each 45° Spring return/each 45°
position *2
1 2 3
bezel/AR16PT
Knob with square
bezel/AR16PS
Knob with round
bezel/AR16PR
3-position 2PDT AR16PT-3C2B AR16PT-1C2B
Left COM
NC
Right COM
NC
NO
2
2
Spring/manual return/each 45° Spring/manual return/each 45°
position *2
1 2 3
AR16PT-6C2B AR16PT-7C2B
Left COM
NC
Right COM
NC
NO
Notes: *1 Terminal arrangement of contact (View from the terminal side (the back)).
NC
NO
COM
*2 •, : means the contact closed (ON).
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
04/150
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

• Dimensions, mm
AR16PT
AF16PS
Knob with round bezel
AF16PR
24
18
28.4 20.5
9.5
7.5
Nut Washer
Packing
28.4 20.5
9.5
7.5
Packing
28.4 20.5
9.5
7.5
18sq.
18sq.
2.8
10
2.8
10
2.8
10
7
7
7
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
Nut Washer
Nut Washer
Packing
18
17 17 17
04/151
04
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

AR16 JT – 2 B C2 A
Operator shape
Type of key
• Type
2-position
Operator and
appearance
(Standard type)
No. of
positions
Contact
arrangement
position *2
1 2
Key with rectangular
bezel/AR16JT
2-position SPDT AR16JT-2nC1A AR16JT-0AC1A
Left COM
NC
AR16JS-2nC1A AR16JS-0AC1A
AR16JR-2nC1A AR16JR-0AC1A NO
Key with square bezel/
AR16JS
2PDT AR16JT-2nC2A AR16JT-0AC2A
Left COM
NC
AR16JS-2nC2A AR16JS-0AC2A NO
Key with round bezel/
AR16JR
Right COM
NC
AR16JR-2nC2A AR16JR-0AC2A
NO
Notes: *1 Terminal arrangement of contact (View from the terminal side (the back)).
NC
NO
COM
*2 •: Means the contact closed (ON).
1 2 1 2
• Key removable position
Specify the key removal position in the square n mark.
Key removable
position
Applied operator action Code
2 0
Left A
Left•Right – B
Left – D
: Available –: Not available
• Type of key
Type *1 A B C D E F
Code A B C D E F
*1 A is standard.
04/152
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

3-position
Operator and
appearance
(Standard type)
No. of
positions
Contact
arrangement
2
2
position *2
1 2 3
bezel/AR16JT
AR16JS
AR16JR
3-position 2PDT AR16JT-3nC2A AR16JT-1EC2A
Left COM
NC
AR16JS-3nC2A AR16JS-1EC2A NO
Right COM
NC
AR16JR-3nC2A AR16JR-1EC2A
NO
2
2
position *2
1 2 3
AR16JT-6nC2A AR16JT-7nC2A
Left COM
NC
AR16JS-6nC2A AR16JS-7nC2A NO
Right COM
NC
AR16JR-6nC2A AR16JR-7nC2A
NO
Notes: *1 Terminal arrangement of contact (View form the terminal side (the back)).
NC
NO
COM
*2 •, : Means the contact closed (ON).
1 3
1 3
1 3
1 3
• Key removal position
Specify the key removal position in the square n mark.
Key removable
position
Applied operator action Code
3 6 7 1
Left – – A
Left•Right – – – B
Left•Center•
– – – C
Right
Right – – D
Center E
Center•Right – – F
Left•Center – – G
• Type of key
Type *1 A B C D E F
Code A B C D E F
*1 A is standard.
04/153
04
Command Switches
AR16 and DR16

• Dimensions, mm
AR16JS
AR16JR
28.4 28
10
9.5
7.5
Washer
Nut
28.4 28
10
9.5
Washer
Packing
28.4 28
24
18
18sq.
18sq.
Key with rectangular bezel
AR16JT
7.5
Nut
10
9.5
7.5
Washer
Nut
2.8
10
7
2.8
10
2.8
10
7
7
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
2
2
2
Packing
Packing
18
04/154
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

n Illuminated pushbutton switches (LED lamp)
AF16 F0N – C2 E3 G
Prodect category: Thin type
Color of button
light source
• Type
Operator Appearance
(Thin type)
LED lamp
operational
voltage
Conntact
arrangement
Momentary action
Type
Alternate action
Type
Flush rectangular AF16F0N, F5N 6V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0N-C1A3 AF16F5N-C1A3
2PDT AF16F0N-C2A3 AF16F5N-C2A3
12V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0N-C1B3 AF16F5N-C1B3
2PDT AF16F0N-C2B3 AF16F5N-C2B3
24V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0N-C1E3 AF16F5N-C1E3
2PDT AF16F0N-C2E3 AF16F5N-C2E3
Flush square AF16F0M, F5M 6V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0M-C1A3 AF16F5M-C1A3
2PDT AF16F0M-C2A3 AF16F5M-C2A3
12V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0M-C1B3 AF16F5M-C1B3
2PDT AF16F0M-C2B3 AF16F5M-C2B3
24V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0M-C1E3 AF16F5M-C1E3
2PDT AF16F0M-C2E3 AF16F5M-C2E3
Flush round AF16F0L, F5L 6V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0L-C1A3 AF16F5L-C1A3
2PDT AF16F0L-C2A3 AF16F5L-C2A3
12V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0L-C1B3 AF16F5L-C1B3
2PDT AF16F0L-C2B3 AF16F5L-C2B3
24V AC/DC SPDT AF16F0L-C1E3 AF16F5L-C1E3
2PDT AF16F0L-C2E3 AF16F5L-C2E3
Note: • The panel cutting dimensions differ depending on the operator shape of thin type model. See page 04/167.
• For the dimensions, see page 04/156.
•Button color
Replace the mark by the color code.
Code G R W *1 Y A S
Note: *1 A combination of the translucent button and the white legend plate
comes to white lens.
04/155
04
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

• Dimensions, mm
5.8
0.5
13.6
0.5
5.8
0.5
13.6
0.5
5.8
0.5
13.6
0.5
28
21
22
15
22sq.
15sq.
22
15
35.9 2
Nut
Panel retainer
7
Panel thickness: 1 to 6
Nut
35.9 2
Panel retainer
7
Nut
35.9 2
Panel retainer
7
2.8
10
2.8
10
2.8
10
Flush rectangular
AF16F0N, F５N
Flush square
AF16F0M, F５M
Flush round
AF16F0L, F5L
Packing
Packing
Packing
04/156
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

AF16 F0T – C2 G
Prodect category: Thin type
Color of button
• Type
Operator Appearance
(Thin type)
Contact
arrangement
Momentary action
Type
Alternate action
Type
Flush rectangular AF16F0T, F5T SPDT AF16F0T-C1 AF16F5T-C1
2PDT AF16F0T-C2 AF16F5T-C2
Flush square AF16F0S, F5S SPDT AF16F0S-C1 AF16F5S-C1
2PDT AF16F0S-C2 AF16F5S-C2
Flush round AF16F0R, F5R SPDT AF16F0R-C1 AF16F5R-C1
2PDT AF16F0R-C2 AF16F5R-C2
Note: • The panel cutting dimensions differ depending on the operator shape of thin type model. See page 04/167.
• Button color
Replace the mark by the color code.
Color Green Black Red White Yellow Orange Blue
Code G B *1 R W *2 Y A S
Notes: *1 A combination of the translucent button and the black legend plate
comes to black.
*2 A combination of the translucent button and the white legend plate
comes to white.
04/157
04
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

• Dimensions, mm
Flush rectangular
AF16F0T, F５T
Flush square
AF16F0S, F５S
Flush round
AF16F0R, F５R
28
21
22
15
22sq.
15sq.
22
35.9 2
15
2.8
10
2.8
10
2.8
10
Nut
Panel retainer
35.9 2
Nut
Panel retainer
35.9 2
Nut
Panel retainer
7
7
7
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
Packing
Packing
Packing
04/158
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

n Pilot lights (LED lamp)
DF16 F0N – E3 W
Product category: Thin type
Lens shape
Color of lens
light source
• Type
Lens Appearance
(Thin type)
LED lamp operational
voltage
Type
Flush rectangular DF16F0N 6V AC/DC DF16F0N-A3
12V AC/DC DF16F0N-B3
24V AC/DC DF16F0N-E3
Flush square DF16F0M 6V AC/DC DF16F0M-A3
12V AC/DC DF16F0M-B3
24V AC/DC DF16F0M-E3
Flush round DF16F0L 6V AC/DC DF16F0L-A3
12V AC/DC DF16F0L-B3
24V AC/DC DF16F0L-E3
Note: • The panel cutting dimensions differ depending on the lens shape of thin type model. See page 04/167.
• Lens color
Code G R W *1 Y A S
Note: *1 A combination of the transparent lens and the white legend plate
comes to white.
04/159
04
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

• Dimensions, mm
28
21
22
15 22sq.
15sq.
22
15
35.9 2
35.9 2
35.9 2
2.8 2.8 2.8
7
7
7
Nut
Panel retainer
Nut
Panel retainer
13.6
0.5
13.6
0.5
13.6
0.5
Packing
Packing
Nut
Panel retainer
Packing
Flush rectangular
DF16F0N
Flush square
DF16F0M
Flush round
DF16F0L
04/160
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

AF16 PT – 2 C2 B
Product category: Thin type
Operator shape
Color of knob: Black
• Type
2-position
Operator
(Thin type)
Conntact
arrangement
1 2 1 2
position *2
1 2
bezel/AF16PT
SPDT AF16PT-2C1B AF16PT-0C1B
Left COM
NC
AF16PS-2C1B AF16PS-0C1B
AF16PR-2C1B AF16PR-0C1B NO
Knob with square
bezel/AF16PS
2PDT AF16PT-2C2B AF16PT-0C2B
Left COM
NC
AF16PS-2C2B AF16PS-0C2B NO
Knob with round
bezel/AF16PR
Right COM
NC
AF16PR-2C2B AF16PR-0C2B
NO
Notes: *1 Terminal arrangement of contact (view from terminal side).
NC
NO
COM
*2 •: Contact closed.
• The panel cutting dimensions differ depending on the operator shape of thin type model. See page 04/167.
04/161
04
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

3-position
Operator
(Thin type)
Contact
arrangement
2
1 3
2
1 3
position *2
1 2 3
Knob with flush
square/AF16PT
Knob with square
bezel/AF16PS
Knob with round
bezel/AF16PR
2PDT AF16PT-3C2B AF16PT-1C2B
Left COM
NC
Right COM
NC
NO
2
1 3
2
1 3
position *2
1 2 3
AF16PT-6C2B AF16PT-7C2B
Left COM
NC
Right COM
NC
NO
NC
NO
COM
*2 •, : Contact closed.
04/162
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

• Dimensions, mm
AF16PS
Knob
AF16PR
35.9 13
35.9 13
35.9 13
28
22
17 17 17
2
2
2
22sq.
22
AF16PT
Nut
Panel retainer
Nut
Panel retainer
Nut
Panel retainer
7
7
2.8
10
2.8
10
7
2.8
10
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
Packing
Packing
Packing
04/163
04
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

AF16 JT – 2 B C2 A
Operator shape
Type of key
• Type
2-position
Operator
(Thin type)
Contact
arrangement
1 2 1 2
position *2
1 2
bezel/AF16JT
SPDT AF16JT-2nC1A AF16JT-0AC1A
Left COM
NC
AF16JS-2nC1A AF16JS-0AC1A
AF16JR-2nC1A AF16JR-0AC1A NO
AF16JS
2PDT AF16JT-2nC2A AF16JT-0AC2A
Left COM
NC
AF16JS-2nC2A AF16JS-0AC2A NO
AF16JR
Right COM
NC
AF16JR-2nC2A AF16JR-0AC2A
NO
NC
NO
COM
*2 •: Contact closed.
Replace the n mark by the removable positiom code.
Removable
position
Applied operatior position Code
2 0
Left A
Left•Right – B
Left – C
• Type of key
Type *1 A B C D E F
Code A B C D E F
*1 A is standard.
04/164
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

3-position
Operator
(Thin type)
Contact
arrangement
2
1 3
2
1 3
position *2
1 2 3
Key with Flush square/
AF16JT
AF16JS
AF16JR
2PDT AF16JT-3nC2A AF16JT-1EC2A
Left COM
NC
AF16JS-3nC2A AF16JS-1EC2A NO
Right COM
NC
AF16JR-3nC2A AF16JR-1EC2A
NO
2
1 3
2
1 3
position *2
1 2 3
AF16JT-6nC2A AF16JT-7nC2A
Left COM
NC
AF16JS-6nC2A AF16JS-7nC2A NO
Right COM
NC
AF16JR-6nC2A AF16JR-7nC2A
NO
NC
NO
COM
*2 •, : Contact closed.
Replace the n mark by the removable positiom code.
Removable
position
Applied operatior position Code
3 6 7 1
Left – – A
Left•Right – – – B
Left•Center•
– – – C
Right
Right – – D
Center E
Center•Right – – F
Left•Center – – G
• Type of key
Type *1 A B C D E F
Code A B C D E F
*1 A is standard.
04/165
04
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

• Dimensions, mm
Key with recrangular bezel
AF16JT
AF16JS
AF16JR
20.5
2.5
2
35.9
Nut
Panel retainer
35.9 20.5
Panel retainer
Packing
2.5
35.9 20.5
28
22
22sq.
22
7
7
7
2.8
10
2.8
10
2.8
10
2
2
2
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
5.8
0.5
Packing
Nut
Nut
Panel retainer
Packing
2
2.5
2
04/166
Command Switches
AF16 and DF16

Safety Precautions
Read the Operating Instructions carefully before mounting,
wiring, operating, servicing, or inspecting the command switch.
Make sure that the Operating Instructions is delivered to the
final user of the command switch.
• The safety precautions are classified into two levels, Warning
and Caution, with meanings described as follows:
Warning : If operation is incorrect, a dangerous situation
may occur, resulting in death or serious injuries.
Caution : If operation is incorrect, a dangerous situation
may occur, resulting in minor to medium
injuries or physical damage to equipment.
An item described under CAUTION may result in a serious
accident, depending on the situation.
Warning
• Do not touch or approach any live part while power is supplied. An
electric shock or burning may result.
• Be sure to turn off the power before mounting, dismounting, wiring,
or inspecting the product. An electric shock, burning from short-circuiting
or equipment malfunction may result.
Caution
• Wire the product according to the wiring instructions in the Operating
Instructions. Make sure that the size of the wires is suitable for the
voltage and applied current. The wrong wiring may result in fire,
accidents or malfunctions.
• Treat the product as industrial waste when it is to be discarded.
n Panel cutout, mm
• Standard type (common)
• Thin type (The panel cutout dimension varies depending on
the operator or lens shape.)
• Rectangular type
24.2+0.2
-0.1
• Square type
19.2+0.2
-0.1
• Round type
16.2
15 +0.2
0
+0 .2
0
16.2+0.2
0
Note: When changing the
operating angle position
of the selector switch, the
panel cutout also requires
an angle change.
18.1+0.2
0
0.2
19.2 + 0
19.2
sq.
+0.2
-0.1
-0.1
19.2+0.2
Note: When changing the
operating angle position
of the selector switch, the
panel cutout also requires
an angle change.
n Installation on panel
• As shown in the figure below, insert the switch main unit
into the mounting hole from the front of the panel, attach the
washer and tightening nut from the back of the panel, and
securely tighten the nut with the wrench (AHX601).
Note: The proper tightening torque is 0.6 to 1.0 N•m.
Packing
Switch main body
Panel
Tightening wrench
(AHX601)
Tightening nut *1
Washer
Note: *1 Do not use pliers or other improper tools to tighten the nut, or tighten it
excessively, Otherwise, the nut may be damaged or the switch may
malfunction.
• Thin type
As shown in the figure below, insert the switch main unit into
the mounting hole from the front of the panel, attach the panel
retainer from the back of the panel, and securely tighten the
nut with the wrench (AHX601).
Note: The proper tightening torque is 0.6 to 1.0 N•m.
Packing
Switch main unit
Panel
Tightening wrench
(AHX601)
Tightening nut *1
Panel retainer
Note: *1 Do not use pliers or other improper tools to tighten the nut, or tighten it
excessively, Otherwise, the nut may be damaged or the switch may
malfunction.
n Applicable panel thickness
Tables 1 and 2 show applicable panel thickness.
Table 1 Standard type (AR16/DR16 series)
Mounting condition Applicable panel
thickness, mm
With
accessories
Protective cover 1 to 4
Dust-tight cover 1 to 4
Various sockets 1 to 3.2
Terminal cover 1 to 3.2
Protective cover + various sockets 1 to 1.6
Protective cover + Terminal cover 1 to 1.6
Dust-tight cover + various sockets Cannot be used.
Dust-tight cover + Terminal cover Cannot be used.
When requiring rotation prevention or positional stabilization
When requiring rotation prevention or positional stabilization
04/167
04
Command Switches
Panel cutout and mounting

Table 2 Thin type (AF16/DF16 series)
Mounting condition Applicable panel
thickness, mm
With
accessories
Protective cover 1 to 4
Various sockets 1 to 3.2
Terminal cover 1 to 3.2
Protective cover + various sockets 1 to 3.2
Protective cover + Terminal cover 1 to 3.2
n High-density mounting
Minimum mounting space (pitch) without accessories, mm
• Standard type (AR16/DR16 series)
Illuminated pushbuttons, pushbuttons, selectors, and pilot lights
①Rectangular ②Square ③Round, dome
18
24 18 18
Note: Determine the mounting pitch by taking the operatbility and wiring work
into consideration.
①Rectangular ②Square ③Round, dome
22
22
Note: Determine the mounting pitch by taking the operatbility and wiring work
into consideration.
18
18
28 22 22
22
• Thin type (AF16/DF16 series)
Illuminated pushbuttons, pushbuttons, selectors, and pilot lights
*1 43: with the cover fully *1 43: with the cover fully 28
*1
Minimum mounting space (pitch) with accessories, mm
• Protective cover AHX669 and AHX826
(Standard type)
24
*1 43: with the cover fully opened
25 *1
• Protective cover AHX671
(Standard type)
28
22
22
30
22
24
24
24
18
25 *1
• Protective cover AF6D826
(Thin type)
• Protective cover AF6D827
(Thin type)
• Dust-tight cover AHX668
(Standard type)
• Dust-tight cover AHX822
(Standard type)
• Minimum mounting spaces (pitch) with sockets, such as Fast-
Connection socket (AR6S690), connector socket (AR6S691) and
PC board-use socket (AR6S692) are the same as those without
accessories.
Note: Determine the mounting pitch by taking the operability and wiring
workability into consideration.
24
*1 43: with the cover fully *1 43: with the cover fully 25 28
22
22
30
22
24
24
24
18
25 *1
24
25 *1
28
22
22
30
22
24
24
24
18
25 *1
24
22
22
30
22
24
24
24
18
25 *1
04/168
Command Switches
Panel cutout and mounting

Safety Precautions
Read the Operating Instructions carefully before mounting,
wiring, operating, servicing, or inspecting the command switch.
Make sure that the Operating Instructions is delivered to the
final user of the command switch.
• The safety precautions are classified into two levels, Warning
and Caution, with meanings described as follows:
Warning : If operation is incorrect, a dangerous situation
may occur, resulting in death or serious injuries.
Caution : If operation is incorrect, a dangerous situation
may occur, resulting in minor to medium
injuries or physical damage to equipment.
An item described under CAUTION may result in a serious
accident, depending on the situation.
Warning
or inspecting the product. An electric shock, burning from short-circuiting,
or equipment malfunction may result.
Caution
voltage and applied current. The wrong wiring may result in fire,
accidents, or malfunctions.
n Method of replacing color lens, legend plate, and screen
Replacing color lens (screen)
• Standard type (AR16/DR16 series)
To remove the color lens, fit the color lens remover (AHX618)
to the grooves in the color lens and pull out the lens, or pry the
lens lightly with a small slotted screwdriver.
• Thin type (AF16/DF16 Series)
To remove the color lens, pry the lens lightly with a small
slotted screwdriver.
If one side of the color lens is separated from the screen,
further insert the screwdriver and remove the color lens
together with the screen. Do not pry the packing when doing
this.
To fit the color lens, align the protrusion of switch main body
with the groove of the screen, and press-fit them.
Color lens remover
(AHX618)
Color lens
Small slotted driver
(I type; nominal width: 3)
Color lens
Screen groove
Protrusion of main unit
Color lens
Screen groove
Packing
Protrusion of main unit
• Removing screen
Insert the tip of a small slotted screwdriver into the groove and
press down the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow.
Color lens
Screen
04/169
04
Command Switches
Notes on use

Fitting color lens to screen
• Rectangular type
Set the textured surface side of the legend plate with the
screen side, then press-fit the color lens. When press-fitting,
make sure that your fingers do not touch the reflective surface
inside the screen.
（AR6C633）
Color lens mating groove
（AR6P667）
Screen mating protrusion
Legend plate
Textured surface
(back side)
• Square type
Set the textured surface side of the legend plate with the
screen side, align the screen protrusion with the color lens
groove, and press-fit together. When press-fitting, make sure
that your fingers do not touch the reflective surface inside the
screen.
（AR6C632）
Color lens groove
（AR6P666）
Legend plate
Screen protrusion
Textured surface (back side)
• Round type
Align the protrusion of the legend plate with the groove of the
screen, also align the screen protrusion and color lens groove,
and press-fit together. When press-fitting, make sure that your
fingers do not touch the reflective surface inside the screen.
（AR6C631）
Color lens groove
（AR6P665）
Legend plate protursion
Textured surface (back side)
Screen protrusion
Screen groove
• For alternate action type of illuminated pushbutton
switches and pushbutton switches, do not remove the color
lenses (screens) in locked (depressed) state. The internal
mechanisms may be damaged.
n Engraving legend plate
Engrave the surface of the legend plate.
• Material: Acrylic resin
• Engraving depth: 0.5 mm max.
• Paint: Use a paint that has alcohol as its main ingredient,
such as melamine paint, phthalic acid paint, or acrylic
paint.
• Legend plate size
Shape Size, mm
Rectangular 17.3
(Engraving range)
Textured surface
(back side)
11.3
(Engraving
range)
13.6
(Outer size)
19.6 (Outer size)
Square
Textured surface
(back side)
13.6sq.
(Outer size)
11.3sq.
(Engraving
range)
Round
Textured surface
(back side)
13.6
(Outer size)
11.3
(Engraving
range)
Notes: *1 A legend sheet may be used, provided that the external dimensions
do not exceed the corresponding outer size specified in the above
table and that the thickness is 0.1 mm or below. (No legend sheets are
provided with the product. Please prepare on customer side.)
*2 Do not engrave any part other than the legend plate.
n Changing the operating angle position of selector switch
The bezel is separated from the knob (key), which makes it
easy to change the operating angle position in 45° increments
(the AR16 series rectangular or square type only).
The following figures show a knob type example. The key type
is the same.
Bezel
90° 2
Bezel
Bezel protrusion
Bezel groove
1
1
2
(Standard)
90°
Separate the bezel
from the knob.
The desired position can be set in
45° intervals.
Set the knob to the desired position,
align the groove of the knob,
and press-fit the knob.
04/170
Command Switches
Notes on use

n Method of replacing lamp
• To remove the LED lamp, insert the lamp changer (AHX672)
in the LED lamp and pull out the LED lamp.
To mount the LED lamp, align the lamp terminal side of the
main unit with the electrode side of the LED lamp, lightly
hold the lamp by hand or with the head of the lamp changer
(AHX672), and insert the lamp.
The LED lamp has no polarity, so it can be powered by either
AC or DC.
Main unit
LED lamp (DR6L695)
Electrode side
Part A: For LED lamps
Lamp changer (AHX672)
• Handling of LEDs
LED whose luminous color is green or blue is sensitive to
static electricity. Be careful when handling the LED. Take
thorough measures against static electricity and surges when
handling the product. The following anti-electrostatic measure
is recommended.
Use a wristband or anti-electrostatic glove when replacing LED
lamps.
n Wiring
• Wiring to tab terminal
Use 110 (2.8mm) series receptacles for tab terminals.
• Pay attention to the following points when soldering.
Type of solder: Use resin-core solder.
Use a soldering iron with a maximum power consumption of
60W (350(C) within five seconds. Make sure that the terminal
is free of tension during soldering. Also, do not deform the
terminal.
• The melting point of lead-free solder is slightly high, which
may make soldering difficult. Use a soldering iron that has a
large soldering tip or high heat generation.
• Connectable wires
Two solid wires with a maximum diameter of 0.8 mm (solder)
One stranded wire with a maximum area of 0.75 mm2 (solder)
Flat-type connection terminal
(2.8 -1.25-5) 0.5 to 1.25mm2
(2.8 -0.5-5) 0.2 to 0.5mm2
• Use of contact blocks
When using NO and NC contacts in the same contact block,
avoid connection that involves opposite polarity or wiring from
different types of power supply.
• For wiring to adjacent terminals, use the terminal cover
(AR6Y261) to prevent short-circuit, or an insulation tube to
assure isolation. For solder terminals, caution is required if
thick wires, in particular, are connected or a large quantity of
solder is used.
• Terminal arrangement
Model Circuit diagram (example) Terminal arrangement
(view from the terminal
(back) side)
Illuminated
pushbuttons
(2PDT)
2 2
a b
4 4
[TOP] ( )
Display side
NC
NO
COM
1 1 a b
Left-side
contact
Right-side
contact
Pushbuttons
and selector
switches
(2PDT)
2 2
4 4
1 1
Pilot lights
a b
[TOP] ( )
Display side
a b
Note: Only the left-side contact is applicable to the SPDT mechanism.
04/171
04
Command Switches
Notes on use

•• Fully insert the key into the switch and turn the key. Do not
pull on the key while turning it.
•• Operate the key with a torque not exceeding 0.1N•m.
•• Do not forcibly insert or extract the key.
•• Do not attempt to operate the switch with the key insufficiently
inserted or insert the wrong key. Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
n Fast-connection socket
• Standed wire : 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 (AWG22 to AWG18)
• Single wire : 0.5 to 1 mm dia.
•• Recommended ferrule : Phoenix Contact, part number AI0, 34-8TQ
Wire size : 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)
Crimping tool : CRIMPFOX UD6-6
Note :• Use a crimping tool with a hexagonal or round
cross section.
Sheath external diameter: 2.8 mm dia. Max.
• Wire sheath stripping length
11±1mm
Note : If ferrules are used, securely insert the wire sheath
inside a resin shell. Cut the end of the wire the same
length as the ferrule or cut it at a position approximately
0.5 mm longer.
Check the length using the strip gauge on the surface of the
socket displayed on the model nameplate. If standed wire is
used, twist the wire so that there are no loose strands after
stripping.
• Connection method
(1)• Insert the wire while pressing the button on the insertion
slot with a small flat-head screwdriver (tip width of 2 mm
max.). Release the button when the wire is all the way
seated in the switch.
(2)• When disconnecting the wire, pull out the wire while
pressing the button on the insertion slot with a small flat-head
screwdriver. Cut the bare part of the wire if it was
previously used, and then newly remove the sheath to
reuse the wire.
(3)• Insert a single wire for each insertion slot.
(4)• Do not pull on the wires with excessive force (15 N or more)
when you perform wiring. Make sure that not extemal force
is exerted on the wires after wiring has been completed.
The next time that a wire is inserted, the parts that support
the wire may change shape and result in conduction failure.
• Terminal arrangement (Rear-side View)
n LED Lamps
•• LED lamp malfunctioning (incorrect lighting)
The LED lamp incorporates a circuit to prevent
malfunctioning. Compared with conventional models, this
LED lamp is less likely to malfunction, but it incorporates no
absolute countermeasures.
A minute current (approximately 0.25 mA) turns on the LED
lamp. A leakage current from the surge absorption circuit or
noncontact circuit, or stray capacitance between cables, may
also turn on the LED lamp.
In this case, a countermeasure (e.g., attaching a resistor in
parallel with the LED lamp) is required.
•• Countermeasure against malfunctioning
Malfunctioning can be prevented by connecting a shunt
resistor (R) in parallel. The resistance in that case varies with
the model and operating conditions.
In the case of 24V DC
R: 10k (0.5W)
(a) (b)
R
Shunt resistor
In the case of 24V AC
R: 2k (2W)
•• The permissible fluctuation range for the operating voltage
of the 6V model is ±5% and that for the 12V or 24V model is
±10%. If the operating voltage is always 5% or 10% higher,
select a resistor that will make the operating current the
same as or lower than the rated current, and connect the
resistor in series to the LED lamp.
•• Calculation of external resistance
Example: Connecting a 24V red LED to a 48V circuit
External resistance [Ω] = Circuit voltage [V] - Rated voltage [V]
Rated current [A]
= 48-24 =3200 [Ω]
7.5×10-3
Therefore, use an external resistor of 3.3kΩ 1W.
(Select a resistor with sufficient wattage.)
•• Surges
High-brightness LED products use elements that are
sensitive to static electricity. Keep in mind that an unusual
voltage, such as a surge voltage, may cause the product to
malfunction.
n Selector Switches
•• Knob type
The knob can be operated by turning it lightly. Be careful to
operate the knob with a torque not exceeding 1N•m.
• Key type
•• Types of keys
Five types (B, C, D, E, and F) are available in addition to the
standard type (type A).
Make sure that the symbol on the key coincides with the
symbol on the switch.
Symbol on key Symbol on main body
(1)• Socket Terminal Arrangement
for AR6S690-L2
(2)• Switch Terminal Arrangement
for Illuminated 2PDT Contacts
Top of switch ( mark)
NC
NO
COM
a b
NC
NO
NC
NO a
Top mark on nameplate
Button
b (for branching)
COM
(for branching) COM (for branching)
04/172
Command Switches
Notes on use

n Connector sockets
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 0.75 mm2 (20AWG to 18AWG)
• Arrange for a receptacle terminal separately.
Nichifu Co., Ltd.: CMC62895F
• Check the insertion position and insert the receptacle
terminal into the socket after connecting the wires to the
receptacle terminal. (The wires once connected cannot
be disconnected.) Lightly pull the wires and check that the
receptacle terminal is securely connected to the socket.
Socket mark
Bend the receptacle terminal
(in the inner direction)
• Align the ▲ mark of the socket and the TOP ( ) mark of the
switch, and put the socket and switch together.
TOP ( )
mark of switch
n Socket for PC board
• Minimum mounting space (pitch), mm
Obtain the mounting pitch based on a reference line to
minimize the cumulative error.
Make sure that the centering difference between the switch
and the PCB socket does not exceed 0.25 mm.
• Apply the following panel cutout dimensions (in mm) to
stabilize the operator position of the switch when combined
with the socket.
AR16/DR16 (common) AF16/DF16 (round type)
• Mount the switch to the panel. Make sure that the switch is
free of any bends.
• PC board processing dimensions (in mm) as viewed from the
socket mounting side.
Reference
b a
5 (Through hole)
• The reference is the center of the socket (switch).
• Switch terminal arrangement (as viewed from the socket
mounting side)
Left-side
contact
Right-side
contact
b a
• Insert the socket so that the lever will be located in the 5mm-diameter
through hole of the PC board. Set the lever to the
lock position as viewed from the socket mounting side.
• Combine the switch-mounted panel with the socket on the
PC board, and solder the socket terminal.
• Combine the PCB socket and the panel while making sure
that the socket terminal does not fall off, and turn over the
socket to do the soldering. Do not leave any space between
the PC board and socket.
• After combining them, check that the lever as viewed from the
soldering side is in the lock position, and solder the terminal.
1 6.2
15 +0.2
0
+0.2 0
18.1 +0.2
0
1 9.2 +0.2 0
L2±0.1
L1±0.1
L3±0.1
Reference
Reference
TOP ( )
mark of socket
6.5
2 2
4 4
1 1
6.5
5 5
2.4
5.8
13.6
Reference
18sq.
(socket outer dimensions)
8- 1.1 (Through hole)
2
4
2
4
1 1
Note: The right-side contact is connected
in the case of an SPDT contact.
Mounting panel
Socket for PC board
PC board
PC board
PC board through hole
( 5mm)
Lever
(Lock position)
Socket
Lever
(Free position)
PC board
Lever
(Lock position)
PC board through hole
( 5)
Socket
04/173
04
Command Switches
Notes on use

n Others
• Operation
Do not hit or flip the button, or the button may be damaged.
Be sure to operate the button by hand.
Do not pull the button if the switch is an alternate action type.
• High-density mounting of illuminated type
When continuously lighting pilot lights or pressing illuminated
pushbuttons, keep in mind that the ambient temperature may
exceed the rated value due to the heat radiated by the lamp.
Be sure to ventilate the lamp /switch if the mounting panel
is not made of metal or if the mounting panel is an enclosed
type.
• Usage locations
• Be sure to use and store the product within the rated
ambient temperature and humidity ranges.
• Although the product resists ordinary cutting oils and
coolant oils, do not use the unit in places where special oils
may be sprayed onto the product.
• If dusts or filings accumulate in the gap between the button
and the frame, the switch may fail to operate normally. Take
appropriate measures, such as using a dust-proof protective
cover, if the switch is to be used in places that are subject to
dusts or filings.
• The AR16/DR16 series and AF16/DF16 series are for
indoor use. Make sure that the product is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
• Do not use the product in the places that are subject to the
adverse effects of ozone or corrosive gases.
• Pay attention to the following points when soldering.
• Type of solder: Use resin-core solder.
• Finish soldering at 350°C within 5 seconds.
• Do not wash the socket.
• Solder the socket so that no flux adheres to it.
• The melting point of lead-free solder is slightly higher than
lead solder, which may make soldering difficult. Use a
soldering iron with a large tip or that provides a high heat
generation.
• Using a spacer between the panel and the PC board
Make sure that the distance shown in the figure below is
maintained between the panel and the PC board. The spacer
dimensions vary with the thickness of the mounting panel.
Mounting panel
PC board
Series A (mm)
AR16/DR16 30.2±0.2
AF16/DF16 37.7±0.2
• Mounting and removing PC board sockets
• Removing
A
Push down the socket levers all the way viewed from the
soldering side in the direction of the free position and
remove the PC board sockets. After removal, the socket
levers will return to the lock position automatically.
• Mounting
Check that the socket lever as viewed from the soldering
side is in the lock position, lightly insert the terminal and
socket so their position is aligned with the switch on the
panel, press the socket-mounting portion of the PC board,
and securely insert the entire socket until the socket lever
snaps. (Check that the lever as viewed from the soldering
side is in the lock position.)
• Use the switch within the following rated voltage range when
the PCB socket is used.
• Rated insulation voltage: 60V
• Rated operational voltage: 24V
• Conventional free air thermal current: 3A
• Use a 1.6-mm-thick double-sided through-hole printed circuit
board made of copper-plated laminated epoxy resin on a
woven glass fabric base.
• In case of standard type (AR16 and DR16 series), beware
that the adopted models are not allowed to attach the
protective cover to some models and that the adopted
models cannot be mounted to some models afterward.
04/174
Command Switches
Notes on use

Description Type Dimensions, mm
Protective cover
(for Standard type)
KKD07-246
KKD07-247
KKD07-248
Type Used with
AHX669 AR16F0N, F5N, F0T, F5T
AXH826 *
AHX671 AR16F0M, F5M, F0S, F5S
AR16E0L, E5L, E0R, E5R
* This cover returns to the home position with spring action to
prevent accidental operation (Packing is provided).
Note: The cover cannot be used with the flush rectangular with guard
type models.
AHX669
AHX826
AHX671
Protective cover
(for Thin type)
KKD07-249
KKD07-250
Type Used with
AF6D826- AF16F0N, F0T
AF6D827- AF16F0M, F0S
This cover prevents accidental operation.
Note: • The protective cover and the button are made of an integral
structure.
• Enter the color code in the square box .
Color Green Red Transparent * Yellow Orange Blue
Code G R C Y A S
Color code of
G R W, B Y A S
main unit
* When the color code of the main unit is W, a combination of the
transparent lens and the white legend plate comes to white.
When it is B, a combination of the transparent lens
and the black legend plate comes to black.
• This cover returns to the home posi-tion
with spring action.
• Not applicable to alternate models.
• Dimensions when connected with a push-button
switch (unit: mm)
AF6D826
AF6D827
Dust-proof cover
(for Standard type)
KKD07-251
KKD07-252
Type Used with
AHX668 AR16F0N, F5N, F0T, F5T
AHX822 AR16F0M, F5M, F0S, F5S
AR16E0L, E5L, E0R, E5R
This cover seals the operator section to prevent powder or dust from
invading inside the switch (Packing is provided).
AHX668
AHX822
Terminal cover
KKD07-253
Type Used with
AR6Y261 Illuminated pushbutton switch, pushbutton
switch, selector switch, pilot light
Protective cover for insulation between terminals and live parts.
Note: • Dimensions when connected with a switch (pilot light) (unit: mm)
Standard type Thin type
• Wiring work should be made first, and attach the cover to the
switch (pilot light).
• Use cables of sheath outer diameter of φ2.8mm or less.
13.7
9.5 21
9.5 21
20.5
9.5 15
20.5
8
25.5
28.2
31.5
14 24
32.5
10.5
23.5
10.5
23.5
33.2
24
31.5
14
32.5
16.2
18 10.5
23.5
16.2
24
14.2 30
14.2 24sq.
20.5
9.5 15
20.5
40.5 40.5 48 48
25.6
18
04/175
04
Command Switches
Accessories

Fast-connection socket
KKD08-093
Type Used with
AR6S690-L1 Illuminated pushbutton switch : SPDT
AR6S690-L2 Illuminated pushbutton switch : 2PDT
AR6S690-LX Pilot light
AR6S690-R1 Pushbutton switch, selector switch : SPDT
AR6S690-R2 Pushbutton switch, selector switch : 2PDT
By combining with a switch, they can be used as a Fast-connection
type switch.
Note: Dimensions when connected with a switch (pilot light)
(unit:mm)
Standard type 　　　 Thin type
Connector socket
KKD07-255
39.5 47
Type Used with
AR6S691-C Illuminated pushbutton switch, pushbutton
By combining with receptacle terminals, this can be used as a
connector.
Note: • The receptacle terminal is not supplied.
Please prepare the receptacle terminal Model No.
CMC62895-F made by NICHIFU Co.,Ltd. on your side.
• Dimensions when connected with a switch (pilot light)
(unit: mm)
Socket for PC board
KKD08-096
Type Used with
AR6S692 Illuminated pushbutton switch, pushbutton
By combining with a switch, they can be used as a switch for PC
board, connection type switch.
Note: • Dimensions when connected with a switch (pilot light)
(unit: mm)
30.2 37.7
• PC board processing drawing (View from component side)
(unit: mm)
4.2 15.5
18
0.8
18
0.3
40.5 48
18
18 25.6
6.5
2 2
b 4 4
a
1 1
6.5
5 5
2.4
5.8
13.6
Reference
5 (Through hole)
Reference
18sq.
(socket outer
dimensions)
8- 1.1 (Through hole)
22.5
24.5
2
18 18
04/176
Command Switches
Accessories

Wrench
KKD07-257
Type Used with
AHX601 AR16 and DR16 series
AF16 and DF16 series
When installing a Command Switch on a panel, this tool enables
secure and firm tightening.
Remover
(for Standard type)
KKD07-258
Type Used with
AHX618 Illuminated pushbutton switch, pushbutton
switch, pilot light
This tool is used for removing color lens, buttons or screens.
Lamp remover
KKD07-259
Type Used with
AHX672 Illuminated pushbutton switch, pilot light
This tool is used for installing or removing lamps.
Use the part A to remove LED lamps.
Panel plug
(for Standard type)
KKD07-260
KKD07-261
KKD07-262
KKD07-267
Type Used with
AXH645- Rectangular type
Degree of protection: IP40
AXH644- Square type
AXH622- Round type
AXH850-B *1 Rectangular type
*1 Packing and nut are provided. The color is black only.
Note: • Enter the color code in the square box .
Type Black Gray
Code B GY
AHX645
AHX644
AHX622
AHX850-B
Panel plug
(for Thin type)
KKD07-264
KKD07-266
KKD07-265
KKD07-263
KKD07-268
KKD07-269
Type Used with
AF6Y645-B Rectangular type
AF6Y644-B Square type
AF6Y622-B Round type
AF6Y850-B *1 Rectangular type
AF6Y851-B *1 Square type
AF6Y852-B *1 Round type
*1 Packing, panel retainer, and nut are provided.
Note: • The color is black only.
AF6Y645-B
AF6Y644-B
AF6Y622-B
AF6Y850-B
AF6Y851-B
AF6Y852-B
60 18
20 4
10
69
18
8 3
24
8 3
18sq.
8 3 18
12.5 3.5
24
18
7
56
8
24 1.5 28
22
24 1.5 22sq.
φ
24 1.5 22
28
22
22sq.
φ 22
23.5 2
23.5 2
23.5 2
Part A
04/177
04
Command Switches
Accessories

Color lens and button
KKD07-270
Type Used with
AR6C633- AR16F0N, F5N, F0T, F5T, G0N, G5N, G0T, G5T
DR16F0N
AF16F0N, F5N, F0T, F5T, Type DF16F0N
AR6C632- AR16F0M, F5M, F0S, F5S, Type DR16F0M
AF16F0M, F5M, F0S, F5S, Type DF16F0M
AR6C631- AR16E0L, E5L, E0R, E5R, Type DR16E0L
AF16F0L, F5L, F0R, F5R, Type DF16F0L
DR6C630- DR16D0L
Note: Enter the color code in the square box .
Color Green Red Transparent * Yellow Orange Blue
Code G R C Y A S
Color code of
G R W, B Y A S
main unit
* When the color code of the main unit is W, a combination of the
transparent lens and the white legend plate comes to white (except
for dome type).
When it is B, a combination of the transparent lens and the black
legend plate comes to black (except for pilot light).
When the dome type (DR16D0L)’s color code of the main unit is W,
the lens code is W.
AR6C633
AR6C632
AR6C631
DR6C630
Legend plate
KKD07-272
Type Used with
AR6P667- AR16F0N, F5N, F0T, F5T, G0N, G5N, G0T, G5T
DR16F0N
AF16F0N, F5N, F0T, F5T, Type DF16F0N
AR6P666- AR16F0M, F5M, F0S, F5S, Type DR16F0M
AF16F0M, F5M, F0S, F5S, Type DF16F0M
AR6P665- AR16E0L, E5L, E0R, E5R, Type DR16E0L
AF16F0L, F5L, F0R, F5R, Type DF16F0L
Type White Black
Code W B
Color code of main unit G, R, W, Y, A, S B
• When the color code of the main unit is W, a combination of the
transparent lens and the white legend plate comes to white.
When it is B, a combination of the transparent lens and the black
legend plate comes to black (except for pilot light).
AR6P667
AR6P666
AR6P665
LED lamp
KKD07-273
Type Lamp operational voltage, current
consumption
DR6L695-A 6V AC/DC, Green, Red, Amber, blue: 7.5mA
AC, 7.5mA DC
Orange: AC8.5mA, DC8.5mA, Yellow: 17mA
AC, 17mA DC
DR6L695-B 12V AC/DC, Green, Red, Amber, blue:
7.5mA AC, 7.5mA DC
Orange, Yellow: 8.5mA AC, 8.5mA DC
DR6L695-E 24V AC/DC, Green, Red, Amber, blue:
7.5mA AC, 7.5mA DC
Orange, Yellow: 8.5mA AC, 8.5mA DC
Color Green Red Orange Yellow Amber Blue
Code G R W Y A S
Color code of
G R W Y A S
main unit
Key
KKD07-274
Type Used with
AR6C662- AR16JT, JS, JR
AF16JT, JS, JR
Note: • Enter the color code in the square box .
Code (Key type) A B C D E F
• Two pieces per set on delivery.
• Both sides of the key is same.
21
21
21
21
15
15sq.
15
3.6
3.6
3.6
8 15
15
15sq.
15
3.6
3.6
3.6
8 15
15
15sq.
15
3.6
3.6
3.6
8 15
15
15sq.
15
3.6
3.6
3.6
8 15
19.6 13.6 0.8
13.6sq.
13.6
19.6
13.6
0.8
0.8
0.8
13.6sq.
13.6
0.8
0.8
13.6sq.
13.6
19.6
13.6
0.8
0.8
0.8
6
10.5
t: 2mm
28
14.8
18
7
04/178
Command Switches
Accessories

• Standard type AR16, DR16 series
1. Illuminated push button switches (g)
Type Without transformer
SPDT 2PDT
AR16F0N 9.3 9.9
AR16F5N 9.3 9.9
AR16G0N 9.4 10
AR16G5N 9.4 10
AR16F0M 8.7 9.3
AR16F5M 8.7 9.3
AR16E0L 8.1 8.7
AR16E5L 8.1 8.7
2. Pushbutton switches (g)
Type SPDT 2PDT
AR16F0T 8.5 9.1
AR16F5T 8.5 9.1
AR16G0T 8.7 9.3
AR16G5T 8.7 9.3
AR16F0S 8 8.6
AR16F5S 8 8.6
AR16E0R 7.4 8
AR16E5R 7.4 8
3. Pilot lights (g)
DR16F0N 8.7
DR16F0M 8.1
DR16E0L 7.5
DR16D0L 7.5
4. Selector switches (knob type) (g)
Type SPDT 2PDT
AR16PT 9.6 10.2
AR16PS 8.6 9.2
AR16PR 8.3 8.9
5. Selector switches (key type) (g)
Type SPDT 2PDT
AR16JT 23.2 23.8
AR16JS 22.3 22.9
AR16JR 21.9 22.5
Note: The value when two keys are attached.
• Thin type AF16, DF16 series
1. Illuminated push button switches (g)
SPDT 2PDT
AF16F0N 13.5 14.1
AF16F5N 13.5 14.1
AF16F0M 12.8 13.4
AF16F5M 12.8 13.4
AF16F0L 12 12.6
AF16F5L 12 12.6
2. Pushbutton switches (g)
Type SPDT 2PDT
AF16F0T 12.7 13.3
AF16F5T 12.7 13.3
AF16F0S 12 12.6
AF16F5S 12 12.6
AF16F0R 11.3 11.9
AF16F5R 11.3 11.9
3. Pilot lights (g)
DF16F0N 12.8
DF16F0M 12.1
DF16F0L 11.4
4. Selector switches (knob type) (g)
Type SPDT 2PDT
AF16PT 14.2 14.8
AF16PS 13.7 14.3
AF16PR 13.1 13.7
5. Selector switches (key type) (g)
Type SPDT 2PDT
AF16JT 27.8 28.4
AF16JS 27.3 27.9
AF16JR 26.8 27.4
Note: The value when two keys are attached.
04/179
04
Command Switches
Mass

Integrated Contacts Structure Emergency stop pushbutton switches AR16V
■ Features
• Up to four sets of contacts in a one-piece structure with a panel
depth dimension of 28 mm (non-illuminated type).
Non illuminated type Illuminated type
28mm
31.5mm
• Both pull or turn reset methods are supported.
• Two button diameters are available: 32 mm (AR16V0) and 40 mm
(AR16V1).
• Safety trigger-action mechanism that prevents the contacts from
operating until the switch is locked, even if people or objects
accidentally come into contact with the switch.
• Direct opening mechanism for NC contacts to ensure that the
contacts can be opened even in the unlikely event that they
become fused.
• IP65 protection for operating section.
AR16V0R
• RoHS compliance (EU Directive 2002/95/EC) is a standard feature.
• Compliance with UL/CSA standards, China Compulsory Certification
(CCC) standards, and TÜV (EN standards).
• CE marking.
n Specifications (indoor use)
Item AR16V
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250V AC/DC
Durability Mechanical 100,000 operations
AR16V1L
Electrical 100,000 operations (AC-15, AC-13, AC-12, DC-13, DC-12)
Operating frequency 1200 operations / hour (On-load factor : 40%)
Withstand voltage Between live section and grounding 2000V AC, 1 minute
Between opposite polarity live sections 2000V AC, 1 minute
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2.5kV
Short-circuit protective device gG 6A (IEC60269 Fuse)
Pollution degree 3
Vibration Operating extremes : frequency 10 to 500 Hz, double amplitude 0.7mm
acceleration 50m/s2
Damage limits : frequency 10 to 500 Hz, double amplitude 0.7mm
acceleration 50m/s2
Shock Malfunction durability : 100m/s2
Mchanical durability : 500m/s2
Operational ambient temperature -10 to +55°C (no icing or no condensation)
Storage temperature -40 to +70°C
Relative humidity (inside control panel) 45 to 85%RH (-5 to 40°C) (no icing or no condensation)
Degree of protection of operating (displaying) section IP65 (dust-ploof, water jet proof): IEC 60529
Degree of protection of control section IP2X (Terminal cover : AR6Y262, At the connection)
Terminal style Solder terminal
Connectable wire 0.75mm2 maximun (18AWG maximun)
04/180
Command Switches
Rating and specifications/AR16V

n Contact ratings
• TÜV (EN60947-5-1), JIS C 8201-5-1 (1999)
Conventional free
air thermal current
I th
Rated operational current
Rated operational
voltage
Ue
AC DC
AC-12
AC-13
AC-15
(Resistive load)
(Inductive load)
(Inductive load)
DC-12
(Resistive load)
DC-13
(Inductive load)
5A 24V - - - 1.0A 0.7A
120V 1.5A 1.0A 0.3A - -
125V - - - 0.2A 0.15A
240V 1.0A 0.7A 0.3A - -
• UL/CSA
• AC (COSø=0.35)
Contact rating code 120V 240V
Making current Braeking current Making current Braeking current
C300 15A 1.5A 7.5A 0.75A
• DC (T0.95=6P)
Contact rating code Making current • Braeking current
125V 250V
R300 0.22A 0.11A
n Contact reliability
• FUJI has confirmed that the product can be used in 1mA circuit
conditions at 5V AC or DC. The operable range, however, may vary
deperding on the operational ambient conditions and type of load.
n Operating characteristic
Operation Push-lock, turn-reset or pull-reset
Ave. required operating force 25N
Operating travel Approx. 5.4mm
Operation angle Approx. 45°
Required return force (pull-reset) 20N
Required return force (tarn-reset) 0.3N • m
n Standards approved
UL508 cUL File No. E44592
CSA C22.2 No.14
TÜV : EN60947-5-1, EN60947-5-5 R50136611
n Mass (g)
Type 1NC 2NC(1NO+1NC) 4NC(2NO+2NC)
AR16V0R 19.0 19.4 20.0
AR16V1R 21.1 21.5 22.1
AR16V0L 19.7 20.1 20.7
AR16V1L 21.8 22.2 22.8
n Lamp rating and current consumption
Applied method Type of lamp Luminous color Lamp rated voltage Current consumption
Without transformer LED lamp Red 6V AC/DC 9mA AC, 7.5mA DC
12V AC/DC 7.5mA AC, 7.5mA DC
24V AC/DC 7.5mA AC, 7.5mA DC
04/181
04
Command Switches
Rating and specifications/AR16V

n Type
Unibody push-lock, pull or turn-reset (32mm dia.) 1NC AR16V0R-01R
1NO+1NC AR16V0R-11R
2NC AR16V0R-02R
1NO+2NC AR16V0R-12R
3NC AR16V0R-03R
1NO+3NC AR16V0R-13R
4NC AR16V0R-04R
Unibody push-lock, pull or turn-reset (40mm dia.) 1NC AR16V1R-01R
1NO+1NC AR16V1R-11R
2NC AR16V1R-02R
1NO+2NC AR16V1R-12R
3NC AR16V1R-03R
1NO+3NC AR16V1R-13R
4NC AR16V1R-04R
Operator Contact LED Lamp Type
Unibody push-lock, pull or turn-reset (32mm dia.) 1NC AR16V0L-01nR
1NO+1NC AR16V0L-11nR
2NC AR16V0L-02nR
3NC AR16V0L-03nR
(KKD08-087) 4NC AR16V0L-04nR
Unibody push-lock, pull or turn-reset (40mm dia.) 1NC AR16V1L-01nR
2NC AR16V1L-02nR
3NC AR16V1L-03nR
(KKD08-091) 4NC AR16V1L-04nR
• Voltage Replace the nmark by the lamp voltage code
Lamp voltage Code
6V AC/DC A3
12V AC/DC B3
24V AC/DC E3
(KKD08-090)
(KKD08-092)
04/182
Command Switches
Type numbers /AR16V

• AR16V0R • AR16V1R
28 20.6 ø32 20.6 ø40
Nut
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
3.8
• AR16V0L • AR16V1L
3.8
28 20.6
n Accessories
Wrench AHX601 (AH9A601)
When installing a command switch on a panel, this tool is useful
for tightening the switch firmly and efficiently.
(KKD07-257)
Terminal cover AR6Y262
Protective cover for insulation between terminals and live parts.
Note : Dimensions when connected with a switch (unit : mm)
• Wiring work should be made first , and attach the cover to the
switch.
Legend plate for AR16V
emergency stop
AR6P719-*1,2
Legend code (*1, 2) Letter hight
Black 00 -
EMERGENCY STOP 5A 7mm
• Plate color : Yellow
• Letter color : Black
■ Dimensions, mm
4
Washer
Washer
Nut
Packing
Panel thickness
1 to 6
0.5
2.2
11.5
20.6 ø40
0.5
2.2
11.5
0.8
31.5
4
ø32
4
1 2
3 4
1 2
1 2
60 ø18
60 ø18
60 ø18
20.4 20
20
11.2
Thickness : 0.35mm
ø17
ø65
20.4 20
20
11.2
Thickness : 0.35mm
ø17
ø65
20.4 20
20
11.2
Thickness : 0.35mm
ø17
ø65
36
04/183
04
Command Switches
Dimensions and Accessories/AR16V

n Notes on use
Safety Precautions
Read the Operating Instructions carefully before mounting, wiring,
operating, servicing, or inspecting the command switch. Make sure
that the Operating Instructions is delivered to the final user of the
command switch.
• The safety precautions are classified into two levels, WARNING and
CAUTION, with meanings described follows.
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if
not avoided, could resuit in death or serious injury.
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if
not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury
and/or damage to the equipment.
An item described under CAUTION may resuit in a serious accident,
depending on the situation.
WARNING
CAUTION
or inspecting, the product.
An electric shock, burning from short-circuiting, or equipment
malfunction may result. WARNING
CAUTION
voltage and applied current.
The wrong wiring may result in fire, accidents, or malfunctions.
• Installation on panel
As shown in the figure below, insert the switch main unit into the
panel cutout from the front of the panel with the top of the switch main
unit (marked with an inverted triangular) facing upward. Then, use a
tightening wrench (AHX601) and secure the unit with a washer and
tightening nut from the rear of the panel.
Note : The proper tightening torque is 0.6 to 1.0 N • m.
1.7＋0.2mm
n Applicable panel thickness
The applicable panel thickness is 1 to 6 mm. When the terminal cover
(AR6Y262) is used, however, the applicable panel thickness will be 1
to 3.2 mm.
n High-density mounting
The following minimum mounting pitch applies to high-density
mounting.
Inverted triangular ( )
Tightening nut *1
Tightening nut *1
n Wiring
The wiring to this switch must be soldered. Keep the following items
in mind when soldering.
• Type of solder : Use resin-core solder.
• Use a soldering iron with a maximum power consumption of 60W
(350°C) within five seconds. Make sure that the terminals is free of
tension during soldering. Also, do not deform the terminal.
Lead-free solder has a high melting point, but the specific melting
point depends on the type of lead-free solder. This may cause
difficulty in soldering. Be careful not to overheat the solder if a
soldering iron with a large soldering tip or a large heating capacity is
used. Keep in mind that overheating the solder may resuit in product
malfunctioning.
Connectable wires
One Solid wires with a maximum diameter of 1.0mm
One standed wire with a maximum area of 0.75 mm2
For wiring to adjacent terminals, use the terminal cover (AR6Y262) to
prevent short-circuit, or an insulation tube to assure isolation. Care is
necessary when two wires are connected together or a large quantily
of solder is applied. In addition, keep in mind that overheating the
tube may result in product malfunctioning if a heat-shrinking tube is
used.
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
*1 : Do not use pliers or other improper tools tighten the nut, and do not tighten
it excessively, or the nut may be damaged or switch may malfunction.
n Panel cutout (mm)
Protrusion
Packing
Switch main unit
Packing Panel
Washer
Tightening wrench
Protrusion
Packing
Switch main unit
Packing Panel
Washer
Tightening wrench
r max＝0.8mm
φ16.2＋0.2 0 mm
0
17.9＋00.2mm
A
A
Type
AR16V0
AR16V1
With AR6P719
Note : Detemine the mounting pitch by taking the operability and wiring
workability into consideration.
Dimension A
41mm min.
45mm min.
65mm min.
04/184
Command Switches
Notes on use/AR16V

Model Circuit diagram (example) Terminal arrangement
(view from the terminal (back) side)
switches
Emergency stop illuminated
pushbutton switches
4 3
b
1 2
b
4 3
b
1 2
b
Note : If NO contacts are uesd in the contact configuration, they will be on the top of the unit (marked with the inverted triangular) and on the opposite side, regardless
of the number of contacts.
n Terminal caver (AR6Y262)
• Combination
The terminal cover must be attached in the correct direction. Make
sure that the triangular on the terminal cover is aligned with the
inverted triangular on the top of the unit. Also, when wiring the switch,
check the alignment of these triangles and insert the wires correctly
through the corresponding holes in the terminal cover.
n Nameplate (AR6P719)
• Precautions
The nameplate must be attached. Attach the nameplate to an
appropriate part, such as the panel, after removing the paper from the
back of the nameplate.
Before attaching the nameplate, claen the surface to which the
nameplate will be attached with alcohol.
The nameplate may come off if the surface is dirty or oily.
• Attachment Procedure (Example)
Remove portions ① and ② from the center of the nameplate, aligh the
nameplate with the panel cutout, and lightly press on the front surface
of the nameplate to attach it to the panel. Then remove portions ③
and ④ , and press on the entire front surface of the nameplate to
complate attaching it to the panel.
n Others
Operation
• Do not hit or flip the button, or the button may be damaged. Be sure
to operate the button by hand.
• To unlock the switch, turn the button approximately 45° clockwise (in
the direction of the arrow) or pull out the button. Do not operate or
handle the button with excessive force.
• Do not lock the emergency stop pushbutton switch during normal
use. Push and lock the switch only in an emergency.
Storage and Usage Locations
• Be sure to use and store the product within the rated ambient
temperature and humidity ranges.
• Although the product resists ordinary cutting oils and coolant oils, do
not use the unit in places where special oils may be sprayed onto the
product.
• If dusts or filings accumulate in the gap between the button and the
frame, the switch may fail to operate normally.
• This switch are for indoor use. Make sure that the product is not
exposed to direct sunlight.
• Do not use the product in the places thet are subject to the adverse
effects of ozone or corrosive gases.
①
③ ④
②
1
a
2
4 3
1 2
1 2
1 2 Top (marked with inverted triangular)
Terminals 1-2 : b (NC) contact terminals
Terminals 3-4 : a (NO) contact terminals
Terminals a-b : Lamp terminals
1 2
1 2
a
4 3
1 2
1 2
1
a
2
4 3
1 2
1 2
1 2 Top (marked with inverted triangular)
Terminals 1-2 : b (NC) contact terminals
Terminals 3-4 : a (NO) contact terminals
Terminals a-b : Lamp terminals
1 2
1 2
a
4 3
1 2
1 2
Wires
Triangular on terminal cover mark
04/185
04
Command Switches
Notes on use/AR16V

04/186
Pushbuttons Illuminated pushbuttons Pilot lights
KKD07-209 KKD07-202
KKD07-212
AH164-E AH164-TL AH164-Z
Selectors
AF87-221 KKD07-232
AH165-2ML AH165-2P
Safety
FUJI’s original Trigger Action mechanism
is used in the emergency stop
pushbuttons. They are suitable for
emergency stop and safety. This
locked.
• Provided with a trigger action
mechanism conforming to EN418.
• Provided with direct opening action
(approved by TÜV)
conforming to EN60947-5-1 and
EN60947-5-5.
R S
■ Features
Design basis
The 16mm dia. series of compact size
pushbuttons are 'finger-size', and
consequently take up little panel space.
AH165-2 series operators are about twice
as large as the AH164 and AH165 series
operators for easier operation. With many
types of operator available, the most
suitable switch can be identified by color,
shape and legend, and have a smooth,
quality snap-action. In spite of their small
size they have a highly reliable
mechanism, and are eminently suited for
solid state and other electronic
circuits. AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
series contact block holders can easily be
removed manually. Moreover, the contact
block can be easily attached or detached
without using any special tools, thus
facilitating addition or replacement of
contact.
Selector switches
Selector switches can also be supplied
in either knob-handle operated or key
operated types.
Strong construction
The operator and contact blocks are
molded from an excellent thermal
resistance resin and can withstand the
heat at the time of soldering.
Since these pushbuttons are
manufactured to industrial standards
they can withstand vibration or shock
thus eliminating lamp failure due to
such causes as loose bases.
With regard to the degree of protection,
standard types which met the
requirements of IP40 of IEC 60529,
and oil tight types which meet the
requirements of IP65 of the said,
are available. This permits the application
to various fields, from machine tools to OA
(Office Automation) facilities.
Quality feel tough
Both the operator and contact block are
precisely engineered. There is no fear
of the switch malfunction even after
long use and it continues to operate
smoothly for its service life of about
1,000,000 operations.
Easy color change
Color lenses fit over the inner button.
The lens can easily be removed using a
small screwdriver
Visible inscription
Button legends are printed on legend
sheet, which is stuck to the legend plate
on the inner button.
The lettering is back lit by the switch
lamp and the inscription is highly visible
through the color lens.
Contact FUJI for your lettering
requirements.
Excellent switch reliability
The switch uses a snap-action
mechanism. The pushbuttons are
available with either momentary or
alternative actions. The snap-action
switch has a double break movement
which operates independently of the
speed of switching. The contacts are
made from gold-flashed silver. High
contact reliability of 1mA at 5V AC/DC is
assured. Contact blocks are available in
1NO+1NC to 3NO+3NC arrangement.
Large terminals
Solder/tab terminal is provided as standard.
Wire-wrap terminal is available on reguest.
Alternate action
In the case of alternate action when
the button is depressed the contacts are
maintained and remain so even if the
finger is removed. The button will not
return to its free position. In order to
remove the lock, the button must
be given a second pressure before the
button will return to its free position. This
makes it most suitable as the switch for a
power source.
Pushbutton with finger guards
Finger guards are provided for square or
rectangular type pushbuttons (SF, TF, SL
and TL types) in order to prevent
operational error of adjacent buttons.
AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
General information
Color lens
Screw driver
Legend plate
Legend sheet
(film)
Lamp
terminal
Contact terminal
Maintain
Note: The luminous color of LEDs and neon illumination
types varies with the body color of the product.
Approvals
For further information related to approved
type, see page 04/187 to 04/190 .
KKD07-222
AH165-V6

AH164 (standard) / AH165 (oil-tight)
S S S
KKD07-205 KKD07-204 KKD07-202
S S
Note: Spot LED and red/green LED types: Not approved standard
KKD07-209 KKD07-210 KKD07-208
S
Flush rectangular head AH164-TF, TF5 Flush rectangular head AH164-TGF, TGF5 Flush square head AH164-SGF, SGF5
AH165-TF, TF5 with guard AH165-TGF, TGF5 with guard AH165-SGF, SGF5
KKD07-206 KKD05-176 KKD05-075b
KKD05-081b KKD05-082b AF91-584
04/187
Extended round head AH164-L, L5 Flush square head AH164-SL, SL5 Flush rectangular head AH164-TL, TL5
AH165-L, L5 AH165-SL, SL5 AH165-TL, TL5
See page 04/195 See page 04/195 See page 04/195
Flush rectangular head AH164-TGL, TGL5 Flush square head AH164-SGL, SGL5
with guard AH165-TGL, TGL5 with guard AH165-SGL, SGL5
See page 04/196 See page 04/196
KKD07-203 KKD05-075b
Extended round head AH164-E, E5 Mushroom head AH164-M, M5 Flush square head AH164-SF, SF5
AH165-E, E5 AH165-M, M5 AH165-SF, SF5
S
Convex square head AH164-SM, SM5 Convex rectangular head AH164-TM, TM5 Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-VR
AH165-SM, SM5 AH165-TM, TM5 (32mm dia.)
S
S
04
■ Emergency stop pushbutton switches (Direct opening action), conform to EN418
Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-V5R Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-V6R
(32mm dia.) (40mm dia.)
KKD07-221 KKD07-222
Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-V1R
(40mm dia.)
See page 04/200
AF91-583
AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
R R R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R R
Note: : See page 04/292
S
S
S
S
S
S
S S
S
(Direct opening action)

AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Knob with rectangular AH164-P Knob with square bezel AH164-SP Key with rectangular AH164-J
bezel AH165-P AH165-SP bezel AH165-J
Key with square bezel AH164-SJ Key with rectangular AH165-JM Key AH165-RJM
04/188
KKD07-213 KKD07-215 KKD09-001L
AH165-SJ bezel
See page 04/201, 04/204 See page 04/202 See page 04/202
KKD09-001R KKD09-006 KKD09-007
■ Pilot lights
Extended round AH164-Z Flush square AH164-ZS Flush rectangular AH164-ZT
AH165-Z AH165-ZS AH165-ZT
KKD07-212 KKD05-094b KKD07-211
Dome AH165-ZM
See page 04/206
AF87-45
■ Buzzers
Standard AH164-TX Loud sound AH164-TX1 Loud sound with AH164-TX2B
volume control
AF87-317 AF87-44 KKD07-223
Standard sound with AH165-X
volume control (IP54)
See page 04/208
KKD05-096b
R
R
R R
R R
R
R
R R
R
R
S
S
S
S
S
S
S S S
Note: S : See page 04/292

AF87-211 AF87-210 AF87-221
Mushroom head with AH165-2YML Flush square head AH165-2SFL, 2SFL5 Extended square head AH165-2SEL, 2SEL5
square bezel
AF87-220 AF87-201 AF87-200
04/189
Flush round head AH165-2FL, 2FL5 Extended round head AH165-2EL, 2EL5 Mushroom head AH165-2ML
Concave square head AH165-2SCL, 2SCL5 Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-2VL Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-2YVL
04
AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
AH165-2 (oil-tight)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Flush round head AH165-2F, 2F5 Extended round head AH165-2E, 2E5 Mushroom head AH165-2M
AF87-211 AF87-210 AF87-215
Mushroom head with AH165-2YM Flush square head AH165-2SF, 2SF5 Concave square head AH165-2SCE, 2SCE5
square bezel
AF87-214 AF87-201 AF87-199
Extended square head AH165-2SE, 2SE5 With selector ring AH165-2S2 With selector ring AH165-2YS2
with square bezell
AF87-200 AF87-207 AF87-206
Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-2V Push-lock, turn-reset AH165-2YV
with square bezel
AF87-217 AF87-216
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
R S
with square bezel
AF87-199 AF87-219 AF87-218

Knob AH165-2P Knob with square bezel AH165-2YP Key AH165-2J
04/190
AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
S
S S
R S
R
R
S R R
S
S S
KKD07-232 KKD07-234 KKD09-003L
Key with square bezel AH165-2YJ Lever AH165-2H Lever with square bezel AH165-2SH
KKD09-003R AF87-209 AF87-203
Operator Type
Knob AH165-2PL
See page 04/221
KKD07-240
■ Pilot lights
Flush round AH165-2Z Extended round AH165-2ZE Flush square AH165-2SZ
AF87-213 AF87-212 AF87-205
Extended square AH165-2SZE
See page 04/222
AF87-204

04/191
04
AH164 and AH165
AH164: Standard (IP40)
AH165: Oil-tight (IP65)
➁ Operator or lens
• Operator for illuminated pushbutton
SL: Flush square head
SL5: Flush square head (Alternate)
TL: Flush rectangular head
TL5: Flush rectangular head (Alternate)
L: Extended round head
L5: Extended round head (Alternate)
TGL: Flush rectangular head with guard
TGL5: Flush rectangular head with guard (Alternate)
SGL: Flush square head with guard
SGL5: Flush square head with guard (Alternate)
• Operator for pushbuttons
SF: Flush square head
SF5: Flush square head (Alternate)
TF: Flush rectangular head
TF5: Flush rectangular head (Alternate)
E: Extended round head
E5: Extended round head (Alternate)
TGF: Flush rectangular head with guard
TGF5: Flush rectangular head with guard (Alternate)
SGF: Flush square head with guard
SGF5: Flush square head with guard (Alternate)
M: Mushroom head
M5: Mushroom head (Alternate)
SM: Convex square head
SM5: Convex square head (Alternate)
TM: Convex rectangular head
TM5: Convex rectangular head (Alternate)
V: Push-lock, turn-reset (32mm dia.)*1 *2
V1: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)*1 *2
• Operator for emergency stop pushbuttons
V5: Push-lock, turn-reset (32mm dia.)*2
V6: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.)*2
• Lens for pilot lights
Z: Extended round
ZS: Flush square
ZT: Flush rectangular
ZM: Dome
Note: *1 Product with no trigger action mechanism
*2 AH165 type only, direct opening action
Button
01: 1NC*1 22: 2NO+2NC
02: 2NC*1 33: 3NO+3NC*2
11: 1NO+1NC
Notes: *1 Available for AH165-V, V1, V5, V6
*2 Not available for with transformer types
➄ Lamp voltage
■ Type number nomenclature
Pushbuttons, illuminated pushbuttons and pilot lights
AH165 - L R 11 E 3 – W
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆
➂ Color of button or lens
Code
Notes: • ( ): indicates luminous color
• AH165-V, V1, V5, V6: Red only
* Not available for illuminated types
G
R
B
Y
W
S
O
RG

–
LED

–
(Orange)
(Amber)

Incandescent

–

–
Neon

(Orange)
–
(Orange)
(Orange)
(Green)

–
color
Green
Red
Black*
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
Red/Green
Code
LED Incandescent*2 Neon*2
AA
ABE
HK
MP
5V DC*2
6V DC*2
12V DC
24V DC
100-110V AC*1 *2
–
200-220V AC*1 *2
–
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
100-110V AC*1
–
200-220V AC*1
–
Notes: *1 With transformer (LED: 24V, Incandescent: 28V)
*2 Not available AH165-ZM
• ZM type: LED lamp only (12, 24V DC)
➅ Type of lamp
Blank: Incandescent
1: Neon
2: Spot LED, LED (ZM types)
3: Flat LED
➆ Terminal
Blank: Solder/tab
W: Wire-wrap
S: Soder (AH165-V, V1, V5, V6 types only)
Note: ZM types: wire-wrap terminal only (Code is blank)
––––
110V AC
120V AC
220V AC
240V AC

Selector switches
AH165 - J 2 B 11 A – W
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆
04/192
AH164 - T X B E
➀ ➁ ➂➃
AH164 and AH165
AH165: Oil-tight (IP65)
➁ Operator
• 2-position, 3-position (operating angle 90°)
SP: Knob with square bezel
P: Knob with rectangular bezel
SJ: Key with square bezel
J: Key with rectangular bezel
JM: Key with rectangular bezel (Direct opening action) *
RJM: Key (Direct opening action) *
Note: * AH165 types (2-position) only
• 3-position (operating angle 45°)
SPK: Knob with square bezel
PK: Knob with rectangular bezel
SJK: Key with square bezel
JK: Key with rectangular bezel
➂ Operation
0: 2-position, spring return*
Note: * Except for JM and RJM types
➃ Color of knob or key removable position
• Color of knob
B: Black
Code
2-position
2 0
3-position
(operating angle 90°)
3-position
(operating angle 45°)
1 3 6 7 1 3 6 7
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
11: 1NO+1NC
22: 2NO+2NC
33: 3NO+3NC*
Note: * Except for JM and RJM types.
➅ Key type No.
A (standard), B, C, D, E, F
➆ Terminal
Blank: Solder/tab
W: Wire-warp
Note: JM, RJM types: Solder/tab terminal only
Buzzers
AH165: Splash-proof (IP54)
➁ Sound
TX: Standard (AH164)
TX1: Loud sound (AH164)
TX2: Loud sound with volume control (AH164)
X: Standard sound with volume control (AH165)
➂ Color of head
B: Black
➃ Operating voltage
AAC: 6V AC*2
ADC: 6V DC*2
A: 6V AC/DC*1
E: 12 to 24V AC/DC
F: 35 to 48V AC/DC
Notes: *1 Except for TX and TX1 types
*2 Except for TX2 and X types

04/193
04
AH164 and AH165
• Pushbutton switches, illuminated pushbutton switches
selector switches, pilot lights
Item AH164 AH165
Rated insulation voltage 250V AC/DC
Ambient temperature –20 to +70°C *1 –10 to +70°C *2
(no condensation or no icing)
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (at –5 to +40°C), no
condensation or no icing
Durability Mechanical Pushbutton switch
(operations) Momentary action: 1 million
Alternate action: 250,000
Push-lock, turn-reset: 100,000
Selector switch: 250,000 *3
Electrical 100,000 (220V AC 0.7A)
Dielectric strength 2000V AC, 1 minute
(Between lamp and contact terminals:
1500V AC, 1 minute)
Short-circuit protective device Fuse 1A *4
Pollution degree 3
Vibration Resonance: 10 to 55Hz, double amplitude
0.1mm *5
Shock Malfunction durability: 100m/s2 *6
Operating frequency 1200 operation/hour (on-load factor: 40%)
Notes: *1 For illuminated pushbutton switch and pilot light: –20 to +55°C
*2 For illuminated pushbutton switch and pilot light: –10 to +55°C
*3 Key insertion/removal durability for selector switch key types: 10,000
*4 AH165-V, V1, JM, RJM, V5, V6 types: Fuse 5A
*5 Emergency stop type: 10 to 500Hz, double amplitude 0.7mm
(acceleration 50m/s2), according to the test condition of EN60947-5-5
(1998)
*6 Emergency stop type:150m/s2
• Buzzers
Item AH164-TX AH164-TX1
Operating voltage 6V AC, 6V DC,12 to 24V AC/DC
35 to 48V AC/DC
Sound level 80dB (0.1m) 90dB (0.1m)
60dB(1m) 70dB(1m)
Durability 1000h
Frequency 2 ±0.5kHz 2.4 to 3.3kHz
Intermittent cycle Approx. 170 cycle/minute
Current consumption 7mA(24, 48V DC) 15mA (24, 48V DC)
15mA(6V DC) 25mA (6V DC)
20mA (6, 24V AC) 30mA (24V AC)
30mA (48V AC) 40mA (48V AC)
50mA (6V AC)
Ambient temperature –20 to +60°C (no condensation or no icing)
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (at –5 to +40°C)
Operator protection IP00
Item AH164-TX2 AH165-X
Operating voltage 6V AC/DC, 12 to 24V AC/DC
35 to 48V AC/DC
Sound level 70dB to 90dB (0.1m) 60dB to 80dB (0.1m)
50dB to 70dB (1m) 40dB to 60dB (1m)
Durability 1000h
Frequency 2 ±0.5kHz 2.4 to 3.3kHz
Intermittent cycle Approx. 170 cycle/minute
Current consumption 30mA (6V DC)
20mA (24, 48V DC)
40mA (6, 24, 48V AC)
Ambient temperature –20 to +60°C (no condensation or no icing)
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (at –5 to +40°C)
UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
EN60947-5-5
File No. E44592
File No. LR20479 (except for AH165-ZM)
File No. LR84365 (for AH165-ZM)
Pushbutton (except for AH165-V, V1),
Illuminated pushbutton: R9250087
Pushbutton (for AH165-V, V1): J9551059
Selector (except for AH165-JM, RJM): R9250088
Selector (for AH165-JM, RJM): J9551059
Buzzer: J9950092 (for AH164-TX2, AH165-X)
Emergency stop pushbutton: R9950093

■ Contact ratings
Rated thermal
current
04/194
AH164 and AH165
■ Contact reliability
FUJI has confirmed that the unit can be used in 1mA circuit
conditions at 5V AC or DC. The operable range may vary
depending on the ambient conditions and type of load.
Rated operational
voltage
Consumption
LED
DC
Notes: • With transformer (LED): 2.6VA/110, 220V
Incandescent
AC/DC
Neon
AC
• With transformer (Incandescent): 2VA/110, 220V
• For the incandescent lamps, the values in parentheses indicate the
rated voltage of the lamps.
5V
6V
12V
24V
110V
120V
220V
240V
7mA (Yellow: 28mA)
7mA (Yellow: 28mA)
7mA
7mA
––––
0.45W (6V)
–
0.55W (14V)
0.55W (28V)
––––
––––
0.19VA
0.21VA
0.38VA
0.42VA
■ Lamp ratings
Rated
operational
voltage
Maximum current
AC
(Res. load)
DC
(Res. load)
5A 24V
125V
250V
––
5.0A
1.0A
0.2A
–
• EN standards (TÜV approved)
Rated thermal
current
Rated operational
voltage
AC 15
(Ind. load)
AC 13
(Ind. load)
5A 24V
100 to 120V
100 to 125V
200 to 240V
–
0.3A
–
0.3A
–
1.0A
–
0.7A
AC 12
(Res. load)
–
1.5A
–
1.0A
DC 13
(Ind. load)
0.7A
–
0.15A
–
DC 12
(Res. load)
1.0A
–
0.2A
–

04/195
■ Illuminated pushbutton switches/without transformer
KKD07-205
KKD07-204
KKD07-202
04
AH164 and AH165
Operator Lamp Voltage Contact Momentary action Alternate action
AH164 type AH165 (Oil-tight) type AH164 type AH165 (Oil-tight) type
Extended round head Flat LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-L11E3 AH165-L11E3 AH164-L511E3 AH165-L511E3
2NO+2NC AH164-L22E3 AH165-L22E3 AH164-L522E3 AH165-L522E3
Spot LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-L11E2 AH165-L11E2 AH164-L511E2 AH165-L511E2
Incandes- 24V 1NO+1NC AH164-L11E AH165-L11E AH164-L511E AH165-L511E
cent AC/DC 2NO+2NC AH164-L22E AH165-L22E AH164-L522E AH165-L522E
3NO+3NC AH164-L33E AH165-L33E AH164-L533E AH165-L533E
Neon 110V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-L11H1 AH165-L11H1 AH164-L511H1 AH165-L511H1
2NO+2NC AH164-L22H1 AH165-L22H1 AH164-L522H1 AH165-L522H1
3NO+3NC AH164-L33H1 AH165-L33H1 AH164-L533H1 AH165-L533H1
220V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-L11M1 AH165-L11M1 AH164-L511M1 AH165-L511M1
2NO+2NC AH164-L22M1 AH165-L22M1 AH164-L522M1 AH165-L522M1
3NO+3NC AH164-L33M1 AH165-L33M1 AH164-L533M1 AH165-L533M1
Flush square head Flat LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-SL11E3 AH165-SL11E3 AH164-SL511E3 AH165-SL511E3
2NO+2NC AH164-SL22E3 AH165-SL22E3 AH164-SL522E3 AH165-SL522E3
Spot LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-SL11E2 AH165-SL11E2 AH164-SL511E2 AH165-SL511E2
Incandes- 24V 1NO+1NC AH164-SL11E AH165-SL11E AH164-SL511E AH165-SL511E
cent AC/DC 2NO+2NC AH164-SL22E AH165-SL22E AH164-SL522E AH165-SL522E
3NO+3NC AH164-SL33E AH165-SL33E AH164-SL533E AH165-SL533E
Neon 110V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-SL11H1 AH165-SL11H1 AH164-SL511H1 AH165-SL511H1
2NO+2NC AH164-SL22H1 AH165-SL22H1 AH164-SL522H1 AH165-SL522H1
3NO+3NC AH164-SL33H1 AH165-SL33H1 AH164-SL533H1 AH165-SL533H1
220V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-SL11M1 AH165-SL11M1 AH164-SL511M1 AH165-SL511M1
2NO+2NC AH164-SL22M1 AH165-SL22M1 AH164-SL522M1 AH165-SL522M1
3NO+3NC AH164-SL33M1 AH165-SL33M1 AH164-SL533M1 AH165-SL533M1
Flush rectangular head Flat LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-TL11E3 AH165-TL11E3 AH164-TL511E3 AH165-TL511E3
2NO+2NC AH164-TL22E3 AH165-TL22E3 AH164-TL522E3 AH165-TL522E3
Spot LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-TL11E2 AH165-TL11E2 AH164-TL511E2 AH165-TL511E2
Incandes- 24V 1NO+1NC AH164-TL11E AH165-TL11E AH164-TL511E AH165-TL511E
cent AC/DC 2NO+2NC AH164-TL22E AH165-TL22E AH164-TL522E AH165-TL522E
3NO+3NC AH164-TL33E AH165-TL33E AH164-TL533E AH165-TL533E
Neon 110V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-TL11H1 AH165-TL11H1 AH164-TL511H1 AH165-TL511H1
2NO+2NC AH164-TL22H1 AH165-TL22H1 AH164-TL522H1 AH165-TL522H1
3NO+3NC AH164-TL33H1 AH165-TL33H1 AH164-TL533H1 AH165-TL533H1
220V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-TL11M1 AH165-TL11M1 AH164-TL511M1 AH165-TL511M1
2NO+2NC AH164-TL22M1 AH165-TL22M1 AH164-TL522M1 AH165-TL522M1
3NO+3NC AH164-TL33M1 AH165-TL33M1 AH164-TL533M1 AH165-TL533M1
Note: Replace the mark by the button color code, see page 04/196.

Flush rectangular head Flat LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-TGL11E3 AH165-TGL11E3 AH164-TGL511E3 AH165-TGL511E3
with guard 2NO+2NC AH164-TGL22E3 AH165-TGL22E3 AH164-TGL522E3 AH165-TGL522E3
Flush square head Flat LED 24V DC 1NO+1NC AH164-SGL11E3 AH165-SGL11E3 AH164-SGL511E3 AH165-SGL511E3
with guard 2NO+2NC AH164-SGL22E3 AH165-SGL22E3 AH164-SGL522E3 AH165-SGL522E3
04/196
AH164 type AH165 (oil-tight) type AH164 type AH165 (oil-tight) type
3NO+3NC AH164-TGL33E3 AH165-TGL33E3 AH164-TGL533E3 AH165-TGL533E3
Incandes- 24V 1NO+1NC AH164-TGL11E AH165-TGL11E AH164-TGL511E AH165-TGL511E
cent AC/DC 2NO+2NC AH164-TGL22E AH165-TGL22E AH164-TGL522E AH165-TGL522E
3NO+3NC AH164-TGL33E AH165-TGL33E AH164-TGL533E AH165-TGL533E
Neon 110V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-TGL11H1 AH165-TGL11H1 AH164-TGL511H1 AH165-TGL511H1
2NO+2NC AH164-TGL22H1 AH165-TGL22H1 AH164-TGL522H1 AH165-TGL522H1
3NO+3NC AH164-TGL33H1 AH165-TGL33H1 AH164-TGL533H1 AH165-TGL533H1
220V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-TGL11M1 AH165-TGL11M1 AH164-TGL511M1 AH165-TGL511M1
2NO+2NC AH164-TGL22M1 AH165-TGL22M1 AH164-TGL522M1 AH165-TGL522M1
3NO+3NC AH164-TGL33M1 AH165-TGL33M1 AH164-TGL533M1 AH165-TGL533M1
3NO+3NC AH164-SGL33E3 AH165-SGL33E3 AH164-SGL533E3 AH165-SGL533E3
Incandes- 24V 1NO+1NC AH164-SGL11E AH165-SGL11E AH164-SGL511E AH165-SGL511E
cent AC/DC 2NO+2NC AH164-SGL22E AH165-SGL22E AH164-SGL522E AH165-SGL522E
3NO+3NC AH164-SGL33E AH165-SGL33E AH164-SGL533E AH165-SGL533E
Neon 110V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-SGL11H1 AH165-SGL11H1 AH164-SGL511H1 AH165-SGL511H1
2NO+2NC AH164-SGL22H1 AH165-SGL22H1 AH164-SGL522H1 AH165-SGL522H1
3NO+3NC AH164-SGL33H1 AH165-SGL33H1 AH164-SGL533H1 AH165-SGL533H1
220V AC 1NO+1NC AH164-SGL11M1 AH165-SGL11M1 AH164-SGL511M1 AH165-SGL511M1
2NO+2NC AH164-SGL22M1 AH165-SGL22M1 AH164-SGL522M1 AH165-SGL522M1
3NO+3NC AH164-SGL33M1 AH165-SGL33M1 AH164-SGL533M1 AH165-SGL533M1
18sq. Lamp terminal
7
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Lamp terminal 7
AH164 and AH165
■ Dimensions, mm
L, L5 SL, SL5
TL, TL5 TGL, TGL5 SGL, SGL5
Washer
Nut
Lamp terminal
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Lamp terminal 7
• Button color
KKD07-203
KKD05-075b
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
7
42.5 10
ø15
ø18
Color Green Red White Yellow Blue Orange
Code G R W Y S O
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
15
18
15sq.
42.5 10 18sq.
42.5 10
15
18
21
24
15
18
42.5 10
21
24
15
18
15sq.
18sq.
• The color lens is made of a tinted transparent material.
• A white illuminated pushbutton is fitted with a transparent color
lens.(Except the neon lamp)
• With wire-wrap pin terminals have a depth of 47mm.
• Lamp voltage
Voltages other than above are available
Code LED Incandescent
AA
ABKP
5V DC
6V DC
12V DC
––
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
––
Neon
–––
120V AC
240V AC

04/197
■ Illuminated pushbutton switches/with transformer
AF90-945
AF90-946
AF90-947
AF90-941
AF90-948
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
04
AH164 and AH165
Extended round head Flat LED ■ Voltage 1NO+1NC AH164-L113 AH165-L113 AH164-L5113 AH165-L5113
code
2NO+2NC AH164-L223 AH165-L223 AH164-L5223 AH165-L5223
Incandes- 1NO+1NC AH164-L11 AH165-L11 AH164-L511 AH165-L511
cent
2NO+2NC AH164-L22 AH165-L22 AH164-L522 AH165-L522
Flush square head Flat LED ■ Voltage 1NO+1NC AH164-SL113 AH165-SL113 AH164-SL5113 AH165-SL5113
code
2NO+2NC AH164-SL223 AH165-SL223 AH164-SL5223 AH165-SL5223
Incandes- 1NO+1NC AH164-SL11 AH165-SL11 AH164-SL511 AH165-SL511
cent
2NO+2NC AH164-SL22 AH165-SL22 AH164-SL522 AH165-SL522
Flush rectangular head Flat LED ■ Voltage 1NO+1NC AH164-TL113 AH165-TL113 AH164-TL5113 AH165-TL5113
code
2NO+2NC AH164-TL223 AH165-TL223 AH164-TL5223 AH165-TL5223
Incandes- 1NO+1NC AH164-TL11 AH165-TL11 AH164-TL511 AH165-TL511
cent
2NO+2NC AH164-TL22 AH165-TL22 AH164-TL522 AH165-TL522
Flush rectangular head Flat LED ■ Voltage 1NO+1NC AH164-TGL113 AH165-TGL113 AH164-TGL5113 AH165-TGL5113
with guard code
2NO+2NC AH164-TGL223 AH165-TGL223 AH164-TGL5223 AH165-TGL5223
Incandes- 1NO+1NC AH164-TGL11 AH165-TGL11 AH164-TGL511 AH165-TGL511
cent
2NO+2NC AH164-TGL22 AH165-TGL22 AH164-TGL522 AH165-TGL522
Flush square head Flat LED ■ Voltage 1NO+1NC AH164-SGL113 AH165-SGL113 AH164-SGL5113 AH165-SGL5113
with guard code
2NO+2NC AH164-SGL223 AH165-SGL223 AH164-SGL5223 AH165-SGL5223
Incandes- 1NO+1NC AH164-SGL11 AH165-SGL11 AH164-SGL511 AH165-SGL511
cent
2NO+2NC AH164-SGL22 AH165-SGL22 AH164-SGL522 AH165-SGL522
Note: Replace the mark by the button color code, see page 04/198.

Insulation
cover
Transformer
primary
terminal
Insulation
cover
04/198
42.5
62
42.5
62
24
■ Dimensions, mm
L, L5 SL, SL5
62 Panel thickness
18
Insulation
cover
TL, TL5 TGL, TGL5 SGL, SGL5
4 (max.)
7
10
ø15
ø18
Holder
Transformer unit
42.5
Washer
Nut
(–)
b
(+)
a
48.5
18
32
42.5
62
24
Insulation
cover
• Button color
Code G R W Y S O
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Holder
Transformer unit
Transformer
primary
terminal
Washer
Nut
48.5
7
10
15
18
32
18
(–)
b
(+)
a
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Holder
Transformer unit
Transformer
primary
terminal
Washer
Nut
48.5
7
10
15
18
32
18
(–)
b
(+)
a
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Holder
Transformer unit
Transformer
primary
terminal
Washer
Nut
48.5
7
10
15
18
32
18
(+)
a
32
18
AH164 and AH165

04/199
KKD07-209
KKD07-208
KKD07-206
Flush rectangular head
with guard
KKD05-176
KKD05-075b
KKD07-210
KKD05-081b
KKD05-082b
04
Extended round head 1NO+1NC AH164-E11 AH165-E11 AH164-E511 AH165-E511
2NO+2NC AH164-E22 AH165-E22 AH164-E522 AH165-E522
3NO+3NC AH164-E33 AH165-E33 AH164-E533 AH165-E533
Flush square head 1NO+1NC AH164-SF11 AH165-SF11 AH164-SF511 AH165-SF511
2NO+2NC AH164-SF22 AH165-SF22 AH164-SF522 AH165-SF522
3NO+3NC AH164-SF33 AH165-SF33 AH164-SF533 AH165-SF533
Flush rectangular head 1NO+1NC AH164-TF11 AH165-TF11 AH164-TF511 AH165-TF511
2NO+2NC AH164-TF22 AH165-TF22 AH164-TF522 AH165-TF522
3NO+3NC AH164-TF33 AH165-TF33 AH164-TF533 AH165-TF533
1NO+1NC AH164-TGF11 AH165-TGF11 AH164-TGF511 AH165-TGF511
1NO+1NC AH164-SGF11 AH165-SGF11 AH164-SGF511 AH165-SGF511
Mushroom head 1NO+1NC AH164-M11 AH165-M11 AH164-M511 AH165-M511
2NO+2NC AH164-M22 AH165-M22 AH164-M522 AH165-M522
3NO+3NC AH164-M33 AH165-M33 AH164-M533 AH165-M533
Convex square head 1NO+1NC AH164-SM11 AH165-SM11 AH164-SM511 AH165-SM511
2NO+2NC AH164-SM22 AH165-SM22 AH164-SM522 AH165-SM522
3NO+3NC AH164-SM33 AH165-SM33 AH164-SM533 AH165-SM533
Convex rectangular head 1NO+1NC AH164-TM11 AH165-TM11 AH164-TM511 AH165-TM511
2NO+2NC AH164-TM22 AH165-TM22 AH164-TM522 AH165-TM522
3NO+3NC AH164-TM33 AH165-TM33 AH164-TM533 AH165-TM533
Pushbuttons
AH164 and AH165
Operator Contact Momentary action Alternate action Dimensions, mm
• Button color
Replace the mark by the following color code
7
15
18
7
Washer
Nut
7
Washer
Nut
7
Washer
Nut
7
Washer
Nut
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
17.5
• The color lens is made of a tinted transparent material. (Except the M,
SM, TM types)
• A white pushbutton is fitted with a transparent color lens.(Except the
M, SM, TM types) A black pushbutton consists of a transparent color
lens and an attached black legend plate. (Except M, SM, TM types)
Color Green Red Black White Blue Yellow Orange
Code G R B W S Y O
10
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
φ
φ
18sq.
42.5
10
42.5
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
15
18
15sq.
18sq.
10
42.5
Panel thickness
4 (max.) 15
18
21
24
15
18
10
42.5
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
21
24
15
18
10
42.5
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
15sq.
18sq.
42.5 16.5
φ 23.5
42.5 16.5
23.5 sq.
42.5 16.5 23.5
Flush square head
with guard

Pushbuttons
AH165
Operator Button Contact Terminal AH165 (oil-tight) type Dimensions, mm
color
Push-lock, turn-reset Red 1NC Solder/Tab AH165-VR01
(32mm dia.) Solder (AH165-VR01-S)
2NC AH165-VR02
15.5 15
15.5 15
Operator Button Contact Terminal AH165 (oil-tight) type Dimensions, mm
04/200
Washer Panel thickness
6 (max.)
color
Push-lock, turn-reset Red 1NC Solder/Tab AH165-V5R01
(32mm dia.) Solder (AH165-V5R01-S)
2NC AH165-V5R02
KKD07-221
(AH165-V5R02-S)
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NC AH165-V6R01
(40mm dia.) (AH165-V6R01-S)
2NC AH165-V6R02
KKD07-222
(AH165-V6R02-S)
Notes: * ( ) For switch with solder terminal.
AF91-584
(AH165-VR02-S)
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NC AH165-V1R01
(40mm dia.) (AH165-V1R01-S)
2NC AH165-V1R02
AF91-583
(AH165-V1R02-S)
Notes: * ( ) For switch with solder terminal.
• Product with no trigger action mechanism.
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
24.5
ø32
*(20)
Washer
Nut
24.5
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
ø40
*(20)
33
42 24.5
Nut
ø32
* (37.5)
33
24.5
ø40
42
6 (max.)
Nut
* (37.5)

8.5
10.5
8.5
10.5
18 8.5
18 8.5
Contact arrange- 1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC
ment
Operator Left
position
M
M
04/201
■ Selector switches/2-position (90-degree)
• The operating angle range can be changed
as shown below by setting the attached
flange shifted by 45° in combination with the
contact block.
In this case, the minimum mounting pitch is
26mm because the contact block is shifted
by 45° from the flange.
04
Operator Operation Key Contact AH164 type AH165 Dimensions, mm
removable (oil-tight) type
position
Knob with Maintained 1NO+1NC AH164-P2B11 AH165-P2B11
rectangular bezel — 2NO+2NC AH164-P2B22 AH165-P2B22
3NO+3NC AH164-P2B33 AH165-P2B33
Spring 1NO+1NC AH164-P0B11 AH165-P0B11
return — 2NO+2NC AH164-P0B22 AH165-P0B22
3NO+3NC AH164-P0B33 AH165-P0B33
Knob with square Maintained 1NO+1NC AH164-SP2B11 AH165-SP2B11
bezel — 2NO+2NC AH164-SP2B22 AH165-SP2B22
3NO+3NC AH164-SP2B33 AH165-SP2B33
Spring 1NO+1NC AH164-SP0B11 AH165-SP0B11
return — 2NO+2NC AH164-SP0B22 AH165-SP0B22
Key with Maintained 1NO+1NC AH164-J2A11A AH165-J2A11A
rectangular bezel 2NO+2NC AH164-J2A22A AH165-J2A22A
A 3NO+3NC AH164-J2A33A AH165-J2A33A
1NO+1NC AH164-J2B11A AH165-J2B11A
2NO+2NC AH164-J2B22A AH165-J2B22A
B 3NO+3NC AH164-J2B33A AH165-J2B33A
1NO+1NC AH164-J2D11A AH165-J2D11A
D 3NO+3NC AH164-J2D33A AH165-J2D33A
Spring 1NO+1NC AH164-J0A11A AH165-J0A11A
return 2NO+2NC AH164-J0A22A AH165-J0A22A
A 3NO+3NC AH164-J0A33A AH165-J0A33A
Key with square Maintained 1NO+1NC AH164-SJ2A11A AH165-SJ2A11A
bezel 2NO+2NC AH164-SJ2A22A AH165-SJ2A22A
A 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ2A33A AH165-SJ2A33A
1NO+1NC AH164-SJ2B11A AH165-SJ2B11A
2NO+2NC AH164-SJ2B22A AH165-SJ2B22A
B 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ2B33A AH165-SJ2B33A
1NO+1NC AH164-SJ2D11A AH165-SJ2D11A
D 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ2D33A AH165-SJ2D33A
Spring 1NO+1NC AH164-SJ0A11A AH165-SJ0A11A
return 2NO+2NC AH164-SJ0A22A AH165-SJ0A22A
A 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ0A33A AH165-SJ0A33A
Selector Switches
AH164 and AH165
Right
3-position selector switch
Contact arrange- 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC
ment
Operator Left U L U M L
position
Center
Right
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
KKD07-213
KKD07-215
KKD09-001L
KKD09-001R
• Contact block position
• There are 6 available key types;
A, B, C, D, E and F.
• With wire-wrap pin terminals have a
depth of 47mm.
42.5 18.5
18
18
24
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
φ
φ18
42.5 18.5
18sq.
18
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
φ
42.5
10.5
18
24
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
42.5
10.5
18sq.
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
• Contact arrangement and operator position:
M
M
U
L
U
L
U
L
U
L

Operator Operation Key Contact AH165 (oil-tight) type Dimensions, mm
KKD09-005L
KKD09-005R
KKD09-005L
KKD09-007R
• Contact arrangement and operator positions:
04/202
Nut 4 (max.)
Panel thickness
4(max.)
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4(max.)
1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
removable
position
Key with rectangular Maintained A 1NO+1NC AH165-JM2A11A
bezel
B AH165-JM2B11A
D AH165-JM2D11A
A 2NO+2NC AH165-JM2A22A
B AH165-JM2B22A
D AH165-JM2D22A
Key with round bezel Maintained A 1NO+1NC AH165-RJM2A11A
B AH165-RJM2B11A
D AH165-RJM2D11A
A 2NO+2NC AH165-RJM2A22A
B AH165-RJM2B22A
D AH165-RJM2D22A
Selector Switches
AH165
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
9.8
ø20
18sq.
32.5
41.5 10.8 18
9.8
18
18sq.
27.5
37.5
46.5 10.8 18
ø20
Washer
Nut
Contact
arrangement
1NO+1NC
Operator
position
Left
Right
11 12 21 22
11 12 21 22
Contact
arrangement
2NO+2NC
Operator
position
Left U L
Right
11 12 11 12
21 22 21 22
11 12 11 12
21 22 21 22
• Terminal number
11 12
21 22
U: Upper contact block
L: Lower contact block
18
24
32.5 8.8
41.5 10.8 18
• There are 6 available key types; A, B, C, D, E and F.

04/203
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
E
D
C
E
D
A
E
E
A
E
D
C
E
D
A
E
04
position
Knob with Maintained 2NO+2NC AH164-P3B22 AH165-P3B22
rectangular bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-P3B33 AH165-P3B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-P6B22 AH165-P6B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-P6B33 AH165-P6B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-P7B22 AH165-P7B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-P7B33 AH165-P7B33
Spring return 2NO+2NC AH164-P1B22 AH165-P1B22
3NO+3NC AH164-P1B33 AH165-P1B33
Knob with square Maintained 2NO+2NC AH164-SP3B22 AH165-SP3B22
bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-SP3B33 AH165-SP3B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SP6B22 AH165-SP6B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SP6B33 AH165-SP6B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SP7B22 AH165-SP7B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SP7B33 AH165-SP7B33
Spring return 2NO+2NC AH164-SP1B22 AH165-SP1B22
Key with Maintained* 2NO+2NC AH164-J3A22A AH165-J3A22A
rectangular bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-J3A33A AH165-J3A33A
2NO+2NC AH164-J3E22A AH165-J3E22A
2NO+2NC AH164-J3C22A AH165-J3C22A
3NO+3NC AH164-J3C33A AH165-J3C33A
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-J6E22A AH165-J6E22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-J6E33A AH165-J6E33A
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-J7A22A AH165-J7A22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-J7A33A AH165-J7A33A
Spring 2NO+2NC AH164-J1E22A AH165-J1E22A
return 3NO+3NC AH164-J1E33A AH165-J1E33A
Key with square Maintained* 2NO+2NC AH164-SJ3A22A AH165-SJ3A22A
bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ3A33A AH165-SJ3A33A
2NO+2NC AH164-SJ3E22A AH165-SJ3E22A
2NO+2NC AH164-SJ3C22A AH165-SJ3C22A
3NO+3NC AH164-SJ3C33A AH165-SJ3C33A
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SJ6E22A AH165-SJ6E22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ6E33A AH165-SJ6E33A
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SJ7A22A AH165-SJ7A22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ7A33A AH165-SJ7A33A
Spring 2NO+2NC AH164-SJ1E22A AH165-SJ1E22A
E
return 3NO+3NC AH164-SJ1E33A AH165-SJ1E33A
Selector Switches
AH164 and AH165
• Contact arrangement and operator position: See page 04/201.
• Spring return, spring/manual return (spring return):
Operation angle 70-degree
8.5
10.5
42.5 18.5
18
18
24
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
φ
8.5
10.5
42.5 18.5
18sq.
18
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
φ
42.5
18 8.5
10.5
18
24
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
42.5
18 8.5
10.5
18sq.
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
• * Available key removable position: Code B
KKD07-214
KKD07-216
KKD09-002L
KKD09-002R

Selector Switches
AH164 and AH165
04/204
8.5
10.5
8.5
10.5
18 8.5
18 8.5
position
Knob with Maintained —
2NO+2NC AH164-PK3B22 AH165-PK3B22
rectangular bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-PK3B33 AH165-PK3B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-PK6B22 AH165-PK6B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-PK6B33 AH165-PK6B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-PK7B22 AH165-PK7B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-PK7B33 AH165-PK7B33
Spring return 2NO+2NC AH164-PK1B22 AH165-PK1B22
3NO+3NC AH164-PK1B33 AH165-PK1B33
—
—
—
Knob with square Maintained —
2NO+2NC AH164-SPK3B22 AH165-SPK3B22
bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-SPK3B33 AH165-SPK3B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SPK6B22 AH165-SPK6B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SPK6B33 AH165-SPK6B33
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SPK7B22 AH165-SPK7B22
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SPK7B33 AH165-SPK7B33
Spring return 2NO+2NC AH164-SPK1B22 AH165-SPK1B22
3NO+3NC AH164-SPK1B33 AH165-SPK1B33
—
—
—
Key with Maintained 2NO+2NC AH164-JK3A22A AH165-JK3A22A
rectangular bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-JK3A33A AH165-JK3A33A
2NO+2NC AH164-JK3E22A AH165-JK3E22A
2NO+2NC AH164-JK3D22A AH165-JK3D22A
2NO+2NC AH164-JK3C22A AH165-JK3C22A
3NO+3NC AH164-JK3C33A AH165-JK3C33A
A
E
D
C
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-JK6E22A AH165-JK6E22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-JK6E33A AH165-JK6E33A
E
D
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-JK7A22A AH165-JK7A22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-JK7A33A AH165-JK7A33A
A
E
Spring 2NO+2NC AH164-JK1E22A AH165-JK1E22A
E
return 3NO+3NC AH164-JK1E33A AH165-JK1E33A
Key with square Maintained 2NO+2NC AH164-SJK3A22A AH165-SJK3A22A
bezel 3NO+3NC AH164-SJK3A33A AH165-SJK3A33A
2NO+2NC AH164-SJK3E22A AH165-SJK3E22A
2NO+2NC AH164-SJK3D22A AH165-SJK3D22A
2NO+2NC AH164-SJK3C22A AH165-SJK3C22A
3NO+3NC AH164-SJK3C33A AH165-SJK3C33A
A
E
D
C
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SJK6E22A AH165-SJK6E22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SJK6E33A AH165-SJK6E33A
E
D
Spring/ 2NO+2NC AH164-SJK7A22A AH165-SJK7A22A
manual return 3NO+3NC AH164-SJK7A33A AH165-SJK7A33A
A
E
Spring 2NO+2NC AH164-SJK1E22A AH165-SJK1E22A
E
return 3NO+3NC AH164-SJK1E33A AH165-SJK1E33A
• Contact arrangement and operator position: See page 04/205.
42.5 18.5
18
18
24
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
φ
42.5 18.5
18sq.
18
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
φ
42.5
10.5
18
24
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
42.5
10.5
18sq.
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
KKD07-214
KKD07-216
KKD09-002L
KKD09-002R

04/205
Remvable
position
Code A B C D E F G
Operation code Key removable position
3
A, B, C, D, E, F, G
6
D, E, F
7
A, E, G
1
E
• Contact arrangement and operator position:
04
Selector Switches
AH164 and AH165
• Key removable positions (JK, SJK)
• Key code No.
There are 6 available key types; A, B, C, D, E and F.
• Contact block position
Contact arrange- 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC
ment
Operator Left U L U M L
position
Center
Right
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4

■ Pilot lights/without transformer
Lens Lamp Voltage AH164 type AH165 (oil-tight) type Dimensions, mm
Extended round Flat LED 24V DC AH164-ZE3 AH165-ZE3
Code G R W Y S O
04/206
a (+)
b (–)
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
––
15sq.
18sq.
15sq.
Panel thickness
5 (max.)
16
Nut
Spot LED 24V DC AH164-ZE2 AH165-ZE2
Incandescent 24V AC/DC AH164-ZE AH165-ZE
Neon 110V AC AH164-ZH1 AH165-ZH1
220V AC AH164-ZM1 AH165-ZM1
Flush square Flat LED 24V DC AH164-ZSE3 AH165-ZSE3
Spot LED 24V DC AH164-ZSE2 AH165-ZSE2
Incandescent 24V AC/DC AH164-ZSE AH165-ZSE
Neon 110V AC AH164-ZSH1 AH165-ZSH1
220V AC AH164-ZSM1 AH165-ZSM1
Flat LED 24V DC AH164-ZTE3 AH165-ZTE3
Spot LED 24V DC AH164-ZTE2 AH165-ZTE2
Incandescent 24V AC/DC AH164-ZTE AH165-ZTE
Neon 110V AC AH164-ZTH1 AH165-ZTH1
220V AC AH164-ZTM1 AH165-ZTM1
Dome LED 12V DC – AH165-ZMB2
24V DC – AH165-ZME2
Pilot Lights
AH164 and AH165
Flush rectangular
• Lens color
• A white pilot lights is fitted with a transparent color lens. (Except the
neon lamp and dome).
• With wire-wrap pin terminals have a depth of 29mm. (Except for ZM
type)
• Lamp voltage
AA
ABKP
5V DC
6V DC
12V DC
––
Note: Except for ZM types and red/green LED types
Neon
–––
120V AC
240V AC
SK-1139
SK-1138
SK-1137
AF87-45
24 7
10
ø15
ø18
18sq.
Washer
Nut
a (+)
b (–)
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
24 7
10 18sq.
a (+)
b (–)
Panel thickness
Washer 4 (max.)
Nut
24 7
10
15
18
15
18
21
24
a (+)
b (–)
Washer
Nut
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
ø15
ø18
14
6.7
31.3 14.2 LED
Lamp terminal
Washer
1sq.
1sq.
18sq.

15
04/207
■ Pilot lights/with transformer
Extended square
AF90-944
Code G R W Y S O
04
Lens Lamp Voltage AH164 type AH165 (oil-tight) type Dimensions, mm
Flat LED AH164-Z3 AH165-Z3
Incandescent AH164-Z AH165-Z
Flat LED AH164-ZS3 AH165-ZS3
Incandescent AH164-ZS AH165-ZS
Flat LED AH164-ZT3 AH165-ZT3
Incandescent AH164-ZT AH165-ZT
Flush rectangular
• Lens color
• A white pilot lights is fitted with a transparent color lens.
Pilot Lights
AH164 and AH165
48.5
7
10
ø15
ø18
Washer
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Insulation
cover
Holder
Transformer
primary
terminal Transformer unit
18
32
18
Nut
(–)
b
(+)
a
62
Holder
Transformer unit
Insulation
cover
Transformer
primary
terminal
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Washer
48.5
7
10 15sq.
18sq.
Nut
32
(–)
b
(+)
a
62
18
15
Holder
Transformer unit
Insulation
cover
Transformer
primary
terminal
Panel thickness
4 (max.)
Washer
48.5
7
10
15
18
Nut
32
18
(–)
b
(+)
a
62
18
24
21
■ Voltage
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
■ Voltage
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
■ Voltage
H:
100-110V
AC
M:
200-220V
AC
AF90-943
AF90-942
Flush square

Sound Operating voltage Type Dimensions, mm
Standard
Loud sound
04/208
Short-circuit terminal
Connected: Intermittent sound
Not connected: Continuous sound
b (–)
21
24
15
18
21
10
Washer
b (–)
9 29.5 16 24
Washer
Volume
Clockwise: Increase sound pressure
Counterclockwise: Decrease sound pressure Nut
Panel
thickness
5 (max.)
18
6V AC AH164-TXBAAC
6V DC AH164-TXBADC
12 to 24V AC/DC AH164-TXBE
35 to 48V AC/DC AH164-TXBF
6V AC AH164-TX1BAAC
6V DC AH164-TX1BADC
12 to 24V AC/DC AH164-TX1BE
35 to 48V AC/DC AH164-TX1BF
6V AC/DC AH164-TX2BA
12 to 24V AC/DC AH164-TX2BE
35 to 48V AC/DC AH164-TX2BF
6V AC/DC AH165-XBA
12 to 24V AC/DC AH165-XBE
35 to 48V AC/DC AH165-XBF
AF87-317
AF87-44
Washer
Nut
a (+)
7
34.5 10
15
18
7.5
Terminal: Tab/solder type
Maximum panel thickness for
the buzzers with washers is 5mm
18×24
Panel thickness
6 (max.)
15
18
7.5 37.5
24
15
18
15
Nut
Panel thickness
5 (max.)
18×24
a (+)
■ Buzzers
KKD07-223
KKD05-096b ø24
9 37
15.5
LED (red)
Washer
Panel
thickness
5 (max.)
Volume
Clockwise:
Increase sound pressure
Counterclockwise:
Decrease sound pressure
Short-circuit terminal Nut
Buzzers
AH164 and AH165
Loud sound with
volume control
Standard sound with
volume control (IP54)

Type Wiring Terminal position
Illuminated
Type number
pushbuttons
display side
Type number
display side
04/209
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
ø16.2 +0.2
04
■ Mounting space, mm
• Pushbuttons and pilot lights
Extended round head or lens Flush square head or lens Flush rectangular head or lens
Mushroom head Convex square head Convex rectangular head
•When mounting the selector
switches near the pilot light
AH164 and AH165
Mounting space
• When mounting the selector
switches near each other
• With transformer
Note: *( ) For switch with flush
rectangular head
■ Terminal number
• AH164, 165
18 18
20
20
18 18
20
20
24
24
21.5
(24)*
42
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
20
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
Panel
cutting
ø16.2 +0.2
0
24
30
24
25*
Note: * Mushroom, convex square,
convex rectangular: 27
• When mounting the JM or RJM selector switches
near each other (2NO+2NC only)
• When mounting the JM or RJM selector switches
near the other selector switch, pushbutton switch
and pilot lights
• AH165-V, V1, V5, V6 • AH165-JM, RJM
7.7±0.1
0
ø2+0.1
0
+0.2
ø16.2 0
15+0.2
0
a
(+)
a
(+)
b
(-)
a
(+)
b
(-)
b
(-)
a b
Pushbuttons
Selector switches
(except for
JM, RJM types)
Pilot lights
(without
transformer)
1
3
2
4
3 1
3 1
1 3 1
3
2 4
2 4
2 2 4
4

Pushbuttons, illuminated pushbuttons and pilot lights ➂ Color of button or lens
04/210
Button
AH165-2
AH165-2: Oil-tight (Large operator)
➁ Operator or lens
• Operator for illuminated pushbutton
FL: Flush round head
FL5: Flush round head (Alternate)
SFL: Flush square head
SFL5: Flush square head (Alternate)
EL: Extended round head
EL5: Extended round head (Alternate)
SEL: Extended square head
SEL5: Extended square head (Alternate)
SCL: Concave square head
SCL5: Concave square head (Alternate)
ML: Mushroom head
YML: Mushroom head with square bezel
VL: Push-lock, turn-reset
YVL: Push-lock, turn-reset with square bezel
• Operator for pushbuttons
F: Flush round head
F5: Flush round head (Alternate)
SF5: Flush square head (Alternate)
E5: Extended round head (Alternate)
SE: Extended square head
SE5: Extended square head (Alternate)
SCE: Concave square head
SCE5: Concave square head (Alternate)
M: Mushroom head
YM: Mushroom head with square bezel
V: Push-lock, turn-reset
YV: Push-lock, turn-reset with square bezel
S2: With selector ring
YS2: With selector ring with square bezel
• Lens for pilot lights
Z: Flush round
SZ: Flush square
ZE: Extended round
SEZ: Extended square
➃ Contact arrangement (except pilot lights)
11: 1NO+1NC
22: 2NO+2NC
33: 3NO+3NC
➄ Lamp voltage
➅ Type of lamp
Blank: Incandescent
1: Neon
3: Flat LED
➆ Terminal
Blank: Solder/tab
W: Wire-wrap
AH165-2 FL R 11 E 3 – W
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆
Code
* Not available for illuminated types
G
R
B
Y
W
S
O

LED

–

(Orange)

(Amber)
Incandescent

–

Neon

(Orange)
–
(Orange)
(Orange)
(Green)

Color
Green
Red
Black*
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
Code LED Incandescent Neon
AA
ABE
HK
MP
5V DC
6V DC
12V DC
24V DC
––––
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
––––
––––
110V AC
120V AC
220V AC
240V AC

04/211
Selector switches
AH165-2 J 2 B 11 A – W
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆
Code 2-position 3-position
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
2 0 1 3 6 7
–
–
–
–
04
AH165-2
➁ Operator
• Knob and key type
2-position (operating angle 90°)
P: Knob
YP: Knob with square bezel
J: Key
YJ: Key with square bezel
P: Knob
YP: Knob with square bezel
J: Key
YJ: Key with square bezel
• Lever type
H: Lever
SH: Lever with square bezel
Note: The operation angle is 45° on the upper and lower side.
➂ Operation
0: 2-position, spring return*
Note: * Except for H and SH types
➃ Color of knob, lever or key removable position
• Color of knob or lever
B: Black
11: 1NO+1NC*
22: 2NO+2NC
33: 3NO+3NC
Note: * Except for 3-position
➅ Key type No.
A (standard), B, C, D, E, F
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
➆ Terminal
Blank: Solder/tab
W: Wire-wrap
AH165-2 PL 2 G 11 E 3
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆
➁ Operator
PL: Knob
PL: Knob
➂ Operation
➃ Color of knob
Code
• The part other than the arrow of the knob is black.
G
R
Y
W
S
O
LED
(Orange)
(Amber)
Incandescent

Neon

(Orange)
(Orange)
(Orange)
(Green)

Color
Green
Red
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
11: 1NO+1NC*
22: 2NO+2NC
Note: * Except for 3-position
➅ Lamp voltage
Code LED Incandescent Neon
AA
ABE
HK
MP
5V DC
6V DC
12V DC
24V DC
––––
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
––––
––––
110V AC
120V AC
220V AC
240V AC
➆ Type of lamp
Blank: Incandescent
1: Neon
3: Flat LED
Note: Terminal with solder/tab only

04/212
AH165-2
Item AH165-2
Ambient temperature –10 to +70°C *1
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (at –5 to +40°C), no condensation or no icing
Durability Mechanical Pushbutton and illuminated pushubutton switch
Push-lock, turn-reset: 100,000
With selector ring: 250,000
Selector and illuminated selector switch: 250,000*2
Electrical 100,000 (220V AC 0.7A)
(Between lamp and contact terminals: 1500V AC, 1 minute)
Short-circuit protective device Fuse 1A
Pollution degree 3
Shock Malfunction durability: 100m/s2
Operating frequency 1200 operation/hour (on-load factor: 40%)
Operator protection IP65
Notes: *1 For illuminated pushbutton, illuminated selector switch and pilot light: –10 to +55°C
*2 Key insertion/removal durability for selector switch key types: 10,000
■ Lamp ratings
Rated operational
voltage
Consumption
LED
DC
Notes: For the incandescent lamps, the values in parentheses indicate the
rated voltage of the lamps.
Incandescent
AC/DC
Neon
AC
5V
6V
12V
24V
110V
120V
220V
240V
7mA (Yellow: 28mA)
7mA (Yellow: 28mA)
7mA
7mA
––––
0.45W (6V)
–
0.55W (14V)
0.55W (28V)
––––
––––
0.19VA
0.21VA
0.38VA
0.42VA
UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
File No. E44592
File No. LR20479 (except for AH165-2Z, 2ZE, 2SZ, 2SZE)
File No. LR84365 (for AH165-2Z, 2ZE, 2SZ, 2SZE)
Pushbutton, illuminated pushbutton: R9250087
Selector (except for AH165-2H, SH), illuminated selector: R9250088
Selector (for AH165-2H, SH): R9250087
■ Contact ratings
See page 04/194

Illuminated Pushbutton Switches
AH165-2
04/213
AF87-211
AF87-210
AF87-221
AF87-220
04
Flush round head
Extended round head
Mushroom head
Mushroom head
with square bezel
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2FL11E3
AH165-2FL22E3
AH165-2FL33E3
AH165-2FL11E
AH165-2FL22E
AH165-2FL33E
AH165-2FL11H1
AH165-2FL22H1
AH165-2FL33H1
AH165-2FL11M1
AH165-2FL22M1
AH165-2FL33M1
AH165-2EL11E3
AH165-2EL22E3
AH165-2EL33E3
AH165-2EL11E
AH165-2EL22E
AH165-2EL33E
AH165-2EL11H1
AH165-2EL22H1
AH165-2EL33H1
AH165-2EL11M1
AH165-2EL22M1
AH165-2EL33M1
AH165-2ML11E3
AH165-2ML22E3
AH165-2ML33E3
AH165-2ML11E
AH165-2ML22E
AH165-2ML33E
AH165-2ML11H1
AH165-2ML22H1
AH165-2ML33H1
AH165-2ML11M1
AH165-2ML22M1
AH165-2ML33M1
AH165-2YML11E3
AH165-2YML22E3
AH165-2YML33E3
AH165-2YML11E
AH165-2YML22E
AH165-2YML33E
AH165-2YML11H1
AH165-2YML22H1
AH165-2YML33H1
AH165-2YML11M1
AH165-2YML22M1
AH165-2YML33M1
AH165-2FL511E3
AH165-2FL522E3
AH165-2FL533E3
AH165-2FL511E
AH165-2FL522E
AH165-2FL533E
AH165-2FL511H1
AH165-2FL522H1
AH165-2FL533H1
AH165-2FL511M1
AH165-2FL522M1
AH165-2FL533M1
AH165-2EL511E3
AH165-2EL522E3
AH165-2EL533E3
AH165-2EL511E
AH165-2EL522E
AH165-2EL533E
AH165-2EL511H1
AH165-2EL522H1
AH165-2EL533H1
AH165-2EL511M1
AH165-2EL522M1
AH165-2EL533M1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Operator Lamp Voltage Contact Momentary action
Type
Alternate action
Type
Dimensions, mm
Note: Replace the mark by the following color code, see page 04/215.
42.5 11.5 ø20
ø25
42.5
11.5 ø20
ø25
15
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
25sq.

04/214
AH165-2
Flush square head
Extended square
head
Concave square
head
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2SFL11E3
AH165-2SFL22E3
AH165-2SFL33E3
AH165-2SFL11E
AH165-2SFL22E
AH165-2SFL33E
AH165-2SFL11H1
AH165-2SFL22H1
AH165-2SFL33H1
AH165-2SFL11M1
AH165-2SFL22M1
AH165-2SFL33M1
AH165-2SEL11E3
AH165-2SEL22E3
AH165-2SEL33E3
AH165-2SEL11E
AH165-2SEL22E
AH165-2SEL33E
AH165-2SEL11H1
AH165-2SEL22H1
AH165-2SEL33H1
AH165-2SEL11M1
AH165-2SEL22M1
AH165-2SEL33M1
AH165-2SCL11E3
AH165-2SCL22E3
AH165-2SCL33E3
AH165-2SCL11E
AH165-2SCL22E
AH165-2SCL33E
AH165-2SCL11H1
AH165-2SCL22H1
AH165-2SCL33H1
AH165-2SCL11M1
AH165-2SCL22M1
AH165-2SCL33M1
AH165-2SFL511E3
AH165-2SFL522E3
AH165-2SFL533E3
AH165-2SFL511E
AH165-2SFL522E
AH165-2SFL533E
AH165-2SFL511H1
AH165-2SFL522H1
AH165-2SFL533H1
AH165-2SFL511M1
AH165-2SFL522M1
AH165-2SFL533M1
AH165-2SEL511E3
AH165-2SEL522E3
AH165-2SEL533E3
AH165-2SEL511E
AH165-2SEL522E
AH165-2SEL533E
AH165-2SEL511H1
AH165-2SEL522H1
AH165-2SEL533H1
AH165-2SEL511M1
AH165-2SEL522M1
AH165-2SEL533M1
AH165-2SCL511E3
AH165-2SCL522E3
AH165-2SCL533E3
AH165-2SCL511E
AH165-2SCL522E
AH165-2SCL533E
AH165-2SCL511H1
AH165-2SCL522H1
AH165-2SCL533H1
AH165-2SCL511M1
AH165-2SCL522M1
AH165-2SCL533M1
Operator Lamp Voltage Contact Momentary action
Type
Alternate action
Type
Dimensions, mm
AF87-201
AF87-200
AF87-199
42.5 11.5 25sq.
20sq.
42.5
11.5
20sq.
25sq.
15
42.5
11.5 20sq.
25sq.
16.5

04/215
Operator Lamp Voltage Contact Type Dimensions, mm
Code G R W Y S O
04
AH165-2
with square bezel
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2VL11E3
AH165-2VL22E3
AH165-2VL33E3
AH165-2VL11E
AH165-2VL22E
AH165-2VL33E
AH165-2VL11H1
AH165-2VL22H1
AH165-2VL33H1
AH165-2VL11M1
AH165-2VL22M1
AH165-2VL33M1
AH165-2YVL11E3
AH165-2YVL22E3
AH165-2YVL33E3
AH165-2YVL11E
AH165-2YVL22E
AH165-2YVL33E
AH165-2YVL11H1
AH165-2YVL22H1
AH165-2YVL33H1
AH165-2YVL11M1
AH165-2YVL22M1
AH165-2YVL33M1
AF87-219
AF87-218
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
25sq.
• Button color
Replace the mark by the following button color code
• A white illuminated pushbutton is fitted with a transparent color lens.
• Lamp voltage
AA
ABKP
5V DC
6V DC
12V DC
––
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
––
Neon
–––
120V AC
240V AC

04/216
Pushbutton Switches
AH165-2
Flush round head
Flush square head
AF87-211
AF87-201
Extended round head
AF87-210
Extended square head
AF87-200
Concave square head
Mushroom head
AF87-199
AF87-215
Mushroom head with
square bezel
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2F11
AH165-2F22
AH165-2F33
AH165-2SF11
AH165-2SF22
AH165-2SF33
AH165-2E11
AH165-2E22
AH165-2E33
AH165-2SE11
AH165-2SE22
AH165-2SE33
AH165-2SCE11
AH165-2SCE22
AH165-2SCE33
AH165-2M11
AH165-2M22
AH165-2M33
AH165-2YM11
AH165-2YM22
AH165-2YM33
AH165-2F511
AH165-2F522
AH165-2F533
AH165-2SF511
AH165-2SF522
AH165-2SF533
AH165-2E511
AH165-2E522
AH165-2E533
AH165-2SE511
AH165-2SE522
AH165-2SE533
AH165-2SCE511
AH165-2SCE522
AH165-2SCE533
–
–
–
–
–
–
Operator Contact Momentary action
Type
Alternate action
Type
Dimensions, mm
AF87-214
42.5 11.5 ø20
ø25
42.5 11.5 25sq.
20sq.
42.5
11.5 ø20
ø25
15
42.5
11.5 20sq.
25sq.
16.5
42.5
11.5
20sq.
25sq.
15
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
25sq.

04/217
Operator Contact Type Dimensions, mm
Right
Depressed
1 2
3 4
04
Pushbutton Switches
AH165-2
With selector ring
With selector ring with
square bezel
Push-lock, turn-reset with
square bezel
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2S222
AH165-2YS222
AH165-2V11
AH165-2V22
AH165-2V33
AH165-2YV11
AH165-2YV22
AH165-2YV33
AF87-207
AF87-206
AF87-210
AF87-200
42.5
11.5 ø20
22
ø25
90°
42.5
11.5 ø20
25sq.
22
ø25
90°
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
42.5
11.5
22
ø32
25sq.
• Button color
• The color lens is made of a tinted transparent material. (Except for M,
YM, V, YV, types)
• A white pushbutton is fitted with a transparent color lens. A black
pushbutton consists of a transparent color lens and an attached black
legend plate. (Except for M, YM, V, YV, types)
Color
Code
Green
G
Red
R
White
W
Black
B
Blue
S
Yellow
Y
Orange
O
• Contact arrangement and operator position
AH165-2S, 2YS
Button
Ring Left
U L U L
Free
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
• Terminal number and contact block position
Type number display side
NC
NO
Upper
Lower
➂➀ ➁➃

Knob
Knob
Key
➂➀ ➁➃
04/218
13.5 ø25
13.5 25sq.
Selector Switches
AH165-2
Maintained
Spring return
Maintained
Spring return
Maintained
Spring return
Maintained
Spring return
• The key can be removed only at the following positions:
A: B: D:
• For spring-return selector switches, the key can be removed at
position A.
2-position
Contact
arrangement
1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC
Operator
position
Left
Right
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
3 4
M: Middle contact block
M U U
M
L
U
M
L
L
U
L
M
NC
NO
Upper
Middle
Lower
Contact arrangement (terminal No.: common)
1NO+1NC: Middle
2NO+2NC: Upper, lower
3NO+3NC: Upper, middle, lower
–
–
–
–
A
B
D
A
A
B
D
A
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2P2B11
AH165-2P2B22
AH165-2P2B33
AH165-2P0B11
AH165-2P0B22
AH165-2P0B33
AH165-2YP2B11
AH165-2YP2B22
AH165-2YP2B33
AH165-2YP0B11
AH165-2YP0B22
AH165-2YP0B33
AH165-2J2A11A
AH165-2J2A22A
AH165-2J2A33A
AH165-2J2B11A
AH165-2J2B22A
AH165-2J2B33A
AH165-2J2D11A
AH165-2J2D22A
AH165-2J2D33A
AH165-2J0A11A
AH165-2J0A22A
AH165-2J0A33A
AH165-2YJ2A11A
AH165-2YJ2A22A
AH165-2YJ2A33A
AH165-2YJ2B11A
AH165-2YJ2B22A
AH165-2YJ2B33A
AH165-2YJ2D11A
AH165-2YJ2D22A
AH165-2YJ2D33A
AH165-2YJ0A11A
AH165-2YJ0A22A
AH165-2YJ0A33A
Operator Operation Key removable
position
Contact Type Dimensions, mm
KKD07-232
KKD07-234
KKD09-003L
KKD09-003R
11.5
42.5 24
ø25
25
11.5
42.5 24
25sq.
25
11.5
42.5 37
11.5
42.5 37

Selector Switches
AH165-2
04/219
AH165-2H, 2SH
Contact
block
Lever Up Down
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
M M
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
U L
1 2
3 4
04
Lever
Lever with square bezel
Black
Black
Maintained
Maintained
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2H2B11
AH165-2H2B22
AH165-2H2B33
AH165-2SH2B11
AH165-2SH2B22
AH165-2SH2B33
Operator Lever
color
Operation Contact Type Dimensions, mm
AF87-209
AF87-203
11.5
42.5 24
45°
ø25
11.5
42.5 24
45°
25sq.
■ Selector switches/2-position
• Contact arrangement and operator position
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
L
U
U M L U M L
➂➀ ➁➃
NC
NO
Upper
Middle
Lower
1NO+1NC: Middle
3NO+3NC: Upper, middle, lower

04/220
25
25
13.5 ø25
13.5 25sq.
U L U M L
Selector Switches
AH165-2
• The Key can be removed at the following positions:
For spring-return selector switches, the key can be removed only at position
E. For manual/spring-return selector switches, the key can be removed at
positions D, E and F for type J6, and position A, E and G for type J7.
Contact arrangement 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC
Operator
Left
position
Center
Right
1 2
3 4
1 2
3
4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
A: B: C: D: E: F: G:
U: Upper contact block M: Middle contact block L: Lower contact block
• Contact block positions: See page 04/219
Knob
Key
Mainteined
Spring/
manual return
Spring/
manual return
Spring return
Mainteined
Spring/
manual return
Spring/
manual return
Spring return
Mainteined
Spring/
manual return
Spring/
manual return
Spring return
Mainteined
Spring/
manual return
Spring/
manual return
Spring return
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
E
D
C
E
D
A
E
E
A
E
D
C
E
D
A
E
E
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
2NO+2NC
3NO+3NC
AH165-2P3B22
AH165-2P3B33
AH165-2P6B22
AH165-2P6B33
AH165-2P7B22
AH165-2P7B33
AH165-2P1B22
AH165-2P1B33
AH165-2YP3B22
AH165-2YP3B33
AH165-2YP6B22
AH165-2YP6B33
AH165-2YP7B22
AH165-2YP7B33
AH165-2YP1B22
AH165-2YP1B33
AH165-2J3A22A
AH165-2J3A33A
AH165-2J3E22A
AH165-2J3E33A
AH165-2J3D22A
AH165-2J3D33A
AH165-2J3C22A
AH165-2J3C33A
AH165-2J6E22A
AH165-2J6E33A
AH165-2J6D22A
AH165-2J6D33A
AH165-2J7A22A
AH165-2J7A33A
AH165-2J7E22A
AH165-2J7E33A
AH165-2J1E22A
AH165-2J1E33A
AH165-2YJ3A22A
AH165-2YJ3A33A
AH165-2YJ3E22A
AH165-2YJ3E33A
AH165-2YJ3D22A
AH165-2YJ3D33A
AH165-2YJ3C22A
AH165-2YJ3C33A
AH165-2YJ6E22A
AH165-2YJ6E33A
AH165-2YJ6D22A
AH165-2YJ6D33A
AH165-2YJ7A22A
AH165-2YJ7A33A
AH165-2YJ7E22A
AH165-2YJ7E33A
AH165-2YJ1E22A
AH165-2YJ1E33A
Operator Operation Key removable
position
Contact Type Dimensions, mm
KKD07-233
KKD07-235
KKD09-003R
KKD09-003L
11.5
42.5 24 ø25
11.5
42.5 24 25sq.
11.5
42.5 37
11.5
42.5 37

04/221
No. of
positions
b
(-)
a
(+)
➂➀ ➁➃
04
Selector Switches
AH165-2
Knob Flat LED 24V DC
Incandescent
24V AC/DC
Neon
110V AC
Neon
220V AC
AH165-2PL211E3
AH165-2PL222E3
AH165-2PL322E3
AH165-2PL211E
AH165-2PL222E
AH165-2PL322E
AH165-2PL211H1
AH165-2PL222H1
AH165-2PL322H1
AH165-2PL211M1
AH165-2PL222M1
AH165-2PL322M1
Operator Operation Lamp voltage
Contact
Maintained 1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
Type Dimensions, mm
KKD07-240
42.5 22
ø20
ø25
• Knob color (arrow)
Replace the mark by the following color code
Color
Green
Red
White
Code
G
R
W
Blue
S
Yellow
Y
Orange
O
Knob color (arrow)
Black
AA
ABKP
5V DC
6V DC
12V DC
––
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
––
Neon
–––
120V AC
240V AC
• Lamp voltage
2-position
Contact arrangement 1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
Operator
Left
position
Right
M U
M
3-position
Contact arrangement 2NO+2NC
Operator
Left
position
Center
Right
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
L
U
L
U
L
U
L
U
L
NC
NO
Upper
Middle
Lower
1NO+1NC: Middle

Lens Lamp Voltage Type Dimensions, mm
AA
ABKP
04/222
24 11.5
Pilot Lights
AH165-2
Flush round
Flush square
Extended round
Extended square
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
Flat LED
Incandescent
Neon
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
24V DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
220V AC
AH165-2ZE3
AH165-2ZE
AH165-2ZH1
AH165-2ZM1
AH165-2SZE3
AH165-2SZE
AH165-2SZH1
AH165-2SZM1
AH165-2ZEE3
AH165-2ZEE
AH165-2ZEH1
AH165-2ZEM1
AH165-2SZEE3
AH165-2SZEE
AH165-2SZEH1
AH165-2SZEM1
AF87-213
AF87-205
AF87-212
AF87-204
24 11.5 ø20
ø25
24 11.5
15
15
ø20
ø25
25sq.
20sq.
24 11.5
25sq.
20sq.
a (+)
b (-)
a (+)
b (-)
a (+)
b (-)
a (+)
b (-)
■ Pilot lights
• Lens color
Color
Green
Red
White
Code
G
R
W
Blue
S
Yellow
Y
Orange
O
• Lamp voltage
Voltage other than above is available
5V DC
6V DC
12V DC
––
–
5V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
––
Neon
–––
120V AC
240V AC
• A white lens is fitted with a transparent color lens.

04/223
Panel
cutting
Panel
cutting
Type Wiring Terminal position
Illuminated
pushbuttons,
switches
04
AH165-2
Mounting space
Mounting space, mm
• Illuminated pushbuttons, pushbuttons, selector switches,
illuminated selector switches and pilot lights
Round head Square head Mushroom head
25 25
25
25 25
25
33
33
ø16.2
+0.2
0 ø16.2
Panel
cutting
+0.2
0 ø16.2
+0.2
0
a
(+)
a
(+)
b
(-)
a
(+)
b
(-)
b
(-)
a b
Pushbuttons
Selector swiches
Pilot lights
1
3
2
4
3 1
3 1
1 3 1
3
2 4
2 4
2 2 4
4
■ Terminal number

04/224
• Products with blue and green LEDs
The LED devices on products with high-brightness (blue and
green) LEDs are very sensitive to static electricity. When
replacing LED lamps do not allow static electricity to come into
direct contact with the metal frame on the upper side of the
LED lamp. The LED device may be damaged if this part is
subjected to static electricity. When installing or removing an
LED lamp, it is recommended that you use the lamp changer
(AHX672).
Metal frame
LED
Remover (AHX618)
Recess of the oil-tight cap
■ Installation on panel
• For installation, use
dedicated wrench AHX601.
The appropriate tightening
torque is 0.6 to 1N·cm.
• The installation sequence is
as follows:
Pass the operator base
through the hole in the panel
and secure it by tightening
the bezel. Properly position
the catch arms of the contact
holder and the catch legs of
the operator base and push
the contact holder onto the
operator base. To remove
the contact holder, pull it
while pressing the catch arms
inward.
Operator base
Catch leg
Mounting hole
Panel Nut
Contact holder Catch arm
Notes on use
■ Mounting steps of switch with transformer
➀Pass the switch operator
through the panel hole
and secure with a nut by
way of the retainer metal
from the front of the panel.
➁Align the position of the
catch arm of the contact
block holder with that of
the catch leg of the switch
operator. Engage these
two catches by pushing
them together.
➂Insert and secure the
transformer unit while
assembling the contact
block holder with the
retainer metal.
➃Connect the receptacle
terminal with lead wires
extending from the
transformer to the lamp
terminal of the contact
block holder. (Be care on
the polarity of the LED.
Red: +, Black: –)
➄Push in and secure the
standard accessory
insulation cover by aligning its position with each terminal. To
replace the transformer, remove the transformer by widening
the catch leg of the contact block holder. Pay attention not to
excessively widen the catch leg. Mounting steps are the same
as the above steps ➂, ➃, and ➄.
Operator
Catch leg
Catch leg
Mounting
hole
Washer
Nut
Catch arm
Panel
Retainer
metal
Contact
block
holder
Transformer
Lamp terminal
Receptacle
terminal
Insulation
cover
■ Installing the protection cover / dust-tight cover, guard-ring
Be careful that the panel thickness does not exceed the
following:
Panel thickness
Protection cover: 2.6mm max.
Dust-tight cover: 2.0mm max.
Guard ring: 2.5mm max.
■ Operating voltage and rated voltage of incandescent
lamps
Rated voltage Operating voltage
6V 4 to 5V
14V 10 to 12V
28V (Standard) 20 to 24V
Incandescent lamps should be operated at the operating
voltages if a lamp service life of 5,000 to 10,000 hours are
needed. The ambient temperature must not exceed 30°C if the
lamp is used at the rated voltage continuously.
■ Method of replacing lamp
• Incandescent lamps/LED lamps/neon lamps
Remove the color lens and inner button with a remover
AHX618.
Then draw out the lamp with a lamp changer AHX672.
When installing lamps, do it manually and in the reverse order
of removing.
• To replace the lamp of a AH165-2 illuminated pushbutton
switch (ML,VL), remove the button and draw out the oil-tight
cap.
• Then, replace the lamp using a lamp changer (AHX672) and
push the oil-tight cap into its original position with its engaging
projection properly adjusted (see the figure below).
Engaging projection
of oil-tight cap
Engaging recess at the
inner end of the switch
VL ML
Note: Lamp of AH165-ZM type can not be replaced.
AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Notes on use

AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Notes on use
■ Key type selector switch
• Five key types (Type B to
Type F) are available
besides Type A, which is
the standard key type.
Be sure to use a key with
a symbol which is matched
with the symbol on the main unit.
• Fully insert the key into the main unit before turning the key.
• The key turning force should not exceed 0.1 N•m.
• Do not pull out or insert the key forcibly.
■ Wiring connections
• Use a soldering iron with a wattage of not more than 30W and
a tip length of more than 20mm.
Use a rosin-core solder
With a 30W iron complete soldering within 5 seconds, or 10
seconds with a 20W iron. Do not apply external force to the
terminals. Do not deform the terminals.
Because lead-free solder's melting point is slightly high,
soldering work may be difficult. Use a soldering iron whose tip
is rather large or whose calorie is rather high.
• Wires that can be connected
Two solid wires with a maximum diameter of 0.8mm (solder)
One stranded wire with a maximum area of 0.75mm2 (solder)
Flat connection terminal
(2.8 -1.25-5) 0.5 to 1.25mm2
(2.8 -0.5-5) 0.2 to 0.5mm2
• Using contact blocks
• For wiring to adjacent terminals, use insulated tubing to
prevent short-circuit and to assure isolation. For solder
terminals, be careful when connecting thick wires. Do not use
too much solder.
• Wiring to wire-wrap pin terminals
Select the appropriate wire sizes and tools from the table
below.
Wire size Bit Sleeve Number of effective wraps
0.4mm dia. 3-A 1-B About 8
(0.65mm dia.) (2-A) (2-B) (About 6)
Use ordinary wrapping for connection.
Wires of 0.65mm dia. must not be used on adjacent terminals.
However, 0.65mm dia. wire can be mixed with 0.4 and 0.5mm
dia. wires.
• Wiring to tab terminals
Use receptacles, No. 110.
04/225
Screen
Color lens
04
■ Method of replacing color lens
• To remove the color lens , insert a small screwdriver into the
color lens and twist in direction of the arrow.
• For an AH165-2, use a small
standard screwdriver or a similar tool
with a flat end. If one side of the
color lens is removed from the
screen, insert the screwdriver or a
similar tool deeper and remove the
color lens together with the screen.
Screen
Recess Projection
Color lens Legend plate
Color lens
■ Replacing pushbuttons
In the case of alternative action type pushbutton switches and
illuminated pushbutton switches, be sure not to replace the
pushbuttons in their locked state. This could result in internal
damage to the mechanism.
■ Description sheet
The Fuji description sheet is 25μm thick. If preparing custom
description sheets, make sure that the thickness is 0.1mm or
less.
■ Contact block
To replace a contact block, use removing tool AGX012. If
excessive force is applied when attempting to open the support
legs for the contact block holder, deformation or damage may
occur.
■ Handling precautions
• Do not apply torque in excess of 1.0 N•m to operate the
selectors switch (Type “P”). Required operating force of
switches is less than 0.1 N•m.
• Do not tap on a pushbutton to turn it ON or OFF, such handling
may damage it. Be sure to operate the pushbutton by hand.
Symbol on the key Symbol on the main unit
■ Installing lamps in close order
pushbuttons installed in close order, care must be taken that the
ambient temperature does not exceed the rated value.

AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Notes on use
04/226
Shunt
resistor
Transformer
C R
X1 X2
C: Capacitor
R: Resistor
■ Using a flat LED in 48V DC circuit
When a flat LED lamps having a rated voltage of 24V DC is
used with 48V DC circuit, connect an external resistor of
3,500Ω (1W).
■ Preventing the neon lamp from incorrectly turning ON
The neon lamp may incorrectly turn ON due to current leakage
or voltage induction. In such a case, connect a shunt resistor in
parallel with the lamp.
Example) 110V AC: 100k (0.25W)
220V AC: 50k (2W)
If an external surge of 3kV or more may occur, connect a surge
absorption element in parallel with the lamp.
■ Operation
Do not use a hitting or bouncing action to operate the button, or
the switch may break. Always operate the switch by hand.
■ Storage and operation site
• Use the unit within the rated operating ambient temperature
and humidity ranges.
• Do not use the enclosed type in places where oil or water is
sprayed or where dust accumulates. In places such as these,
use the oil-tight type or provide a dust cover.
• The oil-tight type is evaluated with standard cutting oil and
cooling oil applied. The oil-tight type cannot be used with some
special oils.
■ Buzzer
• Noise
If the application circuit is likely to generate excessively strong
noise, connect a surge absorber (e.,g., FUJI'S ENC390D,
provided that the switch is a 24V type) in parallel with the
buzzer.
• Place of Use
The buzzer does not have a drip-proof construction. Do not use
the buzzer in places where oil or water is sprayed or where dust
accumulates. If the buzzer is a splash-proof type, it will resist
sprays of water.
• Do not use the buzzer in places that are subject to an
excessive amount of corronsive gas.
• Be careful that the buzzer is likely to sound erroneously due to
leakage current or the like.
■ LEDs
• LED Lamp Malfunctioning
The LED lamp is lit by a very small level of current
(approximately 0.01mA). Therefore, the it may be erroneously lit
by a current leaking from the surge absorption circuit or
semiconductor circuit or due to stray capacitance between
cables. In that case, provide a countermeasure (e.g., connect a
resistor in parallel with the LED lamp).
• Countermeasure for Malfunctioning
Shunt Resistor R or CR elements connected in parallel
Lamp malfunctions can be prevented by connecting a shunt
resistor (R) or CR elements (a capacitor and resistor) in parallel
with the LED lamp terminal. The resistance and CR values vary
depending on the model and the operating conditions.
Example 1 Example 2
Lamp
R
X1 X2
• 24V DC
R: 10kΩ (1W)
• 110V AC
C: 0.33μF (250V AC)
R: 120Ω (0.25W)
• 220V AC
C: 0.33μF (250V AC)
R: 120Ω (0.25W)
• Incoming surge
Be careful that since high luminance LED products use an
element sensitive to static electricity, they may not be lit by an
abnormal voltage like surge.

04/227
04
AH164 and AH165
Accessories
Description Type
Color chips (Round) Color Type
L, L5, E Green AHX631-G
E5, Z Red AHX631-R
White (For Neon) AHX631-W
Blue AHX631-S
Yellow AHX631-Y
Orange AHX631-O
Clear AHX631-C
SF-682 For LED, Neon Green AHX653-G
Color chips (Square) Color Type
SL, SL5, SGL, Green AHX632-G
SGL5, SF, SF5, Red AHX632-R
SGF, SGF5, ZS White (For Neon) AHX632-W
Blue AHX632-S
Yellow AHX632-Y
Orange AHX632-O
Clear AHX632-C
SF-681 For LED, Neon Green AHX653-SG
Color chips (Rectangular) Color Type
TL, TL5, TGL Green AHX633-G
TGL5, TF, TF5 Red AHX633-R
TGF, TGF5, ZT White (For Neon) AHX633-W
Blue AHX633-S
Yellow AHX633-Y
Orange AHX633-O
Clear AHX633-C
SF-680 For LED, Neon Green AHX653-TG
Mushroom head button Color Type
M, M5 Green AHX682-G
Red AHX682-R
White AHX682-W
Blue AHX682-S
Yellow AHX682-Y
Orange AHX682-O
SI-40 Black AHX682-B
Convex square head button Color Type
SM, SM5 Green AHX683-G
Red AHX683-R
White AHX683-W
Blue AHX683-S
Yellow AHX683-Y
Orange AHX683-O
Convex rectangular head Color Type
button
TM, TM5 Green AHX684-G
Red AHX684-R
White AHX684-W
Blue AHX684-S
Yellow AHX684-Y
Orange AHX684-O
Description Type
Legend sheet Round
Type: AHX615-
Legend: ON, OFF, UP, DOWN
Square
Type: AHX616-
START, STOP, OPEN
CLOSE, AUTO, MAN,
RESET, POWER, REV,
FWD, HIGH, LOW
Rectangular
Type: AHX617-
START, STOP, AUTO,
MAN, FOWARD, REVERSE
When ordering, specify desired legend
in the at the end of ordering code,
Transparent blank sheets are also
available.
SH-165 Use black oil ink.
Legend plate Type Color Dimensions, mm
(Acrylic resin)
Round AHX665 White ø12.2 x 0.9
AHX665-C Transparent
AHX665-B Black
Square AHX666 White 12.2sq. x 0.9
AHX666-B Black
Rectangular AHX667 White 12.2 x 18.2 x 0.9
SH-164 AHX667-B Black
Legend plate for spot LED Type Dimensions, mm
(Acrylic resin)
Round AHX650 ø12.2 x 0.9
Square AHX651 12.2sq. x 0.9
Rectangular AHX652 12.2 x 18.2 x 0.9
SP-113
Legend plate for selector Type: AHX664
switch (2-position) Legend: ON-OFF
Legend: Blank
Dimensions, mm: 24sq. x 0.5
SH-226A
15
Legend plate for symbol mark Mark Type
Square AHX666-E
Rectangular AHX667-E
Square I AHX666-H
Rectangular AHX667-H
Square T AHX666-T
AF87-74 Rectangular AHX667-T
■ Accessories for AH164 and AH165

AH164 and AH165
Accessories
KKD07-248
AF91-123, SI-41
04/228
Description Type
Protection cover For round and square head button
Type: AHX671
For rectangular head button
Type: AHX669
AHX826
This cover protect against accidental operation.
Note: Not used for illuminated pushbuttons with guard.
Applicable panel thickness is 2.6mm max.
Dimensions, mm
Dust-tight cover For round and square head button
Type: AHX822
For rectangular head button
Type: AHX668
For mushroom head button
Type: AHX649
These covers protect against dust.
Guard ring Type Color Dimensions, mm
AHX676-B Black ø21 x 12
AHX676-GY Gray
This guard ring is used in combination with an
extended round head pushbutton (L or E).
Transformer Voltage Type Lamp
100 to 110V AC AHX805-H LED
200 to 220V AC AHX805-M
100 to 110V AC AHX806-H Incandescent
200 to 220V AC AHX806-M
SI-42
AF90-949
ø16.2
AHX671
33.2
23.5
31.5
10.5
ø16.2
AHX669
14 18 24
24
13.7
33.2
23.5
AHX826
Note: Applicable panel thickness is 2.0mm max.
Note: Applicable panel thickness is 2.5mm max. Please
place an order for a packing (AHX685) separately
when you intend to use for AH165 series.
KKD07-246
KKD07-247

*4
*4
*1 Illuminated pushbutton switches and pilot lights
*2 Illuminated pushbutton switches and pilot lights
04/229
04
AH165-2
Accessories
Color lens (Round) Legend plate
Mushroom head button
Color lens (Square)
For flush head
(Used with 2F, 2F5, 2FL, 2FL5, 2Z)
Color Type
Green AHX2604-G
Red AHX2604-R
Yellow AHX2604-Y
Blue AHX2604-S
Orange AHX2604-O
Clear AHX2604-C
For flush head
Color Type Used with
White AHX2609-W Incandescent lamp,
LED lamp, Pushbutton *1
Clear AHX2609-C Neon lamp *2
Black AHX2609-B Pushbutton *3
For extended head
For flush square
For extended square, concave square
For extended head
(Used with 2E, 2E5, 2EL, 2EL5, 2ZE)
Color Type
Green AHX2605-G
Red AHX2605-R
Yellow AHX2605-Y
Blue AHX2605-S
Orange AHX2605-O
Clear AHX2605-C
For flush head
(Used with 2SF, 2SF5, 2SFL, 2SFL5, 2SZ)
Color Type
Green AHX2606-G
Red AHX2606-R
Yellow AHX2606-Y
Blue AHX2606-S
Orange AHX2606-O
Clear AHX2606-C
For extended head
(Used with 2SE, 2SE5, 2SEL, 2SEL5, 2SZE)
Color Type
Green AHX2607-G
Red AHX2607-R
Yellow AHX2607-Y
Blue AHX2607-S
Orange AHX2607-O
Clear AHX2607-C
For concave head
(Used with 2SCE, 2SCE5, 2SCL, 2SCL5)
Color Type
Green AHX2608-G
Red AHX2608-R
Yellow AHX2608-Y
Blue AHX2608-S
Orange AHX2608-O
Clear AHX2608-C
with incandescent lamps or LED lamps,
Pushbutton switches (excluding).
with neon lamps.
*3 Pushbutton switches (black)
*4 Engraved range: 17mm dia.
For illuminated pushbuttons
(Used with 2ML, 2YML)
Color Type
Green AHX2614-G
Red AHX2614-R
White AHX2614-W
Yellow AHX2614-Y
Blue AHX2614-S
Orange AHX2614-O
For non-illuminated pushbuttons
(Used with 2M, 2YM)
Color Type
Green AHX2613-G
Red AHX2613-R
White AHX2613-W
Yellow AHX2613-Y
Blue AHX2613-S
Orange AHX2613-O
Black AHX2613-B
■ Accessories for AH165-2
AF87-631
AF87-632
AF87-631
AF87-630
AF87-633

04/230
AH165-2
Accessories
Mounting hole, mm
rmax.0.8
ø16.2+0.2
0
+0.2
17.90
1.7+0.2
0
Description Type
button
Dust-tight cover
Key washer
For illuminated pushbuttons
(Used with 2VL, 2YVL)
Color Type
Green AHX2616-G
Red AHX2616-R
White AHX2616-W
Yellow AHX2616-Y
For pushbuttons
(Used with 2V, 2YV)
Color Type
Green AHX2615-G
Red AHX2615-R
Yellow AHX2615-Y
Black AHX2615-B
For flush round
(Used with 2F, 2FL, 2F5, 2FL5)
Type: AHX2603-2
For flush square
(Used with 2SF, 2SFL, 2SF5, 2SFL5)
Type: AHX2603-2S
These covers protect against dust.
Type: AHX2601
AF87-634
AF87-636
AF87-635

Pushbuttons/Selectors/Pilot Lights/buzzers
AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Accessories
04/231
04
Description Type
Wrench Type: AHX601
When installing a command switch on
a panel, this tool is useful for tightening
the switch firmly and efficiently.
Terminal cover Type: AHX2602
This cover is used with AH164 and
AH165 and AH165-2 (except pilot lights).
Pass the wires through the cover, then
mount the cover in position.
Contact block Terminal Type
Solder/Tab AGX001
Wire-wrap AGX001–W
KKD06-305, KKD06-304
Dummy unit Type: AGX002
A dummy unit is used to fill the space
where no contact blocks are installed.
For example, two dummy units are
used if 1NO+1NC contact block is
installed, and one dummy unit is used
if 2NO+2NC contact blocks are
installed.
Remover Type: AGX012
This tool is used for replacing the
contact blocks or dummy units.
AF87-637
■ Accessories for AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
SK-1141
SM-334
KKD06-333
KKD06-206
KKD07-262
KKD07-261
KKD07-260
KKD07-257
Description Type
Incandescent lamp Voltage Type
6V, 0.6W AHX641
14V, 0.7W AHX642
28V, 0.7W AHX643
LED lamp Voltage Type
5V DC AHX695-5
6V DC AHX695-6
12V DC AHX695-12
24V DC AHX695-24
Replace the mark by the luminous
color code
Red (R), Green (G), Orange (O),
Amber (A), Yellow (Y), Blue (S)
Neon lamp Voltage Type Luminous
color
110V AC AHX655-H Green
AHX654-H Orange
120V AC AHX655-K Green
AHX654-K Orange
220V AC AHX655-M Green
AHX654-M Orange
240V AC AHX655-P Green
KKD06-306 AHX654-P Orange
Panel plug Color Type
Round Black AHX622-B IP40
Gray AHX622-GY IP40
Square Black AHX644-B IP40
Gray AHX644-GY IP40
Rectangular Black AHX645-B IP40
Gray AHX645-GY IP40
Black AHX850-B IP65
Lamp changer Type: AHX672
If the switch is fitted with a lamp, use
this tool to remove the lamp. The tool
is unnecessary when installing a lamp.
KKD07-259
Remover Type: AHX618
This tool is used for replacing the color
chips or screens.
KKD07-258
Contact holder remover Type: AHX699
This tool is used to remove a contact
holder when switches are densely
installed.
SP-522

AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Accessories
SM-1097
SM-1098
Dimensions, mm
• Contact arrangement is 2NO+2NC only.
• These sockets are used only when LED
lamps rated for 24V DC are used under
110V AC/DC.
• Except for AH164, 165 and 165-2 series
pilot lights or AH165-2PL type.
• When side-by-side mounting and
continuous lighting, note that a socket has
higher temperature over the ambient
temperature.
Solder/Tab PC board mounting
AHX697
JAPAN
75 17.9
8.8 27.8
Wire-wrap
AHX697
18
JAPAN
JAPAN
04/232
Description Type
Sockets Terminal Type Used with
Solder/Tab AHX697-S Pushbuttons
Wire-wrap AHX697-W
PC board AHX697-P
Solder/Tab AHX697-SL Illuminated
Wire-wrap AHX697-WL pushbuttons
PC board AHX697-PL
Contact arrangement is 2NO+2NC only.
Except for AH165-2PL types
Sockets for Terminal Type
LED
Solder/Tab AHX697-SH3
Wire-wrap AHX697-WH3
18.5
19.8
18
PC board Illuminated pushbuttons
AHX697
JAPAN
0.5
Pushbuttons
12
0.6
8-ø1.3
6.3
14.3
10-ø1.3
3.5
4.8
10.3
6.3
14.3
1
12
Switch
AHX697
Socket
50.6
PUSH
For wiring to wire-wrap pin terminals, select appropriate wire sizes and
tool from the table below.
Wire size Bit Sleeve Number of effective wraps
(0.65mm dia.) (2-A) (2-B) (About 6)
Use ordinary wrapping for connection. Wires of 0.65mm dia. must not
be used on adjacent terminals. However, 0.65mm dia. wire can be
mixed with 0.4mm and 0.5mm dia. wires.

04/233
04
■ Mass, gram
AH164 series
Type 1NO 2NO 3NO
+ + +
1NC 2NC 3NC
AH164-L,L5 (Without transformer) 12.5 13.5 14.5
L,L5 (With transformer) 53.5 54.5 -
SL,SL5 (Without transformer) 13.1 14.1 15.1
SL,SL5 (With transformer) 54.1 55.1 -
TL,TL5 (Without transformer) 13.9 14.9 15.9
TL,TL5 (With transformer) 54.9 55.9 -
TGL,TGL5 (Without transformer) 13.9 14.9 15.9
TGL,TGL5 (With transformer) 54.9 55.9 -
SGL,SGL5 (Without transformer) 13.1 14.1 15.1
SGL,SGL5 (With transformer) 54.1 55.1 -
AH164-E,E5 10.5 11.5 12.5
M,M5 12.5 13.5 14.5
SF,SF5 11.1 12.1 13.1
TF,TF5 11.9 12.9 13.9
TGF,TGF5 11.9 12.9 13.9
SGF,SGF5 11.1 12.1 13.1
SM,SM5 13.4 14.4 15.4
TM,TM5 13.1 14.1 15.1
AH164-P2,P0 16.1 17.1 18.1
P3,P6,P7,P1 - 17.1 18.1
PK3,PK6,PK7,PK1 - 17.1 18.1
SP2,SP0 15.8 16.8 17.8
SP3,SP6,SP7,SP1 - 16.8 17.8
SPK3,SPK6,SPK7,SPK1 - 16.8 17.8
J2,J0 30.6 31.6 32.6
J3,J6,J7,J1 - 31.6 32.6
JK3,JK6,JK7,JK1 - 31.9 32.9
SJ2,SJ0 30.3 31.3 32.3
SJ3,SJ6,SJ7,SJ1 - 31.3 32.3
SJK3,SJK6,SJK7,SJK1 - 31.6 32.6
AH164-Z (Without transformer) 6.9
Z (With transformer) 50.9
ZS (Without transformer) 7.5
ZS (With transformer) 51.5
ZT (Without transformer) 8.2
ZT (With transformer) 52.2
AH164-TX 16
TX1 17.5
TX2B 13
AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Mass
AH165 series
Type 1NO 2NO 3NO
+ + +
1NC 2NC 3NC
AH165-L,L5 (Without transformer) 12.5 13.5 14.5
L,L5 (With transformer) 53.5 54.5 -
SL,SL5 (Without transformer) 13.1 14.1 15.1
SL,SL5 (With transformer) 54.1 55.1 -
TL,TL5 (Without transformer) 13.9 14.9 15.9
TL,TL5 (With transformer) 54.9 55.9 -
TGL,TGL5 (Without transformer) 13.9 14.9 15.9
TGL,TGL5 (With transformer) 54.9 55.9 -
SGL,SGL5 (Without transformer) 13.1 14.1 15.1
SGL,SGL5 (With transformer) 54.1 55.1 -
AH165-E,E5 10.5 11.5 12.5
M,M5 12.5 13.5 14.5
SF,SF5 11.1 12.1 13.1
TF,TF5 11.9 12.9 13.9
TGF,TGF5 11.9 12.9 13.9
SGF,SGF5 11.1 12.1 13.1
SM,SM5 13.4 14.4 15.4
TM,TM5 13.1 14.1 15.1
VR 13.4 *1 14 *2 -
V1R 14.4 *1 15 *2 -
AH165-V5R 18.1 *1 18.7 *2 -
V6R 18.9 *1 19.5 *2 -
AH165-P2,P0 16.7 17.7 18.7
P3,P6,P7,P1 - 17.7 18.7
PK3,PK6,PK7,PK1 - 17.7 18.7
SP2,SP0 16.1 17.1 18.1
SP3,SP6,SP7,SP1 - 17.1 18.1
SPK3,SPK6,SPK7,SPK1 - 17.1 18.1
J2,J0 31.2 32.2 33.2
J3,J6,J7,J1 - 32.2 33.2
JK3,JK6,JK7,JK1 - 32.5 33.5
SJ2,SJ0 30.6 31.6 32.6
SJ3,SJ6,SJ7,SJ1 - 31.6 32.6
SJK3,SJK6,SJK7,SJK1 - 31.9 32.9
AH165-JM2 30 33.9 -
RJM2 29.6 34 -
AH165-Z (Without transformer) 6.9
Z (With transformer) 50.9
ZS (Without transformer) 7.5
ZS (With transformer) 51.5
ZT (Without transformer) 8.2
ZT (With transformer) 52.2
ZM (Without transformer) 5.4
AH165-X 13.7
Note: *1 For 1NC
*2 For 2NC

AH164, AH165 and AH165-2
Mass
04/234
■ Mass, gram
AH165-2 series
Type 1NO 2NO 3NO
+ + +
1NC 2NC 3NC
AH165-2FL,FL5 15.3 16.3 17.3
2EL,EL5 15.8 16.8 17.8
2ML 18.7 19.7 20.7
2YML 20.2 21.2 22.2
2SFL,SFL5 16.6 17.6 18.6
2SEL,SEL5 17.4 18.4 19.4
2SCL,SCL5 17.6 18.6 19.6
2VL 20.7 21.7 22.7
2YVL 21.4 22.4 23.4
AH165-2F,F5 13.4 14.4 15.4
2E,E5 13.9 14.9 15.9
2M 17.8 18.8 19.8
2YM 18.2 19.2 20.2
2SF,SF5 14.6 15.6 16.6
2SE,SE5 15.4 16.4 17.4
2SCE,SCE5 15.6 16.6 17.6
2S2 - 19 -
2YS2 - 20.6 -
2V 18 19 20
2YV 19.4 20.4 21.4
AH165-2P2,P0 16.6 17.6 18.6
2P3,P6,P7,P1 - 17.6 18.6
2YP2,YP0 18.3 19.3 20.3
2YP3,YP6,YP7,YP1 - 19.3 20.3
2J2,J0 40.9 41.9 42.9
2J3,J6,J7,J1 - 41.9 42.9
2YJ2 42.6 43.6 44.6
2YJ3,YJ6,YJ7,YJ1 - 43.6 44.6
2H 14.3 15.3 16.3
2SH 16.1 17.1 18.1
AH165-2PL2 17.4 18.4 -
2PL3 - 18.4 -
AH165-2Z 9.7
2ZE 10.2
2SZ 11
2SZE 11.6

Reduced depth (AP30 series, 100V or 200V AC)
Two-thirds the depth of FUJI conventional models. And,
the AP30F and AF40F feature the same depth.
04/235
Lens case
Lens case AP30F AP40F
Standard
Inclined –
LED luminous color Color-insert Illumination
Red Red Red
Green Green Green
Yellow Yellow Yellow
Amber Orange Orange
Orange Clear White
Red/green Clear Red/green
Blue Blue Blue
Pure-white White Pure-white
04
■ Description
Provide a bright, colorful display surface.
More user-friendly with easy wiring and windows in a wide
variety of sizes.
■ Features
Lightweight (LED display, 100V or 200V AC)
Only one-third the weight of FUJI conventional models.
Wide window size selection
A wide selection, including half-size windows.
AP30F: 30 x 30mm, 30 x 60mm, 15 x 30mm
AP40F: 40 x 40mm, 40 x 80mm, 20 x 40mm
Easy color and voltage changes
LEDs (with voltage-dividing resistors or voltage-dividing
capacitors and resistors) are easily replaced from the panel
surface.
Save energy
A sharp reduction in power consumption.
High brightness for more vivid colors
LEDs with two to eight times the brightness of those on FUJI
conventional models. Newly added blue and pure white LEDs
improve visibility.
Charged-section cover
A cover for the charged section is provided as a standard
accessory.
■ Configuration of AP30F/AP40F
Lens: Clear lens and smoked lens
Common to incandescent and LED lamps
Legend plate
Common to incandescent and LED lamps
Color-insert
Incandescent lamp
Bracket
(Standard accessories)
AF88-217
Frame, Black
Voltage units
Type LED Incandescent
Full-voltage type
R voltage dividing –
CR voltage dividing –
Transformer unit
Resistor unit –
Flicker unit –
Voltage stabilizer unit –
: Available
– : Not available
LED unit
Combination of LED luminous colors and color-inserts
Multi Display Lights
AP30F and AP40F
General information
AF88-218
AF89-398
Multi display lights F series
F series
61 6
Conventional New
90 6

AP30F
04/236
AP30F– 04 05 E3–S 4 –SR (20) Z1
➀ Basic type
AP30F: 30 × 30, 30 × 60, 60 × 30, 15 × 30mm (Window size)
AP40F: 40 × 40, 40 × 80, 80 × 40, 20 × 40mm
➁ Number of windows
(=Row × Column)
➄ Shape of illuminated face
AP30F series
S: Square (30 × 30)
T: Rectangular, horizontally long (30 × 60)
V: Rectangular, vertically long (60 × 30)
H: Half-size (15 × 30) × 2
X: Mixture of S, T, and V
AP40F series
S: Square (40 × 40)
T: Rectangular, horizontally long (40 × 80)
V: Rectangular, vertically long (80 × 40)
H: Half-size (20 × 40) × 2
X: Mixture of S, T, and V
➅ Illumination method
Blank: Single color, entire surface illumination
4: 2-color, entire surface illumination (for 24V AC/DC LEDs only)
2: 2-way rectangular-split illumination
➆ Illuminated color
Using clear lens Color plate (White) Using smoked lens
R: Red CR: Red SR: Red
G: Green CG: Green SG: Green
Y: Yellow CY: Yellow SY: Yellow
O: Orange CO: Orange SO: Orange
W: White CS: Blue SW: White
S: Blue RG: Red/green SS: Blue
P: Pure-white*
Column
Row
• Two-color illumination face is only available for 24V AC/DC type.
• The flicker unit is available in square design only (S-type).
1. Type number
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇
01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10 01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10
11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20 11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20
01,02,03,04,05,06,07 01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10,
11,12,13,14,15
Max.
400
Max.
105
AP40F
• Convert one rectangular window to two square windows.
• The number of windows is limited to 80 when transformer units are mounted.
Incandescent LED unit
Full-voltage type A: 5.5V AC/DC C: 15.5V AC/DC A3: 6V DC B3: 12V ACDC
D: 20V AC/DC E: 24V AC/DC C3: 15V AC/DC E3: 24V AC/DC
ES: 24V AC/DC * F3: 48V AC/DC
H3: 100-110V AC/DC L3: 115-127V AC/DC
M3: 200-220V AC
Transformer unit H: 100-110V AC L:115-127V AC Q3: 230-254V AC S3: 350-380V AC
M: 200-220V AC Q:230-254V AC T3: 400-440V AC V3: 480V AC
S: 350-380V AC T:400-440V AC
V: 480V AC
Resistor unit H6:110V DC L6: 125V DC –
(Electric bulb 48V 1W)
Mixed type X: Combination of the above X3: Combination of the above three
three types plus flicker and voltage
stabilizer unit
AP40F series
Incandescent LED unit
Full-voltage type C: 15.5V AC/DC D: 20V AC/DC A3: 6V DC B3: 12V AC/DC
E: 24V AC/DC C3: 15V AC/DC E3: 24V AC/DC
ES: 24V AC/DC * F3: 48V AC/DC
H3: 100-110V AC/DC L3: 115-127V AC/DC
M3: 200-220V AC
Transformer unit H: 100-110V AC L: 115-127V AC Q3: 230-254V AC S3: 350-380V AC
M: 200-220V AC Q: 230-254V AC T3: 400-440V AC V3: 480V AC
S: 350-380V AC T: 400-440V AC
V: 480V AC
Resistor unit H6: 110V DC L6: 127V DC –
(Electric bulb 48V 2W)
Mixed type X: Combination of the above X3: Combination of the above three
three types plus flicker and voltage
stabilizer unit
➃ Voltage unit and input voltage
AP30F series
Notes:
The combination of LED units and voltage units is limited as follows:
Code Voltage unit LED unit
E3FA Flicker unit For 24V AC
24V (short body type)
E3FD For 24V DC
E3C Voltage stabilizer unit 27-35V AC/DC 24V (short body type)
Using window layout sheet
Use the copies of the window layout sheet (See page 04/255) and
specify for each of the window when ordering the following types.
• Types with letters on legend plate
• Types with symbol X for ➃ voltage unit and input voltage
• Types with symbol X for ➄ shape of illuminated face
• When two or more illuminated colors are specified for LED
unit in ➆.
AP30F and AP40F
• Specify the number of windows in ( ).
• If two or more colors are specified using LED unit, the illuminated
color ➆ here should be blank.
* Not available for incandescent lamp
➂ Check terminal
C: with
Blank: without
* Short body type
* Short body type
➇UL, CSA Approved (Option)

AP30F and AP40F
Specifications and performance
04/237
15mm (H)
04
■ Specifications
Type AP30F AP40F
Light source Incandescent LED Incandescent LED
Size of illuminated face
40mm
(S)
Illuminated Red ● ● ● ●
color (types of Green ● ● ● ●
color-insert) Yellow ● ● ● ●
Orange ● ● ● ●
White ● ● ● ●
Blue ● ● ● ●
Pure-white – ● – ●
Input voltage Full voltage 5.5, 15.5, 20 6V DC 15.5, 20 6V DC
24V AC/DC 12, 15, 24, 48, 110, 127V AC/DC 220V AC 24V AC/DC 12, 15, 24, 48, 110, 127V AC/DC 220V AC
With transformer 110, 127, 220, 254, 254, 380, 440, 480V AC 50/60Hz 110, 127, 220, 254, 254, 380, 440, 480V AC 50/60Hz
unit 380, 440, 480V AC 50/60Hz 380, 440, 480V AC 50/60Hz
With resistor 110V DC – 110V DC –
unit 125V DC 125V DC
With flicker – 24V DC – 24V DC
unit 24V AC 24V AC
With voltage – 27 to 35V AC/DC – 27 to 35V AC/DC
stabilizer unit
Mixture Combination of the above input voltages for different windows.
Terminal M3.5 screw with washer (self-lifting)
No. of windows 1 to 400 *1 1 to 105 *1
1 to 80 *2 1 to 80 *2
Panel thickness 1 to 6mm
60mm (V)
30mm
(S)
60mm
(T)
80mm (V)
80mm
(T)
20mm (H)
■ Performance
Rated insulation voltage 250V AC/DC:
Full voltage type, with resistor unit, with voltage stabilizer unit,
R/CR dividing, with flicker unit,
with transformer unit (AP30F incandescent 100 to 200V)
600V AC/DC:
With transformer unit (AP30F 230 to 480V)
Dielectric strength 2000V AC 1-minute:
(between unit and ground) Full voltage type, with resistor unit, with voltage stabilizer unit,
R/CR dividing, with flicker unit,
with transformer unit (AP30F incandescent 100 to 200V)
2500V AC 1-minute:
With transformer unit (AP30F 230 to 480V)
Operating ambient temperature –20°C to 40°C
Humidity 45 to 85%RH
*1 : Without transformer unit
*2 : With transformer unit

04/238
AP30F and AP40F
Specifications and performance
■ Power consumption
Light source
LED
Incandescent
Operating voltage
Full voltage
R voltage
dividing type
CR voltage
dividing type
With transformer
unit
With flicker unit
Full voltage
With transformer
unit
With resistor unit
AP30F square
R, G, Y, O, W, S, P
0.26W
0.53W 0.56VA
0.66W 0.69VA
0.26W 0.34VA
0.53W 0.67VA
1.21W 1.54VA
1.40W 1.78VA
3.3VA
2.4VA
1.0VA
0.48W
1.0W
1.0W
3.0VA
2.0W
AP40F square
R, Y, O, W
0.33W
0.66W 0.70VA
0.83W 0.87VA
0.53W 0.58VA
0.53W 0.67VA
1.21W 1.54VA
1.40W 1.78VA
3.3VA
2.4VA
1.0VA
0.48W
–
2.0W
3.0VA
3.0W
AP30F, AP40F half size
R, G, Y, O, W, S, P
–
0.14W 0.16VA
0.17W 0.18VA
0.26W 0.29VA
–
G, S
0.40W
0.79W 0.82VA
0.99W 1.02VA
0.53W 0.58VA
P
0.53W
1.06W 1.30VA
1.32W 1.62VA
0.53W 0.65VA
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
100-110V AC/DC
115-127V AC/DC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
24V AC
24V DC
5.5V AC/DC
15.5V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
110V DC
Notes: • Maximum power consumption per one square window, except for half-size window.
• Maximum power consumption for rectangular type is twice value indicated in the table.

Dimension D (30n+12)
76 (With terminal cover) 6
04/239
Front view
● S-type ● H-type
60.5 (With terminal cover)
Terminal screw M3.5
(Slotted and Phillips
head, self–lifting)
52 (With terminal cover)
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
30
30
04
AP30F
Dimensions
AP30F
■ Dimensions, mm
● T-type ● V-type
21 30 30
30 30 21
30sq.
Dimension C (30n+12)
21 30 30
60 36
60
30
21 30 30
15 15 15 15 15 14
15
30
● With transformer unit (230V to 480V LED and incandescent)
With resistor unit, with flicker unit, with voltage stabilizer unit
Back view
● Full-voltage type (LED)
6
55
Panel thickness 1~6
30
16
30
16.9
89 (With terminal cover) 6
84
Panel thickness 1~6
Terminal screw M3.5
● Full-voltage type (LED, short body type)
47
6
Panel thickness 1~6
● Full-voltage type (Incandescent) ● With transformer (Incandescent, 100V to 220V)
48
6
Panel thickness 1~6
71
Panel thickness 1~6
Terminal screw M3.5
Half size (Illuminated face)
With check terminal
● Full-voltage type
6
57
Panel thickness 1~6
Terminal screw M3.5
17
12
30
13
13
30
30
8
12.8
30
13
13
30
30
13
13
30
30
36 60
30 30 21
30
60

AP30F
Dimensions
■ Panel cutout and overall dimensions
● S, H-type
V-type
Panel cutout
A
B
S-type
A
B
T-type
A
B
Number of windows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Panel cutout A 35 65 95 125 155 185 215 245 275 305 336 366 396 426 456 486 516 546 576 606
Overall C 42 72 102 132 162 192 222 252 282 312 342 372 402 432 462 492 522 552 582 612
● T-type
Panel cutout A 35 65 95 125 155 366 426 486 546 606 336 366 396 426 456 486 516 546 576 606
Overall C 42 72 102 132 162 192 222 252 282 312 342 372 402 432 462 492 522 552 582 612
■ Total numbers of windows
04/240
B 35 65 95 125 155 185 215 245 275 305 335 365 395 425 455 485 515 545 575 605
D 42 72 102 132 162 192 222 252 282 312 342 372 402 432 462 492 522 552 582 612
B * 65 125 185 145 305 365 425 485 545 605 – – – – – – – – – –
D * 72 132 192 252 312 372 432 492 552 612 – – – – – – – – – –
● V-type
Panel cutout A * 65 125 185 245 305 366 426 486 546 606 – – – – – – – – – –
B 35 65 95 125 155 185 215 245 275 305 335 365 395 425 455 485 515 545 575 605
Overall C * 72 132 192 252 312 372 432 492 552 612 – – – – – – – – –
D 42 72 102 132 166 192 222 252 282 312 342 372 402 432 462 492 522 552 582 612
AP30F
Examples: 1. S-type Row: 6 2. T-type Row: 8 3. V-type Row: 5
Column: 14 Column: 8 Column: 18
Total: 84 Total: 64 Total: 90
V type
S.T type
Number of windows (Column)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 – – – – – – – – – –
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
T type
S.V type
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
2 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
3 3 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60
4 4 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80
5 5 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
6 6 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
7 7 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 84 91 98 105 112 119 126 133 140
8 8 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160
9 9 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 108 117 126 135 144 153 162 171 180
10 10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
11 – 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 110 121 132 143 154 165 176 187 198 209 220
12 – 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
13 – 13 26 39 52 65 78 91 104 117 130 143 156 169 182 195 208 221 234 247 260
14 – 14 28 42 56 70 84 98 112 126 140 154 168 182 196 210 224 238 252 266 280
15 – 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 285 300
16 – 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320
17 – 17 34 51 68 85 102 119 136 153 170 187 204 221 238 255 272 289 306 323 340
18 – 18 36 54 72 90 108 126 144 162 180 198 216 234 252 270 288 306 324 342 360
19 – 19 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190 209 228 247 266 285 304 323 342 361 380
20 – 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400
Number of windows
(Row)
Note: For H type, count two windows as one S type window.
H type (Half size) S type (Square type)
Tolerance: +1.0 mm, –0
Note: * Indicates dimensions for rectangular windows.

89 (With terminal cover) 6 8 (Inclined window)
54 (With terminal cover) 8 (Inclined window)
04/241
Front view
● S-type ● H-type
60.5 (With terminal cover)
40
13
40
60 (With terminal cover)6 8 (Inclined window)
Terminal screw M3.5
40
Half size (Illuminated face)
With check terminal
04
AP40F
Dimensions
AP40F
■ Dimensions, mm
● T-type ● V-type
■ 40
28 40 40
40 28
48 80
40 28
80
40
80
28 40
40
80 48
28 40 40
20 20 20 18
20 40
● With transformer unit, with resistor unit, with flicker unit,
with voltage stabilizer unit
Back view
● Full–voltage type (LED)
6 8 (Inclined window)
55
Panel thickness 1–6
Terminal screw M3.5
40
13
13
40
16
40
16.9
84
Terminal screw M3.5
● Full–voltage type (LED, short body type)
57
8
40
12.8
47
6 8 (Inclined window)
Terminal screw M3.5
6
48
Terminal screw M3.5
40
13
12
17
40
40
● Full-voltage type (Incandescent)
● Full–voltage type

Number of windows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Panel cutout A 45 85 125 165 205 245 285 – – – – – – – –
Overall C 56 96 136 176 216 256 296 – – – – – – – –
● V-type
Number of windows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Panel cutout A * 85 165 245 – – – – – – – – – – – –
Overall C * 96 176 256 – – – – – – – – – – – –
V type
Note: For H Type, count two-windows as one S-type window.
04/242
B 45 85 125 165 205 245 285 325 365 405 445 485 525 565 605
D 56 96 136 176 216 256 296 336 376 416 456 496 536 576 616
B 45 85 125 165 205 245 285 325 365 405 445 485 525 565 605
D 56 96 136 176 216 256 296 336 376 416 456 496 536 576 616
A
A
B
A
S-type T-type B
V-type
Panel cutout
B
■ Total numbers of windows
Number of windows (Column)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 –
1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
3 3 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45
4 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
5 – 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
6 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90
7 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 84 91 98 105
● S, H-type
● T-type
Number of windows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Panel cutout A 45 85 125 165 205 245 285
B * 85 165 245 325 405 485 565
Overall C 56 96 136 176 216 256 296
D * 96 176 256 336 416 496 576
Number
of
windows
(Row)
S, V type
T type
S, T type
Tolerance: +1.0 mm, –0
AP40F
Dimensions
AP40F
■ Panel cutout and overall dimensions
Note: * Indicates dimensions for rectangular windows.
H type (Half size) S type (Square type)

Column
Row
AP30F AP40F
01~02
AP30F 01~02
03~06
03~08
07~10
The transformer type with over 20 lamps is very heavy and extra
brackets are required. Fit brackets at equal intervals.
Transformer type with 51 to 80 lamps
Fit brackets in all slots.
04/243
04
Description Mass (g)
Voltage Incandescent Full-voltage type 29
unit With transformer (short) 79
With transformer 107
With resistor unit 52
LED Full-voltage type 29
Short body type 33
With R/CR voltage dividing type 32
2-color all surface illumination 38
with check terminal half size
With flicker unit 54
With voltage stabilizer unit 54
Side plate 27
AP30F and AP40F
Notes on use
■ Installation
Mounting panel
• Panel thickness: 1 to 6mm
• The panel thickness must be able to support the weight of the
products and wiring cables. Take particular care in deciding the
panel thickness when the products are heavy.
Panel cutout
Cut the mounting panel according to the numbers of rows and
columns of windows. (See the dimensions on page
04/240 and 242.)
How to install
• Insert the product into the panel cutout from the front of the
mounting panel. Make sure the product top and bottom are
correctly oriented. The product nameplate is stuck to the top of
the product.
• Fix the brackets into the side-plate slots at the back of the
panel, as shown in the figure below, and clamp the product with
the bracket screws. (Tightening torque : 0.4 to 0.6N•m)
■ Wiring
Terminal size
The M3.5 terminal screw is suitable for both phillips and slotted
screwdrivers. The terminal washers are the self-lifting type. Use
crimp terminals. (Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0N•m). Double
crimp terminals can be connected.
Staggered terminals
Because the terminals are staggered, jumper connection is
simple. Jumpers are supplied with products as standard.
Rated current of jumper : 3A
The number of brackets required depends on the type as follows
Full-voltage type and transformer type with 1 to 20 lamps
Transformer type with 21 to 50 lamps
Rows or
columns
Brackets
required
1–2 3–4 5 6–8 9 10–12 13 14–16 17 18–20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
■ Mass (g)
Mass of multi display light = Voltage unit × (rows × columns) + Side plate × (rows + columns)
AP30F AP40F
09~15 16~20
AP40F 01~02 03~06 07~11 12~15
11~15
16~20
01~02
03~04
05~07
–
–
Description Mass (g)
Voltage Incandescent Full-voltage type 32
unit With transformer 110
With resistor unit 64
LED Full-voltage type 38
Short body type 33
With R/CR voltage dividing type 32
2-color all surface illumination 38
with check terminal half size
With flicker unit 67
With voltage stabilizer unit 67
Side plate 28
Bracket
Side-plate slot
Jumper

AP30F and AP40F
Notes on use
04/244
Using the specially-designed suction cup removal tool
DN7Y020, replace a color insert and legend plate by applying
the suction cup as shown in the diagram below.
Do not touch the chip when the color insert is removed from the
LED unit and the LED chip is exposed. Defective lighting or
other problems may be caused by static electricity.
Install a color insert and legend plate by inserting their rough
surfaces so that they face the lamp.
■ Replacing parts
Detaching lens case
To remove a lamp, place the tip of a flat-blade screwdriver in the
grove at the edge of the lens case and press it in the direction of
the arrow. The tip of the screwdriver should be 4.5mm or less
wide and 0.6mm or less thick.
To remove both the LED unit and lens case, place the tip of flat-blade
screwdriver in one of the indents on the edges of the lens
case and press it in the direction of the arrow.
When installing an LED unit, press it into the frame so that the
LED unit side with the arrow faces the top side of the frame (i.e.,
the side with the unit type nameplate). The LED unit must be in
the correct orientation when installing it.
After installing the lens case and lens, use your finger to press
the lens part firmly until it stops in place. To prevent defective
lighting or other problems caused by static electricity, do not
press directly on the LED chip surface with your finger.
Replacing incandescent lamps
Insert and remove lamps using the hollow end of the lamp
changer type AHX029.
■ Replacing color inserts and legend plates
To replace a color insert and legend plate, insert a flat-blade
screwdriver and press it to remove the lens.
For AP30F
For AP40F

04/245
SF00-404
04
■ LED unit color display
The operating voltage and lamp color are printed on the LED
unit lamp using codes.
AP30F and AP40F
Notes on use
• For a color display when the lamp is OFF, insert first a color
insert and then an opaque white legend plate into the lens
case.
• For an opaque white display when the lamp is OFF, insert first
a transparent color insert and then an opaque white legend
plate into the lens case (only with LEDs).
• For smoked lenses, insert first a color insert and then an
opaque white legend plate into the lens case.
• The legend plate and color inserts can be engraved.
• Do not touch the chip when the color insert is removed from
the LED unit and the LED chip is exposed. Defective lighting or
other problems may be caused by static electricity.
Opaque white display with the lamp off
Lens
legend plate
(White or clear)
Color-insert
Color display with the lamp off
Lens
Legend plate
Color-insert
■ LED polarity
The terminals of all 6V DC voltage products and DC flicker units
have polarity, so care is needed when installing them. X1 is the
positive terminal.
+
Polarity indication: +
■ Connecting color lamps and half-size lamp windows
Example
24
Voltage
Y
Color
Terminals Light color from Half-size lamp
two-color lamp window
X1 to X3 Green Top
X1 to X2 Red Bottom
R A W Y G S P F
M 220R 220A 220W 220Y 220G 220S 220P
L 127R 127A 127W 127Y 127G 127S 127P
H 110R 110A 110W 110Y 110G 110S 110P
F 48R 48A 48W 48Y 48G 48S 48P
E 24R 24A 24W 24Y 24G 24S 24P 24F
C 15R 15A 15W 15Y 15G 15S 15P
B 12R 12A 12W 12Y 12G 12S 12P
6 6R 6A 6W 6Y 6G 6S 6P
E
(With check 24-RC 24-AC 24-WC 24-YC 24-GC 24-SC 24-PC
terminal)
■ Installing color inserts and legend plate
Inserting a color insert and legend plate
Legend
plate
Color-insert
Color
code
Rated
voltage
code
Top
Bottom

AP30F and AP40F
Notes on use
Lamp rated voltage Standard operating voltage
(V AC) (V AC)
6.3 4 to 5.5
18 12 to 15
24 16 to 20
30 20 to 24
04/246
Assembling lens and lens case
Assemble the lens with lens case by mating lens projections
with lens case indents.
■ Other precautions
1. Transformer units
• A maximum of 80 windows can function for a unit with
transformers when the windows are square.
• Transformers are designed for a load of one incandescent
lamp and one LED unit. It is not possible to connect additional
loads.
2. Operating voltage and the rated voltage of incandescent lamp
• Incandescent lamps can be used within the lamp’s rated voltage.
If you need 5,000 to 10,000 hours of service life for incandescent
lamp (at AC circuit), use the lamp within the standard operating
voltage. Using incandescent lamps in DC circuit greatly reduces
the lamp service life due to notching phenomenon. Use LED units
in DC circuit instead.
3. Flicker units
• When two or more flicker units are used in a Multi Display
Light, they may not illuminate simultaneously because of
variations in flicker unit circuits.
• Flicker units can be used only with square Multi Display Lights.
They cannot be used with rectangular lights.
4. Continuous lighting
• For continuous light, the duty cycle should be 50% or less. If
densely packed LEDs are lit continuously with a high duty
cycle, LED life will be reduced.
• With 2-color lighting on the entire surface, do not use
continuous lighting when lighting 2 colors simultaneously.
5. Store and operate these units within the temperature and
humidity specifications on page 04/237.
6. Do not use these units at outdoor.
7. Do not use these units in places where dust or cuttings will
accumulate. The lights may not turn ON if dust or cuttings
penetrate into the units.

04/247
AP30F Square AP30F Rectangular AP30F Split rectangular AP30F Half size
04
AP30F and AP40F
Accessories
■ Accessory
Description Type and dimensions, mm
28sq. 1.5 1.5 58
28
28sq.
13
37sq. 1.5 1.5 77
37
17
37
DN7C001-S DN7C001-T
DN7C001-H
DN8C001-S DN8C001-T
DN8C001-H
27sq. 1 57
27
27
12
35.8sq. 1 75.8
35.8
35.8
15.8
28.5
27
37.9
35.8
(Color-insert)
AP30F Square AP30F Rectangular AP30F Split rectangular AP30F Half size
(Color-insert)
AF00-379
Color-insert and
legend plate
Used with Type
Square(S) Rectangular(T,V) Half size(H)
AP30F Clear DN7C001-SC DN7C001-TC DN7C001-HC
Smoked DN7C001-SS DN7C001-TS DN7C001-HS
AP40F Clear DN8C001-SC DN8C001-TC DN8C001-HC
Smoked DN8C001-SS DN8C001-TS DN8C001-HS
AF00-379
Lens
Color-insert
Legend plate
Type
Square (S)
APCX012-LW
APCX012-LWS
APCX013-LW
APCX013-LWS
Rectangular (T, V)
APCX014-LW
APCX014-LWS
APCX015-LW
APCX015-LWS
Half size (H)
DN7P002-W
DN7P002-WS
DN8P002-W
DN8P002-WS
Clear
Smoked
Clear
Smoked
Used with
AP30F
AP40F
Type
Square (S)
APCX016-SR
APCX016-SO
APCX012-LW
APCX016-SLG
DN7P004-G
APCX016-SLY
APCX016-SS
APCX012-C
–
DN8P004-R
DN8P004-A
APCX013-LW
APCX077-SG
DN8P004-G
DN8P004-Y
APCX017-SS
APCX077-SW
–
–
Rectangular (T, V)
APCX016-TR
APCX016-TO
APCX014-LW
APCX016-TLG
DN7P005-G
APCX016-TLY
APCX016-TS
APCX014-C
–
DN8P005-R
DN8P005-A
APCX015-LW
APCX077-TG
DN8P005-G
DN8P005-Y
APCX017-TS
APCX077-TW
–
–
2-way split rectangular
APCX058-R
APCX058-O
APCX058-W
APCX058-LG
DN7P006-G
APCX058-LY
APCX058-S
APCX058-C
–
DN8P006-R
DN8P006-A
APCX059-W
APCX079-G
DN8P006-G
DN8P006-Y
APCX059-S
APCX079-W
–
–
Half size (H)
DN7P002-R
DN7P002-A
DN7P002-W
DN7P002-G
–
DN7P002-Y
DN7P002-S
–
DN7P002-C
DN8P002-R
DN8P002-A
DN8P002-W
DN8P002-G
–
DN8P002-Y
DN8P002-S
–
DN8P002-W
DN8P002-C
Color
Red
Orange
White
Green (LED)
Green (incandescent)
Yellow
Blue
Clear
Clear
Red
Orange
White
Green (LED)
Green (incandescent)
Yellow
Blue
White (LED)
White
Clear
Used
with
AP30F
AP40F
Code
LED
R
O
P
G
–
Y
S
W, RG, C
W, C
R
O
W, RG, C
G
–
Y
S
P
P
W, C
Incandescent
R
O
W
–
G
Y
S
–
–
R
O
W
–
G
Y
S
–
–
–

04/248
For AP30F (except 48V 1W) For AP40F, AP30F (48V 1W)
ø5
AP30F and AP40F
Accessories
Jumper
AF00-379
Incandescent lamp
AF00-380
Used with Type
2 poles 3 poles 4 poles 5 poles 6 poles
AP30F APCX029 DN7Y001-03 DN7Y001-04 DN7Y001-05 DN7Y001-06
AP40F APCX030 DN8Y001-03 DN8Y001-04 DN8Y001-05 DN8Y001-06
Jumper dimensions
Used with Dimension A Dimension B
2 poles 3 poles 4 poles 5 poles 6 poles
AP30F series 30 37.6 67.6 97.6 127.6 157.6
AP40F series 40 47.6 87.6 127.6 167.6 207.6
7.5
Dimension B (for 6 poles)
Dimension A Dimension A Dimension A Dimension A Dimension A
AF00-383
Used with Socket type Voltage/capacity Type Remarks
AP30F BA9s/13 bayonet type 6.3V 1W AHX135 Lamp with built-in transformer
18V 1W AHX279 –
24V 1W AHX144 –
30V 1W AHX129 –
48V 1W AHX407 Lamp with built-in resistor unit
AP40F 18V 2W AHX141 Lamp with built-in transformer
24V 2W AHX142 –
30V 2W AHX143 –
48V 2W DN7H001 Lamp with built-in resistor unit
23 28
ø10
ø10
Lamp changer
Color-insert and legend plate
changer
Used with Type
AP30F, AP40F For incandescent lamp AHX029
T-1990
A
A
35
ø16
ø12
ø12.5
ø9
Cross section A-A
60
15
ø22
ø11
Type DN7Y020

04/249
Single color
All surface
illumination
Full voltage
Single color
All surface
illumination
Full voltage
Color-insert
(color when light
turned OFF)
Color (transparent)
-insert (white when
light turned OFF)
Color-insert
(color when light
turned OFF)
Color (transparent)
-insert (white when
light turned OFF)
04
AP30F and AP40F
Accessories
LED unit
AF00-374
Used with Emitted Color-insert Type
color specification
Square(S) Horizontal Vertical Half size(H)
rectangular (T) rectangular (V)
AP30F Red DN7Q001-S1 R DN7Q001-T1 R DN7Q001-V1 R DN7Q001-H1 R
Orange DN7Q001-S1 A DN7Q001-T1 A DN7Q001-V1 A DN7Q001-H1 A
White DN7Q001-S1 W DN7Q001-T1 W DN7Q001-V1 W DN7Q001-H1 W
Green DN7Q001-S1 G DN7Q001-T1 G DN7Q001-V1 G DN7Q001-H1 G
Yellow DN7Q001-S1 Y DN7Q001-T1 Y DN7Q001-V1 Y DN7Q001-H1 Y
Blue DN7Q001-S1 S DN7Q001-T1 S DN7Q001-V1 S DN7Q001-H1 S
Pure-white DN7Q001-S1 P DN7Q001-T1 P DN7Q001-V1 P DN7Q001-H1 P
Red DN7Q001-S3 R DN7Q001-T3 R DN7Q001-V3 R DN7Q001-H3 R
AP40F Red DN8Q001-S1 R DN8Q001-T1 R DN8Q001-V1 R DN8Q001-H1 R
White DN8Q001-S1 W DN8Q001-T1 W DN8Q001-V1 W DN8Q001-H1 W
Pure-white DN8Q001-S1 P DN8Q001-T1 P DN8Q001-V1 P DN8Q001-H1 P
Red DN8Q001-S3 R DN8Q001-T3 R DN8Q001-V3 R DN8Q001-H3 R
Notes: The LED unit is provided with a lens case and a color-insert.
Replace the in the type number with one of the following voltage code.
Voltage Code Square, horizontal/ Half size
vertical rectangular
6V DC 6 –
12V AC/DC B
15V AC/DC C
24V AC/DC E
48V AC/DC F –
110V AC/DC H –
127V AC/DC L –
220V AC M –
AP30F
Square
AP30F
Rectangular
AP30F
Half size
AP40F
Square
AP40F
Rectangular
AP40F
Half size
30sq.
48 60
48 30
30
38 15
40sq.
48
80
48 40
40
38 20
DN7Q001-S DN7Q001-T,V DN7Q001-H DN8Q001-S DN8Q001-T,V DN8Q001-H
AF00-373
: Available – :Not available

04/250
Used with Horizontal rectangular Vertical rectangular Remarks
AP30F DN7Q001-T ■AB DN7Q001-V ■AB Full-voltage type (R/CR voltage dividing)*
2-way split illumination DN7Q004-T EAB DN7Q004-V EAB Short body type for transformer unit
AP40F DN8Q001-T ■AB DN8Q001-V ■AB Full-voltage type (R/CR voltage dividing)*
2-way split illumination DN8Q004-T EAB DN7Q008-V EAB Short body type for transformer unit
AP30F Square AP30F Rectangular AP40F Square AP40F Rectangular
40sq.
38
80
Used with Emitted Color-insert Type
color specification
Square(S) Horizontal Vertical
AP30F Red DN7Q004-S1ER DN7Q004-T1ER DN7Q004-V1ER
Color-insert
(color when light
turned OFF)
Orange DN7Q004-S1EA DN7Q004-T1EA DN7Q004-V1EA
White DN7Q004-S1EW DN7Q004-T1EW DN7Q004-V1EW
Green DN7Q004-S1EG DN7Q004-T1EG DN7Q004-V1EG
Yellow DN7Q004-S1EY DN7Q004-T1EY DN7Q004-V1EY
Blue DN7Q004-S1ES DN7Q004-T1ES DN7Q004-V1ES
Pure-white DN7Q004-S1EP DN7Q004-T1EP DN7Q004-V1EP
Red DN7Q004-S3ER DN7Q004-T3ER DN7Q004-V3ER
LED
transformer
units
LED short
body type
Color (transparent)
-insert (white when
light turned OFF)
AP40F Red DN8Q004-S1ER DN8Q004-T1ER DN8Q004-V1ER
Color-insert
(color when light
turned OFF)
White DN8Q004-S1EW DN8Q004-T1EW DN8Q004-V1EW
Pure-white DN8Q004-S1EP DN8Q004-T1EP DN8Q004-V1EP
Red DN8Q004-S3ER DN8Q004-T3ER DN8Q004-V3ER
AP30F and AP40F
Accessories
LED unit
AF00-376
LED
transformer
units
LED short
body type
Color (transparent)
-insert (white when
AF00-375 light turned OFF)
Note: The LED unit is provided with a lens case and a color-insert.
A B
A
B
Horizontal rectangular (T)
2-way split illumination
Vertical rectangular (V)
2-way split illumination
Specify the colors by replacing A and B with the
corresponding symbols.
Red: R, Green: G, Orange: A, White: W, Yellow: Y,
Blue: S, Pure white: P
Example
DN7Q001-T2ERG: AP30F horizontal rectangular type
with 2-way split illumination with red on the left and
green on the right.
30sq.
38
60
38 30
DN7Q004-S DN7Q004-T,V DN8Q004-S DN8Q004-T,V
38 40
: Color-insert specification codes: Colored = 2, Transparent or white: 4
■: Specify the voltage codes. See page 04/249.
●: Specifying colors for 2-way split illumination.
* For dimensions, See page 04/249.

04/251
Single color
All surface
illumination
with a
check
terminal
(full voltage
only 24V
type)
Single color
All surface
illumination
with a
check
terminal
(full voltage
only 24V
type)
Color-insert
(color when light
turned OFF)
Color (transparent)-
insert (white when
light turned OFF)
Color-insert
(color when light
turned OFF)
Color (transparent)-
insert (white when
light turned OFF)
AP30F Square AP30F Rectangular AP40F Square AP40F Rectangular
04
AP30F and AP40F
Accessories
LED unit Used with Emitted Color-insert Type
color specification
Square(S) Horizontal Vertical Half size(H)
AP30F Red DN7Q003-S1ER DN7Q003-T1ER DN7Q003-V1ER –
Orange DN7Q003-S1EA DN7Q003-T1EA DN7Q003-V1EA –
White DN7Q003-S1EW DN7Q003-T1EW DN7Q003-V1EW –
Green DN7Q003-S1EG DN7Q003-T1EG DN7Q003-V1EG –
Yellow DN7Q003-S1EY DN7Q003-T1EY DN7Q003-V1EY –
Blue DN7Q003-S1ES DN7Q003-T1ES DN7Q003-V1ES –
Pure-white DN7Q003-S1EP DN7Q003-T1EP DN7Q003-V1EP –
Red DN7Q003-S3ER DN7Q003-T3ER DN7Q003-V3ER –
AP40F Red DN8Q003-S1ER DN8Q003-T1ER DN8Q003-V1ER –
White DN8Q004-S1EW DN8Q003-T1EW DN8Q003-V1EW –
Pure-white DN8Q003-S1EP DN8Q003-T1EP DN8Q003-V1EP –
Red DN8Q003-S3ER DN8Q003-T3ER DN8Q003-V3ER –
Note: The LED unit is provided with a lens case and a color-insert.
AF00-376
AF00-375
Used with Emitted color Type
Square(S) Horizontal rectangular (T) Vertical rectangular (V)
AP30F 2-color illumination Red and green DN7Q002-S3EF DN7Q002-T3EF DN7Q003-V3EF
AP40F Red and green DN8Q002-S3EF DN8Q002-T3EF DN8Q003-V3EF 2-color illumination
30sq.
38
60
38 30
DN7Q002-S
DN7Q003-S
DN7Q002-T,V
DN7Q003-T,V
DN8Q002-S
DN8Q003-S
DN8Q002-T,V
DN8Q003-T,V
40sq.
38
80
38 40

AP30F and AP40F
Accessories
04/252
25.5 44
29
4
ø3
9.75
Secondary terminal (Y1,Y2)
5
Mounting bracket
Type APX111
AF00-384
12
20
8 2.8
M3 32
Transformer unit
Note: Replace the mark in the type number with
the voltage code.
Voltage 100 to 110V 115 to 127V 200 to 220V 230 to 254V 350 to 380V 400 to 440V 480
Code H L M Q S T V
SF-1111
Base unit for separate
mounting transformer
AF89-824
Type AHX326
Remarks
• If the power supply voltage is 100V AC or over (or more than
220V for R or CR voltage-dividing types) and the panel has
limited depth or there are weight limitations, a full-voltage type
can be used with a separate mounted transformer, as shown
in the following table below.
• A base unit is required when combining with a transformer
unit.
Mounting is possible using screws or rail.
58
48
22
32
10
58
22.5
A
Base
Rail
Transformer
Primary terminal (X1, X2)
Type AX511-
AX503-
AX544-
Rail type A (mm)
TH35-15AL 69
TH35-7.5, AH35-7.5AL 61.5
■ Separate mounted transformer application table
Used with LED specification Incandescent specification
Applicable light Built-in unit Transformer unit Separate base Applicable light Built-in light bulb Transformer unit Separate base
type type
AP30F AP30F- ◆E3-● DN7Q001- E AHX544- × AHX326 × AP30F- ◆A-● AHX135 AHX511- × AHX326 ×
AP30F- ◆ES-● DN7Q004- E No. of windows No. of windows (6.3 V 1W bulb) No. of windows No. of windows
AP40F AP40F- ◆E3-● DN8Q001- E AP40F- ◆C-● AHX141 AHX503- ×
AP40F- ◆ES-● DN8Q004- E (18 V 2W bulb) No. of windows
Notes: 1. Replace ◆ mark by the number of basic windows. ◆ = vertical x horizontal
2. Replace ● mark by the code indicating the shape of illuminated face (S, T, or V, do not specify H).
3. The following depths are available. AP30F- ◆E3: 60.5mm AP30F- ◆ES: 52mm AP30F- ◆A: 54mm
AP40F- ◆E3: 60.5mm AP40F- ◆ES: 52mm AP40F- ◆C: 54mm
4. Refer to pages 04/249 and 04/250 for built-in unit types with LED specifications.

04/253
DN7Y002 DN8Y002 APCX055
22.8sq.
27sq.
2 17.8
04
Terminal cover
AP30F and AP40F
Accessories
13 13
ø6.5
32.8sq.
15.7 13
13
ø6.5
15.7
12
17
ø7 3
29
16
16.9
27
2 11.1
3.2
27sq.
12.8
8
2 11.5
ø7 3.2
ø7
APX131 APCX054
AF00-389
AF00-388
AF00-387
AF00-386
AF00-385
Series Description DN7Y002 APCX054 APX131 DN8Y002 APCX055
AP30F LED single-color, Full-voltage type
full-surface R, CR voltage
illumination dividing type
Transformer type
Half-size, Full-voltage type
2-color
illumination
LED short body Full-voltage type
type
Incandescent Full-voltage type
lamp
Transformer type
110V, 220V
Transformer type
over than 220V
AP40F LED single-color, Full-voltage type
full-surface R, CR voltage
illumination dividing type
Transformer type
Half-size, 2-color Full-voltage type
illumination
LED short body Full-voltage type
type
Incandescent Full-voltage type
lamp
Transformer type

AP30F and AP40F
Window layout sheet
When ordering Multi Display Lights, fill in the necessary items in
this ordering sheet on Page 04/255. (It is also recommended
that you make copies of the sheet for future use.)
04/254
■ Window layout ordering sheet
Filling in the ordering sheet
1. Use lines to designate the borders of the illumination face.
2. Write the color code (G, R, W, Y, O, S) for each window
into the bottom row of the window. For T and V types,
write the code in only one place.
3. If you are requesting embossed characters, write the
characters into the table.
4. For windows requiring more than 7 (vertical) or 15
(horizontal) spaces, continue writing on a separate
ordering sheet.
5. Write in two places for a two-split illumination type.
6. When using a flicker unit or a voltage stabilizer unit, write
the unit code into the bottom row of the window.
Horizontally(Column)
01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
Vertically(Row)
RUN
R
R Y
G O
FWD
W
REV
STOP
G
W
E3FD
MONIT-1 MONIT-2
Designate the borders of the
illumination face with lines.
Example of flicker
unit voltage.
Cases in which you should order with the ordering sheet
• When ordering a mixture of LED luminous colors
• When ordering a mixture of window sizes in the illumination
face
• When ordering a mixture of two-color illumination faces
• When ordering a mixture of input voltages
• When requesting embossed characters
Specification example

04/255
Horizontally(Column)
04
AP30F and AP40F
Window layout sheet
■ Window layout ordering sheet
01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
Vertically(Row)

• The protection of operator section
meets the IP65 (IEC), so these
switches can be used in oil-splash
environments, such as on machine
tool control panels. (Except for AC32)
• A wide choice of output codes fits a
broad range of applications.
Available step angles are 15, 30, and
360°/26 (13.85°). Real binary code,
complementary binary code, and real
gray code are available.
• Switches are available with
connectors or with lock rings for easy
handling.
• Stopper screw positions are user
selectable.
AC32
AC09
AC16 AF90-209, 210, 211
Rated insulation voltage 50V
Operating temperature –20 to +70°C
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (non condensation)
Service life Mechanical 50,000 operations
Electrical 50,000 operations
Dielectric Between terminals 250V AC, 1 minute
strength Between terminals and ground 1500V AC, 1 minute
Insulation Between terminals 500MΩ or more
resistance Between terminals and ground 5,000MΩ or more
Degree of protection (operator section) AC09, AC16 : IP65 (IEC60529)
AC32 : IP40 (IEC60529)
With or without lock ring
Blank: Without lock ring
0007: With lock ring
0009: With adhesive lock ring
With or without connector
Blank: 8-terminal, without connector
A01: 8-terminal, with right-angle connector
A02: 8-termianl, with straight connector
B00: 7-terminal, without connector
B01: 7-terminal, with right-angle connector
B02: 7-terminal, with straight connector
With or without stopper screw
Blank: With stopper screw
E: Without stopper screw
Length of shaft (mm)
AC09 AC16 AC32
L1: 16 — 14.5
L2: 18 — 16.5
L3: 20 — 18.5
L4: 22 19.5 20.5
Note: When shorter action than the maximum range of
switch action is used, stopper screws are used.
However, stopper screws are not used if the
maximum action range is used when either 15°
(symbol Y) or 360°/26 (symbol Z) is specified.
AC 09 – C Z 0 / 25 L1 E A01 / 0007
Rotary Switches
AC09, 16 and 32
Digital code output type
■ Description
FUJI AC series rotary switches offer a
wide choice of output codes. They
feature sliding Au-flashed contacts for
high contact reliability. Inhibitor and
parity check circuits guard against
switch malfunctions caused by error
signals. With only seven connections to
make, these switches are an
economical solution to multiposition
switching needs.
■ Features
• Au-flashed contacts for high contact
reliability.
■ Ratings ■ Performance
Volts Operational current (A)
(resistive load)
50V AC 0.05
5V AC 0.5
25V DC 0.05
5V DC 0.25
Basic type
Mounting
09: M9 nut
16: M16 adapter
32: Adapter
(32mm mounting pitch)
Type of code
R: Real binary code
C: Complementary binary code
G: Real gray code
Angle of step
Angle Setting position
X: 30° 0 to 11
W: 360°/13 (27.69°) 0 to 12
Y: 15° 0 to 23
Z: 360°/26 (13.85°) 0 to 25
Start position
Available step angle
0 to 11: 30°
0 to 12: 360°/13 (27.69°)
0 to 23: 15°
0 to 25: 360°/26 (13.85°)
End position
Available step angle
0 to 11: 30°
0 to 12: 360°/13 (27.69°)
0 to 23: 15°
0 to 25: 360°/26 (13.85°)
04/256 Information subject to change without notice

Rotary Switches
AC09, 16 and 32
*1 *2 *3
Information subject to change without notice 04/257
04
• M9 nut mounting
Angle of Connector Lock ring Type
step
Real binary code Complementary Real gray code
binary code
30° Without Without lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■ AC09-CX / ( )■ AC09-GX / ( )■
connector With lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■/0007 AC09-CX / ( )■/0007 AC09-GX / ( )■/0007
With adhesive lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■/0009 AC09-CX / ( )■/0009 AC09-GX / ( )■/0009
With right Without lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■01 AC09-CX / ( )■01 AC09-GX / ( )■01
angle With lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■01/0007 AC09-CX / ( )■01/0007 AC09-GX / ( )■01/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■01/0009 AC09-CX / ( )■01/0009 AC09-GX / ( )■01/0009
With Without lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■02 AC09-CX / ( )■02 AC09-GX / ( )■02
straight With lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■02/0007 AC09-CX / ( )■02/0007 AC09-GX / ( )■02/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RX / ( )■02/0009 AC09-CX / ( )■02/0009 AC09-GX / ( )■02/0009
360°/13 Without Without lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■ AC09-CW / ( )■
(27.69°) connector With lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■/0007 AC09-CW / ( )■/0007
With adhesive lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■/0009 AC09-CW / ( )■/0009
With right Without lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■01 AC09-CW / ( )■01
angle With lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■01/0007 AC09-CW / ( )■01/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■01/0009 AC09-CW / ( )■01/0009
With Without lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■02 AC09-CW / ( )■02
straight With lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■02/0007 AC09-CW / ( )■02/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RW / ( )■02/0009 AC09-CW / ( )■02/0009
15° Without Without lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■ AC09-CY / ( )■ AC09-GY / ( )■
connector With lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■/0007 AC09-CY / ( )■/0007 AC09-GY / ( )■/0007
With adhesive lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■/0009 AC09-CY / ( )■/0009 AC09-GY / ( )■/0009
With right Without lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■01 AC09-CY / ( )■01 AC09-GY / ( )■01
angle With lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■01/0007 AC09-CY / ( )■01/0007 AC09-GY / ( )■01/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■01/0009 AC09-CY / ( )■01/0009 AC09-GY / ( )■01/0009
With Without lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■02 AC09-CY / ( )■02 AC09-GY / ( )■02
straight With lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■02/0007 AC09-CY / ( )■02/0007 AC09-GY / ( )■02/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RY / ( )■02/0009 AC09-CY / ( )■02/0009 AC09-GY / ( )■02/0009
360°/26 Without Without lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■ AC09-CZ / ( )■ AC09-GZ / ( )■
(13.85°) connector With lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■/0007 AC09-CZ / ( )■/0007 AC09-GZ / ( )■/0007
With adhesive lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■/0009 AC09-CZ / ( )■/0009 AC09-GZ / ( )■/0009
With right Without lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■01 AC09-CZ / ( )■01 AC09-GZ / ( )■01
angle With lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■01/0007 AC09-CZ / ( )■01/0007 AC09-GZ / ( )■01/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■01/0009 AC09-CZ / ( )■01/0009 AC09-GZ / ( )■01/0009
With Without lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■02 AC09-CZ / ( )■02 AC09-GZ / ( )■02
straight With lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■02/0007 AC09-CZ / ( )■02/0007 AC09-GZ / ( )■02/0007
connector With adhesive lock ring AC09-RZ / ( )■02/0009 AC09-CZ / ( )■02/0009 AC09-GZ / ( )■02/0009
Notes:
*1 Replace the marks by the Start and End positions
Step angle 30° 360°/13 15° 360°/26
Start and End positions 0 to 11 0 to 12 0 to 23 0 to 25
*2 Replace the ( ) mark by the shaft length code
L1: 16mm L2: 18mm L3: 20mm L4: 22mm
*3 Replace the ■ mark by the connector
A01: 8-terminal, with right angle connector
A02: 8-terminal, with straight connector
B01: 7-terminal, with right angle connector

binary code
30° Without connector AC16-RX / L4■ AC16-CX / L4■ AC16-GX / L4■
With right angle connector AC16-RX / L4■01 AC16-CX / L4■01 AC16-GX / L4■01
With straight connector AC16-RX / L4■02 AC16-CX / L4■02 AC16-GX / L4■02
360°/13 Without connector AC16-RW / L4■ AC16-CW / L4■
(27.69°) With right angle connector AC16-RW / L4■01 AC16-CW / L4■01
With straight connector AC16-RW / L4■02 AC16-CW / L4■02
15° Without connector AC16-RY / L4■ AC16-CY / L4■ AC16-GY / L4■
With right angle connector AC16-RY / L4■01 AC16-CY / L4■01 AC16-GY / L4■01
With straight connector AC16-RY / L4■02 AC16-CY / L4■02 AC16-GY / L4■02
360°/26 Without connector AC16-RZ / L4■ AC16-CZ / L4■ AC16-GZ / L4■
(13.85°) With right angle connector AC16-RZ / L4■01 AC16-CZ / L4■01 AC16-GZ / L4■01
With straight connector AC16-RZ / L4■02 AC16-CZ / L4■02 AC16-GZ / L4■02
binary code
30° Without connector AC32-RX / ( )■ AC32-CX / ( )■ AC32-GX / ( )■
With right angle connector AC32-RX / ( )■01 AC32-CX / ( )■01 AC32-GX / ( )■01
With straight connector AC32-RX / ( )■02 AC32-CX / ( )■02 AC32-GX / ( )■02
360°/13 Without connector AC32-RW / ( )■ AC32-CW / ( )■
(27.69°) With right angle connector AC32-RW / ( )■01 AC32-CW / ( )■01
With straight connector AC32-RW / ( )■02 AC32-CW / ( )■02
15° Without connector AC32-RY / ( )■ AC32-CY / ( )■ AC32-GY / ( )■
With right angle connector AC32-RY / ( )■01 AC32-CY / ( )■01 AC32-GY / ( )■01
With straight connector AC32-RY / ( )■02 AC32-CY / ( )■02 AC32-GY / ( )■02
360°/26 Without connector AC32-RZ / ( )■ AC32-CZ / ( )■ AC32-GZ / ( )■
(13.85°) With right angle connector AC32-RZ / ( )■01 AC32-CZ / ( )■01 AC32-GZ / ( )■01
With straight connector AC32-RZ / ( )■02 AC32-CZ / ( )■02 AC32-GZ / ( )■02
Rotary Switches
AC09, 16 and 32
• M16 adapter mounting
Angle of Connector Type*1 *2
step
Notes:
Step angle 30° 360°/13 15° 360°/26
• Adaptor mounting (32mm mounting pitch)
Angle of Connector Type*1 *2 *3
step
Notes:
Step angle 30° 360°/13 15° 360°/26
*2 Replace the ( ) mark by the shaft length
L1: 14.5mm L2: 16.5mm L3: 18.5mm L4: 20.5mm

Terminal Bit Setting position
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C 16 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C 16 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C 16 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
●
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C 16 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ●
C P ● ● ● ●● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C P ● ● ● ●● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
G: Real gray code
●
●
■ 13-position
R: Real binary code
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ● ●
C P ● ● ● ●● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
04
Rotary Switches
AC09, 16 and 32
■ 24-position
R: Real binary code
■ 12-position
R: Real binary code
G: Real gray code
G: Real gray code
●
■ 26-position
R: Real binary code
●
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A a ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F b ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B c ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E d ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C e ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
G P ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A a ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F b ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B c ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E d ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C e ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
G P ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
D C
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
A a ● ● ● ● ● ●
F b ● ● ● ● ● ●
B c ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E d ● ● ● ●
C P ● ● ● ● ● ●
G
D C
INH : Inhibit terminal
P : Parity check terminal
C : Common terminal
● : Turned ON
●
No. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
A 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
B 4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E 8 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
C P ● ● ● ●● ●
G INH ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
D C
●
● ●

■ Accessories
Lead wire with connector (8-terminal)
AF91-675
Length of lead wire (m) Type Mass (g)
0.5 ACX011-805 11
1.0 (Standard) ACX011-810 19
2.0 ACX011-820 33
AF91-710
Type Mass (g)
Lock ring
Lock ring (inserted) ACX001 2
Lock ring (sealed) ACX001A 5
ACX001
ø16
ACX001A
ø28
4.7
ø9.1
1 1.2
8
ø9.1
ø10
1.9
1.5 1
20.5
6 14 L
L: 0.5, 1.0, 2.0m
■ Dimensions, mm
AC09 AC09 (with connector)
8-terminal
ABCDDE FG
2.54
17.78
22
30
31
28
20
22 15.8
Panel thickness
Max. 4
M9 P=0.75
ø6
40
25.5
8
*L
Right-angle
connector
32
30.5
23.4
Straight
connector
22
15.8
20
Panel cutting Panel cutting
8
Panel thickness
Max. 4
M9 P=0.75
25.5 *L
ø6
ø9.1 +0.3
–0
Shaft length L1 L2 L3 L4
* 16 18 20 22
Mass (g)
Without connector 41 42 43 44
With connector 42 43 44 45
AC16 AC32
M9 P=0.75
6.4
Panel thickness
Max. 4
27 *L
ø6
20
M2.3×6
Shaft length L1 L2 L3 L4
* 14.5 16.5 18.5 20.5
Mass (g) 47 48 49 50
8-terminal
ABCDDEFG
17.78
22
28
2.54
30
31
In case of using lock ring
(AC09- /0007)
+0.3
–0
ø9.1
ø2.7
Panel thickness
1.2 to 3.2
28
20
22 15.8
8-terminal
ABCDDE FG
2.54
Panel cutting
ø9.1 +0.3
–0
ø32±0.2
ø17
M2.3 (for flat head screw)
38
32
17.78
22
30
31
Rotary Switches
AC 09, 16 and 32
11
Panel thickness
Max. 4
28 19.5
Mass: 47g
8-terminal
ABCDDE FG
2.54
17.78
22
30
31
Panel cutting
M16 P=1
ø6
ø20
ø16.1+0.3
–0
28
20
22 15.8

G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z A B C D E F
■ Installation
04
■ Notes on use
1. Connecting wires
Note the following points when soldering:
• The power of the soldering iron must not be over 30W.
• Use solder with resin flux core.
• Complete soldering within 5 seconds if using a 30W
soldering iron, or within 10 seconds if using a 20W
soldering iron.
2. Note on the case linkage
Rotary Switches
AC09, 16 and 32
3. Number of stopper screws shipped
● AC09 and AC32
• Step angle: 30° (symbol X)
Positions 0/11 (0 to 11): one screw. User-selectable start
and stop positions: two screws (one for start position, one
for end position).
• Step angle: 15° (symbol Y)
for end position).
• Step angle: 360°/26 (symbol Z)
for end position).
● AC16
Customers can specify the stopper screw positions. The
switch is then shipped with stopper screws already in the
specified positions.
4. Stopper screw positions
Insert stopper screws into the switch body holes marked with
letters, as shown in the insertion example on the right. These
tables below show that the start position stopper screw is
inserted in the hole on the left of the position setting and the
end positions stopper screw is inserted in the hole on the
right.
Do not disconnect
this case linkage.
Switch body
Stopper screw
holes (24)
Stopper screw
holes (26)
If step angle X (30°) or
Y (15°) is specified.
If step angle W (360°/13)
or Z (360°/26) is specified.
5. Installing a stopper screw
The maximum tightening torque for a stopper screw is 0.1N·m.
Screw the stopper screw into position until it hits the body
frame rib. Do not overtighten the screw.
Stopper screw
Stopper screw
Frame rib
AC09
Pass the switch body through the hole from
the back of the panel, and secure it by
tightening the hexagonal nut with a flat washer
and a toothed lock washer.
The recommended tightening torque for the
hexagonal nut is 1.5 to 2N·m.
Insert the lock ring (ACX001) between the
panel and the flat washer, and the adhesive
lock ring (ACX001A) between the switch body
and the panel.
AC16
Pass the switch body with a bezel through the
hole from the back of the panel, and secure it
with a φ16 mounting nut. The recommended
tightening torque for the nut is 0.6 to 1N·m.
AC32
Pass the switch body through the hole from
the back of the panel, and secure it with two
flat head screws from the face of the panel.
The recommended tightening torque for the
flat head screws is 0.3 to 0.5N·m.
Switch body
O ring
Panel
Flat washer
Toothed look washer
M9 hexagonal nut
Packing
Panel Panel
ø16 mounting nut
M2.3 flat head screw

AC09-C 0/7L1
Insertion example 1
➀ Step angle
X: 30°, W: 360°/13,
Y: 15°, Z: 360°/26
➁ Start position setting: 0
➃ With a stopper screw
Blank: With stopper screw
E: No stopper screw
➂ End position setting: 7
• If symbol ➀ (step angle) is X-----type AC09-CX0/7L1:
Insert the start side stopper screw in hole A and the end side screw in hole Q.
• If symbol ➀ (step angle) is W-----type AC09-CW0/7L1:
Insert the start side stopper screw in hole A and the end side screw in hole Q.
Start position setting End position setting
Range of switch action
Setting
Stopper screw
position A C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
E G I K M O Q S U W Y A
Start side stopper screw
position
End side stopper screw position
• If symbol ➀ (step angle) is Y-----type AC09-CY0/7L1:
Insert the start side stopper screw in hole A and the end side screw in hole J.
Start side
End side
Setting
Stopper screw
position
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A B
C
C
D E
D
F
E F
G H
G
I
H
J
I J
K L
K L
M N O
M N O P
P
Q R
Q R
S T U V
S T U V
Start side stopper
screw position
Notes: 1. If the range of action is designated as 0/22 (0 to 22), insert a stopper screw into hole A only.
2. If the range of action is designated as 0/23 (0 to 23), no stopper screws are inserted (symbol ➃ is E).
• If symbol ➀ (step angle) is Z-----type AC09-CZ0/7L1:
Insert the start side stopper screw in hole A and the end side screw in hole J.
W X
W X A B
Start side
End side
Setting
Stopper screw
position
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A B
C
C
D E
D
F
E F
G H
G
I
H
J
I J
K L
K L
M N O
M N O P
P
Q R
Q R
S T U V
S T U V
W X Y Z
W X Y Z A B
Start side stopper
screw position
Notes: 1. If the range of action is designated as 0/24 (0 to 24), insert a stopper screw in hole A only.
2. If the range of action is designated as 0/25 (0 to 25), no stopper screws are inserted (symbol ➃ is E).
AC09-RX2/11
End position setting
Start side stopper screw position End side stopper screw position
Rotary Switches
AC 09, 16 and 32
Setting
Stopper screw
position A C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
E G I K M O Q S U W A
Start side stopper screw
position
Insertion example 2
Step angle
Start position setting
Setting
Stopper screw position A C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
E G I K M O Q S U W A

04/263
04
Cam Type
RC310
Control selector switches
Cam-type control selector
switches
■ Description
FUJI cam-type control switches are
recommended for use on switchboards,
control panels and switchgear because
of their reliability in service. The main
type is RC310 with operational current
ratings of 10A.
Simplified and economical circuits can be
designed around the RC310, since it can
handle loads of up to 10A at 220VAC
without the need of contactors. Typical
examples of complex circuits based on
the attractive features of these
economical cam-type selector switches
are given on pages 04/265 to 04/268.
FUJI is prepared to manufacture other
versions to suit your particular
applications, and switches with up to 12
selector positions can be made to order.
RC310 switches are normally supplied
with H-type handles. Alternative handle
shapes available include the pistol-grip
P-type, cane-handle shaped S-type and
rosette shaped R-type.
Switches with a 2-12 position maintained
type, 3-position center spring-return type
and center spring-return type with locking
device are also available.
Specify the following (See page 04/264):
1. Type number
2. Mounting method
3. Operation
4. Selector position and notch angles
5. No. of contact blocks
6. Contact arrangement
7. Handle
8. Handle colors
Example
Cam switch,
rated current 10A .................. RC310-1
Flush mounting ............................ x
Maintained operation ......................... M
Contact arrangement ............................. 3201
(3-position, 2 contact blocks,
H type handle ................................................... H
Black color handle............................................... B
Type number RC310x-1M3201HB
Note: “C” in the type No. nomenclature must be
filled with numbers appearing in the table of “The
Contact Arrangement”. (page 04/265)
When requiring special arrangements not appearing
in the list clearly specify the arrangement required.
Note that “C” in the type nomenclature must not be
removed in this case.
RC310x-1MCHB
Type Flush mounting Semi-flush mounting Enclosed
x-type g-type
RC310-1
SG-740 SG-743 AF-191
RC310x-1 RC310-1 RC310g-1
■ Ratings
Type Rated thermal Breaking capacity (A)
current Voltage AC DC DC
(A) (V) Inductive Resistive Inductive
RC310-1 10 24 10 10 5
110 7.5 3 1.3
220 7.5 0.8 0.45
440 2.5 0.4 0.2
550 2 0.3 0.15
■ Life expectancy (operations)
Type Mechanical Electrical
RC310-1 5 million 250,000 at 220VAC 7.5A
500,000 at 220VAC 3A
■ Contact arrangement (typical)
(Viewed from the direction of the handle)
■ Technical data
Insulation resistance: Over 100MΩ at 500VDC
Dielectric strength: 2,500VAC. 1 minute
Ambient temperature: –5° to +60°C
Operating cycle: 600 cycles/hour
■ Contact arrangement: See page 04/265.
Contact
of upper
side
Nos. of selector
positions
Contact of
lower side
Handle

A 45°
L 45°
04/264
9.5
70
Cam Type
RC310
• Handle color B: Black
• Operation
Model Description
M Maintained
A Center spring return
L
● Available
RC310 series
RC310 -1
Mounting
Blank: Semi-flush
mounting
x: Flush mounting
g: With enclosure
Operation
Contact arrangement
See page 04/265
Handle
Handle color
Center spring return with locking device
(Pull to turn)
• Selector position and notch angle
Operation Notch angle Position
90°
2 position
90° *
3, 4 position
45° *
3-8 position
30°
9-12 position
2
3
5
4
5
10
12
11
(With locking device)
2
1 3
3
3
4
4
Note: * 3 or 4-position type notch angle is normally 45 degrees.
Specify when ordering other than this.
● Available
M
• Handle
Type Standard Versions
8
H type R type W type S type P type K type D type G type
RC310-1
17
• Ratings
Type Rated Voltage Number of Selector Flush mounting Semi-flush mounting Enclosed
thermal contact position and (x-type) (g-type)
current (A) (VAC) blocks notch angle Type Type Type
RC310-1 10 550 1 See the table RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ RC310g-1■
2 above. RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ RC310g-1■
3 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ RC310g-1■
4 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■
5 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■
6 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ –
7 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ –
8 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ –
9 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ –
10 RC310x-1■ RC310-1■ –
Note: : Type of operation ■: Contact arrangement – See page 04/265.
2
1 3
2
1 3
2
1 3
2
1 3
3
4
1
2
3
4
1 5
4
5
2 6
1
4
5
2 6
1 7
1
5
2
7 3
6 4
5 6
7
2 8
1 9
6 7
8
3 9
2 10
6 7
8
3 9
11
1
2
1
7
2
3
10 4
6
5
8
9
1 2
2 3
1
2 3
1 4
25 ø38 40 50
20 50
50 22
65 20
25
38
17
ø30 50 38
58
40 ø20
50
ø30
25
15
30
25 ø30

5 7 8 6
5 7 5 7 8 6
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
13 15 16 14
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
13 15 16 14
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
04/265
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
13 15 16 14
9 11
12 10
5 7
8 6
1 3
13 15 16 14
9 11
12 10
5 7
8 6
1 3
9 11 12 10
9 11 12 10
13 15 16 14
9 11 12 10
13 15 16 14
9 11
12 10
5 7
8 6
1 3
04
Cam Type
RC310
■ Contact arrangement
The following diagrams show the cam-type selector switch
contact arrangement. These are only typical examples and
other versions can be manufactured to meet your special
requirements. Contact FUJI for details.
The figures appearing on the right side indicate the contact
arrangement. This information must be given when ordering.
3 2 0 1
No. of contact arrangements: Indicates the
arrangement number.
No. of contact blocks: Up to 10 blocks can be
mounted. (0 indicates 10 blocks)
No. of selector positions
2-position 4-contact block
1 2
4 2
1 2
1 2
4 2
1 2
5 7
1 2 1 2
8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2
4 2
1 2
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
13 15 16 14
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2
13 15 16 14
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2
1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2
1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2
2401
2405
2402
2406
2403
2407
2404
2408
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
5 7
1 2 1 2
8 6
1 3 4 2
5 7
1 2 1 2
8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2
1 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2
2301
2305
2302
2306
2303
2307
2304
2308
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
5 7
1 2 1 2
8 6
1 3 4 2 1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 2 1 2
8 6
1 3 4 2
2201
2205
2202
2206
2203
2207
2204
2208
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2 1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2
1 3
1 2 1 2
4 2 1 3 4 2
2101
2105
2102
2106
2103
2107 Over rap contact
(early make, late break)
Over rap contact
(early make, late break)
2104
2108

5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
9
5 7 8 6
12 10
9
5 7
11
9
5 7 8 6
04/266
1 3 4 2
1 3 4 2
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
9
5 7 8 6
9
5 7
9
5
9
5 8 6
9
5
12 10
11
11 12 10
12 10
9
5 7
11
12 10
11
11
Cam Type
RC310
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
3101
3105
3102
3106
3103
3107
3104
3108 Notch angle : 90°
3109 3110 3111 3112
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
5 7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
5 7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
5 7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
3201
3205
3202
3206
3203
3207
3204
3208
3209 3210 3211 3212
1
11 12 10
3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
11 12 10
3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
9
5 7 8 6
1
11 12 10
3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
1
7 8 6
3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
11 12 10
3 4 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
8 6
1 4 2
3
1 2 3 1 2 3
12 10
8 6
9
5 7
11
1 4 2
3
1 2 3 1 2 3
8 6
1 4 2
3
1 2 3 1 2 3
8 6
1 4 2
3
1 2 3 1 2 3
8 6
4 2
7
3
1 2 3 1 2 3
9
8 6 5
1
12 10
4 2
11
7
3
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
12 10
4 2
7
3
1 2 3 1 2 3
3301
3305
3302
3306
3303
3307
3304
3308
3309 3310 3311 3312

5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
7 8 6
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
7 8 6
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
7 8 6
04/267
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
5 7 8 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
5 7 8 6
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
7 8 6
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
7 8 6
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
04
Cam Type
RC310
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
5 7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9 11 12 10
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
4301
4305
4302
4306
4303
4307
4304
4308
4309 4310 4311 4312
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
4201
4205
4202
4206
4203
4207
4204
4208
4209 4210 4211 4212
9
5
7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
7 8 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
7 8 6
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
13 15 16 14
11 12 10
7 8 6
13 15 13 14
11 12 10
7 8 6
13 15 16 14
9
11 12 10
7 8 6
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
5
1 3 4 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
4401
4405
4402
4406
4403
4407
4404
4408
4409 4410 4411 4412

5
1
04/268
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
Cam Type
RC310
7
3
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
8
4
12
8
4
6
2
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
9
5
1
7
3
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
9
5
1
11
7
3
12
8
4
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5301
5304
5302
5305
5303
5306
5307 5308 5309
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
13
9
5
1
15
11
7
3
16
12
8
4
14
10
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5401
5404
5402
5405
5403
5406
5407 5408 5409
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
1
7
3
8
4
6
2
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5201
5204
5202
5205
5203
5206
5207 5208 5209

04/269
04
Cam Type
RC310
■ Dimensions, mm
Flush mounting
RC310x-1
Semi-flush mounting
RC310-1
Enclosed (Up to 3-contact block)
RC310g-1
No. of contact blocks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L 39.5 51.5 63.5 75.5 87.5 99.5 111.5 123.5 135.5 147.5
Terminal
M3.5×8
L
1.6 25
15 30
48
36
4–M4
48
60
Panel drilling
4-ø4.5
ø8
H handle
48
48
No. of contact blocks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L 39.5 51.5 63.5 75.5 87.5 99.5 111.5 123.5 135.5 147.5
11
7
9
3
5
1
Terminal
M3.5×8 H handle
9
5
1
6
10
L
max.4.5 6 25
36
15 30
M4×10
48
60
Panel drilling
4-ø4.5
ø8
2
48
48
48
Panel drilling (View from back)
30 15
25
75 35
37
Earth M4
terminal
ø22/ø27
Knockout hole
100
80
H handle
60
50
6-5×8Elliptical

04/270
SB-413 SDO-0116M SB-413 SDO-0117M
RC310-1V0 NS387/2M RC310-1A20 NS387/4V
■ Dimensions, mm
NS387
Ammeter
Voltmeter Panel cutting
Panel Switches
NS387 and RC310
Instrument switches
Voltmeter/Ammeter Changeover
Switches
■ Description
These switches are used with voltmeters or
ammeters in secondary PT or CT circuits.
Normally, 3-phase line voltage or phase
current is measured with 3 meters
provided, which requires considerable
switchboard or console space. Space can
be saved by using NS387 and RC310
instrument switches, since the phase
current or line voltage can be read with a
single meter and either VS or AS
(Voltmeter or Ammeter switch). FUJI AS’s
are precisely and ruggedly constructed,
and open circuits do not occur at the time
of switch-over, so eliminating the possibility
of abnormal voltage trouble. NS387 is a
Series Application Type Ordering No. of Legend plate * Handle With or Mass
code contact angle without
block Off position (kg)
NS387 AC Voltmeter NS387/4V AC38V4N 4 R-S · S-T · T-R 2 x 45° Without 0.5
AC Voltmeter NS387/4V0 AC38V4F 4 OFF · R-S · S-T · T-R 3 x 45° With 0.5
DC Voltmeter NS387/2V AC38V2N 2 I · OFF · II 2 x 45° With 0.43
AC Ammeter NS387/2M AC38A2N 2 R · S · T 2 x 45° Without 0.43
AC Ammeter NS387/2M0 AC38A2F 3 OFF · R · S · T 3 x 45° With 0.47
AC Ammeter NS387/3M AC38A3N 3 R · S · T 2 x 45° Without 0.47
AC Ammeter NS387/4M AC38A43F 4 OFF · R · S · T 3 x 45° With 0.5
RC310 AC Voltmeter RC310-1V AK2R1-V32 2 R-S · S-T · T-R 2 x 45° Without 0.22
AC Voltmeter RC310-1V0 AK2R1-V42 2 OFF · R-S · S-T · T-R 3 x 45° With 0.22
AC Ammeter RC310-1A2 AK2R1-A32 2 R · S · T 2 x 45° Without 0.22
AC Ammeter RC310-1A20 AK2R1-A42 2 OFF · R · S · T 3 x 45° With 0.22
AC Ammeter RC310-1A3 AK2R1-A33 3 R · S · T 2 x 45° Without 0.25
AC Ammeter RC310-1A30 AK2R1-A43 3 OFF · R · S · T 3 x 45° With 0.25
Note: * For standard type legend plate. Other types can be manufactured by request.
■ Ratings
Series Rated Making and breaking capacity
thermal AC (inductive) DC (inductive)
current Voltage Make Break Voltage Make Break
(A) (V) (A) (A) (V) (A) (A)
NS387 15 110 30 3 24 60 60
220 30 3 110 15 15
440 20 2 220 5 5
550 20 2 440 2.5 2.5
RC310 10 110 37.5 7.5 24 37.5 7.5
220 37.5 7.5 110 37.5 1.3
440 37.5 2.5 220 37.5 0.45
550 37.5 1.5 440 37.5 0.15
■ Handle color (standard)
NS387: Black
RC310: Black
■ Special spanner (for NS387)
Use this spanner for installation or
replacement.
1. Type number
84
12.9 16
Note: Do not remove the wires connected. No. of contact blocks
2 3
L 51.5 63.5
A V
ø38
Max. 4.56 25
L 36
48sq.
60sq.
ø8
4–ø4.5
Ammeter Voltmeter Panel cutting
48sq.
RC310
No. of contact blocks
2 3 4
L 90 98 106
L
2 to 3 8.2
26.3
ø38
50sq.
62
62
30
2-ø4.5
ø15
blade-type switch and RC310 is a cam-type.
Both are compact in size and use
highly dependable silver contacts. FUJI
can also supply DC voltmeter type
switches in addition to these for AC use.

04/271
V~
S-T
off
I
S-T
14 9
OFF
• RC310 series
5 7
R•S
R•S
5 7
R•T
R•S
R•S
04
Panel Switches
NS387 and RC310
Instrument switches
13
14
9 10 5 6 1 2
16 15 12 11 8 7 4 3
V
T-R
R-S
R
S
T
V~
5 6 1 2
8 7 4 3
V
II
I
II
A~
S
A
T
R
5 6 1 2
8 7 4 3
R
K
K
S T
k k
L L
V~
V
T-R
R-S
R
S
T
13 10 5 6 1
12
4
2
16 15 11 8 7 3
A~
S
A
OFF
T
R
5
9 10
6 1 2
12 11 8 7 4 3
R
K
K
S T
k k
L L
A~
S
A
T
R
S T
R
K K
K
k k k
L L
9 10
12 11
56
87
1 2
4 3
A~
S
A
T
R
R
K K
K
S T
k k k
L L
13
14
16 15
9 10 56 1 2
3
12 11 8 7 4
OFF
R S T
6
2
8
1 3
4
T•R
V
V
S•R
R•T
T•R
S•T
T•R
S•T
V
V
R S T
6
2
8
1 3
4
S•R T•R
T•R
S•T
T•R
S•T
OFF
6
2
8
RC310-1A2
5 7
1 3
4
R S T R S T
T
A
A
R
S
R S T
6
2
8
5 7
1 3
4
R S T R S T
T
A
A
R
OFF
S
R S T
T
A
R
S
12 10
6
2
8
9 11
5 7
1 3
4
A R S T R S T
R S T
T
A
R
OFF
S
12 10
6
2
8
9 11
5 7
1 3
4
A R S T R S T
R S T
■ Wiring diagrams
Voltmeter changeover switches
• NS387 series
NS387/4V
NS387/2V
NS387/4V0
RC310-1V
RC310-1V0
Ammeter changeover switches
• NS387 series
NS387/2M
NS387/2M0
NS387/3M
NS387/4M
• RC310 series
RC310-1A20
RC310-1A3
RC310-1A30

04/272
SDO-0118M
SF-2024
NS387/C4+0mHD NS387/2+2mKD
8.2 26.3 4
Panel drilling
Panel Switches
NS387
Control switches
Panel switches for industrial
control switchboards
■Description
NS387 control switches are used on control
panels or consoles to operate H.V. circuit
breakers or disconnecting switches. These
switches are small in size, dependable and
take up little switchboard space. Since
they have a large current capacity they can
be applied to many types of control
circuits.
The movable blade has both an excellent
contact performance and a long service life.
Switches can be supplied in center spring
return for momentary action and
maintained versions, with 2, 3 and 4
positions. They can be fitted with H, K or
R-type standard FUJI handles. The H-type
is used as an ON-OFF switch to control
circuit breakers or as a disconnecting
switch. The K-type is mainly for regulation
use and the R-type is used for controlling
the power source. In addition to the
standard handles key-controlled handles
are also available.
Please refer to page 04/273 of this catalog
for typical contact arrangements of these
panel switches. We are in a position to
supply many other types of switches to
meet your particular application needs.
■ Technical data
Insulation resistance: Over 25MΩ at 500V DC
Dielectric strength: 2200V AC rms, 1 minute
Durability
Mechanical: 300,000 operations
Electrical: 100,000 operations at 220V AC 5A
Allowable ambient temperature: –5° to +40°C
■ Ratings
Contacts Rated Making and breaking capacity
thermal DC (inductive) [W] AC (inductive) [VA] *
current (A) 24V 110V 220V 440V 110V 220V 440V 550V
Standard contact 15 1440 1650 1100 1100 3300 6600 8800 11000
Residual contact 15 1440 1650 550 220 – – – –
Non-break contact 15 720 825 550 132 – – – –
Note: * When the operated equipment is AC electromagnet, breaking capacity is the above-mentioned 10% or
less the cacpacity of the stationary state to which the electromagnet is energized.
■ Dimensions, mm
With H, I, R, K, KP, KQ, KX, KY type handle
L
Panel thickness
2 to 3.2
Type No. of contact blocks
1 2 3 4 5 6
NS387/ 82 90 98 106 114 123
NS387S/ 82 90 98 106 114 123
NS387/C 82 90 98 106 114 139
NS387/A 82 90 98 106 114 123
NS387/D 82 90 98 106 114 123
Mass (kg) 0.4 0.43 0.47 0.5 0.54 0.57
Special spanner
Use this spanner for installation or replacement
30
30
50sq.
62
62
2-ø4.5
ø15
84
12.9 16
Notching device
Legend plate
Handle
Rosette
Contact
Bakelite cover
Specify the following (See page 04/273)
1. Type number
2. Letters or symbols to be printed on legend plate
3. Color of rosette (if you require other color but
black standard color)
4. Color of handle
5. Options if required

Note: The standard: Black (B).
04/273
0
0
0
04
Panel Switches
NS387
Control switches
Construction
Blank: Open type
C: With transparent cover
Basic type
Operation
C: Maintained, 2-position
A: Maintained, 3-position
Blank: Spring return, 3-position
Contact arrangement
Handle locking device
See page 04/274
Color of handle and rosette
B: Black
D: Dark green
Type of handle
See page 04/274
With or without of micro switch
Blank: Without
S1: With a micro switch
S2: With two micro switch
Note: Specify the embossed characters when ordering a model
equipped with a legend plate.
• Operation • Contact
Standard contact
Non-break contact
For clockwise rotation, terminals 1, 3, and 4
are conductive before the continuity of
terminals 1 and 4 is interrupted. After that,
only terminals 1 and 3 are conductive.
Note: Specify the type of handle
locking device when ordering a
model equipped with a micro
switch.
No. of
positions
2
3
4
(3)
(3)
(3)
Handle
position
Operation
angle
Code
C
A
D
Blank
F
E
1 2
1 2 3
2
1
3 4
A B
A B
A B
Spring /
manual
return
90°
45°
Operation
Maintained
Spring return
NS387 / 1 + 1 + 1m + 1m S1 H1 B L2
Contact
arrange-ment
Code Contact position Contact
(varies depending on operation)
Blank C A
No. of combinations
(varies depending on operation)
C A Blank
Contacts at right angles to the
operating handle (in parallel to the
operating handle only in the case
of the 4-position changeover type)
The above contacts
1 shifted clockwise by 45°
Non-interrupting contacts at right angles
to the operating handle (in parallel to
the operating handle only in the case of
the 4-position changeover type)
Code m is added after the number of blocks.
The above contacts 3 shifted
clockwise by 45°
Code m is added after the
number of blocks.
1 + 3 + 4
≤ 6-block
3 + 4
≤ 4-block
1 + 2 + 3
+ 4
≤ 6-block
3 + 4
≤ 6-block
1 + 2 + 3
+ 4
≤ 6-block
3 + 4
≤ 4-block
1 0–10
Blank,
1–10
0m–
6m
Blank,
1m–
6m
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Notes: • In each of the above contact forms, the symbol refers to the position of the operating handle.
• If no contacts are required, leave 2 and 4 blank and enter 0 for 1 and 3 .

04/274
8 9
H type I type K type R type KP type KQ type KX type KY type
13
H type R type W type S type P type K type D type
9.5
70
Panel Switches
NS387
Control switches
■ Operating handle
• Combination of rosette and handle
Rosette
For NS387
Handle
For NS387
For RC310
Type of handle (refer to 2. Shape of handle, table below)
Without micro switch:
H, I, K
KP1 – KP10
KQ1 – KQ10
KX1 – KX10
KY1 – KY10
R
Without micro switch:
P, S, D, W
With micro switch:
H, P, S, K, D, R, W
Notes:• With micro switch equipped, NS387 panel switch are provided with NS387-use rosette as standard, and with the handle for RC310-1 cam switch.
• The large handle (P, S, D, or W) for the RC310-1 is not compatible with any other handle.
• Types of handle locking
Code
Blank
Center spring return type Maintained type
Note: If a micro switch is equipped, it will be activated when the handle is pulled.
KP
KP 1 KP KP KP KP KP KP KP KP 10
KQ 1 KQ 11
22
2 2
33
33
4
KQ
KQ4 KQ KQ KQ KQ KQ KQ10
44
5 5
55
6 6
66
77
7 7
8
88
9
99
KX KX KX KX KX KX KX KX KX KX 10
KY KY KY KY KY KY KY KY KY KY 10
• Shape of handle
For
NS387
For
RC310
8.2 26.3
13
40
14 26.3 14
30
26.3 14
38
26.3
ø38
41
38
38
45.5
38
48.5
20 30
27.5 ø35
25 ø38 40 50
20 50
50 22 65 20
25
38
17
ø30
50 38
58
The handle can be turned without being locked.
The handle can be turned after being pulled, and the handle
stops at each notch when it is released.
The handle can be turned after being pulled, and when it is
released in any notch position, the handle will stop at that
notch position. Moreover, when the handle is pulled in any
notch position, the micro switch will be activated, and both
the micro switch and handle will be reset when the handle is
released. However, the handle cannot be switched to any
other notch while it is in the pulled condition.
In the case of the NS387, the handle can be turned after being pulled,
and the handle then returns to the center position automatically when it
is released. If the handle needs to be turned without being pulled, order
a model with no handle lock.
The RC310 handle can be turned without being locked.
With a handle for the RC310.
The handle can be turned after being pulled, and the handle then
returns to the center position automatically when it is released.
The handle can be turned without being pulled, and will return to the
center position automatically when it is released. The micro switch is
activated while the handle is pulled in the center position, and the
switch is reset when the handle is released. The handle, however, does
not turn left or right when it is pulled.
center position automatically when it is released. When the handle is
pulled in the left position, the lock mechanism will activate and no other
notch can be selected. In that case, the handle will automatically return
to the center position when it is pressed in the shaft direction.
center position automatically when it is released. The micro switch will
be activated when the handle is pulled in the center position, and the
handle will return when the handle is pressed in the shaft direction.
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
The handle can be turned after being pulled. When it is released, the
handle will automatically return to the center position in the pulled
condition. The handle will return when it is pressed in the shaft
direction.
–
–
–
38
45.5

NS387/2 + 0mHD • The handle can be turned after being pulled, and will return to the
04/275
Operation Type(example) Contact arrangement Description
Center
1 2 5 6
spring
return
4 3 8 7
1 2 5 6 9 1013 14
4 3 8 7 12 11 16 15
1 2 5 6
4 3 8 7
1 2 5 6
4 3 8 7
C
NO NC
C
NO NC
04
Panel Switches
NS387
Control switches
■ Assembled typical switches
For other than above, contact FUJI.
center position automatically when it is released.
NS387/2 + 2 + 0mHB • The handle can be turned after being pulled, and will return to the
NS387/1 + 1mHB • The handle can be turned after being pulled, and will return to the
NS387/2 + 0mS1B • RC310-1 handle, equipped with a rosette.
• Add L1 for the pull-and-turn type.
NS387/1 + 0mS1HDL2 • Provided with a micro switch, RC310-1 handle, and a rosette for the
NS387.
• The handle can be turned without being pulled, and will return to the
center position automatically when it is released. The micro switch will
be activated while the handle is pulled in the center position.
NS387/5 + 0mSBL3 • RC310-1 handle, equipped with the NS387 rosette.
• When the handle is pulled in the left position, it will be locked, and the
handle will automatically return to the center position when it is pressed
in the shaft direction.
NS387/1 + 0mS1H1BL4 • Equipped with a micro switch, RC310-1 handle, and a rosette for the
NS387.
• The handle can be turned after being pulled, and will return to the
center position automatically when it is released, but the handle
remains in the pulled condition. The handle will be reset when it is
pressed.
• The micro switch will be activated while the handle is pulled.
Maintained
2-position
NS387/C3 + 1mKB
NS387/C6 + 0mW1D • RC310-1 cam switch handle, equipped with a rosette.
NS387/A6 + 0mRB
NS387/A2 + 0mH1B • RC310-1 cam switch handle, equipped with a rosette.
NS387/A3 + 3 + 0mS1KDL2 • RC310-1 cam switch handle, equipped with the NS387 rosette.
• The handle can be turned left or right without being pulled. The
micro switch will be activated while the handle is pulled.
Maintained
3-position
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
1
2
1
2
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
1 2
4 3
1 2 5 6 9 1013 1417 18
4 3 8 712 11 16 15 20 19
1 2
4 3
1 2 5 6 9 1013 14
4 3 8 7 12 11 16 15
1 2 5 6 9 1013 1417 18 21 22
4 3 8 712 11 16 1520 19 24 23
1 2 5 69 1013 14 17 18 21 22
4 3 8 712 11 16 15 20 19 24 23
1 2 5 6
4 3 8 7
1 2 5 6 9 1013 1417 1821 22
4 3 8 7 12 11 16 15 20 19 24 23
C
NO NC
–
–

04/276
Terminal Blocks
General Information
■ Description
FUJI can supply a variety of terminal
blocks for switchboard or switchgear use.
FUJI terminal blocks and end barriers are
strongly constructed from a phenol resin
and have adequate creepage distance
and excellent insulation characteristics.
Good connections are assured by
convenient screw terminals and
solderless box lugs. All terminal blocks
are designed to carry their rated
amperage without danger of overheating.
FUJI terminal blocks are available in a
variety of types, some of which are
illustrated on this page.
AYBN type is simple to assemble and is
designed to speed up installation. It is
available in up to 12 poles and 600 Amps
versions.
AYBS type terminal blocks are made
from the highest quality phenol resin and
resists tracking. Current ratings are
available up to 115 Amps and 12 poles.
The customer is required to assemble
the channel-mounted type himself. The
modular construction allows the number
of blocks in a channel to be increased or
decreased very easily.
In addition we can also supply the LT4D
type which is provided with an isolating
switch, and SKT type power terminal
blocks, which are used in motor circuits,
power source and similar circuits.
Testing terminals type LT5 for CT, VT
secondary circuits are also available.
Type LT2E
Rail mounted type terminal blocks
600 volts 22 to 600 Amps
■ Further information: See page 04/283.
Type AYBN
General purpose terminal blocks
600 Volts 15 to 600 Amps
Type AYBS
High quality terminal blocks
Type LT4D
Rail mounted terminal blocks with isolating switch
660 Volts 20 Amps
Type SKT
Terminal block with pressure solderless box lug type
connector on one side and screw type connector on
the other.
Type LT5
Testing terminal and link for VT and CT circuit
250 Volts AC/DC 30 Amps
■ Wire gauge and square
The following table shows the relationship
between B.W.G., A.W.G. wire gauge and mm2
cross-sections. In this catalog wire sizes are
quoted in mm2. Please use this table for
reference.
SB-232 SB-277
SB-279 SB-279
AF01-220
Gauge Square
B.W.G. A.W.G. mm2
4/0 107.2
4/0 104.2
3/0 91.6
3/0 85.2
2/0 73.2
2/0 67.5
0 58.6
0 53.5
1 45.6
1 42.4
2 40.9
3 34.0
2 33.6
4 28.7
3 26.7
5 24.5
4 21.2
6 20.9
5 16.8
7 16.4
8 13.8
6 13.3
9 11.1
7 10.5
10 9.1
8 8.3
11 7.3
Gauge Square
B.W.G. A.W.G. mm2
9 6.6
12 6.0
10 5.3
13 4.6
11 4.2
14 3.5
12 3.3
15 13 2.63
16 2.14
14 2.08
17 1.71
15 1.65
16 1.32
18 1.22
17 1.03
19 0.89
18 0.81
19 0.66
20 0.62
21 20 0.52
21 0.41
22 0.40
22 0.32
23 0.32
23 0.26
24 0.25
24 0.20
B.W.G. Birminghan Wire Gauge
A.W.G. American Wire Gauge
Type AYBN
General purpose terminal blocks

04/277
AYBN011-1
With screw type connectors,
marking strip and cover
SB-277
AYBN043-1
AYBN204-5
04
Terminal Blocks
Type AYBN
General purpose terminal blocks 600 Volts
Typical illustration and description Amps No. of With spring washer With turtle-shaped washer
poles Type Ordering code Type Ordering code
15 3 AYBN013-5 LT1N-0203B AYBN013-1 LT1N-0203A
4 AYBN014-5 LT1N-0204B AYBN014-1 LT1N-0204A
Wire size: Max. 5.5mm2 25 3 AYBN023-5 LT1N-0503B AYBN023-1 LT1N-0503A
Terminal screw: M4 4 AYBN024-5 LT1N-0504B AYBN024-1 LT1N-0504A
Wire size: Max. 14mm2 40 3 AYBN043-5 LT1N-1403B AYBN043-1 LT1N-1403A
Wire size: Max. 22mm2 60 3 AYBN063-5 LT1N-2203B AYBN063-1 LT1N-2203A
Wire size: Max. 60mm2 150 3 – AYBN103-5 *1 LT1N-6003B
Terminal screw: M8 4 – AYBN104-5 *1 LT1N-6004B
Wire size: Max. 100mm2 200 3 – AYBN203-5 *2 LT1N-1X03B
Terminal screw: M10 4 – AYBN204-5 *2 LT1N-1X04B
Terminal screw: M12 4 – AYBN404-5 *2 LT1N-2X04B
Terminal screw: M16
Notes: *1 Cross recessed pan head screw type.
*2 Hexagonal bolt
SB-277
AYBN026-1
SB-232
SB-277
SG-292 AYBN601-5
Wire size: Max. 2mm2
Terminal screw: M3.5

04/278
Mass: 1040g
Terminal Blocks
Type AYBN
■ Dimensions, mm
15A, 25A Terminal blocks
Type No. A B C D E F G H Mass
of
poles (g)
AYBN013-1, -5 3 45 37 6.9 9 28 M3.5 23.8 32 20
AYBN014-1, -5 4 54 46 6.9 9 28 M3.5 23.8 32 30
AYBN016-1, -5 6 72 64 6.9 9 28 M3.5 23.8 32 40
AYBN018-1, -5 8 90 82 6.9 9 28 M3.5 23.8 32 50
AYBN010-1, -5 10 108 100 6.9 9 28 M3.5 23.8 32 60
AYBN011-1, -5 12 126 118 6.9 9 28 M3.5 23.8 32 75
AYBN023-1, -5 3 52.5 44.5 9.9 11.5 30 M4 26.8 36 35
AYBN024-1, -5 4 64 56 9.9 11.5 30 M4 26.8 36 40
AYBN026-1, -5 6 87 79 9.9 11.5 30 M4 26.8 36 60
AYBN028-1, -5 8 110 102 9.9 11.5 30 M4 26.8 36 80
AYBN020-1, -5 10 133 125 9.9 11.5 30 M4 26.8 36 95
AYBN021-1, -5 12 156 148 9.9 11.5 30 M4 26.8 36 115
Type No. A B C D E F H L Mass
of
poles (g)
AYBN043-1, -5 3 67 59 12.4 16 40 31.8 45 φ4.5 80
AYBN044-1, -5 4 83 75 12.4 16 40 31.8 45 φ4.5 110
AYBN063-1, -5 3 90 78 16.9 20 52 39 60 φ6 160
AYBN064-1, -5 4 113 101 16.9 20 52 39 60 φ6 210
1. Ordering code or type number
Type No. A B C D E F H L Mass
of
poles (g)
AYBN103-5 3 85 79 23 27 51 M8 72 φ6 390
AYBN104-5 4 112 79 23 27 51 M8 99 φ6 510
AYBN203-5 3 110 90 29.7 35 63 M10 96 φ7 740
AYBN204-5 4 145 90 29.7 35 63 M10 131 φ7 970
400A Terminal blocks
Type No. A B C D E F G H Mass
of
poles (g)
AYBN403-5 3 175 120 45 55 82 M12 9.5 156 1670
AYBN404-5 4 230 120 45 55 82 M12 9.5 211 2170
600A Terminal blocks
■ Technical data
Insulation resistance: Over 1 0 0 M Ω at 500V DC
Dielectric strength: 2500V AC rms. 1 minute

04/279
Wire size: Max. 5.5mm2
Terminal screw: M4
04
Terminal Blocks
Type AYBS
High quality terminal blocks 600 Volts
Typical illustration and description Volts Amps No. of With spring washer With turtle-shaped washer
poles Type Ordering code Type Ordering code
600 49 6 AYBS026-5 LT1S-0506B AYBS026-1 LT1S-0506A
12 AYBS021-5 LT1S-0512B AYBS021-1 LT1S-0512A
Terminal screw: M5
Terminal screw: M6
■ Dimensions, mm
Type No. A B C D E F K Mass
of
poles (g)
AYBS026-1, -5 6 101 91 40 10 13 28 M4 120(110)*
AYBS021-1, -5 12 179 169 40 10 13 28 M4 220
AYBS043-1, -5 3 72 60.5 46 12.5 15.5 32 M5 110
AYBS044-1, -5 4 88 76 46 12.5 15.5 32 M5 130
AYBS041-1, -5 12 212 200 46 12.5 15.5 32 M5 300
AYBS063-1, -5 3 89 77 60 17 21 35.5 M6 190
AYBS064-1, -5 4 110 98 60 17 21 35.5 M6 240
* For AYBS026-5 type
■ Technical data
Dielectric strength: 2500V AC rms 1 minute
–20° to +60°C (at 70% ratings)
AYBS021-1
SB-244
AYBS044-1
SB-241
AYBS064-1
SB-239

04/280
PULL
OFF
ON
PUSH
■ Dimensions, mm
• Terminal block section LT4D
• Mounting rail LT9E-R1
mass: 200g
• Marking strip sheet LT9D-M1
mass: 2g
35
M
L
9.1
*9.7
11
4.5
Terminal Blocks
Type LT4D
900
10
Channel mounted type terminal blocks with isolating switch
660 Volts 20 Amps
Wire size: Maximum 5 . 5 m m 2
Terminal screw: M4
These blocks are provided with isolating switches.
When opening the control circuit tentatively for testing or
inspection purposes please operate the switch knob. If the
leads of an ammeter are connected to both ends of the terminal
block and then open the switch the ammeter will then be
connected in series and this will allow measurement.
Warning
Do not use this switch for secondary CT circuits.
Incorrect operation could be dangerous.
Illustration Description Type Minimum
quantity
per order
LT4D-020Y 100 pcs
LT9D-E1 50 pcs
LT9E-T2 50 pcs
LT9E-R1 1 pcs
LT9D-M1 1 sheets
(900mm)
Terminal block
section with
isolating switch
End barrier
End clamp kit
Mounting rail
Marking strip
sheet
1. Type number
2. Quantity: Specify in minimum quantity or multiples of minimum
quantity per order.
Examples: minimum quantity per order: 20 pcs.
To order, 20 pcs, 40 pcs, 60 pcs,
..., 100 pcs, etc.
Should be specified.
■ Technical data
Dielectric strength: 2500V AC rms. 1 minute
11
46.0
55.5
51
46 3
45
20
25
28.7
10
10 10
4.5
mass: 50g
• End clamp kit LT9E-T2
mass: 12g
• Assembled LT4D-020Y-M:
Mounting hole pitch
L : Full length
• End barrier LT9D-E1
mass: 5g
No. of M L No. of M L
poles poles
8 132 140 22 292 300
10 152 172 24 312 320
12 172 180 30 372 380
40 492 500
14 192 200
16 232 240 50 592 600
18 252 260 85 992 1000
272 280
Note: 1 to 85 poles can also be assembled except those listed above.
10
9 61.5
1
Name
plate
46
thickness :0.5mm
(1m)

(8AWG)
(6AWG)
(4AWG)
04/281
04
Terminal Blocks
Type SKT
With transparent cover power terminal blocks
Wire size: 2 to 100 mm2
• Transparent terminal cover allows the wiring configuration to
be checked externally.
• Slotted hexagon head bolts that can be tightened with
screwdrivers or box wrenches are used for the terminals.
• The line side and load side are provided with hinged
terminal covers to ensure safety and allow easier
maintenance and inspections.
• cUL approved, file No. E45457
SKT14A-3C to SKT100A-3C only.
SKT14A-3C
AF01-220
■ Types and ratings
■ Specifications ■Tightening torque
Type
SKT14A-3C
SKT38A-3C
SKT60A-3C
SKT100A-3C
SKT14A-3CG
SKT38A-3CG
SKT60A-3CG
SKT100A-3CG
Wire size
(mm2)
2 to 14
2 to 38
14 to 60
30 to 100
2 to 14
2 to 38
14 to 60
30 to 100
Mass
(g)
300
310
450
730
440
450
690
1120
Pole
3
3 + 1 (Earth terminal)
Rated insulation
voltage (V AC)
600
600
Rated continuous
current (A)
50
100
150
200
50
100
150
200
Withstand voltage
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Flammability
Temperature rise
2500V AC 1minute
-20 to +55°C
85%RH or less
UL94V-2 (Cover), UL94V-0 (Frame)
45K or less (JIS C 2811)
Type
SKT14A-3C
SKT14A-3CG
SKT38A-3C
SKT38A-3CG
SKT60A-3C
SKT60A-3CG
SKT100A-3C
SKT100A-3CG
Recommended tightening
torque (N•m)
Load side
11.5–15.5
(M8)
11.5–15.5
(M8)
11.5–15.5
(M8)
23–31
(M10)
Cable pull-out (UL486A)
min. force (N)
Min. cable
222
(14AWG)
222
(14AWG)
311
(12AWG)
311
(12AWG)
Max. cable
400
445
623
801
(2AWG)
Line side
5.1–6.5
(M6)
5.1–6.5
(M6)
11.5–15.5
(M8)
23–31
(M10)
• Terminal blocks
• Connectors
Rated continuous current
(A)
50
100
150
200
Type
SKT14-S
SKT38-S
SKT60-S
SKT100-S
Wire size
(mm2 )
2 to 14
2 to 38
14 to 60
30 to 100
Mass
(g )
52
55
80
135
Rated voltage
(V AC)
600
1. Type number

65
24
29.5
80
17 26
6
27.8
25 36
04/282
2-ø4.5
32.5
24
M10
M8 9 10 ø5.3
17 12
Terminal Blocks
Type SKT
■ Dimensions, mm
• Terminal block
SKT14A-3C (Without earth terminal)
SKT14A-3CG (With earth terminal)
60
94
25 25
17.5
67
75
M6
2-ø4.5
32.5
M8
80
Earth terminal
M8
2-ø5.5
• Connector
SKT14-S SKT38-S SKT60-S
Earth terminal
94
M6
M8
67
17.5
25 25
60
29.5
65
75
30 30
23
80
90
24
69
67
29.5
34
M8
115
Earth terminal
90.5
89
24
29.5
79
35 35
2-ø6.5
115.5
29
105
43
M10
Earth terminal
135
95
53
M6 8
9 ø4.3
17.2
10
(26) (27)
M8
41.6max
33.3
14 10.3
15
4
(8.4)
26.1
53
9 ø4.3
M8
43.4max
33.3
17.2
17 26
M6 8
4 14 10.3
15
10 (26) (27)
(8.4)
27.9
38.1
50.4 max.
18.8
M8
22.8
57
19 29
11.6
(29) (28)
(11.8)
33.1
4
SKT100-S
71.5
M10
61.9 max.
46.2
15
23
6.2
4
20
2-ø4.5
M10 12 12
14.6
(32) (27.5)
(ø13)
(13.4)
38.2
7

04/283
■ Features
• Any number of poles can be assembled on a 35mm DIN rail.
• A lineup of 10 models supporting screw sizes from M3.5 to
M16 and a maximum current of 600A is available.
• Our standard models are approved by UL, CSA, and TÜV.
• The molded material conforms to the UL standard for self-extinguishing
materials (UL94V-0).
• Mounting is performed by simply pressing the block down
onto the rail (except for models LT2E-200 to 600).
04
Terminal Blocks
Type LT2E
■ Specifications
Rated thermal Terminal Applicable wire size Terminal block End barrier Cover Legend plate End clamp Rail
current (A) screw and maximum current
22 M3.5 1.25mm2-16A LT2E-020 LT9E-E1 LT9E-C1 LT9E-M1 LT9E-T1 LT9E-R1
2mm2-22A LT9E-R2
30 M4 1.25mm2-16A LT2E-030 LT9E-E2 LT9E -C2
2mm2-22A
3.5mm2-30A
40 M4 3.5mm2-30A LT2E-040 LT9E-E3
5.5mm2-40A
75 M5 5.5mm2-40A LT2E-080 LT9E-E4 LT9E-C3
8mm2-50A
14mm2-75A
95 M6 8mm2-50A LT2E-090 LT9E-E5 LT9E-C4
14mm2-75A
22mm2-95A
38mm2-130A
60mm2-160A
200 M10 38mm2-130A LT2E-200 LT9E-E7 LT9E-C6 LT9E-M3 LT9E-T2
60mm2-160A (Standard provided) (Standard provided)
100mm2-200A LT9E-C7
100mm2-240A (Standard provided)
150mm2-300A LT9E-C9
200mm2-400A LT9E-C11
325mm2-600A LT9E-C13

04/284
Terminal screw M3.5×8
7
3.5min.
Terminal screw M4×10
8.6
39 9.5
18
12.2
5min.
Terminal Blocks
Type LT2E
■ Performance
Rated insulation voltage 600V
Ambient operating conditions Temperature -25 to 60°C
(with no icing or condensation)
Relative humidity 45% to 85%
Temperature rise Temperature rise in conducting
metal is less than 35K.
Insulation resistance 200MΩ between charged parts, and
between charged parts and the
metal mounting plate
(Measured at 500V DC megger.)
Dielectric strength 2,500V AC (1 min)
Applicable standards Conforms to JIS C 2811
■ Material
Main body PPE (modified polyphenylene ether resin)
(black) UL94V-0
Conductive plate C2680R (Ni-plated)
Terminal screws SWRM (Zn-plated)
Side panel PPE (modified polyphenylene ether resin)
(black) UL94V-0
Cover PC (translucent polycarbonate resin) UL94V-0
Legend plate PVC (white)
■ Dimensions, mm
● Terminal blocks
LT2E-020 41
8
36
16
10.5
32.5
10
6.9max.
3.5min. 4.7max.
Applicable crimp terminal
φ
41
10
39
18
12
35.5
10
8.5max.
6min. 5.7max.
4min.
φ
LT2E-030
41
11
12
35.5
10
9.5max.
6min. 5.7max.
4min.
φ
LT2E-040
14
46
21
14
40
10
12.1max.
7.3min. 7.2max.
φ
LT2E-080

04/285
● Terminal blocks
04
Terminal Blocks
Type LT2E
64
23
18.5
48.5
10
17.2
19
17.1max.
6min.
10.5min. 9max.
φ
LT2E-090
74
30
19.5
51
10
22.3
25
22.2max.
8min.
12min. 12max.
φ
LT2E-150
86
40
39
29
36
57
29max.
13min. 14max.
10min.
φ
LT2E-200
47
37
97
48
41
66
37max.
18max.
10min.
13.5min.
φ
LT2E-300
110
56
46
74
46max.
58
46 Terminal screw M12×30
22max.
12min.
15min.
φ
LT2E-400
(Cover, supplied with a legend plate)
124
63
66
52
84
51
52max.
25.5max.
16min.
18.5min.
φ
LT2E-600

● End barriers
LT9E-E1 LT9E-E2 LT9E-E3 LT9E-E4
LT9E-E5 LT9E-E6 LT9E-E7
04/286
Sold in units of 100. Sold in units of 100. Sold in units of 100. Sold in units of 50.
Sold in units of 20. Sold in units of 10. Sold in units of 1.
Length: 1m
Sold in units of 20.
Terminal Blocks
Type LT2E
● Covers
LT9E-C1 LT9E-C2 LT9E-C3 LT9E-C4
Length: 1m
Length: 1m
LT9E-C5 LT9E-C6 LT9E-C7 LT9E-C8
Standard cover Special cover Standard cover
(Standard provided) (Standard provided)
LT9E-C9 LT9E-C10 LT9E-C11 LT9E-C12 LT9E-C13
Special cover Standard cover Special cover Standard cover Special cover
(Standard provided) (Standard provided)
Length: 1m
Length: 1m
Sold in units of 20. Sold in units of 1. Sold in units of 1. Sold in units of 1.
Sold in units of 1. Sold in units of 1. Sold in units of 1. Sold in units of 1. Sold in units of 1.
● Legend plates
LT9E-M1 LT9E-M3
Dimensions
(0.5t×10W×1200L)
Sold in units of 50
Dimensions
(0.5t×12W×900L)
Sold in units of 50
Material: PVC Material: PVC

35
25
30
Sold in units
100
50
International
standards
UL approved
CSA approved
TUV approved
04/287
● End clamps ● Mounting rails
LT9E-T1 LT9E-T2 LT9E-R1
45
38 8.5
12
18
3.5
45 10
20
28.7
25
Sold in units of 100. Sold in units of 50.
Type Standard Rated insulation
voltage (V)
E45457
109308-M-001
R9551146
E45457
109308-M-001
R9551147
E45457
109308-M-001
R9551148
E45457
109308-M-001
J9551159
E45457
109308-M-001
J9551160
E45457
109308-M-001
J9551161
E45457
109308-M-001
J9551162
E45457
109308-M-001
J9551163
E45457
109308-M-001
J9551164
E45457
109308-M-001
J9551165
04
Terminal Blocks
Type LT2E
■ Application to products satisfying international standards
Dielectric strength: 2,200V AC for 1 min.
Operating temperature range: -25 to 60°C
LT2E-020
LT2E-030
LT2E-040
LT2E-080
LT2E-090
LT2E-150
LT2E-200
LT2E-300
LT2E-400
LT2E-600
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
UL
CSA
TÜV
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
660
600
660
600
660
600
660
LT9E-R2
Material: aluminum A6063
Type
LT9E-R1
LT9E-R2
Rated continuous
current (A)
20
20
22
30
30
30
40
40
40
75
75
75
95
95
95
150
150
160
200
200
200
300
300
300
400
400
400
550
550
600
B C
A
10
A
4.5
B
10
C
10
Length
1000mm
2000mm
Applicable wire size for stranded
wires (AWG)
20–14
20–14
20–14
18–12
18–12
18–12
18–10
18–10
18–10
10–6
10–6
12–6
8–4
8–4
10–4
4–2/0
4–2/0
6–2/0
2–4/0
2–4/0
2–250
2/0–300
2/0–300
1/0–300
4/0–350
4/0–350
3/0–500
300–600
300–600
250–600
:
Note: The values in the above table are for when strandard wires and crimp terminals are used for connection. Use the terminal block together with the crimp terminals
and wires approved for the desired standard.

04/288
LT95S – B1
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd./D C Catalog
Testing Terminals
Type LT5
V.
V.
Note: S.R.: Series resistor
H.F.: H.V. fuse
V.T.: Voltage transformer
( ): Indicates the quantity of
terminals or links used
at this circuit.
12
50mm or more 50mm or more
12
21
Ø19
28 31.7
Ø12
21
Ø19
43 31.7
Ø12
5
20
1
9
18
40
56
5
20
16
18 2 1
40
47.2
Testing terminals for VT, CT circuit –
For panel mounting
250 Volts AC or DC, 30 Amps
Wire size: Maximum 8 m m 2
These terminals are used in VT and CT
secondary circuits.
These are used to test protective relays
or meters or for carrying out calibration.
2. Quantity: One pack (10 pcs) is
minimum.
■ Technical data
Insulation resistance: Over 100MΩ at
500V DC
Dielectric strength: 2000V AC rms.
1 minute
■ Applications
VT circuit
CT circuit
Note: C.T.: Current transformer
( ): Indicates the quantity of
terminals or links used at
this circuit.
Illustration Description Etched Type
letters
(Standard)
VT circuit U LT5S-B2
Black V LT5S-B3
W LT5S-B4
O LT5S-B1
– LT5S-B
CT circuit R LT5D-B5
Black S LT5D-B6
T LT5D-B7
O LT5D-B1
– LT5D-B
Link, black LT95S-B1
Link, black (small type) LT95S-B2
SDO-0095M
SB-260
Q-482
SDO-0099M
■ Dimensions, mm
LT5S – for VT circuits Mass: 30g
LT5D – for CT circuits Mass: 50g
LT95S – Link
Mass: 10g
LT95S – B2

04/289
Ring selection type pushbutton switches
Command Series
CCC approved
04
CCC approved
AR22/DR22 and AD30/DR30 series
Bezel Operator Type
AR22 AR30
Momentary action Alternate action Momentary action Alternate action
(Turn-reset for V5R) (Turn-reset for V5R)
Round bezel Flush round head AR22F0R AR22F5R AR30F0R AR30F5R
Extended round head AR22E0R AR22E5R AR30E0R AR30E5R
Flush round head (symbol mark type) AR22FAR AR22FBR AR30FAR AR30FBR
Extended round head (symbol mark type) AR22EAR AR22EBR AR30EAR AR30EBR
Extended with half guard AR22G0R AR22G5R AR30G0R AR30G5R
Extended with full guard (24mm dia.) AR22G3R AR22G8R AR30G1R AR30G6R
Flush with full guard (24mm dia.) AR22G2R – – –
Mushroom head with full guard (40mm dia.) AR22M3R – AR30M3R AR30M8R
Mushroom head with full guard (35mm dia. metal nut)– – AR30GSR –
Mushroom head (29mm dia.) AR22M4R AR22M9R AR30M4R –
Mushroom head (40mm dia.) AR22M0R AR22M5R AR30M0R AR30M5R
Giant head – – AR30B0R –
Giant head with guard – – AR30B1R –
Giant head with full guard – – AR30B2R –
Giant head with full guard – – AR30B3R –
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia, with white arrow) – AR22V5R – AR30V5R
Square bezel Flush square head AR22F0S AR22F5S – –
Extended square head AR22E0S AR22E5S – –
Flush round head AR22F0Y AR22F5Y – –
Extended round head AR22E0Y AR22E5Y – –
Mushroom head AR22M4Y – – –
Certificate No. 2003010305063372 2003010305063384
Note: Certified contact of AR22 type: Momentary action: within 6 contacts
Alternate action : within 4 contacts
Certified contact of AR30 type: Momentary action: within 8 contacts
Alternate action : within 4 contacts
Pushbutton switches
Bezel Operator Type
AR22 AR30
Round bezel With selector ring AR22S1R AR30S1R
AR22S2R AR30S2R
AR22S3R AR30S3R
AR22S6R AR30S6R
Certificate No. 2003010305063372 2003010305063384
Note: Certified contact: 2NO+2NC (S2R: 2NO is also certified)
Bezel Operator Type
AR22 AR30
With white arrow No white arrow With white arrow No white arrow
(soft-touch) (soft-touch)
Round bezel Push-lock, turn-reset (29mm dia.) AR22VSR AR22V4R – –
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.) AR22V0R AR22V2R AR30V0R AR30V2R
Push-lock, turn-reset (65mm dia.) – – AR30V1R –
Key-release push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.) – AR22V7R – –
Push-look, pull-reset (35mm dia.) – AR22Q2R – AR30Q2R
Unibody push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.) AR22VGE – – –
Certificate No. 2003010305063372 (except for AR22VGE) 2003010305063384
2005010305156646 (for AR22VGE)
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NC, 1NO+1NC, 2NC, 3NC, 2NO+2NC, 4NC (except for Q2R, VGE type)
• Certified contact of Q2R, VGE type: 1NC, 1NO+1NC and 2NC only
• Certified button color: red (R) only

Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switches
04/290
· Contact
Without transformer
Momentary action: within 6 contacts
Alternate action: within 3 contacts
With transformer
Command Series
CCC approved
Bezel Operator Type
AR22 AR30
Momentary Alternate Momentary Alternate
Round bezel Flush round head AR22F0L AR22F5L – –
Extended round head AR22E0L AR22E5L AR30E0L AR30E5L
Mushroom head (29mm dia.) AR22M4L AR22M9L – –
Mushroom head (40mm dia.) AR22M0L AR22M5L – –
Extended with transparent full guard (24mm dia.) AR22G4L AR22G9L AR30G4L AR30G9L
Extended with full guard (24mm dia. with openings) AR22G2L AR22G7L AR30G2L AR30G7L
Extended with full guard (24mm dia.) AR22G1L AR22G6L AR30G3L AR30G8L
Push-lock, turn-reset – – – AR30V5L
(40mm dia. with white arrow)
Square bezel Flush square head AR22F0M AR22F5M – –
Extended square head AR22E0M AR22E5M – –
Flush round head AR22F0P AR22F5P – –
Extended round head AR22E0P AR22E5P – –
Mushroom head AR22M4P – – –
Certificate No. 2003010305063372 2003010305063384
Specifications · Contact
Without transformer
With transformer
· Color of button
Green, red, white, yellow, orange, blue
· Light source
LED lamp, incandescent lamp
· Operating voltage of lamp
Without transformer
LED: 6V AC, 6V DC, 12V AC/DC
Incandescent lamp: 5.5V AC/DC, 20V AC/DC
LED, incandescent lamp: 15V AC/DC, 24V AC/DC
With transformer
LED, incandescent lamp: 100-110V AC, 115-127V AC, 200-220V AC,
230-254V AC, 350-380V AC, 400-440V AC,
480V AC, 500-550V AC
Illuminated pushbutton switches
Bezel Operator Type
AR22 AR30
With white arrow No white arrow With white arrow No white arrow
(soft-touch) (soft-touch)
Round bezel Push-lock, turn-reset (29mm dia.) AR22VSL – – –
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.) AR22V0L AR22V2L AR30V0L AR30V2L
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. transparent in all colors) AR22VDL AR22VAL – –
Unibody push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.) AR22VGF – – –
Certificate No. 2003010305063372 (except for AR22VGF) 2003010305063384
2005010305156646 (for AR22VGF)
Notes: • Certified contact without transformer: 1NC, 1NO+1NC, 2NC, 3NC (except for VGF type)
• Certified contact with transformer: 1NC, 1NO+1NC, 2NC (except for VGF type)
• Certified contact of VGF type: 1NC, 1NO+1NC and 2NC only,
• Certified lamp voltage of VGF type: LED lamp: 24V AC/DC, neon lamp: 110, 120, 220, 240V AC

04/291
Selector switches
Bezel Operator Type
Round bezel Knob AR22PR AR22PCR AR30PR AR30PCR
Square bezel Knob AR22PY AR22PCY – –
Certificate No. 2003010305063372 2003010305063384
Note: Certified contact of AR22 type: Mainted: within 6 conrtacts
Certified contact of AR30 type: Momentary action: within 8 conrtacts
Pilot lights
Lever AR22WR AR22WCR AR30WR AR30WCR
Cylindrical knob AR22RR AR22RCR – –
Key AR22JR AR22JCR AR30JR AR30JCR
Key (long durability) AR22JAR – AR30JAR –
Lever AR22WY AR22WCY – –
Cylindrical knob AR22RY AR22RCY – –
Key AR22JY AR22JCY – –
Control type, spring return and spring / manurl return: within 4 contacts
Control type, spring return and spring / manurl return: within 4 contacts
Item with degree of protection IP2X (IP20)
AR22 AR30
Standard type Control type Standard type Control type
Command Series
CCC approved
04
Bezel Operator Type
AR22 AR30
Standard type Standard type
Round bezel Knob AR22PL AR30PL
Square bezel Knob AR22PP –
Certificate No. 2003010305063372 2003010305063384
Notes: • Certified contact of AR22 type :
Without transformer
Maintained : within 4 contacts
Spring return and spring / manual return: within 3 contacts
With transformer
• Certified contact of AR30 type :
Without transformer
With transformer
Bezel Lens Type
DR22 DR30
Round bezel Dome DR22D0L DR30D0L
Extended round DR22E3L DR30E3L
Faceted DR22K0L DR30K0L
Square bezel Flush square DR22F3M –
Flush square (Transparent lens) DR22F4M DR30F4M
Flush square (12mm high frame) DR22F5M –
Extended square DR22E3M –
Flush rectangular DR22E3N –
Flush rectangular (Transparent lens) – DR30F4N
Flush square large type (Transparent lens) – DR30M4M
Extended round DR22E3P –
Certificate No. 2003010305063383 2003010305063487
Notes: • Certified lamp: both LED and incandescent lamp
• Certified transformer type: standard and short-body
• Except for with resistor/resistor unit
Type Certificate No.
AR22 ZB 2003010305063372
AR30 ZB 2003010305063384
DR22 ZB 2003010305063383
DR30 ZB 2003010305063487
Notes: • Certified for all types listed on the table in page 04/289 to 04/291
except for unibody push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia.) types of emergency
stop illuminated pushbutton switches and short-body transformer of
pilot light.
• The terminal section of standard emergency stop illuminated pushbutton
switches has degree of protection, IP2X.

Pushbutton switches
Ring selection type pushbutton switches
Operator Type
Push-lock, turn-reset (ø32) AH165-V5
Push-lock, turn-reset (ø40) AH165-V6
Certificate No. 2003010305071068
04/292
Command Series
CCC approved
AH164, 165, 165-2 series
Operator Type
AH164 AH165 AH165-2
Momentary action Alternate action Momentary action Alternate action Momentary action Alternate action
(Turn-reset (Turn-reset
for V, V1) for 2V, 2YV)
Flush round head – – – – AH165-2F AH165-2F5
Extended round head AH164-E AH164-E5 AH165-E AH165-E5 AH165-2E AH165-2E5
Extended square head – – – – AH165-2SE AH165-2SE5
Extended square concave head – – – – AH165-2SCE AH165-2SCE5
Flush square head AH164-SF AH164-SF5 AH165-SF AH165-SF5 AH165-2SF AH165-2SF5
Flush rectangular head AH164-TF AH164-TF5 AH165-TF AH165-TF5 – –
Flush square head with guard AH164-SGF AH164-SGF5 AH165-SGF AH165-SGF5 – –
Flush rectangular head AH164-TGF AH164-TGF5 AH165-TGF AH165-TGF5 – –
with guard
Mushroom head (round bezel) – – – – AH165-2M –
Mushroom head (square bezel) – – – – AH165-2YM –
Mushroom head AH164-M AH164-M5 AH165-M AH165-M5 – –
Convex square head AH164-SM AH164-SM5 AH165-SM AH165-SM5 – –
Convex rectangular head AH164-TM AH164-TM5 AH165-TM AH165-TM5 – –
Push-locked (round bezel) – – – AH165-V – AH165-2V
Push-locked large type – – – AH165-V1 – –
Push-locked (square bezel) – – – – – AH165-2YV
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NO+1NC, 2NO+2NC, 3NO+3NC. AH165-V and -V1: 1NC and 2NC only.
• Certified button color: all in manufactured range of corresponding type. AH165-V and -V1: red (R) only.
• Certified terminal shape: for soldering and tab, and for wrapping. AH165-V and -V1: soldering and tab only.
Operator Type
AH165-2
With selector ring (round bezel) AH165-2S2
With selector ring (square bezel) AH165-2YS2
Note: Certified contact: 2NO+2NC
AH165
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NC and 2NC only
• Certified terminal shape: soldering and tab only

AH164 AH165 AH165-2
Momentary action Alternate action Momentary action Alternate action Momentary action Alternate action
• Certified operating lamp voltage: 6, 12 and 24V DC (LED)/ 5, 12, 15
and 24V AC/DC (incandescent lamp)
04/293
Operator Type
Selector switches (Standard)
Selector switches (Direct opening action)
Pilot lights
Command Series
CCC approved
04
Lens Type
Operator Type
knob (round bezel) AH165-2PL
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NO+1NC, 2NO+2NC
AH164 AH165 AH165-2
Flush round – – AH165-2Z
Extended round AH164-Z AH165-Z AH165-2ZE
Extended square – – AH165-2SZE
Flush square AH164-ZS AH165-ZS AH165-2SZ
Flush rectangular AH164-ZT AH165-ZT –
Notes: • Certified lamp: LED, incandescent lamp and neon
• Certified operating lamp voltage: 6, 12 and 24V DC (LED)/ 5, 12, 15 and 24V AC/DC (incandescent lamp)/
110, 120, 220 and 240V AC (neon) /110, 220V AC (LED and incandesent lamps with transformer)
• The spot LED type have not been approved.
(Turn-reset for
2VL, 2YVL)
Flush round head – – – – AH165-2FL AH165-2FL5
Extended round head AH164-L AH164-L5 AH165-L AH165-L5 AH165-2EL AH165-2EL5
Extended square head – – – – AH165-2SEL AH165-2SEL5
Concave square head – – – – AH165-2SCL AH165-2SCL5
Flush square head AH164-SL AH164-SL5 AH165-SL AH165-SL5 AH165-2SFL AH165-2SFL5
Flush rectangular head AH164-TL AH164-TL5 AH165-TL AH165-TL5 – –
Flush square head with guard AH164-SGL AH164-SGL5 AH165-SGL AH165-SGL5 – –
Flush rectangular head AH164-TGL AH164-TGL5 AH165-TGL AH165-TGL5 – –
with guard
Mushroom head (round bezel) – – – – AH165-2ML –
Mushroom head (square bezel) – – – – AH165-2YML –
Push-locked (round bezel) – – – – – AH165-2VL
Push-locked (square bezel) – – – – – AH165-2YVL
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NO+1NC, 2NO+2NC, 3NO+3NC
• Certified terminal shape: for soldering and tab, and for wrapping.
• Certified lamp: LED, incandescent lamp and neon
• Certified operating lamp voltage: 6, 12 and 24V DC (LED)/ 5, 12, 15 and
24V AC/DC (incandescent lamp) / 110, 120, 220 and 240V AC (neon)
/110, 220V AC (LED and incandesent lamps with transformer)
• The spot LED type have not been approved.
Operator Type
AH164 AH165 AH165-2
Knob (round bezel) – – AH165-2P
Knob (rectangular bezel) AH164-P AH165-P –
Knob (square bezel) AH164-SP AH165-SP AH165-2YP
Key (round bezel) – – AH165-2J
Key (rectangular bezel) AH164-J AH165-J –
Key (square bezel) AH164-SJ AH165-SJ AH165-2YJ
Key, 45-degree notch AH164-JK AH165-JK –
(rectangular bezel)
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NO+1NC, 2NO+2NC, 3NO+3NC
• Certified terminal shape: for soldering and tab, and for wrapping
Operator Type
Key (rectangular bezel) AH165-JM2
Key (round bezel) AH165-RJM2
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NO+1NC, 2NO+2NC
• Certified position quantity: 2-position only.
Certified returning method: maintained only.

04CD/1/1
Illuminated Switches/Pilot Lights
AG22 and AG23
General information
■ Description
AG series Command Switches are
designed to be installed in a square or
rectangular hole. AG23 series are 25 x
32mm rectangular type while AG22
series are 25mm regular square type.
Either of them comprises illuminated
pushbutton switch and pilot light. The
illuminated pushbutton switches are
available either in momentary action or
alternative action. Moreover, their light
sources are also available in either
incandescent lamp or LED lamp. These
AG series Command Switches are highly
suitable for use with instrumentation
panels or control panels. Their contacts
use Au-flashed Ag contacts and adopt a
sliding mechanism, thus ensuring a high
contact reliability. The color inserts for
indicators are available up to 4-way split
types. Each indicator is provided with 5-
color inserts and the color you desire can
be easily replace.
■ Features
• Excellent contact reliability
These switches combine Au-flashed Ag
contact and sliding mechanism features
so as to ensure a high contact reliability
even when used with low-voltage, small
current circuits of 5V 1mA range.
Therefore, they allow direct input to IC’s.
Moreover, their contacts are a double-break
type, thus permitting their
application to 240V AC circuits.
AG23-HL
• Small in depth and compactly built
Both AG22 and AG23 series Command
Switches are as small as 52mm in depth
and their buttons are extruded only 5mm
from the panel surface.
Pilot lights
SM-295
• The color inserts are available in
max. 4-way split
The 4-color inserts can be positioned in
any of the four quarters of the total
display area. 6 combinations are
available.
In these switches with incandescent
lamp, their lens colors can be replaced
with one from the “colored plate kit”
which is provided for illuminated
pushbutton switches or pilot lights.
• Terminals are both use of soldering
and tab terminal types
They are subjected to “solder plated” so
as to permit accurate soldering.
• Contact can be added or replaced
The contact block comprises 1NO and
1NC. In AG23 series the contact
arrangement is available up to 4NO+4NC
and in AG22 series up to 2NO+2NC.
SM-345
AG22-L
AG23-L
SM-293
SM-1526 SM-346
AG22-Z
SM-1524
AG23-Z
Sliding leaf spring
Sliding lever
Stationary
contact
Movable
contact
Contact block
Terminal
(Soldering/Tab)
Panel
5 52
Lens
Legend plate
Color insert
Light baffle
Lamp holder
Incandescent lamps
Main body
Contact blocks
Illuminated pushbutton Illuminated levers
Illuminated rockers
■ Construction
AG23 (Incandescent lamp)
■ Approvals
R
For further information related to approved
type, see page 04CD/1/2 to 04CD/1/3.
AG23-RL

AG22 and AG23
AG22 series
Incandescent lamp
04CD/1/2
R R
R R
R
R R R R R R
R R R R R R
Indicator split See page 04CD/1/8
A: B:
AG22-LAX AG22-LBX
R R
SP-1099 SP-1120
LED lamp: Indicators
A: B:
AG22-LA 3 AG22-LB 3
R R
SP-1101 SP-1121
AG22-L See page 04CD/1/9
R
SP-1100
LED lamp: Contact unit
A: B:
AG22-ZAX AG22-ZBX
SP-1099 SP-1120
■ Pilot lights
Incandescent lamp
A: B:
AG22-ZA 3 AG22-ZB 3
SP-1101 SP-1121
AG22-Z6 See page 04CD/1/9
SP-1100
LED lamp: Contact socket
AG23 series
Incandescent lamp
A:
AG23-LAX
SP-1102
B:
AG23-LBX
SP-1105
C:
AG23-LCX
SP-1116
D:
AG23-LDX
SP-1114
E:
AG23-LEX
SP-1112
F:
AG23-LFX
SP-1118
A:
AG23-LA 3
SP-1122
B:
AG23-LB 3
SP-1104
C:
AG23-LC 3
SP-1117
D:
AG23-LD 3
SP-1115
E:
AG23-LE 3
SP-1113
F:
AG23-LF 3
SP-1119
LED lamp: Contact unit
AG23-L See page 04CD/1/9
R
SP-1103

R R R R R R
R R R R R R
AG23-Z6 See page 04CD/1/9
04CD/1/3
SP-1103
AG22 and AG23
■ Pilot lights
Incandescent lamp
A:
AG23-ZAX
SP-1102
B:
AG23-ZBX
SP-1105
C:
AG23-ZCX
SP-1116
D:
AG23-ZDX
SP-1114
E:
AG23-ZEX
SP-1112
F:
AG23-ZFX
SP-1118
A:
AG23-ZA 3
SP-1112
B:
AG23-ZB 3
SP-1104
C:
AG23-ZC 3
SP-1117
D:
AG23-ZD 3
SP-1115
E:
AG23-ZE 3
SP-1113
F:
AG23-ZF 3
SP-1119
■ Illuminated lever switches
R
LED lamp: Socket
2-position 3-position See page 04CD/1/10
Mainteined,
Spring return
AG23-HL
SP-1108
Spring/manual
return
AG23-HL
SP-1108
2-position 3-position See page 04CD/1/11
Mainteined,
Spring return
AG23-RL
SP-1107
Spring/manual
return
AG23-RL
SP-1107
■ Illuminated rocker switches

04CD/1/4
AG22 and AG23
• Illuminated pushbutton switch (Incandescent lamp)
AG 23–L 5 A X 1 E –
Basic type
Mounting hole dimensions
22: 23.5 × 22.5mm
23: 23.5 × 30.5mm
Operation
L : Illuminated pushbutton/Momentary action
L5: Illuminated pushbutton/Alternate action*
Indicator split
A: B: C:
D: E: F:
(C, D, E, F: for AG23 only)
Color insert kits (See page 04CD/1/8)
X: Provided
Contact arrangement
1: 1NO+1NC, 3: 3NO+3NC (AG23 series only)
Lamp voltage
A: 5 V AC/DC B: 12 V AC/DC C: 15 V AC/DC E: 24 V AC/DC
Mounting (See page 04CD/1/13)
Blank : Horizontal mounting
T : Vertical mounging
Color of flange
Blank : Grey (standard)
B : Black
• Illuminated pushbutton switch (LED lamp)
Indicator
AG 23–L A E 3 –
Basic type
22: 23.5 × 22.5mm
23: 23.5 × 30.5mm
Illuminated unit
Indicator split
A: B: C:
D: E: F:
Lamp voltage
E3: 24 V DC
Color insert sequence
Replace the (1, 2, 3, 4) by color code depending on the type of split
patterns.
G: Green, R: Red, W: White, O: Orange, Y: Yellow
A B C D E F
Contact unit
AG 23–L 5 1 –
Basic type
22: 23.5 × 22.5mm
23: 23.5 × 30.5mm
Operation
L : Illuminated pushbutton/Momentary action
L5: Illuminated pushbutton/Alternate action*
Contact arrangement
Color of flange
B : Black
• Pilot light (Incandescent lamp)
AG 23 – Z A X E–
Basic type
22: 23.5 × 22.5mm
23: 23.5 × 30.5mm
Pilot light
Indicator split
A: B: C:
D: E: F:
Color insert kits (See page 04CD/1/8)
X: Provided
Lamp voltage
A: 5 V AC/DC B: 12 V AC/DC C: 15 V AC/DC E: 24 V AC/DC
Color of flange
B : Black
• Pilot light (LED lamp)
Indicator
AG 23–Z A E 3 –
Basic type
22: 23.5 × 22.5mm
23: 23.5 × 30.5mm
Pilot light
Indicator split
A: B: C:
D: E: F:
Lamp voltage
E3: 24 V DC
Color insert sequence
Replace the ■ (1, 2, 3, 4) by color code depending on the type of split
patterns.
A B C D E F
Socket
AG 23 – Z 6 –
Basic type
22: 23.5 × 22.5mm
23: 23.5 × 30.5mm
Pilot light
Socket
Mounting
Color of flange
B : Black
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1
2
1 12
1
3 2
1
2
3
1 2
4 3
1
2
1 12
1
3 2
1
2
3
1 2
4 3
When the button is depressed the contacts are maintained and remain
so even if the finger is removed. The button will not return to its free
position. In order to remove the lock, the button must be given a
second pressure before the button will return to its free position.
Notes: *

04CD/1/5
(Also available with 2-color
indicators when requiring 2-lamp
type, Example: AG23-RL2RG)
AG22 and AG23
• Illuminated lever switch and illuminated rocker switch
AG 23–RL 2 R 4 E 3–1 /
Basic type
23: 23.5 30.5mm
Operator shape
HL: Lever type
RL: Rocker type
Operation
0: 2-position, spring return (Upper to lower)
1: 3-position, spring return (To center)
6: 3-position, maintained and spring return
(Upper to center)
Operator color
G: Green
R: Red
W: White
Y: Yellow
O: Orange
S: Blue (For Incandescent lamp only)
Contact arrangement
1: 1NO+1NC 3: 3NO+3NC
2: 2NO+2NC 4: 4NO+4NC
Color of lever (Lever type only)
Blank: Black
H: Gray
R: Red
Color of flange
Blank: Gray (Standard)
B: Black
Mounting
Blank: Horizontal mounting
T: Vertical mounting (Standard)
Number of lamps
1: 1-lamp
2: 2-lamp
Type of lamps
Blank: Incandescent
2: Spot LED
3: Flat LED
Lamp voltage
Incandescent LED
A: 5 V AC/DC AA: 5 V DC
B: 12 V AC/DC A: 6 V DC
C: 15 V AC/DC B: 12 V DC
E: 24 V AC/DC E: 24 V DC

AG22 and AG23
UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
File No. E44592
File No. LR20479
Item Illuminated pushbutton switch Illuminated lever switch Pilot light
04CD/1/6
Illuminated rocker switch
Ambient temperature –5 to +40°C
Humidity 45 to 85%RH (at –5 to +40°C), no
condensation or no icing
Durability Mechanical 1NO+1NC, 2NO+2NC 100,000 –
3NO+3NC*, 4NO+4NC*: 100,000
Electrical 100,000 (220V AC 0.7A) –
(Between lamp and contact terminals: 1500V AC, 1 minute)
Pollution degree 3
Shock Malfunction durability: 100m/s2 Mechanical durability: 500m/s2
Notes: * AG23 type only.
■ Contact ratings
Rated thermal
current
Rated
operational
voltage
Maximum current
AC
(Res. load)
DC
(Res. load)
5A 24V
125V
250V
––
5.0A
1.0A
0.2A
–
• NECA C 4521 standards
Rated thermal
current
Rated operational
voltage
AC 15
(Ind. load)
AC 13
(Ind. load)
5A 24V
110V
220V
–
0.3A
0.3A
–
1.0A
0.7A
AC 12
(Res. load)
–
1.5A
1.0A
DC 13*
(Ind. load)
0.7A
–
0.15A
DC 12
(Res. load)
1.0A
–
0.2A
Notes: * T0.95 = 21ms

04CD/1/7
LED Lamp [w/split]
Illuminated pushbutton switch, pilot light Lever switch, rocker switch
0-split
–
–
–
2-split 3-split 4-split 1-lamp 2-lamp
–
–
–
–
–
–
AG22 and AG23
■ Power consumption
• AG22, 23
0.04*1 0.04*1
0.04*1
0.05*2 0.05*2
0.05*2
0.09 0.09
0.09
0.36
0.36 0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36 0.36
0.36 0.36
0.17
0.36
0.17
0.17
0.36
0.36
0.36 0.36
Operating
Voltage
(V)
Incandescent
lamp
[W/1-lamp]
5 0.45
–
6 –
–
12 0.55
–
24 0.55
*1 Yellow: 0.14w/split
*2 Yellow: 0.17w/split

Illuminated pushbutton Switches/Pilot Lights
AG22 and AG23
AG22-L
AG23-L
SM-346
SM-293
AG22-L5
AG23-L5
SM-345
SM-295
AG22-Z
AG23-Z
SM-346
SM-294
04CD/1/8
Legend
plate
■ Wiring diagrams
AG22 (2NO+2NC) AG23 (4NO+4NC)
• Terminal arrangement • Terminal arrangement
View from terminal side
■ Illuminated pushbutton switches (Incandescent lamp)
Momentary action
Description Color 1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
insert *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3
split Type Type
A AG22-LAX1■-( ) AG22-LAX2■-( )
B AG22-LBX1■-( ) AG22-LBX2■-( )
A AG23-LAX1■-( ) AG23-LAX2■-( )
B AG23-LBX1■-( ) AG23-LBX2■-( )
C AG23-LCX1■-( ) AG23-LCX2■-( )
D AG23-LDX1■-( ) AG23-LDX2■-( )
E AG23-LEX1■-( ) AG23-LEX2■-( )
F AG23-LFX1■-( ) AG23-LFX2■-( )
Alternate action
Description Color 1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
insert *1 *2 *3 *1 *2 *3
split Type Type
A AG22-L5AX1■-( ) AG22-L5AX2■-( )
B AG22-L5BX1■-( ) AG22-L5BX2■-( )
A AG23-L5AX1■-( ) AG23-L5AX2■-( )
B AG23-L5BX1■-( ) AG23-L5BX2■-( )
C AG23-L5CX1■-( ) AG23-L5CX2■-( )
D AG23-L5DX1■-( ) AG23-L5DX2■-( )
E AG23-L5EX1■-( ) AG23-L5EX2■-( )
F AG23-L5FX1■-( ) AG23-L5FX2■-( )
*1
A: 5V AC/DC
B: 12V AC/DC
C: 15V AC/DC
E: 24V AC/DC
*2
Replace the ( ) mark by the mounting angle code
Blank:Horizontal mounting
T: Vertical mounting
*3
Replace the mark by the flange color code
Blank: Gray (Standard)
B: Black
For AG23 type illuminated pushbutton switch,
3NO+3NC and 4NO+4NC are also available.
■ Pilot lights (Incandescent lamp)
Description Color 1NO+1NC
insert *1 *2 *3
split Type
A AG22-ZAX■-( )
B AG22-ZBX■-( )
A AG23-ZAX■-( )
B AG23-ZBX■-( )
C AG23-ZCX■-( )
D AG23-ZDX■-( )
E AG23-ZEX■-( )
F AG23-ZFX■-( )
■ Color insert kits
Illuminated pushbutton switches and pilot lights with an incandescent lamp
comprise the following number of green, red, white, orange and blue inserts,
legend plates and light baffle plates.
Color insert Light baffle
Full Half Quarter Half Quarter
Color
insert
split
A 5 – – – – – – – 1
B – 5 – – 1 – – – 1
C – – 5 – – 1 – – 1
D – 5 – 5 1 – – 1 1
E – – 5 5 – 1 1 – 1
F – – – 10 1 – – 2 1
■ Dimensions, mm
AG22 AG23
• Body • Body
• Barrier • Barrier
Center barrier End barrier Long center barrier Long end barrier
AGX008-C AGX008-E AGX003-LC AGX003-LE
Short center barrier Short end barrier
AGX003-SC AGX003-SE
52 5 25 sq. 52 5 32
25
Notes:

04CD/1/9
■ Illuminated pushbutton switches (LED lamp)
• Indicators
Description Color Type*1 *2
insert
split
A AG22-LA■-
B AG22-LB■-
A AG23-LA■-
B AG23-LB■-
C AG23-LC■-
D AG23-LD■-
E AG23-LE■-
AG22-L
SK-1016
SM-348
AG23-L F AG23-LF■-
• Contact unit
Description Contact Momentary action Alternate actionn
Type*3 *4 Type*3 *4
1NO+1NC AG22-L1-( ) AG22-L51-( )
2NO+2NC AG22-L2-( ) AG22-L52-( )
1NO+1NC AG23-L1-( ) AG23-L51-( )
2NO+2NC AG23-L2-( ) AG23-L52-( )
3NO+3NC AG23-L3-( ) AG23-L53-( )
4NO+4NC AG23-L4-( ) AG23-L54-( )
AG22-L
SM-347
AG23-L
SM-298
■ Pilot lights (LED lamp)
• Indicators
Description Color Type*1 *2
insert
split
A AG22-ZA■-
B AG22-ZB■-
A AG23-ZA■-
B AG23-ZB■-
C AG23-ZC■-
D AG23-ZD■-
E AG23-ZE■-
AG22-Z
SM-349
SM-304
AG23-Z F AG23-ZF■-
■ Wiring diagrams (Lamp circuit)
AG22
• Incandescent lamp • LED lamp
Notes:
*1 Replace the ■ mark by the lamp voltage code.
E3: 24V DC
*2 Replace the mark by color code depending on
the type of split patterns.
(For color insert sequence, see page 04CD/1/4)
*3 Replace the ( ) mark by the mounting code.
*4 Replace the mark by the flange color code.
Blank: Gray, B: Blank
Example
• Indicator
AG23 series .................................................. AG23
Illuminated pushbutton .......................................... L
4-way split color insert .......................................... F
LED lamp 24V DC (Anode common) .................. E3
Color sequence ....... GRWO
Type number AG23-LFE3-GRWO
• Contact unit
Momentary action .................................................. L
Contact block 2NO+2NC ....................................... 2
Horizontal mounting ........................................ Blank
Color of flange Gray ....................................... Blank
Type number AG23-L2
AG23
• Incandescent lamp • LED lamp (24V)
( )
L1
Illuminated pushbutton Switches/Pilot Lights
AG22 and AG23
Description Type
code*3 *4
AG22-Z6-( )
AG23-Z6-( )
AG23-Z6
SM-298
AG22-Z6
SM-347
• Sockets
1: Green 2: Red
4: Orange 3: White
LC
LC
L1
L1
L2
L1 L3
L2 L4
LC
L1 L3
L2 L4
LC
LC
(+)
( )
L1
LC
(+)
L2
( )
( )
L1
LC
(+)
L2
( )
LC
(+)
L2
( )
( )
L1
LC
(+)
L2
( )
L4
( )
( )
L1
( )
L3
LC
(+)
L2
( )
L4
( )
( )L1
LC
(+)
L2
( )
LC
(+)
L2
( )
L4
( )
L4
( )
Full face Full face Full face
3 - way split
(Half at left)
2 - way
Vertical split
3 - way split 4 - way split
(Half at top)
2-way
Horizontal split
2-way 2, 3, 4 - way split
View from terminal side

Illuminated lever Switches
AG23
04CD/1/10
■ Illuminated lever switches/Incandescent lamps
Description Contact No. of Operation 2-position 3-position
block lamp Type* Type*
Incandescent 1NO+1NC 1 Maintained AG23-HL2 1■-1( ) /▲ —
lamp 2 AG23-HL2 1■-2( ) /▲ —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-HL2 2■-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 2■-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL2 2■-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 2■-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-HL2 3■-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 3■-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL2 3■-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 3■-2( ) /▲
1NO+1NC 1 Spring AG23-HL0 1■-1( ) /▲ —
2 return AG23-HL0 1■-2( ) /▲ —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-HL0 2■-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 2■-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL0 2■-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 2■-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-HL0 3■-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 3■-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL0 3■-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 3■-2( ) /▲
2NO+2NC 1 — AG23-HL6 2■-1( ) /▲
Spring/
manual
return
2 AG23-HL6 2■-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 — AG23-HL6 3■-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL6 3■-2( ) /▲
■ Illuminated lever switches/LED lamps
Spot LED 1NO+1NC 1 Maintained AG23-HL2 1■2-1( ) /▲ —
2 AG23-HL2 1■2-2( ) /▲ —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-HL2 2■2-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 2■2-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL2 2■2-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 2■2-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-HL2 3■2-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 3■2-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL2 3■2-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 3■2-2( ) /▲
1NO+1NC 1 Spring AG23-HL0 1■2-1( ) /▲ —
2 return AG23-HL0 1■2-2( ) /▲ —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-HL0 2■2-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 2■2-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL0 2■2-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 2■2-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-HL0 3■2-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 3■2-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL0 3■2-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 3■2-2( ) /▲
2NO+2NC 1 — AG23-HL6 2■2-1( ) /▲
Spring/
manual
return
2 AG23-HL6 2■2-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 — AG23-HL6 3■2-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL6 3■2-2( ) /▲
Flat LED 1NO+1NC 1 Maintained AG23-HL2 1■3-1( ) /▲ —
2 AG23-HL2 1■3-2( ) /▲ —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-HL2 2■3-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 2■3-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL2 2■3-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 2■3-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-HL2 3■3-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 3■3-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL2 3■3-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL3 3■3-2( ) /▲
1NO+1NC 1 Spring AG23-HL0 1■3-1( ) /▲ —
2 return AG23-HL0 1■3-2( ) /▲ —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-HL0 2■3-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 2■3-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL0 2■3-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 2■3-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-HL0 3■3-1( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 3■3-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL0 3■3-2( ) /▲ AG23-HL1 3■3-2( ) /▲
2NO+2NC 1 — AG23-HL6 2■3-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL6 2■3-2( ) /▲
3NO+3NC 1 — AG23-HL6 3■3-1( ) /▲
2 AG23-HL6 3■3-2( ) /▲
* • Replace the mark by the lamp color codes.
G: Green R: Red W: White Y: Yellow O: Orange
S: Blue (Incandescent Lamp only)
• Replace the ■ mark by the lamp voltage codes
Incandescent A: 5V AC/DC B: 12V AC/DC C: 15V AC/DC E: 24V AC/DC
LED AA: 5V DC A: 6V DC B: 12V DC E: 24V DC
• Replace the ( ) mark by the mounting angle code.
• Replace the mark by the flange color codes.
Blank: Gray (Standard) B: Black
• Replace the ▲ mark by the lever color codes.
Blank: Black (Standard) H: Gray R: Red
SP-1108
KK04-047A
Spring/
manual
return
SP-1108

04CD/1/11
■ Illuminated rocker switches/Incandescent lamps
Incandescent 1NO+1NC 1 Maintained AG23-RL2 1■-1( ) —
2 AG23-RL2 1■-2( ) —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-RL2 2■-1( ) AG23-RL3 2■-1( )
2 AG23-RL2 2■-2( ) AG23-RL3 2■-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-RL2 3■-1( ) AG23-RL3 3■-1( )
2 AG23-RL2 3■-2( ) AG23-RL3 3■-2( )
1NO+1NC 1 Spring AG23-RL0 1■-1( ) —
2 return AG23-RL0 1■-2( ) —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-RL0 2■-1( ) AG23-RL1 2■-1( )
2 AG23-RL0 2■-2( ) AG23-RL1 2■-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-RL0 3■-1( ) AG23-RL1 3■-1( )
2 AG23-RL0 3■-2( ) AG23-RL1 3■-2( )
2NO+2NC 1 — AG23-RL6 2■-1( )
Spring/
manual
return
2 AG23-RL6 2■-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 — AG23-RL6 3■-1( )
2 AG23-RL6 3■-2( )
SP-1107
■ Illuminated rocker switches/LED lamps
Spot LED 1NO+1NC 1 Maintained AG23-RL2 1■2-1( ) —
2 AG23-RL2 1■2-2( ) —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-RL2 2■2-1( ) AG23-RL3 2■2-1( )
2 AG23-RL2 2■2-2( ) AG23-RL3 2■2-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-RL2 3■2-1( ) AG23-RL3 3■2-1( )
2 AG23-RL2 3■2-2( ) AG23-RL3 3■2-2( )
1NO+1NC 1 Spring AG23-RL0 1■2-1( ) —
2 return AG23-RL0 1■2-2( ) —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-RL0 2■2-1( ) AG23-RL1 2■2-1( )
2 AG23-RL0 2■2-2( ) AG23-RL1 2■2-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-RL0 3■2-1( ) AG23-RL1 3■2-1( )
2 AG23-RL0 3■2-2( ) AG23-RL1 3■2-2( )
2NO+2NC 1 — AG23-RL6 2■2-1( )
Spring/
manual
return
2 AG23-RL6 2■2-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 — AG23-RL6 3■2-1( )
2 AG23-RL6 3■2-2( )
KK04-048A
Flat LED 1NO+1NC 1 Maintained AG23-RL2 1■3-1( ) —
2 AG23-RL2 1■3-2( ) —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-RL2 2■3-1( ) AG23-RL3 2■3-1( )
2 AG23-RL2 2■3-2( ) AG23-RL3 2■3-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-RL2 3■3-1( ) AG23-RL3 3■3-1( )
2 AG23-RL2 3■3-2( ) AG23-RL3 3■3-2( )
1NO+1NC 1 Spring AG23-RL0 1■3-1( ) —
2 return AG23-RL0 1■3-2( ) —
2NO+2NC 1 AG23-RL0 2■3-1( ) AG23-RL1 2■3-1( )
2 AG23-RL0 2■3-2( ) AG23-RL1 2■3-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 AG23-RL0 3■3-1( ) AG23-RL1 3■3-1( )
2 AG23-RL0 3■3-2( ) AG23-RL1 3■3-2( )
2NO+2NC 1 — AG23-RL6 2■3-1( )
2 AG23-RL6 2■3-2( )
3NO+3NC 1 — AG23-RL6 3■3-1( )
2 AG23-RL6 3■3-2( )
Illuminated rocker Switches
AG23
* • Replace the mark by the lamp color codes
G: Green R: Red W: White Y: Yellow O: Orange
S: Blue (Incandescent Lamp only)
• Replace the ■ mark by the lamp voltage codes
Incandescent A: 5V AC/DC B: 12V AC/DC C: 15V AC/DC E: 24V AC/DC
LED AA: 5V DC A: 6V DC B: 12V DC E: 24V DC
• Replace the ( ) mark by the mounting angle code
• Replace the mark by the flange color codes
Blank: Gray (Standard) B: Black
Spring/
manual
return
SP-1107

■ Wiring diagrams
(AG23 4NO+4NC)
11
13
14
12
L2
21
23
24
22
LB
04CD/1/12
L3
LC LC
( )
LC
LB
L2
L3(+)
L3
LC
( )
LB
( )
L2
(+)
L3(+)
1 - lamp
2 - lamp
1 - lamp
2 - lamp
Illuminated lever Switches/Illuminated rocker Switches
AG23
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
Lever switches Rocker switches
NP
No. of
lamp
1
2
52 16.5 25
32
30°
NP
52
9.5
3.5 25
32
No. of
lamp
1
2
L3
41
43
44
42
31
33
34
32
LC
Name plate
■ Wiring diagrams (Lamp circuit)
• Incandescent lamp • LED lamp
1 2
41 42
43 44
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
1 2
11 12
13 14
1 2 3
11 12
13 14
1 2 3
41 42
43 44
1 2 3
11 12
13 14
1 2 3
31 32
33 34
1 2 3
41 42
43 44
1 2 3
11 12
13 14
1 2 3
21 22
23 24
1 2 3
31 32
33 34
1 2 3
41 42
43 44
1 2
41 42
43 44
1 2
11 12
13 14
1 2
31 32
33 34
1 2
41 42
43 44
1 2
11 12
13 14
1 2
21 22
23 24
1 2
31 32
33 34
1 2
41 42
43 44
Operator positon 1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC 4NO+4NC
2-position
3-position –
Note: The operator position shown is where the nameplate-stuck-surface is positioned toward you.

04CD/1/13
32n ± 0.5
25n ± 0.5
Notes on use
AG22 and AG23
Notes on use
■ Panel cutting
• AG 22
Description Mounting design Panel cutting Remarks
Flange Individual mounting
mounting (Horizontal)
Manifold mounting
(Horizontal)
Barrier Individual mounting
Manifold mounting
(Horizontal)
Notes • n: Number of mounted unit Max 10 Panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm (with dust covers: 1 to 4 mm)
• For vertical mounting, contact FUJI
• The dimensions in parentheses are for tandem mounting of switches with dust covers.
Panel cutting space between
rows of units
rows of units
Dotted line indicates the position
of each mounting barrier
• AG 23
Description Mounting design Panel cutting Remarks
Flange Individual mounting
Manifold mounting
(Horizontal)
Individual mounting
(Vertical)
Manifold mounting
(Vertical)
Barrier Individual mounting
Manifold mounting
(Horizontal)
Individual mounting
(Vertical)
Manifold mounting
(Vertical)
Notes • n: Number of mounted unit Max10 Panel thickness: 1 to 5 mm (with dust covers: 1 to 4 mm)
• The dimensions in parentheses are for tandem mounting of switches with dust covers.
rows of units
rows of units
Dotted line indicates the position
of each mounting barrier
25 ± 0.1
30.5 ± 0.3 30.5 ± 0.3 23.5 ± 0.3 23.5 ± 0.3 30.5 ± 0.3 30.5 ± 0.3 23.5 ± 0.3 23.5 ± 0.3
25 ± 0.1
25 ± 0.1
32 ± 0.1 30.5 ± 0.3
23.5 ± 0.3
32 ± 0.1 32 ± 0.1
32 ± 0.3
26n+6 ± 1
26.5
39
33.5 26.5
33n+6 ± 1
33.5
31.9n–1.5 ± 0.3
(39.5n–9 ± 0.3)
24.9n–1.5 ± 0.3
(32.5n–9 ± 0.3)
36.4 ± 0.3
32.8n+3.5 ± 0.3
29.4 ± 0.3
25.8n+3.5 ± 0.3
Over 3
Over 6
1.3 Over 6
Over 6
25 ± 0.1
25 ± 0.1
25 ± 0.1
25n ± 0.5
23.5 ± 0.3
22.5 ± 0.3
23.5 ± 0.3
24.9n–2.4 ± 0.3
(32.5n–10 ± 0.3)
Over 3
Over 6
26.5
32
23.5 ± 0.3
27.8 ± 0.3
26.5
26n+6.5 ± 1
23.5 ± 0.3
25.9n+1.9 ± 0.3
1.3 Over 6
Over 6
■ Mounting the Switches (Pilot lights)
Mounting the switches by inserting them into place in the front of the mounting panel.
The switches will be held in position by the mounting springs.

04CD/1/14
Jaw
Pry it with a pointed
tool (such as a pair
of tweerzers)
in the direction
shown by the arrow
AG22 and AG23
Notes on use
■ Installing or removing switches
• To install switches in the standard mounting or barrier-isolated
single-unit mounting method, insert the switches one at a time
from the front of the panel.
• Installing the main bodies of the switches
If the mounting panel is vatical, install the switches with their
nameplates positioned at the bottom. If the mounting panel is
horizontal, install the switches with their nameplates positioned
on this side.
• If the mounting panel is thin (1 to 2 mm thick), make panel
cutouts smaller.
• When the barrier-isolated tandem-mounting method is
employed, you can sequentially install switches one by one.
For the final one, place a part of the center barrier in the
mounting hole beforehand, and then insert the switch into the
mounting hole so that the end barrier is in close contact with
the main body of the switch (procedure: Fig.2 to Fig.1)
• To remove a switch which has been installed in the standard
mounting or barrier-isolated single-uint monting method, push
out the switch by pushing it from the back of the panel while
holding the panel bay pushing it inward.
• To remove switches which have been installed in the barrier-isolated
tandem-mounting method, proceed as
follows:disengage the rear of the barrier on both sides of the
switch to be removed so that the barriers are attached to the
switch and, push the switch outward from the back of the panel
while holding the front of the mounting panel firm, and take out
the switch by opening the barriers by bending them to both
sides on the front side of the panel (procedure: Fig.1 to Fig.2)
■ Operating voltage and rated voltage of incandescent
lamps
Rated voltage Operating voltage
6V 4 to 5V
14V 10 to 12V
18V 12 to 15V
28V (Standard) 20 to 24V
Incandescent lamps should be operated at the operating
voltages if a lamp service life of 5,000 to 10,000 hours are
needed. The ambient temperature must not exceed 30°C if the
lamp is used at the rated voltage continuously.
■ Removing the lighting unit...AG23 (Oblong)
To remove the lighting unit, refer to the illlustraions given in the
below. (Especially when removing the unit installed on a panel)
■ Lamp replacement (For illuminated pushbutton and pilot
lights)
To replace a lamp, pull out the entire lighting unit and replace
the lamp from the back of the lamp holder.
Install the lighting unit so that it conforms with the contact end
inside the switch main-body. The inserting force must not be
greater than 60N.
■ Installing the lighting section
Install the lighting unit aligning the TOP display on the lighting
uint and switch main-body as shown in the below.
Do not push the internal mechanism of the switch main body
while the lamp unit has been removed. Deformation of contact
piece for the lamp may result in poor lighting or malfunction.
■ Replacing the lamp (Lever type or rocker type)
To remove the lamp, remove the lens by using a screwdriver or
other pointed tool (see.the illustrations in the below) and then
pull out the lamp by using a lamp remover (Type AHX672) .To
install the lamp, insert it with your fingers and then put back the
lens.
End barrier Center barrier
Panel
Fig.1 Fig.2
A *
A
Remarks*The unit has two jaws at
lower left as indicated with
the asterisks
Cross section A-A
(main components only)

04CD/1/15
■ Removeing or installing the lens
To remove the lens, slide it horizontally. To install the lens, align
it with the lamp house and insert it from the top.
■ Installing the color plate and nameplate
Install the color plate and Nameplate in the lens section with
their grained surfaces directed inward.
■ Removeing or installing the nameplate (Lever type)
To remove the nameplate from the lens, press the studs of the
lens against a flat plane so that the lens is widened slightly, and
insert a screwdriver or other pointed tool into the groove of the
nameplate. (See the illustration in the below.)
To install the nameplate into the cover, put the end of
thenameplate in the cover and then press the nameplate into
the cover by pinching them with your fingers. (See the
illustration in the below.)
■ Contact block
To replace a contact block, use removing tool AGX012. If
excessive force is applied when attempting to open the support
legs for the contact block holder, deformation or damage may
occur.
AG22 and AG23
Notes on use
■ Contacts configuration modifications
Note that there are certain restrictions on contact configureation
modifications.
No modifications other than those below are available. Although
it is not impossible to modify a switch with 3a3b or 4a4b into that
with 2a2b, do not attempt this modification because the layout of
the contacts of the former differs from that of the latter.
Caution: never remove any of the contact units or dummy units
which are located at both ends. If you do, the main units of the
switches may be damaged, may become unable to be installed,
or other troubles may result.
Remove this contact unit.
■ Wiring connections
• Use a soldering iron with a wattage of not more than 30W and
a tip length of more than 20mm.
Use a rosin-core solder
With a 30W iron complete soldering within 5 seconds, or 10
seconds with a 20W iron. Do not apply external force to the
terminals. Do not deform the terminals.
Because lead-free solder's melting point is slightly high,
soldering work may be difficult. Use a soldering iron whose tip
is rather large or whose calorie is rather high.
• Wires that can be connected
Two solid wires with a maximum diameter of 0.8mm (solder)
One stranded wire with a maximum area of 0.75mm2 (solder)
• Using contact blocks
• For wiring to adjacent terminals, use insulated tubing to
prevent short-circuit and to assure isolation. For solder
terminals, be careful when connecting thick wires. Do not use
too much solder.
■ Installing lamps in close order
pushbuttons installed in close order, care must be taken that the
ambient temperature does not exceed the rated value.
■ Alternate types
AG23-L5 AG22-L5
Do not open/close the switch with its leaf spring held pressed.If
you do, the alternate mechanism can be damaged.
Lens
Lamp house
Push
Name plate
Name plate
Lens
Lens
Pull
Pull
Befor
modification
After
modification
With
1NO+1NC
With
2NO+2NC
With
3NO+3NC
With
4NO+4NC
With
2NO+2NC
With
1NO+1NC
With
4NO+4NC
With
3NO+3NC
Insert the contact unit
in this hole
Insert the contact unit
in this hole
Remove this contact unit.
Slide
SP-1122

AG22 and AG23
Notes on use
04CD/1/16
■ Dismounting the switch (Main body)
➀To remove the main body of a rectangular
command switch installed on a panel, bend the
mounting springs and push them outside of the
main body.If it is densely packed with other
devices, use the removeing tool (Type AGX013)
for ease of removal.
➁For how to use the removing tool, see the
illustration in the below.Insert the tool from back of
the switch (main-body) and then push out the
switch.
■ Operation
Do not use a hitting or bouncing action to operate
the button, or the switch may break. Always operate
the switch by hand.
■ Storage and operating environment
Observe the operating ambient temperature and
humidity specifications indicated in the catalog or
other related material. Do not use the switches in a
location where they are exposed to being splashed
with oil or water. The location must not be dusty.
• If it is inevitable that the installed switches will be
exposed to dust or metallic particles caused by
factory installation work or other tasks, cover the
switches with suitable sheets to protect them.
• If using the switches in a dusty atmosphere cannot
be avoided protect the switches with dust covers.

12.5 21.5 19
12.5 19
04CD/1/17
■ Accessories
SM-337
SM-338
AG22 and AG23
Accessories
Type Used with
AGX011-3
AG23-L
AGX011-2
AG22-L
Description Type
Barrier
SM-313
For AG22
Center
-barrier
End-barrier
For AG23
Long center
-barrier
Long end
-barrier
Short center
-barrier
Short end
-barrier
Color
Black
Gray
Black
Gray
Black
Gray
Black
Gray
Black
Gray
Black
Gray
Type
AGX008-CB
AGX008-CH
AGX008-EB
AGX008-EH
AGX003-LCB
AGX003-LCH
AGX003-LEB
AGX003-LEH
AGX003-SCB
AGX003-SCH
AGX003-SEB
AGX003-SEH
Bezel
SM-354
For AG22
For AG23
Color
Black
Gray
Black
Gray
Type
AGX010-2B
AGX010-2H
AGX010-3B
AGX010-3H
Color insert kit
This kit contains green,
red, white, orange and
blue color-inserts,
legend plates and light
baffle plates.
See page 04CD/1/8
For AG22-L, Z
For AG23-L, Z
Split
Full face
2-way split
Full face
2-way split
3-way split
4-way split
Type
AGX019-2A
AGX019-2B
AGX019-3A
AGX019-3B
AGX019-3C
AGX019-3D
AGX019-3E
AGX019-3F
Legend plate
For AG22-L, Z
For AG23-L, Z
Color
Clear*
White
Clear*
White
Type
AGX009-2C
AGX009-2W
AGX009-3C
AGX009-3W
SM-355
Dimension (mm)
• 15sq.×1 (AGX009-2)
• 15×23×1 (AGX009-3)
Dust-tight cover
SM-1528
Description Type
Protection cover
For AG22-L
For AG23-L
Type
AGX007-2
AGX007-3
AGX007-3T
SM-375
(vertical mounting)
The cover portects against accidental
operation.
The cover lid is returned home with a spring
force.
AGX007-3
AGX007-2
AGX007-3T
24.5
12.5 21.5 26
12.5
28.5
24.5
12.5
31.5
16
Panel plug
For AG22
For AG23
Color
Black
Gray
Black
Gray
Type
AGX006-2B
AGX006-2H
AGX006-3B
AGX006-3H
Contact block AGX001
Soldering/Tab use
Dummy unit AGX002
*:Standard
Dimensions (mm)
The dummy unit installs in the part which
does not use the contact unit.
KKD06-305

SP-124
Lens
For AG23-RL AGX005
04CD/1/18
Type: AHX672
B 60.6
A
Socket Switch
AGX005-P AGX004-2P AGX004-4P
13.45
31
12.8
13-ø1.3 12.8
20.35
4.6
6.3
14.3
20.35
25
6 21-ø1.3
6
11.7 11.7
6.3
14.3
13.45
18.4
4.6
9.15
25
11-ø1.3
4 4
6.3
0.55
AG22 and AG23
Accessories
Lens
Type
For AG23-HL
Incandescent,
Flat LED
Spot LED Color Split
AGX034-R
AGX034-G
AGX034-W
AGX034-Y
AGX034-S*1
AGX034-O
AGX034-B*2
AGX038-R
AGX038-G
AGX038-W
AGX038-Y
–
AGX038-O
–
Red
Green
White
Yellow
Blue
Orange
Black
Two-way
split
*1 Used with the incandecent lamp only
*2 Used with non illuminated side of spot LED(1-lamp types)
*1 Used with the incandecent lamp only
*2 Used with non illuminated side of spot LED(1-lamp types)
Legend plate
For AG23-HL
SP-123
SP-115
SM-334, 335
Type
Incandescent,
Flat LED
Spot LED Color Split
AGX032-R
AGX032-G
AGX032-W
AGX032-Y
AGX032-S*1
AGX032-O
AGX033-R
AGX033-G
AGX033-W
AGX033-Y
AGX033-S*1
AGX033-O
AGX033-B*2
AGX036-W
Remover
Dimension (mm)
8.5×16.5×2
For contact unit
AGX012
For body
AGX013
Legend plate
For AG23-RL
This tool is used to remove the indicator
of illuminated pushbutton or pilot light.
Voltage Type
6V, 0.6W
14V, 0.7W
18V, 0.7W
28V, 0.7W
AHX641
AHX642
AHX612
AHX643
Dimension (mm)
9.5×16×8.5
If the switch is fitted with a lamp, use this
tool to remove the lamp. The tool is
unnecessary when installing a lamp.
SP-116
AGX035-W
Remover
SP-1142
AF02-117
AGX039
Lamp changer
For AG23-HL, RL
–
–
–
–
–
–
AGX037-R
AGX037-G
AGX037-W
AGX037-Y
–
AGX037-O
–
Red
Green
White
Yellow
Blue
Orange
Red
Green
White
Yellow
Blue
Orange
Black
Full
face
Two-split
Incandescent
lamp
KKD06-333
Socket
AF02-129
AGX004
AF02-130
Terminal
For wiring to wire-wrap pin terminals, select
appropriate wire sizes and tool from the table
below.
Use ordinary wrapping for connection. Wires of
0.65mm dia. must not be used on adjacent
terminals. Howerver, 0.65mm dia. wire can be
mixed with 0.4mm and 0.5mm dia. wires.
PC board mounting
Type Contact
arrangement
Used
with
Solder/tab
Wire wrap
PC board
Solder/tab
Wire wrap
PC board
Solder/tab
Wire wrap
PC board
AGX005-S
AGX005-W
AGX005-P
AGX004-2S
AGX004-2W
AGX004-2P
AGX004-4S
AGX004-4W
AGX004-4P
1a1b
2a2b
1a1b
2a2b
3a3b
4a4b
AG22
AG23
Wire size Bit Sleeve Number of
effective wraps
0.4mm dia.
0.5mm dia.
(0.65mm dia.)
3-A
1-A
(2-A)
1-B
2-B
(2-B)
About 8
About 6
(About 6)
Terminal A B
Solder/tab
7.5
Wire wrap
18.5
PC board
3.5
8.8
19.8
4.8
Dimension (mm)
14.3
Type number display side Type number display side Type number display side
24
20.35
4.5

04CD/1/19
■ Mass, gram
Lamp type Illuminated 1NO 2NO 3NO 4NO Pilot lights
pushbuttons + + + +
1NC 2NC 3NC 4NC
Incandescent AG22-LA, L5A 21.5 22.5 – – AG22-ZA 18.5
lamp B, L5B 22.5 23.5 – – B 19.3
AG23-LA, L5A 27 28 29 30 AG23-ZA 23.5
B, L5B 29.2 30.2 31.2 32.2 B 25.7
C, L5C 29.2 30.2 31.2 32.2 C 25.7
D, L5D 29.4 30.4 31.4 32.4 D 25.9
E, L5E 29.4 30.4 31.4 32.4 E 25.9
F, L5F 29.5 30.5 31.5 32.5 F 26
LED lamp *1AG22-LA, L5A 21.8 22.8 – – *2AG22-ZA 19
B, L5B 22.2 23.2 – – B 19
*2AG23-LA, L5A 27.5 28.5 29.5 30.5 *2AG23-ZA 24
B, L5B 28 29 30 31 B 24.5
C, L5C 28 29 30 31 C 24.5
D, L5D 28.2 29.2 30.2 31.2 D 24.7
E, L5E 28.2 29.2 30.2 31.2 E 24.7
F, L5F 28.3 29.3 30.3 31.3 F 24.8
Illuminated rocker and 1NO 2NO 3NO 4NO
lever switches + + + +
1NC 2NC 3NC 4NC
AG23-RL·-1 26 27 28 29
AG23-RL·-2 28 29 30 31
AG23-HL·-1 26 27 28 29
AG23-HL·-2 28 29 30 31
AG23-RL·2-1 25 26 27 28
AG23-RL·2-2 27.5 28.5 29.5 30.5
AG23-RL·3-1 25.5 27.2 27.5 28.5
AG23-RL·3-2 28 29 30 31
AG23-HL·2-1 25 26 27 28
AG23-HL·2-2 27.5 28.5 29.5 30.5
AG23-HL·3-1 25.5 26.5 27.5 28.5
AG23-HL·3-2 28 29 30 31
L5: Alternate action
*1 Combined indicators and contact unit. *2 Combined indicators and sockets.
AG22 and AG23
Mass

AF99-70 AF99-68 AF99-83
AF99-63 AF99-64 KK02-246A
KK02-240A KK02-236 AF99-82
04CD/2/1
transformer
Movable
contact
AM22 and DM22
General information
AM22F0L AM22F0R DM22D0L
AM22E0L AM22E0R DM22E3L
Selectors
AM22V0F AM22V0E AM22PR
The full range of the contact blocks and
transformer units suitable for the AR22
and DR22 series may also be fitted to
the AM22 and DM22 series.
■ Features
Quick-replacement contact blocks
and transformer units
The snap-on construction makes
replacement and addition of contact
blocks and transformer units very simple
and straightforward.
Oil-and dust-proof operator module
construction
The protection level of the AM22/DM22
operator modules conforms to IEC
Standard IP65. The special seals
protect the operator modules and switch
mechanisms against oil, dust, and grime,
thus ensuring high performance in dusty
and moist environments.
Miniaturization
• Pushbutton and selector switches with
1NO+1NC: 40mm deep
space.
Metal nut
Safer model with metal nut is also
available
Wiring
spaces.
makes wiring easy.
1NO: Blue, 1NC: Red
Lamp terminal and
Safety
locked.
Protection
the operator.
improved.
■ Approvals
approved type, see page 04CD/2/2 to
04CD/2/3.
40mm
Pushbutton
Selector switch
Illuminated
pushbutton
switch with
transformer
Pilot light/
Standard
60mm*
35mm
* 230V and over:
64mm
Self-cleaning contacts
Every time the switch is operated, the
contact surfaces are wiped with a
Stationary
contact
Return
spring
S

Flush round head AM22F0L, F5L
Extended round head AM22E0L, E5L
04CD/2/2
AM22M0L, M5L
Extended with
AF99-59 AF99-66
S S
AM22M4L, M9L
AM22G4L, G9L
(With openings)
S S
AM22G2L, G7L
AM22 and DM22
S
S
Mushroom head
(40mm dia.)
Mushroom head
(29mm dia.)
Flush round head AM22F0R, F5R
S
(24mm dia.)
AM22G3R, G8R
S
Extended round head AM22E0R, E5R
S
Mushroom head with
full guard
(40mm dia.)
AM22M3R, M8R
S
AF99-70
AF99-63 AF99-61
AF99-69
AF99-68 AF99-65
AF99-64 AF99-89
See page 04CD/2/13,
04CD/2/29
See page 04CD/2/13,
04CD/2/29
See page 04CD/2/13,
04CD/2/29
See page 04CD/2/14,
04CD/2/29
See page 04CD/2/13,
04CD/2/29
See page 04CD/2/14,
04CD/2/29
See page 04CD/2/15,
04CD/2/30
See page 04CD/2/15,
04CD/2/30
See page 04CD/2/15,
04CD/2/30
See page 04CD/2/15,
04CD/2/30
Note S : See page 04CD/2/50
Mushroom head
(40mm dia.)
AM22M0R, M5R
S
Mushroom head
(29mm dia.)
AM22M4R
S
AF99-58
AF99-67
See page 04CD/2/15,
04CD/2/30
See page 04CD/2/15,
04CD/2/30
AM22V0E AM22VSE
KK02-236A KK02-237A
arrow)
arrow)
See page 04CD/2/16,
04CD/2/31
See page 04CD/2/16,
04CD/2/31
(40mm dia. with
mechanical indicator)
See page 04CD/2/16,
04CD/2/31
AW22VME
KKD07-091 S S

04CD/2/3
AM22V0F Push-lock, turn-reset
arrow)
See page 04CD/2/17,
04CD/2/32
See page 04CD/2/18,
04CD/2/33
■ Pilot lights
Dome DM22D0L
See page 04CD/2/27,
04CD/2/34
Key AM22JR, JCR
S KKD09-014
Lever AM22WR, WCR
S AF99-76
AM22 and DM22
■ Illuminated selector
Operator Type
Knob AM22PL
S AF99-79
arrow)
AM22VSF Push-lock, turn-reset
(40mm dia. transparent
in all colors with white
arrow)
AM22VDF
KK02-339A KK02-241A KK02-243A
Knob AM22PR, PCR
S AF99-82
See page 04CD/2/17,
04CD/2/32
See page 04CD/2/17,
04CD/2/32
S : See page 04CD/2/50
See page 04CD/2/18,
04CD/2/33
See page 04CD/2/18,
04CD/2/33
See page 04CD/2/25,
04CD/2/34
Faceted DM22K0L
S AF99-87
Extended round DM22E3L
S AF99-85
S AF99-88
See page 04CD/2/27,
04CD/2/35
See page 04CD/2/27,
04CD/2/35
Notes: With resitor unit type: Not approved standard
S
S
S

04CD/2/4
AM22 and DM22
AM22 E0L – 10 E3 R
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
AM22: 22mm-dia. illuminated pushbutton
➁ Operator
F0L: Flush round head
F5L: Flush round head (Alternate)
G4L: Extended with transparent full guard
G9L: Extended with transparent full guard (Alternate)
G2L: Extended with full guard (With openings)
G7L: Extended with full guard (With openings, alternate)
V0F: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with white arrow)
VSF: Push-lock, turn-reset (29mm dia. with white arrow)
VDF: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. transparent in all colors
with white arrow)
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 50: 5NO
05: 5NC
➃ Lamp voltage
• Incandescent lamp *1
• LED lamp
63: 6V DC, without transformer *1
B3: 12V AC/DC, without transformer *1
C3: 15V AC/DC, without transformer *1
➄ Color of lens
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red *2 A: Orange
W: White S: Blue
➅ Special product
ZM: Metal nut
Notes: *1 Except for emergency stop illuminated pushbutton.

04CD/2/5
AM22 and DM22
Pushbuttons
AM22 E0R – 10 R
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄
AM22: 22mm-dia. pushbutton
➁ Operator
M5R: Mushroom head (40mm dia. alternate)
G8R:Extended with full guard (24mm dia. alternate)
M8R:Mushroom head with full guard (40mm dia. alternate)
V0E: Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with white arrow)
VSE: Push-lock, turn-reset (29mm dia. with white arrow)
VME:Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with mechanical indicator)
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 44: 4NO+4NC
50: 5NO
05: 5NC
➃ Color of button
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red* A: Orange
B: Black S: Blue
W: White
T: Green, Red, Black (For AM22F0R)
➄ Special product
ZM: Metal nut
Notes: * Button color of emergency stop switches are Red only.
• The manufacturing range varies depending on the model. For details, refer

04CD/2/6
AM22 and DM22
AM22 PL – 2 10 E3 G
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈
AM22: 22mm dia. selector switch and illuminated selector switch
➁ Operator
• Selector switch
PR: Knob
WR: Lever
JR: Key
PL: Knob
➂ Operation
4: 4-position, maintained (For AM22PCR, WCR)
5: 5-position, maintained (For AM22PCR, WCR)
A: Left
B: Left and right
D: Right
E: Center
F: Right and center
G: Left and center
10: 1NO 30: 3NO
01: 1NC 03: 3NC
11: 1NO+1NC 33: 3NO+3NC
20: 2NO 40: 4NO
02: 2NC 04: 4NC
22: 2NO+2NC 44: 4NO+4NC
50: 5NO
05: 5NC
Note: Control type: See page 04CD/2/22 to 04CD/2/24
➅ Lamp voltage
• LED lamp
➆ Color of knob
G: Green
R: Red
➇ Key type No.
A, B, C, D, E or F
➈ Special product
ZM: Metal nut
Notes: •The manufacturing range varies depending on the model. For details,

04CD/2/7
AM22 and DM22
Pilot lights
DM22 D0L – E3 W
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄
DM22: 22mm dia. pilot light
➁ Lens
D0L: Dome
E3L: Extended round
K0L: Faceted
➂ Lamp voltage
• LED lamp
➃ Color of lens
G: Green Y: Yellow
R: Red A: Orange
W: White S: Blue
➄ Special product
ZM: Metal nut
Notes: • The manufacturing range varies depending on the model. For details,
H8: 100-110V AC/DC, short-body with transformer
L8: 115-127V AC/DC, short-body with transformer
M8: 200-220V AC/DC, short-body with transformer

UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
TÜV: EN60947-5-1
EN60947-5-5
04CD/2/8
Mechanical durability:
500m/s2
-10 to +50°C
AM22 and DM22
File No. E44592
File No. LR20479
Pushbutton, Illuminated pushbutton: R9551062
: R50028146
Description Pushbutton switch Pilot light
switch
Selector switch
Operating frequency
Dielectric strength
Pollution degree
Vibration
Shock
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity
600V AC/DC *1
See page 04CD/2/9
6kV
1000A
Fuse 15A
3
-10 to +70°C, *5
(Illuminated type: -10 to +50°C *6)
-40 to +80°C
45 to 85% RH (within -5 to +40°C)
IP65
*3 Emergency stop type: 10 to 500Hz, double amplitude 0.7mm (acceleration 50m/s2), according to the test
condition of EN60947-5-5 (1997)
*5 AM22V0E, VSE type: -20 to +60°C
*6 AM22V0F, VDF, VSF type: -20 to +50°C

04CD/2/9
AM22 and DM22
Emergency stop pusubutton switch 300,000
Emergency stop illuminated pusubutton
Maintained 5, 6, 7, 8-contact 500,000
4-contact 500,000
3-contact 500,000
Notes: Key insertion/removal durability for selector switch key types
• Key type 10,000

■ Contact ratings
AC (COS ø=0.35)
A600 60A 6.0A 30A 3.0A 15A 1.5A 12A 1.2A
DC T0.95= 6P (Max. 300ms)
Descripton Contact rated Making current · Breaking current
04CD/2/10
AM22 and DM22
• EN standard/TÜV approved
Descripton Rated operational current
Illuminated pushbutton switch 10A 24V 6.0A 4.0A
Pushbutton 120V 6.0A –
Selector switch (2-position) 125V – 1.3A
250V – 0.45A
480V 2.5A –
600V 2.0A –
Emergency stop pushbutton switch 125V – 0.65A
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch 240V 6.0A –
250V – 0.23A
480V 2.5A –
600V 2.0A –
code
125V 250V 301V–600V
Pushbutton
(Except the overlap contact types)
Pushbutton
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch
Selector switch (2-pos./overlap contact type, 3-, 4-, 5-pos. type) R300 0.22A 0.11A –
Lamp rated voltage UL/CSA Standards, TÜV approved
LED lamp Incandescent lamp
Full-voltage (without transformer) Max. 24V AC/DC Max. 30V AC/DC
With transformer Max. 550V AC (Short-body type: Max. 220V AC)

04CD/2/11
Pushbutton
Ave. required
operating force
Operating travel
Required return
force
9N
Approx. 6mm
–
AM22 and DM22
Description
Note: * 4-position, 5-position : 2NO+2NC
Push-lock type
Selector *
Maintained Spring/manual return Spring return
22N
Approx. 9mm
( Operation angle: Approx. 60°)
0.25N•m
0.15N•m
2-position:
Approx. 90°
3-position:
Approx. 45°
4-position:
Approx. 40°
5-position:
Approx. 30°
0.15N•m
0.13N•m
3-position:
Approx. 45°
0.13N•m
0.1N•m
2-position:
Approx. 60°
3-position:
Approx. 45°
–
■ Lamp ratings
Transformer
Without
transformer
With transformer
(Standard type:
AR9T511)
With resistor unit
(AR9T519-H)
Lamp voltege
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
127V AC
220V AC
254V AC
380V AC
440V AC
480V AC
550V AC
110V DC
Type
–
APX510-6
APX510-D6
APX510-12
APX510-15
–
APX510-24
APX510-6
APX510-6
APX510-24
Rated voltage
–
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
–
24V AC/DC
6V AC
6V AC
24V AC/DC
Consumption
–
Yellow: 50mA AC
Yellow: 33mA DC
–
12mA AC, 11mA DC
1.5VA
2.5VA
1.2W
Type
AHX135
–
–
–
AHX279
AHX144
AHX129
AHX135
AHX135
–
Rated voltage
6.3V AC/DC
–
–
–
18V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
30V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
–
Consumption
0.9W
–
–
–
0.8W
0.9W
0.8W
2VA
2VA
2VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
–
• Replace the mark by the lamp luminous color code, see page 04CD/2/12
• Except AM22V0F, VDF, VSF type

• Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton swtiches
Lamp
LED
Incandescent
Note: • The operating voltage for incandescent lamps is set at 80 to 90%
1.0
0.5
Absolute brightness
04CD/2/12
90 100 110
AM22 and DM22
Approx. 30000h
Approx. 5000h (AC)
Judgement criterion
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
Time✕103[h]
■ Combination of lens color and LED lamp luminous color
[AC voltage100%]
100,000
50,000
20,000
10,000
5,000
2,000
1,000
500
200
70 80
Voltage [%]
100
50
Durability
Luminous
flur
Durability (h)
Luminous flur
[%]
Incandescent lamp voltage characteristics
Transformer
Without
transformer
With
transformer
(Type: AM9T511)
Lamp
voltage
6V AC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
127V AC
220V AC
254V AC
380V AC
440V AC
480V AC
550V AC
LED
Type
AR9L001-6R
AR9L001-24R
AR9L001-6R
Rated
voltage
6V AC
24V AC/DC
6V AC
Consumption
9mA AC
15mA AC, 14mA DC
1.5VA
3.0VA
■ Lamp durability
Button
Color
Code
Green
G
Red
R
White
W
Yellow
Y
Orange
A
Blue
S
Red
R
(AM22V0F, VDF, VSF)
Note: Replace the mark by Lamp voltage. See page 04CD/2/11
LED lamp
Luminous color
Green
Red
Orange
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Red
Type
APX510- G
APX510- R
APX510- O
APX510- Y
APX510- A
APX510- S
AR9L001- R

Flush round head Without 1NO AM22F0L-10 3 AM22F5L-10 3 AM22F0L-10 4 AM22F5L-10 4
1NC AM22F0L-01 3 AM22F5L-01 3 AM22F0L-01 4 AM22F5L-01 4
1NO+1NC AM22F0L-11 3 AM22F5L-11 3 AM22F0L-11 4 AM22F5L-11 4
2NO AM22F0L-20 3 AM22F5L-20 3 AM22F0L-20 4 AM22F5L-20 4
2NO+2NC AM22F0L-22 3 — AM22F0L-22 4 —
With 1NO AM22F0L-10 3 AM22F5L-10 3 AM22F0L-10 4 AM22F5L-10 4
1NO+1NC AM22F0L-11 3 AM22F5L-11 3 AM22F0L-11 4 AM22F5L-11 4
2NO AM22F0L-20 3 AM22F5L-20 3 AM22F0L-20 4 AM22F5L-20 4
AF99-70 2NC AM22F0L-02 3 AM22F5L-02 3 AM22F0L-02 4 AM22F5L-02 4
Extended round head Without 1NO AM22E0L-10 3 AM22E5L-10 3 AM22E0L-10 4 AM22E5L-10 4
1NC AM22E0L-01 3 AM22E5L-01 3 AM22E0L-01 4 AM22E5L-01 4
1NO+1NC AM22E0L-11 3 AM22E5L-11 3 AM22E0L-11 4 AM22E5L-11 4
2NO AM22E0L-20 3 AM22E5L-20 3 AM22E0L-20 4 AM22E5L-20 4
2NO+2NC AM22E0L-22 3 — AM22E0L-22 4 —
With 1NO AM22E0L-10 3 AM22E5L-10 3 AM22E0L-10 4 AM22E5L-10 4
1NO+1NC AM22E0L-11 3 AM22E5L-11 3 AM22E0L-11 4 AM22E5L-11 4
2NO AM22E0L-20 3 AM22E5L-20 3 AM22E0L-20 4 AM22E5L-20 4
AF99-63 2NC AM22E0L-02 3 AM22E5L-02 3 AM22E0L-02 4 AM22E5L-02 4
Mushroom head Without 1NO AM22M0L-10 3 AM22M5L-10 3 AM22M0L-10 4 AM22M5L-10 4
(40mm dia.) 1NC AM22M0L-01 3 AM22M5L-01 3 AM22M0L-01 4 AM22M5L-01 4
1NO+1NC AM22M0L-11 3 AM22M5L-11 3 AM22M0L-11 4 AM22M5L-11 4
2NO AM22M0L-20 3 AM22M5L-20 3 AM22M0L-20 4 AM22M5L-20 4
2NC AM22M0L-02 3 AM22M5L-02 3 AM22M0L-02 4 AM22M5L-02 4
2NO+2NC AM22M0L-22 3 — AM22M0L-22 4 —
With 1NO AM22M0L-10 3 AM22M5L-10 3 AM22M0L-10 4 AM22M5L-10 4
AF99-59 2NC AM22M0L-02 3 AM22M5L-02 3 AM22M0L-02 4 AM22M5L-02 4
Mushroom head Without 1NO AM22M4L-10 3 AM22M9L-10 3 AM22M4L-10 4 AM22M9L-10 4
(29mm dia.) 1NC AM22M4L-01 3 AM22M9L-01 3 AM22M4L-01 4 AM22M9L-01 4
2NC+2NC AM22M4L-22 3 — AM22M4L-22 4 —
With 1NO AM22M4L-10 3 AM22M9L-10 3 AM22M4L-10 4 AM22M9L-10 4
AF99-61 2NC AM22M4L-02 3 AM22M9L-02 3 AM22M4L-02 4 AM22M9L-02 4
04CD/2/13
Type Type Type Type
AM22
Note: See page 04CD/2/14

AM22
Extended with transparent Without 1NO AM22G4L-10■3 AM22G9L-10■3 AM22G4L-10■4 AM22G9L-10■4
full guard (24mm dia.) 1NC AM22G4L-01■3 AM22G9L-01■3 AM22G4L-01■4 AM22G9L-01■4
Extended with full guard Without 1NO AM22G2L-10■3 AM22G7L-10■3 AM22G2L-10■4 AM22G7L-10■4
(24mm dia. with openings) 1NC AM22G2L-01■3 AM22G7L-01■3 AM22G2L-01■4 AM22G7L-01■4
04CD/2/14
Type Type Type Type
1NO+1NC AM22G4L-11■3 AM22G9L-11■3 AM22G4L-11■4 AM22G9L-11■4
2NO AM22G4L-20■3 AM22G9L-20■3 AM22G4L-20■4 AM22G9L-20■4
2NC AM22G4L-02■3 AM22G9L-02■3 AM22G4L-02■4 AM22G9L-02■4
2NO+2NC AM22G4L-22■3 — AM22G4L-22■4 —
With 1NO AM22G4L-10■3 AM22G9L-10■3 AM22G4L-10■4 AM22G9L-10■4
AF99-66 2NC AM22G4L-02■3 AM22G9L-02■3 AM22G4L-02■4 AM22G9L-02■4
1NO+1NC AM22G2L-11 3 AM22G7L-11■3 AM22G2L-11■4 AM22G7L-11■4
2NO+2NC AM22G2L-22■3 — AM22G2L-22■4 —
With 1NO AM22G2L-10■3 AM22G7L-10■3 AM22G2L-10■4 AM22G7L-10■4
AF99-69 2NC AM22G2L-02■3 AM22G7L-02■3 AM22G2L-02■4 AM22G7L-02■4
• Lens color
Code G R W S Y A
• Voltage
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
6V AC A —
5.5V AC/DC — 5
12V AC/DC B —
15V AC/DC C C
20V AC/DC — D
24V AC/DC E E
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30
Contact 3NC 2NO+2NC 4NO 4NC 5NO 5NC 3NO+3NC
arrangement
Code 03 22 40 04 50 05 33

04CD/2/15
Pushbuttons
AM22
action action
Type Type
Flush round head 1NO AM22F0R-10 AM22F5R-10
1NC AM22F0R-01 AM22F5R-01
1NO+1NC AM22F0R-11 AM22F5R-11
2NO AM22F0R-20 AM22F5R-20
2NC AM22F0R-02 AM22F5R-02
AF99-68 2NO+2NC AM22F0R-22 AM22F5R-22
Extended round head 1NO AM22E0R-10 AM22E5R-10
1NC AM22E0R-01 AM22E5R-01
1NO+1NC AM22E0R-11 AM22E5R-11
2NO AM22E0R-20 AM22E5R-20
2NC AM22E0R-02 AM22E5R-02
AF99-64 2NO+2NC AM22E0R-22 AM22E5R-22
Mushroom head 1NO AM22M0R-10 AM22M5R-10
(40mm dia.) 1NC AM22M0R-01 AM22M5R-01
1NO+1NC AM22M0R-11 AM22M5R-11
2NO AM22M0R-20 AM22M5R-20
2NC AM22M0R-02 AM22M5R-02
AF99-58 2NO+2NC AM22M0R-22 AM22M5R-22
action action
Type Type
Mushroom head 1NO AM22M4R-10 —
(29mm dia.) 1NC AM22M4R-01 —
1NO+1NC AM22M4R-11 —
2NO AM22M4R-20 —
2NC AM22M4R-02 —
AF99-67 2NO+2NC AM22M4R-22 —
Extended with full 1NO AM22G3R-10 AM22G8R-10
guard (24mm dia.) 1NC AM22G3R-01 AM22G8R-01
1NO+1NC AM22G3R-11 AM22G8R-11
2NO AM22G3R-20 AM22G8R-20
2NC AM22G3R-02 AM22G8R-02
AF99-65 2NO+2NC AM22G3R-22 AM22G8R-22
Mushroom head with 1NO AM22M3R-10 AM22M8R-10
full guard (40mm dia.) 1NC AM22M3R-01 AM22M8R-01
1NO+1NC AM22M3R-11 AM22M8R-11
2NO AM22M3R-20 AM22M8R-20
2NC AM22M3R-02 AM22M8R-02
AF99-89 2NO+2NC AM22M3R-22 AM22M8R-22
• Button color
Code G R W S Y A B
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30 03
arrangement
Code 22 40 04 50 05 33 44

AM22
04CD/2/16
Operator Contact T y p e
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NC AM22V0E-01R
(40mm dia. with 1NO+1NC AM22V0E-11R
white arrow) 2NC AM22V0E-02R
3NC AM22V0E-03R
2NO+2NC AM22V0E-22R
KK02-236A 4NC AM22V0E-04R
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NC AM22VSE-01R
(29mm dia. with 1NO+1NC AM22VSE-11R
white arrow) 2NC AM22VSE-02R
3NC AM22VSE-03R
2NO+2NC AM22VSE-22R
KK02-237A 4NC AM22VSE-04R
Push-lock, turn-reset 1NC AM22VME-01R
(40mm dia. with 1NO+1NC AM22VME-11R
mechanical 2NC AM22VME-02R
indicator) 3NC AM22VME-03R
2NO+2NC AM22VME-22R
KKD07-091 4NC AM22VME-04R
• Used with AR9B290-S for NO contact.

04CD/2/17
AM22
Operator Transformer Contact LED lamp
Type
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AM22V0F-01■ 3R
(40mm dia. with 1NO+1NC AM22V0F-11■ 3R
white arrow) 2NC AM22V0F-02■ 3R
3NC AM22V0F-03■ 3R
With 1NC AM22V0F-01■ 3R
1NO+1NC AM22V0F-11■ 3R
KK02-240A 2NC AM22V0F-02■ 3R
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AM22VSF-01■ 3R
(29mm dia. with 1NO+1NC AM22VSF-11■ 3R
white arrow) 2NC AM22VSF-02■ 3R
3NC AM22VSF-03■ 3R
With 1NC AM22VSF-01■ 3R
1NO+1NC AM22VSF-11■ 3R
KK02-241A 2NC AM22VSF-02■ 3R
Push-lock, turn-reset Without 1NC AM22VDF-01■ 3R
(40mm dia. transparent 1NO+1NC AM22VDF-11■ 3R
in all colors with 2NC AM22VDF-02■ 3R
white arrow) 3NC AM22VDF-03■ 3R
With 1NC AM22VDF-01■ 3R
1NO+1NC AM22VDF-11■ 3R
KK02-243A 2NC AM22VDF-02■ 3R
• Voltage
Transformer Code
LED
Without 6V AC A
24V AC/DC E
Transformer Code
LED
With 100–110V AC H
115–127V AC L
200–220V AC M
230–254V AC Q
350–380V AC S
400–440V AC T
480V AC V
500–550V AC W
• Used with AR9B290-S for NO contact.

2-position
04CD/2/18
key removable Switch with
position round bezel Contact Operator position
arrangement
Left Right
1NO (1) Upper contact
➂ ●
➃
1NC (1) Upper contact
➀ ●
➁
1NO+1NC Upper contact
➂ ➃
(1) ●
(2) Lower contact
➀ ●
➁
2NO+2NC Upper contact
(1) ●
➂ ➃
(3) ➂ ● ➃
Lower contact
(2) ➀ ● ➁
(4) ➀ ● ➁
Knob Maintained 1NO AM22PR-210B
1NC AM22PR-201B
1NO+1NC AM22PR-211B
2NO AM22PR-020B
2NC AM22PR-202B
each 90° 2NO+2NC AM22PR-222B
Spring return 1NO AM22PR-010B
1NC AM22PR-001B
1NO+1NC AM22PR-011B
2NO AM22PR-020B
2NC AM22PR-002B
60° 2NO+2NC AM22PR-022B
Lever Maintained 1NO AM22WR-210B
1NC AM22WR-201B
1NO+1NC AM22WR-211B
2NO AM22WR-220B
2NC AM22WR-202B
each 90° 2NO+2NC AM22WR-222B
Spring return 1NO AM22WR-010B
1NC AM22WR-001B
1NO+1NC AM22WR-011B
2NO AM22WR-020B
2NC AM22WR-002B
60° 2NO+2NC AM22WR-022B
Key Maintained ■: Key 1NO AM22JR-2■10( )
removable 1NC AM22JR-2■01( )
position 1NO+1NC AM22JR-2■11( )
( ): Key type 2NO AM22JR-2■20( )
2NC AM22JR-2■02( )
each 90° See page 2NO+2NC AM22JR-2■22( )
04CD/2/20
Spring return 1NO AM22JR-0A10( )
1NC AM22JR-0A01( )
1NO+1NC AM22JR-0A11( )
2NO AM22JR-0A20( )
2NC AM22JR-0A02( )
2NO+2NC AM22JR-0A22( )
60°
Selector Switches
AM22
•➀ – ➁, ➂ – ➃: Contact block terminal No.
• Contact arrangements: See page 04CD/2/20
Upper contact
Lower contact
Operator
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
● Contact closed
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
AF99-82
AF99-76
KKD09-014

04CD/2/19
each 45˚
each 45˚
Selector Switches
AM22
3-position
Switch with
round bezel Contact Operation position
arrange-ment
L C R L C R
Knob Maintained 1NO+1NC AM22PR-311B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
2NO AM22PR-320B ➂ ➀
2NC AM22PR-302B ● ●
2NO+2NC AM22PR-322B ➃ ➁
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AM22PR-611B
return 2NO AM22PR-620B
2NC AM22PR-602B
2NO+2NC AM22PR-622B
(1) (2)
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AM22PR-711B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AM22PR-720B ➂ ➀
2NC AM22PR-702B ● ●
2NO+2NC AM22PR-722B ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AM22PR-122B 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
(3) (4)
Lever Maintained 1NO+1NC AM22WR-311B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
2NO AM22WR-320B ➂ ➀
2NC AM22WR-302B ● ●
2NO+2NC AM22WR-322B ➃ ➁
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AM22WR-611B
return 2NO AM22WR-620B
2NC AM22WR-602B
2NO+2NC AM22WR-622B
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AM22WR-711B 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AM22WR-720B ➂ ➀
2NC AM22WR-702B ● ●
2NO+2NC AM22WR-722B ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AM22WR-122B 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
AF99-82
AF99-76
Note: • Contact arrangements: See page 04CD/2/20 ● Contact closed

04CD/2/20
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
Selector Switches
AM22
position Switch with
round bezel Contact Operator position
arrange-ment
L C R L C R
Key Maintained ■: Key 1NO+1NC AM22JR-3■11( ) 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
removable 2NO AM22JR-3■20( ) ➂ ➀
position 2NC AM22JR-3■02( ) ● ●
( ): Key type 2NO+2NC AM22JR-3■22( ) ➃ ➁
each 45˚
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AM22JR-6■11( )
return 2NO AM22JR-6■20( )
2NC AM22JR-6■02( )
2NO+2NC AM22JR-6■22( )
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC AM22JR-7■11( ) 1NO+1NC Upper contact Lower contact
return 2NO AM22JR-7■20( ) ➂ ➀
2NC AM22JR-7■02( ) ● ●
2NO+2NC AM22JR-7■22( ) ➃ ➁
Spring return 2NO+2NC AM22JR-1E22( ) 2NO+2NC Upper contact Lower contact
➀ ➀
➁ ➁
➂ ➂
● ●
➃ ➃
Notes: • Operator position L: Left, C: Center, R: Right
• ➀ – ➁, ➂ –➃: Contact block terminal No.
Code A B C D E F G
Removable
position
AM22JR-2 ● ● – ● – – –
AM22JR-0 ● – – – – – –
AM22JR-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AM22JR-6 – – – ● ● ● –
AM22JR-7 ● – – – ● – ●
AM22JR-1 – – – – ● – –
• Key code No.
A, B, C, D, E and F
(3) (4)
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°45°
KKD09-014
● Contact closed
arrangement
Code 10 01 11 20 02 30 03
arrangement
Code 22 40 04 50 05 33 44
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator
Upper contact
Lower contact

Selector Switches
04CD/2/21
3-position
key removable arrangement Switch with
position round bezel
Knob Maintained Replace the ■ AM22PCR-3■B
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
mark by the contact
arrangement code
Spring/manual (shown on next page). AM22PCR-6■B
return
Spring/manual AM22PCR-7■B
return
Spring return AM22PCR-1■B
Lever Maintained Replace the ■ AM22WCR-3■B
mark by the contact
arrangement code
Spring/manual (shown on next page). AM22WCR-6■B
return
Spring/manual AM22WCR-7■B
return
Spring return AM22WCR-1■B
Key Maintained Replace the Replace the ■ AM22JCR-3 ■( )
Spring/manual position code: (shown on next page). AM22JCR-6 ■( )
F or G
Spring/manual AM22JCR-7 ■( )
return
Spring return AM22JCR-1E■( )
AM22
Code A B C D E F G
Removable
position
AM22JCR-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
AM22JCR-6 – – – ● ● ● –
AM22JCR-7 ● – – – ● – ●
AM22JCR-1 – – – – ● – –
• Key code No.
A, B, C, D, E and F
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
each 45˚
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°
KK02-248A
KK02-249A
KKD09-013

04CD/2/22
Selector Switches
AM22
code
position
2NO+2NC 064 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ● ●
1NO+1NC 07F (1) NC
(2) NO ●
– – – – –
– – – – –
2NO+2NC 07C* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 084 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 094* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 104 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ● ●
2NO+2NC 11C* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
code
position
2NC 01F (1) NC
(2) NC
– – – – –
– – – – –
2NO+2NC 014 (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
4NC 01J (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NC
(4) NC
2NO+2NC 024 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ● ●
2NO+2NC 03C* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
(Maintained
only)
2NO+2NC 044* (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 054 (1) NC
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
* These may be some overlap in the contact when switching between
notches.
(Maintained
only)
(Maintained
only)
Operator
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

04CD/2/23
Selector Switches
AM22
code
position
2NO+2NC 124* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 134* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ● ●
(4) NO ●
3NO+1NC 14D* (1) NO ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
3NO+1NC 15A* (1) NO ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 164 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 174* (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
2NO+2NC 184 (1) NC ●
(2) NC ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
* These may be some overlap in the contact when switching between
notches.
code
position
2NO+2NC 194 (1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
4NO 20B (1) NO ●
(2) NO ●
(3) NO ●
(4) NO ●
(Maintained
only)
Operator
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

04CD/2/24
code
Mounting Type
position 1 2 3 4 5
(1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO
(4) NO
(1) NC
(2) NC
(3) NO
(4) NO
Selector Switches
AM22
4, 5-position
arrangement Switch with
round bezel
Knob 2NO+2NC 4-position Replace the ■ AM22PCR-4■B
arrangement code
(shown below)
5-position AM22PCR-5■B
maintained
Lever 2NO+2NC 4-position AM22WCR-4■B
maintained
5-position AM22WCR-5■B
maintained
Operator position
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
(The following
contact is only
available.)
(Main-tained
only)
(Main-tained
only)
40° 30°
KK02-248A
KK02-249A
Name plate side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operator

Knob Maintained 1NO Without AM22PL-210■ 3 Without AM22PL-210■ 4
1NC AM22PL-201■ 3 AM22PL-201■ 4
1NO+1NC AM22PL-211■ 3 AM22PL-211■ 4
2NO AM22PL-020■ 3 AM22PL-020■ 4
2NO+2NC AM22PL-222■ 3 AM22PL-222■ 4
1NO With AM22PL-210■ 3 With AM22PL-210■ 4
each 90° 1NC AM22PL-201■ 3 AM22PL-201■ 4
1NO+1NC AM22PL-211■ 3 AM22PL-211■ 4
2NO AM22PL-220■ 3 AM22PL-220■ 4
Spring return 1NO Without AM22PL-010■ 3 Without AM22PL-010■ 4
1NC AM22PL-001■ 3 AM22PL-001■ 4
1NO+1NC AM22PL-011■ 3 AM22PL-011■ 4
2NO AM22PL-020■ 3 AM22PL-020■ 4
1NO With AM22PL-010■ 3 With AM22PL-010■ 4
60° 1NC AM22PL-001■ 3 AM22PL-001■ 4
1NO+1NC AM22PL-011■ 3 AM22PL-011■ 4
2NO AM22PL-020■ 3 AM22PL-020■ 4
04CD/2/25
2-position
AM22
AF99-79
3-position
Knob Maintained 1NO+1NC Without AM22PL-311■ 3 Without AM22PL-311■ 4
2NO+2NC AM22PL-322■ 3 AM22PL-322■ 4
1NO+1NC With AM22PL-311■ 3 With AM22PL-311■ 4
Spring/manual 1NO+1NC Without AM22PL-611■ 3 Without AM22PL-611■ 4
return 1NO+1NC With AM22PL-611■ 3 With AM22PL-611■ 4
1NO+1NC Without AM22PL-711■ 3 Without AM22PL-711■ 4
1NO+1NC With AM22PL-711■ 3 With AM22PL-711■ 4
each 45˚
each 45˚
AF99-79
Note: , ■ See page 04CD/2/26

04CD/2/26
AM22
LED Incandescent
6V DC 6 –
6V AC A –
12V AC/DC B –
15V AC/DC C C
20V AC/DC – D
24V AC/DC E E
115-127V AC L L
200-220V AC M M
230-254V AC Q Q
350-380V AC S S
400-440V AC T T
480V AC V V
500-550V AC W W
Code G R W S Y A
2-position
arrangement
position
(2) NC ● –
(2) NO – ●
(2) NO – ●
*1 (2) NC ● –
(3) NO – ●
(4) NC ● –
*1 (2) NC ● –
(3) NO – ●
(4) NO – ●
Notes: *1 : AM22PL-2
Without transformer
3-position
arrangement
position
*1 (2) NC – – ●
1NO+1NC (1) NO – – ●
*2 (2) NC ● – –
2NO+2NC (1) NO ● – –
*3 (2) NC – – ●
(3) NO ● – –
(4) NC – – ●
*1 (2) NO ● – –
1NO+1NC (1) NC ● – –
*2 (2) NO – – ●
2NO+2NC (1) NC – – ●
*3 (2) NC – – ●
(3) NO ● – –
(4) NO ● – –
Notes: *1 : AM22PL-3, 6 *3 : AM22PL-3
*2 : AM22PL-7
With transformer
Lamp terminal
Name plate side
(3) (1)
(4) (2)
Transformer
Name plate side
(4) (3) (2) (1)

04CD/2/27
Dome Without 6V AC DM22D0L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DM22D0L-54
6V DC DM22D0L-63 — —
12V AC/DC DM22D0L-B3 15V AC/DC DM22D0L-C4
24V AC/DC DM22D0L-E3 24V AC/DC DM22D0L-E4
With 100–110V AC DM22D0L-H3 100–110V AC DM22D0L-H4
200–220V AC DM22D0L-M3 200–220V AC DM22D0L-M4
Extended round Without 6V AC DM22E3L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DM22E3L-54
6V DC DM22E3L-63 — —
12V AC/DC DM22E3L-B3 15V AC/DC DM22E3L-C4
24V AC/DC DM22E3L-E3 24V AC/DC DM22E3L-E4
With 100–110V AC DM22E3L-H3 100–110V AC DM22E3L-H4
200–220V AC DM22E3L-M3 200–220V AC DM22E3L-M4
Faceted Without 6V AC DM22K0L-A3 5.5V AC/DC DM22K0L-54
6V DC DM22K0L-63 — —
12V AC/DC DM22K0L-B3 15V AC/DC DM22K0L-C4
24V AC/DC DM22K0L-E3 24V AC/DC DM22K0L-E4
With 100–110V AC DM22K0L-H3 100–110V AC DM22K0L-H4
200–220V AC DM22K0L-M3 200–220V AC DM22K0L-M4
Pilot Lights
DM22
AF99-88
AF99-85
AF99-87
Dome 100–110V AC DM22D0L-H9 100–110V AC DM22D0L-H8
200–220V AC DM22D0L-M9 200–220V AC DM22D0L-M8
Extended round 100–110V AC DM22E3L-H9 100–110V AC DM22E3L-H8
200–220V AC DM22E3L-M9 200–220V AC DM22E3L-M8
Faceted 100–110V AC DM22K0L-H9 100–110V AC DM22K0L-H8
200–220V AC DM22K0L-M9 200–220V AC DM22K0L-M8
KK02-245A
KK02-246A
KK02-247A
Note: See page 04CD/2/28

• Lens color
04CD/2/28
Pilot Lights
DM22
Color
Code
Green
G
Red
R
White
W
Blue
S
Yellow
Y
Orange
A
• Lamp voltage
Description
Without transformer
With transformer
With resistor unit
Voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
110V DC
Code
Standard type
LED
–
A3
63
B3
C3
–
E3
H3
L3
M3
Q3
S3
T3
V3
W3
H7
Incandescent
54
–
–
–
C4
D4
E4
H4
L4
M4
Q4
S4
T4
V4
W4
–
Short-body type
LED
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
H9
L9
M9
–
–
–
–
–
–
Incandescent
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
H8
L8
M8
–
–
–
–
–
–

04CD/2/29
24
(Extended)
44 Nut
Flush/Extended
AM22 and DM22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
19
19
39
1 99
59 1 to 6
79
37
44
13 (Flush)
ø24
30
37
ø24
30
37
ø24
30
37
ø40
30
37
ø29
30
37
Nut
Packing
Panel Thickness
Name
plate
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal
cover
24.3
13
19
39
1 99
1 to 6
59
79
37
44
Nut
Panel Thickness Packing
Name
plate
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal cover
13
19
39
1 99
1 to 6
59
79
37
44
Nut
Name
plate
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal cover
19
19
39
1 99
1 to 6
59
79
37
44
Nut
Name
plate
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal cover
19
19
39
1 99
1 to 6
59
79
ø24
30
37
37
Name
plate
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal cover
19
19
39
1 99
1 to 6
1 59 (63)
79
37
44
24.5*
Nut
Packing
Panel Thickness Name
plate
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal cover
Transformer
(Extended)
13 (Flush)
*
Lamp terminal Lamp terminal
Lamp terminal
Lamp terminal
Lamp terminal
AM22F0L, F5L, E0L, E5L
With transformer
Without transformer
AM22M0L, M5L
Extended with transparent full guard
AM22M4L, M9L AM22G4L, G9L
Extended with full guard (with openings)
AM22G2L, G7L

Panel Thickness
AM22M0R, M5R
1 19
04CD/2/30
Name plate
Panel Thickness
AM22M4R
AM22 and DM22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
ø24
30
1 19
19 13 (Flush)
39
1 to 6
37
44
99
19
39
1 99
37
37
44
24
ø40
26
ø40
Nut
Terminal cover
(Extended)
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Nut
Packing
Terminal cover Nut
Name plate
Name plate
Name plate
Name plate
Packing
ø48
Panel Thickness
59
79
ø24
30
19
39
1 to 6
37
44
99
37
(M3.5)
Nut
59
79
1 to 6
59
79
19
39
1 99
37
44
ø29
24
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal cover
Nut
Packing
1 to 6 30
37
Panel Thickness
59
79
19
39
1 99
37
44
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal cover
1 to 6 Packing
59
79
Flush/Extended
AM22F0R, F5R
AM22E0R, E5R
Extended with full guard (24mm dia.) Mushroom with full guard (40mm dia.)
AM22G3R, G8R AM22M3R, M8R

04CD/2/31
1 32.5
Panel
Thickness
1 to 6
1 32.5
1 59.5
Nut
AM22 and DM22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
59.5
44
39.5
37
ø40
37
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Nut
Packing
Name plate
30
ø16
Terminal cover
59.5
39.5
44
37
37
ø29
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Panel
Thickness
Nut
Packing
Name plate
30
ø16
Terminal cover
AM22V0E
AM22VSE
1 to 6
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. with mechanical indicator)
AM22VME
32.5
39.5
37
44
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Panel
Thickness
Packing
1 to 6 Name plate
ø40
30
ø16
37
Terminal cover

1 32.5
Without transformer
04CD/2/32
1 32.5
ø40
ø40
AM22 and DM22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
59.5(63.5*)
39.5
44
37
37
24.5*
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Panel
Thickness
Nut
Packing
Name plate
ø40
30
ø16
Terminal cover
Transformer
59.5
39.5
44
37
37
Terminal screw(M3.5)
Nut
Packing
Name plate
30
ø16
Terminal cover
Lamp terminal
1 32.5
59.5
39.5
44
37
37
ø29
Nut
Packing
Name plate
30
ø16
Terminal cover
Lamp terminal
1 32.5
59.5
39.5
44
37
37
Nut
Packing
Name plate
30
ø16
Terminal cover
Lamp terminal
1 to 6
Panel
Thickness
1 to 6
Panel
Thickness
1 to 6
Panel
Thickness
1 to 6
AM22V0F
AM22VSF
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. transparent in all colors with white arrow)
AM22VDF
Without transformer

04CD/2/33
■ Dimensions, mm
AM22PR, PCR
Terminal cover
Packing
1 to 6
AM22WR, WCR
1 99 26
Terminal cover
Panel Thickness
1 to 6
1 99 23 24
AM22 and DM22
Dimensions
26
39
1 99
59
79
ø24
30
37
ø24
30
37
27
37
44
Terminal screw
(M3.5) Nut
ø24.5
30
37
Nut
Panel Thickness
Name plate
19 13
39
59
79
37
44
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Packing
Name plate
19 13
39
59
79
37
44
(M3.5)
Packing
Name plate
19 13
Panel Thickness
1 to 6
Knob
Lever
Key
AM22JR, JCR

AM22 and DM22
Dimensions
Knob AM22PL
1 99
Terminal cover
Dome DM22D0L
With transformer, with resistor unit Without transfor mer
1 58 (62) 19
Short body/with transformer
04CD/2/34
19 34 1
Nut
Panel Thickness
■ Dimensions, mm
• Pilot lights
ø24
30
37
ø24
30
37
26
19 13
26
39
1 to 6
39
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
1 59 (63)
1 99
59
79
79
37
44
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Nut
Packing
Lamp
terminal
19 13
Panel Thickness Name plate
37
44
24.5*
Nut
Packing
Panel Thickness Name plate
Terminal cover
Transformer
1 to 6
With transformer
Without transformer
*
*
8
1 to 6
Packing Ter minal
cover
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
8
Nut
Panel Thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal
cover
ø24
30sq.
ø24
30
ø24
30sq.
Transformer
38
Nut
Panel Thickness
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal
cover
20 18.3
Transformer

04CD/2/35
Extended DM22E3L
Panel Thickness
Nut
1 to 6
Transformer
Faceted DM22K0L
1 20.6
Nut
Panel Thickness
Nut
Panel Thickness
Transformer
Transformer
Transformer
AM22 and DM22
Dimensions
■ Dimensions, mm
• Pilot lights
30sq.
1 34 14
Nut
Panel Thickness
1 34 21
8
Panel Thickness
1 to 6
Terminal Packing
cover
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
ø24
30sq.
ø24
ø24
8
1 to 6
Terminal Packing
cover
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
ø24
30sq.
ø24
ø24
30
30
20 18.3 20 18.3 30sq.
38
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal
cover
38
Panel Thickness
Packing
Terminal
cover
8
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal
cover
14
8
1
1 to 6
Packing
Terminal
cover
Terminal screw (M3.5)
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Terminal screw
(M3.5)
Nut
58 (62)*
58 (62)*

Notes on use
Button
04CD/2/36
(Back side of the button)
AM22 and DM22
Notes on use
Fig. 1 Panel cutout hole dimensions, mm
3.2+0.2mm
0
rmax=0.8mm
ø22.3+0.4 0 mm
24.1+00.4mm
Note : If key-washer or legend plate are not used, 3.2mm-wide. location holes
shown in Fig. 1 need not be cutout.
1. Pushbutton with a round bezel (ordinary mounting)
panel, and tighten the nut with the AR9A006 wrench from the
front of the panel to secure the operator as shown in Fig.2.
Fig. 2 Pushbutton with a round bezel
Packing
AF95-465
Wrench
(AR9A006)
Nut
Panel
Operator
Note : Recommended tightening torque is from 1.0 to 1.5N·m.
2. Mounting Procedure for the M3R and M8R
• Insert the operator through the cutout hole from behind the
panel and secure it by the guard ring from the front of the
panel.
Note: The correct tightening torque is 1.0 to 1.5 N•m.
• Use the wrench (AR9A001) to mount the button.
Note:The correct tightening torque is 0.5 to 1.0 N•m.
Fig. 3
■ Method for changing the button, lens, and nameplate
● AM22F0R, F5R, E0R, E5R, G3R, G8R
• To remove the button, insert a small flat-tip screwdriver in the
groove around the periphery of the button, and gently pry it off
working the screwdriver around the entire periphery.
• To attach the button, align the I-shaped protrusion on the back
side of the button with the cross-shaped groove on the plunger
and push the button in.
Fig. 4a
Fig. 5
● AM22M0R, M5R, M4R, M0L, M4L, M5L, M9L
• The button is threaded. Attach it and remove it by hand. When
attaching the button, make sure that it is screwed in
completely.
• For illuminated pushbutton switches, insert the groove of the
nameplate onto the protrusion on the plunger and push in the
nameplate.
Fig. 6
Wrench
(AR9A001)
Button
Guard ring
Packing
Operator
Panel
Button
*Small flat-tip screwdriver
I-shaped protrusion
Groove
Button
Nut
Pull
Button
Nameplate
Groove
Protrusion
Fig. 4b
• In case of G3R, G8R: Loosen and pull the nut, and the button
will come off.

04CD/2/37
Wrench *
(AM9A008)
panel, and as shown in Fig.8, insert the pushbutton into the
operator cylinder while aligning the grooves inside the
pushbutton with the protrusions on the operator.
Note: The correct tightening torque is 0.5 to 1.0N•m.
Fig. 8 Setting pushbutton to operator cylinder
Protrusion
● AM22PR, PCR, WR, WCR
(1) As shown in the following figure, insert the tip of a small
flathead screwdriver into the selector tip groove. Rotate the
screwdriver in the direction indicated by the arrow until the
selector tip rises, and draw out the knob.
(3) Insert the knob, with the selector tip in the floated state, into
the original position of the rotation tube, and push the
selector tip into place.
Fig. 11a
Center button Button
* Provide with products
Pushbutton in side groove
Cylinder inside protrusion
Small flathead screwdriver*
Selector tip groove
AM22 and DM22
Notes on use
● AM22V0E, VSE, VME, V0F, VDF, VSF
As shown in Fig.7, engage the tips of the AM9A008 wrench
into the indentations around the pushbutton center button,
and turn the wrench to loosen and remove the pushbutton
center button, then remove the pushbutton.
Note: The correct tightening torque is 0.5 to 1.0N•m.
Fig. 7
● AM22F0L, F5L, E0L, E5L, G4L, G9L, G2L, DM22E3L
• Engage the protrusions on the front end of the wrench
(AR9A001) with the groove on the lens and screw on the lens.
• Attaching the nameplate
Insert the groove of the nameplate onto the protrusion on the
plunger.
Fig. 9
Wrench
(AR9A001)
Lens
Nameplate
Groove
Groove
● DM22D0L, K0L
• Push the end of the wrench (AHX702) onto the lens and turn
the wrench to attach or remove the lens.
Fig. 10
Lens
Wrench
Fig. 11b
Selector tip
● AM22PL
• To remove an illuminated switch, insert a small flathead
screwdriver or the like into the groove around the periphery of
the knob and pry it off.
Fig. 12a
Periphery of the knob
Knob
Cylinder
Small flathead screwdriver*
Cylinder
Knob
Fig. 12b
*Use a small flathead screwdriver with a head that is about 4 mm wide.

AM22 and DM22
Notes on use
● AM22JR, JCR
• For key type switches, the decorative cover and nut are
threaded. Removing the decorative cover enables the nut to
be removed. Make sure to tighten the decorative cover so that
there is no play.
Fig. 13
04CD/2/38
■ Using accessory ring-packings
Use the required number of ring-packings (1.3mm-thick, 5
pieces, resin mold).
Table below is a guideline for using the packings.
If a locking nut or legend plate is used, the thickness must be
counted as an additional panel thickness.
Panel thickness vs. number of packings (reference data)
Number of packings
Effective panel thickness
including lock-ring and
legend plate thicknesses
• Pilot light
30*2
42*1 30
50*4 37*1 *5
30
*3
The minimum mounting spaces required for AM22•DM22
command switches are given below. (Fig. 15)
Fig. 15
• Illuminated pushbutton and pushbutton
and emergency stop pushbutton
• Illuminated and non-illuminated selectors
Notes: *1 • AM22M0L, M5L, M0R, M5R, V0E, V0F, VDF: 42
• AM22M3R, M8R: 49
• AM22WR, WCR: 40
*2 When mounting contact blocks at 30mm pitch, use it circuit of 380V or
less.
*3 Short body with transformer types: 50mm.
*4 This dimension applies when transformer units or contact blocks face
each other.
*5 This dimension applies when transformer unit or contact block is
mounted on only one side.
see page 04/53 to 04/57
Decorative cover
Applicable type: Water-proof cap AHX797
Dust-proof cap AM9D797
Nut
When attached to the panel in combination with a water-proof or
dust-proof cap, the water-proof cap or dust-proof cap may sink
downward and prevent the depressed button from returning to
its original position.
As shown in the following figure, cut an approximately 5-mm air
outlet in the portion of the ring packing touching the panel
surface. Also, reduce the number of packing rings by one below
the standard number. The clamp ring tightening torque is 1 to
1.5 N•m.
Fig. 14
5mm
Cap
Packing
The water-proof cap or dust-proof cap seals the panel surface to
provide IP65 protection.
• AM9D797 : Air outlet groove packing provided.

04CD/2/39
AM22 and DM22
Accessories
Discription
Wrench
KK02-261
Wrench AM9A008
Application:
AM22V center button
KKD07-096
Wrench
KK02-098A
AF96-241
SG-873
AF95-21
Wrench/Lamp changer
SI-1030
AF95-22
SI-303
Type
AR9A004
Dimensions, mm: 30 x 100 x 6.5 B
C
A
Section “B”
Use this section to tighten or remove the lens.
Applicable type:
AM22M3R, M8R, F0L, F5L, E0L, E5L, G4L,
G9L, G2L, G7L, DM22E3L
Remarks
Section “A” : (For AR22 nut tightening)
Section “C” : (For AR22V, AR30V
center button tighting)
AR9A001
Application:
AM22M3R, M8R, F0L, F5L, E0L, E5L, G4L,
G9L, G2L, G7L, DM22E3L lens tightening
Wrench for
ø22, ø30
AR9A006
Application:
AM22, DM22 nut tightening
Wrench AHX701
Application:
To mount on Protection cover (AM9D762),
use this wrench to tighten the nut.
Discription Type
AHX321
For all types except pilot lights
DR9A321-T
Dimensions, mm: 57 x 130 x 30
For pilot lights
• This tool is used to remove contact blocks
and transformer units.
• The AHX321 can remove round color lens
of switches.
Special tool
AHX702
Use this wrench to tighten or remove the lens
and lamp.
Used with:
Lens of DM22D0L, K0L Incandescent lamp of
pilot lights and illuminated pushbuttons
Lamp changer AHX790
• Use this rubber wrench for mounting or
removing LED lamps from pilot lights and
illuminated pushbutton switches.
■ Accessories
AHX321
DR9A321-T
For BA9S/13 lamp
(For E12/15 lamp)
• Application
AM22V0F, VSF, VDF
Lamp changer
(for AM22 VF type)
AM9A009
KK02-261
For ø30
For ø22

Discription Type
04CD/2/40
Dimensions, mm:
15 30
AM22 and DM22
Accessories
Protection cover
SP183
13
20.5
Notes : Assemble in the following order.
1. Remove the tightening ring.
2. Set protrusion A of the retaining
washer in the groove of the operator.
3. Use the wrench (AHX701) to tighten
the thin nut.
4. Align protrusion B of the retaining
washer with the groove of the
protective cover, and press the
protective cover onto the thin nut.
5. Mount the button and lens to
complete assembly.
Panel
Protection cover Packing
Key washer AHX715
48.6
24.5sq.
29.5
14.8
34.5
Use this metal washer when securing an
operator.
Dimension, mm:
SP-214
Operator base cover
AF95-26
AM9D762
This cover protects against accidental
operation.
Used with:
AM22FR, ER
AM22FL, EL
Dimensions, mm:
3 0.7
20.5
3
ø25
5.5 ø22.1
0.5
AR9Y002
Attach this cover to the operator base of a
pushbutton switch with only one contact
block (1NO or 1NC) to protect against dust.
Adapter
SK-596
AHX718
Use this adapter to mount a 22-mm-diameter
command switch to a 25-mm-diameter
cutout hole. Note that a 25-mm-diameter
packing (AHX283, resin) must be
purchased separately and used with the
adapter.
Dimensions, mm:
6.0
ø33
ø25
ø22
Thickness: 0.8mm
Discription Type
Legend plate AR9P711-➀➁➂ This aluminum
A: Aluminum cutout hole. (Packing
provided)
Legend Code
➁ ➂
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
provided)
Legend Code
➁ ➂
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
SI-1033
ø22.5
Aluminum
Black
30
R15
SI-1032
Thickness: 0.8mm
Dimensions, mm:
ø22.5
Aluminum
Black
30
15 30
AR9P711-B AR9P711-A
AR9P712-B AR9P712-A
Button
*Key washer
Part A
Part B
Thin nut
*Provided
Panel cutout: ø25.5 mm +0.5
0

04CD/2/41
Discription Type
provided)
AR9P713-B AR9P713-A
EMERGENCY
S T O P
Plate color: Yellow
Letter color: Black
AM22 and DM22
Accessories
AR9P719
Legend Code
➁ ➂
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
AF95-114
Thickness: 0.8mm
Dimensions, mm:
ø22.5
Aluminum
Black
45
15 30
Legend plate AR9P719-➀➁ This aluminum legend
for emergency stop plate is for a 22.3mm dia.
panel cutout hole.
(Packing provided)
Legend Code Letter
➀ ➁ hight
Blank 0 0 –
5 A 7mm
5 B 13mm
5 C 13mm
Dimensions, mm:
Thickness: 0.8mm
ø22.5
ø70
KK02-265A
Legend plate
(width: 34mm)
AR9P015-B➀➁ : Hight 36mm
AR9P014-B➀➁ : Hight 40.3mm
Color: black
Legend code
➀ ➁
Blank 0 0
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
.AF96-190
Optimal for use in combination with a
3-position selector switch.
Legend plates are available in two types:
short, 36 mm; and long, 40.3mm.
AR9P015 AR9P014
AR9P009 AR9P011
AR9P007
34
ø22.5
ø22.5
Thickness: 0.6mm
34
25
20.7
15.3
15.3
37
34
45
3 3.6
50
(Name plate)
AR9P010
(Name plate)
AR9P012
13
8
37
34
ø22.3
ø22.3
(Name plate)
AR9P008
50
16
3
0.8 3.6
30
27
ø22.3
Discription Type
Dimensions, mm:
Legend plate with Legend plate AR9P009-B
name plate Name plate AR9P010-B ➀➁ (34 × 8mm)
Name Code
plate ➀ ➁
ON 0 A
OFF 0 B
START 0 C
STOP 0 D
OFF-ON 2 A
Dimensions, mm:
.AF96-190
EMERGENCY
STOP
EMERGENCY
OFF

Discription Type
04CD/2/42
Discription Type
Center button
(for AM22V type)
Type
AR9M006-
Used with
AM22PR, PCR
KK02-271A
KK02-270A
AM22 and DM22
Accessories
Panel plug
SI-1027
AF95-153
Jumper
AF95-27
Round:
AHX725-B Black
AHX725-H Gray
Square:
AHX726-B Black
AHX726-H Gray
Dimensions, mm: ø29.5 x 17 (AHX725)
29.5 sq. x 17 (AHX726)
Use this plug to cover up unused panel
cutout holes.
For oil proof usage, use together with
packing (AR9Y730) and a nut (AR9R744).
APCX029 (For pilot light without transformer)
DR9Y001 (For pilot light with transformer)
Use this jumper to connect terminals
allocated in a 30mm pich.
Rated current is 3A
Dimensions, mm
7.5
30
37.5
37.5
30
Thickness: 0.5mm
9
7.5
APCX029
DR9Y001
Lens for pushbutton
switch
Type
AM9C001-
AM9C003-
AM9C006-
AM9C007-
Used with
AM22F0R, F5R
AM22E0R, E5R, G3R, G8R
AM22M4R
AM22M0R, M3R, M5R, M8R
Lens for illuminated
pushbutton switch and
pilot lights
Type
AR9C011- *
AM9C012- *
AM9C015-
AM9C016-
DM9C011-
DM9C012-
Used with
AM22F0L, F5L
AM22E0L, E5L, G4L, G9L,
G2L, G7L, DM22E3L
AM22M4L, M9L
AM22M0L, M5L
DM22D0L
DM22K0L
Color Green Red Clear Yellow
Code G R C Y
Color Orange Blue White
Code A S W
Notes: * When the code is “W” (white), use a lens of
clear color.
KK02-266A
KK02-267A
KK02-268A
KK02-269A
KK02-270A
KK02-266A
KK02-268A
KK02-269A
button
(for AM22V type)
Knob
AF95-43
Center button color: Red only
Code B G R
KK02-267A
Type
AM9C034-R
AM9C035-R
Used with
AM22V0E, VSE
AM22V0F, VSF, VDF
Type
AM9C036-R
AM9C037-R
AM9C040-R
Used with
AM22V0E, V0F
AM22VSE, VSF
AM22VDF
Button color: Red only
KK02-272A
Color Green Red Black White
Code G R B W
Code Y A B

code
color
Code Y R G
Lens color Y R G
color
Code A O S
Lens color A W S
04CD/2/43
Discription Type
Type
AR9M007-
Used with
AM22WR, WCR
AF94-465
Knob
(for illuminated
selector switch)
AM22 and DM22
Accessories
AF95-42
Lever
Replace the mark by the lever color code
Code B G R
KK02-273A
Key
Legend plate
KK02-273A
Legeng plate
KKD09-012
AF94-459
Legend plate
Type
AR9M005-
Used with
AM22PL
Code G R W
Code Y A S
Type
AR9C022-
Used with
AM22JR, JCR
Replace the mark by the key type code.
Code: A, B, C, D, E or F, 6 types.
• This part is made of acrylic resin.
• Dimensions, mm: ø17.8 x 10.2
Discription Type
LED lamp Type Lamp voltage
KKD06-208
LED lamp
(for AM22V0F, VSF,
VDF type)
KK02-273A
APX510-6 6V AC
APX510-D6 6V DC
APX510-12 12V AC/DC
APX510-15 15V AC/DC
APX510-24 24V AC/DC
Dimensions, mm:
Type Lamp voltage
AR9L001-6R 6V AC
AR9L001-24R 24V AC/DC
Dimensions, mm:
Lamp base: BA9s/13
19
ø10
ø6.9 29
AC DC 24V
Holder
(24V: gray)
(6V: white)
Lamp base
Incandescent lamp
KKD06-307
voltage consumption
1W
1W
1W
1W
Dimensions, mm:
20
ø10
Lamp base: BA9s/13
Type
AR9P001-W
Used with
AM22F0L, F5L
Type
AR9P002-W
Used with
AM22E0L, E5L, G4L, G9L,
G2L, G7L
Type
AM9P024-W
Used with
AM22M0L, M5L, M4L, M9L
Luminous color: Red only

Discription Type Discription Type
Contact block (1NO) AR9B290 Standard
04CD/2/44
KK02-118A
AR9T003
Use this base in combination with a
transformer unit. This base unit can be
mounted using screws or rails.
Dimensions, mm
AM22 and DM22
Accessories
Type
AR9T511-H
AR9T511-L
AR9T511-M
AR9T511-Q
AR9T511-S
AR9T511-T
AR9T511-V
AR9T511-W
AM9T511-H
AM9T511-L
AM9T511-M
AM9T511-Q
AM9T511-S
AM9T511-T
AM9T511-V
AM9T511-W
Primary voltage
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
Transformer unit
Dimensions, mm:
Up to 220 V 22.4 x 30 x 45
Over 220 V 25.3 x 29 x 48
AF94-457
AF95-33
AR9B290-S Overlap
Color: Blue
AF94-455
Contact block (1NC) AR9B291 Standard
AR9B291-S Overlap
Color: Red
AF94-455
Lamp terminal AR9B292
Color: Black
AF94-456
Used with
Standard type
AM22V0F,
VDF, VSF
• The contact is covered with a silicon
rubber cover to keep out foreign matter
such as dust, etc.
* See page 04CD/2/46(AM22 Z8 types)
KK02-118A
Contact
protection cover
Type Used with*
AR9D002-1 AM22, 1step contact
AR9D002-2 AM22, 2step contact
Dimensions, mm:
AR9D002-1
32
12
52
39.5
32.5
30
AR9D002-2
Resistor
Voltage stabilizer
Device for LED lamp
flickering
AF95-33
* Used in combination with 12V, 15V, or 24V rated
LED lamp.
Base unit for
transformer
separate mounting
5
58
48
32
22
2-ø4.5
35.5
56
60 *
35
Rail: TH35-7.5
TH35-7.5AL
TH35-15AL
Terminal screw M3.5
Terminal cover
Transformer
unit
(optional)
X2 X1
(Y2)
(Y1)
* Except for the types 110V AC, 127V AC and 220V AC.
Resistor: AR9T519-H (110V DC)
Fit this resistor when using LED of 24V DC
rating with 110V DC power.
Voltage stabilizer: AR9T001-E
This unit allows an LED lamp of 24V DC
rating to be used in a circuit with voltage
from 27V to 35V (AC or DC).
Flickering device:
6V AC: AR9T002-A
6V DC: AR9T002-6
12 to 24V AC: AR9T002-G *
12 to 24V DC: AR9T002-E *
Note: Terminal cover is not supplied with this. Note: With terminal cover

Replace the mark by the cap color code
Color Green Red Black
Code G R B
1.3 21 ø34
Note: 5 pieces of packing per delivery
Note: 4 pieces of packing per delivery
Dimensions, mm
18.4 x 29 x 8.4
ø22 x 5.8
04CD/2/45
Discription Type
Used with
AM22F0R, F5R, E0R, E5R,
M0R, M5R, M4R, F0L, F5L,
E0L, E5L, M0L, M5L, M4L,
M9L, PR, PCR, WR, WCR,
KK02-274A
JR, JCR, PL
DM22D0L, E3L, K0L
AM22V0E, V0F, VDF
AM22F0R, F5R, E0R, E5R,
M4R, F0L, F5L, E0L, E5L,
M4L, M9L, PR, PCR, WR,
WCR, JR, JCR, PL
AM22VSE, VSF
DM22D0L, E3L, K0L KK02-276A
KK02-277A
KK02-274A
Water-tight cap AHX797
AM22 and DM22
Accessories
Nut
Type
AM9R744*1
DM9R744*1
AM9R057*3
AM9R057*2
AM9R058*3
DM9R057*2
KK02-275A
Guard-ring Type
AM9R003*1
AM9R054*2
AM9R056*2
AM9R223*2
Used with
AM22G4L, G9L
AM22G3R, G8R
AM22G2L, G7L
AM22M3R, M8R
KK02-278A
AF94-462
Nut
Discription Type
Packing
KK02-279A
Dust-proof cap
AF94-462
AM9D797-
Dimensions, mm:
Packing
ø30
ø24.5
Air outlet groove
Used for sealing the operator from foreign
debris such as dust in environments where
the unit is in contact with such elements.
AHX730:
For all AM22 and DM22 (Resin)
AHX283:
For AHX728 (Resin)
AR9Y730:
For AHX725*, 726* (Rubber)
SF-1113
Terminal cover
AF94-466
Type
AR9Y305
DR9Y320
Used with
Contact unit
Lamp terminal
Transformer unit *
Pilot lights
* Rated up to 220V.
(Except for contact block alone and lamp
terminal alone)
Terminal cover
* Use types that exceed the standard 220V rating
for products with standard type transformer.
SG-5
Type
AHX376
Used with
With transformer *
With short-body
transformer
With resistor unit
Dimensions, mm
13 x 29 x 6.5
*1 Resin types are black (standard)
*2 Aluminum types are silver
*3 Aluminum types are silver (standard)
AM9R003 AM9R054
AM9R056
AM9R223
*1 Resin types are transparent
*2 Resin types are black
SK-594
Used with:
AM22E0R, E5R, E0L, E5L
AHX283
AR9Y730
SI-299
AHX730
AR9R744
For AHX725*, 726*
* When use the panel plug as IP65,
then use with packing(AR9Y730)
* When use the panel plug as IP65,
then use with nut (AR9R744)

04CD/2/46
AM22 and DM22
Special products
Products equipped with contact protection cover
■ Features
A silicon rubber cover is provided for the contact block to keep
out foreign matter such as dust, etc.
standard type.
■ Type
AM22 Z8
■ Dimensions
The only thing different from the standard product is the addition
of a 1-mm thick silicon rubber cover around the contact block.
Type
• Pushbuttons
• Emergency stop pushbuttons
• Selectors
• Illuminated pushbuttons
• Emergency stop illuminated
pushbuttons (without transformer)
• Illuminated selectors
Contact arrangement
1NO+1NC,
2NO*1, 2NC
1NO+3NC, 2NO+2NC,
3NO+1NC, 4NO*1, 4NC
1NO*2, 1NC
1NO+2NC, 2NO+1NC,
3NO*2, 3NC
Remarks
For use with a
1-step contact
For use with a
2-step contact
For use with a
1-step contact
For use with a
2-step contact
Notes: *1 Except for emergency stop pushbutton switch
*2 Except for emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch
Resisting water-soluble cutting oils and heat
■ Features
Safer operation in environments exposed to water-miscible
cutting fluids, machining oils, lubricating oils, cleaning oils and
high humidity (up to 95%) is made possible by using materials
that protect against rust and corrosion of components.
standard type.
■ Type
AM22 Z9, DM22 Z9
■ Dimensions
Same as those of the standard type
• AM22, DM22 series
AM22 (Except for emergency stop pushbutton switch and
emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switch)
DM22 (Except for pilot lights with resistor unit)

Nut
Panel thickness
Nut
Panel thickness
04CD/2/47
AM22 and DM22
Special products
Meeting IP2X finger protection standards
■ Features
Conforms to EN standard EN60204-1 (protecting against
electric shock). The terminal has IEC60529 degree of
protection; IP2X finger protection secured (a mock human finger
used in testing did not come into contact with charged parts).
The contact block and lamp terminal can be easily mounted or
removed with the terminal cover mounted.
■ Type
AM22 ZB, DM22 ZB
Specify “ZB” at the end of the type number of the standard type.
■ Accessories
• Contact block (plus terminal cover)
NO contact: AR9B290- D
NC contact: AR9B291- D
•Transformer unit (plus terminal cover)
AR9T511- D
• Protection degree: IP2X
• Terminal screw: M3.5
Wiring can be done with a solid wire or fork shaped crimp
terminal.
Note: Ring-type crimp terminals cannot be used.
• Other ratings and specifications are the same as those of the
standard type.
AM22
DM22: Without transformer, with transformer (except for short-body
types)
■ Dimensions, mm
AM22/Pushbutton switches
40
Terminal screw(M3.5) Panel thickness
DM22/Without transformer
DM22/With transformer
1 to 6
39
59
19
13
(Extended)
(Flush)
Nut
79
Packing
Nameplate
Terminal cover
36.5 19
Terminal cover
Terminal screw (M3.5)
8
1 to 6
Packing
19
Terminal cover
60
62.5* 8
1 to 6
Packing
Note : * Except for the types 110V AC, 127V AC and 220V AC.

04CD/2/48
AM22 and DM22
Special products
Metal nut (aluminum) types
■ Features
The nut is an aluminum ring.
standard model.
■ Type
AM22 ZM
DM22 ZM
Specify “ZM” at the end of the type number of the standard type.
■ Dimensions, mm
AM22 (except for G4L, G9L, M3R, M8R, V E*, V F* types)
DM22 with round bezel
Note: * Standard type is a metallic ring (chrome plated).
Resisting sulfuration gas
■ Features
These products can be used in environments having a
concentration of hydrogen sulfide gas of 0.5 ppm or less.
The metallic parts have been subjected to an anti-corrosion
treatment (see note).
The contacts of the AM series are gold plated.
Note: The body is made of resin and cannot be used with gases that affect
resins (plastics).
■ Type
AM22 Z4, DM22 Z4
■ Notes on use
• This product is resistant to light corrosive gas exposure.
• Other measures, such as covering the entire switch with a box,
and the degree of protection of the panel should be taken into
consideration.
Hydrogen sulfide gas concentration of 0.5 ppm max.
Ambient storage temperature: 8 to 37°C
Humidity: 62 to 81%
standard type.
■ Dimensions, mm
AM22
DM22 (except for pilot lights with resistor unit)
(except for emergency stop pushbutton switch and
emergency stop illumingted pushbutton switch)
KK02-253A KK02-254A
KK02-255A KK02-256A

04CD/2/49
Mass, gram
Type 1-contact
F0R
28
F5R
E0R
29
E5R
G3R, M4R
31
G8R
M0R
33
M5R
M3R
49
M8R
2-contact
38
39
41
43
59
4-contact
57
58
60
62
78
F0L
F5L
E0L
E5L
M4L, G4L, G2L
M9L, G9L, G7L
M0L
M5L
1-contact 2-contact 4-contact
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
51
51
53
53
54
54
55
55
70
–
72
–
73
–
74
–
1-contact 2-contact
Standard Standard* Short body
Without transformer
1-contact 2-contact 4-contact
PL 44 54
With transformer*
1-contact
88
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
2-contact
97
97
99
99
100
100
101
101
Type 1-contact
VSE
42
V0E
51
VME
53
2-contact
52
61
63
4-contact
71
80
82
VSF
VDF
V0F
53
60
62
62
69
71
With transformer*
1-contact
99
106
108
2-contact
108
115
117
Type Without transformer With transformer
D0L
E3L, K0L
22
23
74
75
72
73
With resistor
unit
36
37
• Pilot lights
Type 1-contact
PR
33
PCR
–
WR
34
WCR
–
JR
58
JCR
–
2-contact
43
43
44
44
68
68
4-contact
62
62
63
63
87
87
Type
Note: *230V and over : +17grams
73
With transformer*
1-contact
90
2-contact
100
Command Series
AM22 and DM22
Mass

Command Series
CCC approved
Pushbutton switches
Bezel
Round bezel
Certificate No.
04CD/2/50
CCC approved
AM22/DM22 series
· Contact
Without transformer
With transformer
· Color of button
Green, red, white, yellow, orange, blue
· Light source
LED lamp, incandescent lamp
· Operating voltage of lamp
Without transformer
LED: 6V AC, 6V DC, 12V AC/DC
Incandescent lamp: 5.5V AC/DC, 20V AC/DC
LED, incandescent lamp: 15V AC/DC, 24V AC/DC
With transformer
LED, incandescent lamp: 100-110V AC, 115-127V AC, 200-220V AC,
230-254V AC, 350-380V AC, 400-440V AC,
480V AC, 500-550V AC
Bezel
Round bezel
Certificate No.
Specifications
Operator
Flush round head
Extended round head
Mushroom head with full guard (40mm dia.)
Mushroom head (29mm dia.)
Operator
Flush round head
Extended round head
Extended with transparent full guard (24mm dia.)
Extended with full guard (24mm dia. with openings)
Type
AM22
Momentary
AM22F0L
AM22E0L
AM22M4L
AM22M0L
AM22G4L
AM22G2L
2003010305063372
Alternate
AM22F5L
AM22E5L
AM22M9L
AM22M5L
AM22G9L
AM22G7L
Type
AM22
Momentary action
AM22F0R
AM22E0R
AM22G3R
AM22M3R
AM22M4R
AM22M0R
2003010305063372
Alternate action
(Turn-reset for V5R)
AM22F5R
AM22E5R
AM22G8R
AM22M8R
–
AM22M5R
Note: • Certified contact: Momentary action: within 8 contacts
Bezel
Round bezel
Certificate No.
Operator
Push-lock, turn reset (40mm dia.)
Type
AM22
AM22VSE
AM22V0E
AM22VME
2003010305063372
Notes: • Certified contact: 1NC, 1NO+1NC, 2NC, 3NC, 2NO+2NC, 4NC

04CD/2/51
Emergency stop illuminated pushbutton switches
Selector switches
Bezel
Round bezel
Certificate No.
Operator
Knob
Type
AM22
Standard type
AM22PL
2003010305063372
Notes: • Certified contact: Without transformer
Maintained: within 6 contacts
Spring return and spring/manual return: within 3
contacts
With transformer
Spring return and spring/manual return: within 2
contacts
• Certified lamp: both LED and incandescent lamp
Pilot lights
Bezel
Round bezel
Certificate No.
Lens
Dome
Extended round
Faceted
Type
DM22
DM22D0L
DM22E3L
DM22K0L
2003010305063383
Notes: • Certified lamp: both LED and incandescent lamp
• Certified transformer type: standard and short-body
• Except for with resistor unit
Item with degree of protection IP2X (IP20)
Type Certificate No.
AM22 ZB 2003010305063372
DM22 ZB 2003010305063383
Note: Certified for all types listed in the above items
except for short-body transformer of pilot light.
Command Series
CCC approved
Bezel
Round bezel
Certificate No.
Operator
Push-lock, turn reset (40mm dia.)
Push-lock, turn-reset (40mm dia. transparent in all colors)
Type
AM22
AM22VSF
AM22V0F
AM22VDF
2003010305063372
Notes: • Certified contact without transformer: 1NC, 1NO+1NC, 2NC, 3NC
• Certified contact with transformer: 1NC, 1NO+1NC, 2NC
• Certified light source: LED lamp only
• Certified operating lamp voltage: Without transfomer: 6A AC, 24V AC/DC
With transfomer: 100-110V AC, 115-127V AC, 200-220V AC, 230-254V AC, 350-380V AC, 400-440V AC, 480V AC, 500-550V AC
Bezel
Round bezel
Certificate No.
Operator
Knob
Lever
Key
Type
AM22
Standard type
AM22PR
AM22WR
AM22JR
2003010305063372
Control type
AM22PCR
AM22WCR
AM22JCR
Note: • Certified contact:
Control type, spring return and spring/manual return: within 4 contacts

04CD/3/1
Movable
contact
AH25
General information
Features
■ Oil and dust-proof construction
Protection complies with IEC
Standard IP65.Special seals keep out oil,
water, dust, and chips. This gives FUJI
switches superior performance where
dampness and dirt are likely to cause
trouble .FUJI recommended where
reliability is important.
SP-987
■ Slide-action self-cleaning contacts
All contacts are double-break and self-cleaning.
With each operation, the contact
surfaces are wiped by sliding that
ensures positive engagement and
excellent conductivity even in very low
level circuits (5V, 5mA) and in corrosive
environments.
Stationary
contact
Scrubbing contact action
Return
spring
■ A wide variety of operators
Pushbuttons, illuminated
pushbuttons,2- or 3-position selector
switches, and key-operated selector
switches, etc. Choose the one you need.
■ Contact blocks available up to
4NO+4NC
The AH25 series controls from one to
eight control blocks in combination.Each
contact block contains a set of 1NO or
1NC contacts.
■ Terminal covers
Terminal covers make mounting safe.
These covers can be used to indicate
device numbers.
■ Snap-on contact blocks and
transformer
The contact blocks are easily snapped
on, without using screws. Light
transformers can also be mounted
without tools.
■ Easily replaced color tips
Only a screwdriver is needed to replace
the buttons. A wide variety of colors
available to suit to your needs.
■ Bright, long-life lamp
LED lamps that have a longer service life
than standard incandescent lamps are
available. FUJI LED lamps are bright and
can be used with both AC and DC, much
the same way as incandescent lamps.
KKD06-208
■ Approvals
UL listed
CSA certified
AF87-349
Snap-on
Incandescent lamp LED lamp
KKD06-307
For further infomation related to approved
type, see page 04CD/3/2 to 04CD/3/4
Terminal
cover

04CD/3/2
See page 04CD/3/10 See page 04CD/3/10
AH25
Type Description Type Description
AH25-F
The button surface is flush with the
Flush round head
locking nut. Momentary type.
AF87-312
AH25-M
Mushroom head
Mushroom head button.
Momentary type.
SG-185
AH25-F5
Flush round head
/Alternate action
locking nut.
Push-ON/push-OFF type.
SG-166
AH25-M5
Mushroom head
/Alternate action
Mushroom head button.
SG-183
AH25-E
Extended round head
The button surface projects 7mm
from the locking nut.
Momentary type.
AF87-314
AH25-E5
Extended round head
/Alternate action
The button surface projects 7mm
from the locking nut.
SG-175
AH25-SF
Flush square head
guard. Momentary type.
Operator protection conforms to IP40.
SG-208
AH25-G
The upper half of the button has a
guard ring to help prevent operating
errors. Momentary type.
SG-171
AH25-SF5
Flush square head
/Alternate action
guard. Push-ON/push-OFF type.
SG-210
AH25-G5
/Alternate action
The upper half of the button has a
guard ring to help prevent operating
errors.
SG-172
AH25-SE
The button surface projects 7mm from
the guard. Momentary type.
SG-206
AH25-G1
The button has a guard ring to help
prevent operating errors.
Momentary type.
AF87-179
AH25-SE5
/Alternate action
The button surface projects 7mm from
the guard. Push-ON/push-OFF type.
SG-207
AH25-G6
/Alternate action
The button has a guard ring to help
prevent operating errors.
SG-176
AH25-V
Locked when the button is pushed. To
reset turn the button to the right.
AF89-414
AH25-U
Wobble stick
The contact works when the lever is
moved in any direction.
Spring return action.
SG-202

04CD/3/3
■ Mechanically interlocked pushbutton switches
AH25-S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6
Pushbotton with selector ring(2-
position)
AH25
AH25-L
Extended round head
The surface of the illuminated button
projects about 15mm from the locking
nut.
Momentary type.
SG-150
AH25-L4
Extend with transparent full
guard
The illuminated button has a guard
ring to help prevent operating errors.
Momentary action.
AF89-605
AH25-L5
Extended round head
/Alternate action
The surface of the illuminated button
projects about 15mm from the locking
nut.
SG-152
AH25-VL
Locked when the illuminated button is
pushed. To reset, turn the button to
the right.
AF89-413
AH25-L2
(With openings)
Momentary type.
AF90-267
AH25-SL
The illuminated button projects about
8mm from the guard.
Momentary type.
SG-144
AH25-L6
(With openings)
/Alternate action
AF90-277
AH25-SL5
Extended square head /
Alternate action
The illuminated button projects about
8mm from the guard.
SG-149
AH25-L3
Momentary action.
AF89-604
AH25-SL1
Flush square head
The illuminated button has a built-in
legend plate. Momentary type.
SG-139
AH25-L7
/Alternate action
AF90-265
AH25-SL6
Flush square head/
Alternate action
The illuminated button has a built-in
legend plate.
SG-146
Turning the ring to the left or right
changes over the contact.
SI-55
AH25-/
Mechanically
interlocked
Two buttons are interlocked by a
lever. When on is ON, the other is
OFF.
See page 04CD/3/13 AF89-610 See page 04CD/3/14
See page 04CD/3/15
See page 04CD/3/15
See page 04CD/3/15
See page 04CD/3/15
See page 04CD/3/15
See page 04CD/3/16
See page 04CD/3/16
See page 04CD/3/16
See page 04CD/3/16
See page 04CD/3/16

AH25-P
Knob
04CD/3/4
See page 04CD/3/18
See page 04CD/3/23
See page 04CD/3/25
This switch works when the knob is
turned.
Operating positions : 2 or 3
Operating : Maintained, spring return,
and spring/manual return.
SG-188
AH25-SJ
This switch works with a key inserted.
Operating : Maintained.
SG-226
AH25-PC
Knob operated control type
21 types of operation are available
using a cam for performing complex
controls.
AF89-596
AH25-PW
Lever
The lever extends out 13mm from the
knob.
SP-1007
AH25-J
Key
See page 04CD/3/22
This switch works when the key is
inserted.
SG-233
AH25-PL
Illuminated knob
Illuminated switch with a lamp built
into the knob.
AF89-622
AH25-SP
See page 04CD/3/18
This switch works when the knob is
turned.
SG-196
— —
AH25
See page 04CD/3/18
■ Pilot lights
AH25-ZM*
This pilot light uses a round
Dome
transparent colored lens.
SF-1095
AH25-ZN
Flush square with legend plate
This pilot light has a built-in square
legend plate on which characters and
symbols can be marked.
SF-1092
AH25-ZK*
Faceted
See page 04CD/3/25
This pilot light uses a faceted
transparent colored lens.
SF-1094
AH25-ZM8, 9
Dome (Short-body with
transformer)
This pilot light has a short-body
transformer.
SH-971
AH25-ZS
Extended square
See page 04CD/3/25
This pilot light uses a square lens.
SF-1093
— —
See page 04CD/3/25
Note: * With resistor unit types: Not approved standard
See page 04CD/3/25

04CD/3/5
D: Dark green
Y: Yellow
B: Black*
O: Orange
AH25
Pushbuttons
AH25 - E R 11
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃
AH25: 25mm-dia. pushbutton
➁ Operator
F: Flush round head
F5: Flush round head(Alternate action)
E5: Extended round head(Alternate action)
G: Extended with half guard
G5: Extended with half guard (Alternate action)
G1: Extended with full guard
G6: Extended with full guard (Alternate action)
M: Mushroom head
M5: Mushroom head (Alternate action)
V: Push-lock, turn-reset
U: Wobble stick
SF5: Flush square head (Alternate action)
SE: Extended square head
SE5: Extended square head (Alternate action)
S1-S6:Pushbutton with selector ring (2-position)
➂ Color of button
G: Green
R: Red
W: White
S: Sky-blue
*AH25-U type: ball color Black only.
10: 1NO
01: 1NC
11: 1NO+1NC
20: 2NO
02: 2NC
22: 2NO+2NC
Mechanically interlocked pushbutton switches
AH25: 25mm-dia. interlocked pushbutton
➁ Combination of operator and operation mode
• Latched/Latched
F5/F5: Flush (Push-locked)/Flush (Push-locked)
F5/E5: Flush (Push-locked)/Extended (Push-locked)
M5/M5: Mushroom (Push-locked)/Mushroom (Push-locked)
• Latched/Unlatched
F5/F: Flush (Push-locked)/Flush (Momentary)
E5/E: Extended (Push-locked)/Extended (Momentary)
M5/M: Mushroom (Push-locked)/Mushroom (Momentary)
➂ Button color
G: Green
R: Red
B: Black
D: Dark green
Y: Yellow
W: White
S: Sky-blue
O: Orange
30: 3NO
03: 3NC
33: 3NO+3NC
40: 4NO
04: 4NC
44: 4NO+4NC
AH25 - L5 G 11 H 3a
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
AH25: 25mm-dia. illuminated pushbutton
➁ Operator
L: Extended round head
L5: Extended round head (Alternate action)
L2: Extended with full guard (With openings)
L6: Extended with full guard (With openings alternate action)
L3: Extended with full guard
L7: Extended with full guard (Alternate action)
L4: Extended with transparent full guard
VL: Push-lock, turn-reset
SL: Extended square head
SL5: Extended square head (Alternate action)
SL1: Flush square head
SL6: Flush square head (Alternate action)
➂ Color of lens
G: Green
R: Red
W: White
* For LED lamp: Not available
S: Sky-blue*
Y: Yellow
O: Orange
10: 1NO
01: 1NC
11: 1NO+1NC
20: 2NO
02: 2NC
22: 2NO+2NC
➄ Lamp voltage
• Without transformer:
Incandescent LED
Blank 5.5V -
A - 6V AC
AD - 6V DC
B - 12V AC/DC
C 15V AC/DC 15V AC/DC
D 20V AC/DC -
E 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC
• With transformer:
Incandescent LED
H 100-110V AC 100-110V AC
L 115-127V AC 115-127V AC
M 200-220V AC 200-220V AC
Q 230-254V AC 230-254V AC
S 350-380V AC 350-380V AC
T 400-440V AC 400-440V AC
V 480V AC 480V AC
W 500-550V AC 500-550V AC
➅ Type of lamp
Blank: Incandescent lamp
3: LED lamp
30: 3NO
03: 3NC
33: 3NO+3NC
40: 4NO
04: 4NC
44: 4NO+4NC
AH25 - F5 B 10 /M5 R 10
➀ ➃
➁ ➂
➂ ➁
➃
10: 1NO
01: 1NC
11: 1NO+1NC
20: 2NO
02: 2NC
Note: • The manufacturing varies depending on the model. For details, refer to the
contents of this catalog

04CD/3/6
AH25
AH25 - PL 3 G 22 E 3 a
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈
AH25: 25mm-dia. selector and illuminated selector switch
➁ Operator
P: Knob
PC: Knob operated control type
J: Key
SP: Knob with square bezel
SJ: Key with square bezel
PW: Lever
PL: Illuminated knob
➂ Operating
2: 2-position,maintained
0: 2-position,spring return (Right to left)
3: 3-position,maintained
6: 3-position,spring/manual return (Left to center)
7: 3-position,spring/manual return (Right to center)
1: 3-position,center spring return
Blank: 3-position,maintained (Control type only)
A: Left
B: Left and right
C: Left,center and right
D: Right
E: Center
F: Center and right
G: Center and left
➅ Contact arrangement
10: 1NO
01: 1NC
11: 1NO+1NC
20: 2NO
02: 2NC
22: 2NO+2NC
Note: Control type: See page 04CD/3/22
➆ Lamp voltage
Incandescent LED
Blank 5.5V AC/DC –
A – 6V AC
AD – 6V DC
B – 12V AC/DC
D 20V AC/DC –
Incandescent LED
H 100-110V AC 100-110V AC
L 115-127V AC 115-127V AC
M 200-220V AC 200-220V AC
Q 230-254V AC 230-254V AC
S 350-380V AC 350-380V AC
T 400-440V AC 400-440V AC
V 480V AC 480V AC
W 500-550V AC 500-550V AC
➇ Type of lamp
3: LED lamp
➈ Key code No.
A, B, C, D, E or F
30: 3NO
03: 3NC
33: 3NO+3NC
40: 4NO
04: 4NC
44: 4NO+4NC
Pilot lights
AH25 - ZM W Q 3a
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄
AH25: 25mm-dia. pilot light
➁ Lens
ZM: Dome
ZK: Faceted
ZS: Extended square*
ZN: Flush square with legend plate*
* Incandescent lamp only
➂ Color of lens
G: Green
R: Red
W: White
* For LED lamp: Not available
➃ Lamp voltage
Incandescent LED
Blank 5.5V AC/DC -
A - 6V AC
AD - 6V DC
B - 12V AC/DC
D 20V AC/DC -
Incandescent LED
H - 110V DC*
H 100-110V AC 100-110V AC
L 115-127V AC 115-127V AC
M 200-220V AC 200-220V AC
Q 230-254V AC 230-254V AC
S 350-380V AC 350-380V AC
T 400-440V AC 400-440V AC
V 480V AC 480V AC
W 500-550V AC 500-550V AC
* With resistor unit only
➄ Type of lamp
8: Incandescent lamp/Short-body with transformer
3: LED lamp
7: LED lamp/With resistor unit
9: LED lamp/Short-body with transformer
Note: • The manufacturing varies depending on the model. For details, refer to
the contents of this catalog
➄ Color of knob
B: Black *1
R: Red
W: White*3
S: Sky-blue*2*3
G: Green
Y: Yellow*3
O: Orange*3
*1 Except for illuminated type
*2 For LED lamp: Not available
*3 Illuminated type only
S: Sky-blue*
Y: Yellow
O: Orange

04CD/3/7
UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
File No. E44592
File No. LR20479
AH25
Mechanically interlacked pushbutton switch
Selector switch
Pilot light
Operating frequency
Dielectric strength
Pollution degree
Vibration
Shock
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity
600V AC/DC *1
See the table below
3
Resonance: 10 to 55Hz, double amplitude 0.1mm
Malfunction durability: 100m/s2
-20 to +70°C
(Illuminated type: -20 to +50°C)
-40 to +80°C
45 to 85% RH (within -5 to +40°C)
IP65*3
–
–
–
-20 to +50°C
*3 Square type : IP40
With selector ring 200,000
Push-lock, turn-reset 100,000
Mechanically interlocked pushbutton Latched/Latched, Latched/Unlatched 100,000
switch
Selector switch Maintained, spring return, spring/manual return 1 million
Control type 200,000
Illuminated selector switch Maintained, spring return, spring/manual return 1 million
• Key type 10,000

04CD/3/8
AH25
Ratings and Specifications
■ Contact ratings
Application
UL
●
Description Rated
thermal
current
(A)
AC DC
Voltage
Operational current (A)
(V)
AC15(Ind.)
Voltage
(V)
Operational current (A)
DC13(Ind.) DC12(Res.)
Pushbutton switch
Selector switch (2-position)
10 24
110
220
440
550
666
2.5
2
24
110
220
––
6
1.3
0.45
–– 6
2.5
1––
Selector switch (3-position)
Pushbutton switch with selector ring
Pushbutton switch with selector lever
10 24
110
220
440
550
333
1.3
1
24
110
220
––
3
0.65
0.23
––
3
1.3
0.5
––
Voltage [V]
110-120
120
220-240
240
440-480
480
550-600
600
Application
UL
●
●
●
●
CSA
●
●
●
●
AC(COS =0.35 or less)
Make [A]
60
30
15
12
Continuous current
[A]
10
Break [A]
6.0
3.0
1.5
1.2
Voltage [V]
115-125
115
230-250
●
Note: AH25-J3, -J5, -P3, -P1, -S1, -S3, -S4, -S5 types cannot be used in DC circuit.
CSA
●
DC
Make and break currents [A]
1.1
0.55
• NECA standards
The AH25 command switches can be used in low level circuit of 5V AC/DC, 5mA.The operating environment and the types of load,
however, may affect the operating range.

04CD/3/9
Lamp
LED
Incandescent
Approx. 30000h
Approx. 5000h (AC)
Judgement criterion
Note: • The operating voltage for incandescent lamps is set at 80 to 90%
1.0
0.5
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
Time✕103[h]
Absolute brightness
■ Combination of lens color and LED luminous color
[AC voltage100%]
100,000
50,000
20,000
10,000
5,000
2,000
1,000
500
200
70 80
90 100 110
Voltage [%]
100
50
Durability
Luminous
flux
Durability (h)
Luminous flux
[%]
Lens color
(lens or color plate)
Color
Green
Red
White
Yellow
Orange
LED lamp
(high-brightness)
Luminous color
Green
Red
Orange
Yellow
Amber
Type
APX510- G
APX510- R
APX510- O
APX510- Y
APX510- A
Type *1
APX508- G
APX508- R
APX510- O
APX508- Y
APX508- A
Code
G
R
W
Y
A
Notes: *1 For pilot lights
• Replace the mark by the lamp voltage code
AH25
■ Lamp ratings
Transformer
Without
transformer
With transformer
With resistor unit
Lamp voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
110V AC
127V AC
220V AC
254V AC
380V AC
440V AC
480V AC
550V AC
110V DC
Type
–
APX508-6
APX508-D6
APX508-12
APX508-15
–
APX508-24
APX508-6
APX508-6
APX508-24
–
APX510-6
APX510-D6
APX510-12
APX510-15
–
APX510-24
APX510-6
APX510-6
APX510-24
Rated voltage
–
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
–
24V AC/DC
6V AC
6V AC
24V AC/DC
Consumption
–
Green, red, orange, amber: 7mA AC
Yellow: 50mA AC
Green, red, orange, amber: 11mA DC
Yellow: 33mA DC
Green, red, orange, amber: 14mA AC, 11mA DC
Green, red, orange, amber: 13mA AC, 11mA DC
–
12mA AC, 11mA DC
1.5VA
2.5VA
1.2W
Type
AHX135
–
–
–
AHX279
AHX144
AHX129
AHX135
AHX135
–
Rated voltage
6.3V AC/DC
–
–
–
18V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
30V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
6.3V AC/DC
–
Consumption
0.9W
–
–
–
0.8W
0.9W
0.8W
2VA
2VA
2VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
2.5VA
–
Note: Replace the mark by the lamp luminous color code.

04CD/3/10
20
30
14.5
41sq. 20
30
Pushbuttons
AH25
Type
Operator dimensions,mm
Flush round
head
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
Notes: • See page 04CD/3/11
AH25-F 10
AH25-F 01
AH25-F 11
AH25-F 20
AH25-F 02
AH25-F 22
AH25-E 10
AH25-E 01
AH25-E 11
AH25-E 20
AH25-E 02
AH25-E 22
AH25-G 10
AH25-G 01
AH25-G 11
AH25-G 20
AH25-G 02
AH25-G 22
AH25-G1 10
AH25-G1 01
AH25-G1 11
AH25-G1 20
AH25-G1 02
AH25-G1 22
AH25-M 10
AH25-M 01
AH25-M 11
AH25-M 20
AH25-M 02
AH25-M 22
• Contact block dimensions: See page 04CD/3/12
Alternate action
Type
AH25-F5 10
AH25-F5 01
AH25-F5 11
AH25-F5 20
AH25-F5 02
AH25-F5 22
AH25-E5 10
AH25-E5 01
AH25-E5 11
AH25-E5 20
AH25-E5 02
AH25-E5 22
AH25-G5 10
AH25-G5 01
AH25-G5 11
AH25-G5 20
AH25-G5 02
AH25-G5 22
AH25-G6 10
AH25-G6 01
AH25-G6 11
AH25-G6 20
AH25-G6 02
AH25-G6 22
AH25-M5 10
AH25-M5 01
AH25-M5 11
AH25-M5 20
AH25-M5 02
AH25-M5 22
AF87-312
Extended
round head
AF87-314
Extended with
half guard
SG-171
Extended with
full guard
SG-179
Mushroom
head
SG-185
7.5
Panel thickness
0.8 to 6
33
41
20
30
Panel thickness
0.8 to 6
33 41
14
Panel thickness
0.8 to 6
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
33
41
14.5
28
30
Panel thickness
0.8 to 6
33
41
22.5
30

04CD/3/11
Type
*1
Pushbuttons
AH25
Type
24.3
70.5
Flush square
head
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
AH25-SF 10
AH25-SF 01
AH25-SF 11
AH25-SF 20
AH25-SF 02
AH25-SF 22
AH25-SE 10
AH25-SE 01
AH25-SE 11
AH25-SE 20
AH25-SE 02
AH25-SE 22
Alternate action
Type
AH25-SF5 10
AH25-SF5 01
AH25-SF5 11
AH25-SF5 20
AH25-SF5 02
AH25-SF5 22
AH25-SE5 10
AH25-SE5 01
AH25-SE5 11
AH25-SE5 20
AH25-SE5 02
AH25-SE5 22
SG-208
Extended square
head
SG-206
22.5
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 2
33
41
49.5
20sq.
29sq.
16
Panel thickness
0.8 to 2
33
20sq.
29sq.
41
49.5
• Button color
Button color Green
Red
Black
Code G
R
B
Yellow
Y
White
W
Button color Dark green
Code D
Sky-blue
S
Orange
O
Note: AH25-V type: Red, yellow, black only.
• Up to 8-contact block of the contact arrangement can be made.
For alternate action type, up to 4-contact block of the contact
arrangement can be made. (Except for AH25-V type)
• AH25-V type: Up to 4-contacts can be made.
• Contact block dimensions: See page 04CD/3/12
Push-lock,
turn-reset
Notes: • AH25-U type: ball color Black only.
*1 Alternate action type.
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
AH25-V 10
AH25-V 01
AH25-V 11
AH25-V 20
AH25-V 02
AH25-V 22
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
AH25-UB10
AH25-UB01
AH25-UB11
AH25-UB20
AH25-UB02
AH25-UB22
AF89-414
Wobble stick
SG-202
Panel thickness
1 to 6
37
30
40
13.5
25
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
33
41

04CD/3/12
Operator
1NO, 1NC,
2NO, 2NC,
1NO+1NC
3NO, 3NC,
4NO, 4NC,
2NO+2NC
F,E,M,G,G1
F5,E5,M5,G5,G6
V
U
SF,SE
SF5,SE5
45
67
48.5
43.5
46.5
68.5
67
89
70.5
65.5
68.5
90.5
3NO+3NC
89
–
–
87.5
90.5
–
4NO+4NC
111
–
–
109.5
112.5
–
Pushbuttons
AH25
• Up to 8-contact block of the contact arrangement can be made. For
alternate action type, up to 4-contact block of the contact arrangement
can be made.
AH25
Contact block
A*
* When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of externals increase 1.5mm.
• Contact block dimensions, mm
Terminal screw M3.5
37
A*

04CD/3/13
Button color Green
Code G
Red
R
Black
B
Yellow
Y
White
W
Code D
Sky-blue
S
Orange
O
Pushbuttons
AH25
Operator Type Contact operation
Mounting Type Depressed
position
Free Free Depressed
Pushbutton with
selector ring
2-position
2NO+2NC
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
NO
—
—
—
—
●
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
●
●
—
—
●
●
—
—
—
—
●
●
—
●
—
—
●
—
—
—
●
●
—
—
●
●
—
—
●
●
●
●
—
—
●
—
—
—
—
—
●
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
●
●
—
—
●
●
—
—
●
—
—
●
—
—
●
—
—
●
●
Note: (1) to (4) contact block mounting position ● Contact closed
— Contact open
AH25-S1 22
AH25-S2 22
AH25-S3 22
AH25-S4 22
AH25-S5 22
AH25-S6 22
SI-55
Locked
• Button color
• The contact arrangement is 2NO+2NC only.
• The terminals are on the upper and lower positions.
• To turn selector ring of the S3 type right/left,the contacts in the upper
and lower contact blocks overlap.
• Dimensions, mm
(3) (1)
(4) (2)
Terminal screw M3.5
Panel thickness 0.8 t o 6
33
41
83* 25.5
90
Name plate side
* When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of
externals increase 1.5mm.

Button color Green
Code G
04CD/3/14
* When attaching the terminal cover, the deimension of externals increase 1.5mm.
Pushbuttons
AH25
■ Mechanically interlocked pushbutton switches
Exterior view Operator Cat. No.
Latched/Latched Flush/Flush
Flush/Extended
Flush/Mushroom
Flush/Flush
Flush/Extended
Flush/Mushroom
Contact block
1NO/1NO
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1NO/1NO
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1NO/1NO
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1NO/1NO
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1NO/1NO
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1NO/1NO
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
AH25-F5 10/F5 10
AH25-F5 11/F5 11
AH25-F5 10/E5 10
AH25-F5 11/E5 11
AH25-F5 10/M5 10
AH25-F5 11/M5 11
AH25-F5 10/F 10
AH25-F5 11/F 11
AH25-F5 10/E 10
AH25-F5 11/E 11
AH25-F5 10/M 10
AH25-F5 11/M 11
AF89-610
Latched/Unlatched
AF89-615
• Button color
Red
R
• Up to 2-contacts can be made.
Black
B
Yellow
Y
White
W
Code D
Sky-blue
S
Orange
O
• Dimensions, mm
A*
AH25- /
B
20
30 30
50
91
7
33
Terminal screw
M3.5
Panel thickness
Packing 0.8 to 6
Contact arrangement
A*
1NO, 1NC
46.5
1NO+1NC
2NO, 2NC
68.5
Button F, F5
B 7.5
E, E5
14
M, M5
22.5

04CD/3/15
Type
Extended
round head
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
AH25-L 10
AH25-L 01
AH25-L 11
AH25-L 20
AH25-L 02
AH25-L 22
AH25-L2 10
AH25-L2 01
AH25-L2 11
AH25-L2 20
AH25-L2 02
AH25-L2 22
AH25-L3 10
AH25-L3 01
AH25-L3 11
AH25-L3 20
AH25-L3 02
AH25-L3 22
AH25-L4 10
AH25-L4 01
AH25-L4 11
AH25-L4 20
AH25-L4 02
AH25-L4 22
AF89-604
Button color Green
Code G
Red
R
Yellow
Y
Orange
O
Sky-blue
S
White
W
Alternate action
Type
AH25-L5 10
AH25-L5 01
AH25-L5 11
AH25-L5 20
AH25-L5 02
AH25-L5 22
AH25-L6 10
AH25-L6 01
AH25-L6 11
AH25-L6 20
AH25-L6 02
AH25-L6 22
AH25-L7 10
AH25-L7 01
AH25-L7 11
AH25-L7 20
AH25-L7 02
AH25-L7 22
–
–
–
–
–
–
SG-150
Extended with full
guard
(With openings)
AF90-267
Extended with full
guard
Extended with
AF89-605
AH25
Operator dimensions, mm
33
30
20
Panel thickness
0.8 to 6
24.5 18.5
20.5
29
22 33
Panel thickness 29
0.8 t o 6
24.5 18.5
25
30
• Lens color
For illuminated pushbutton with LED lamp,sky-blue is not available.
Lens are transparent colored plastic.
• Contact block dimensions: See page 04/19.
• Up to 8-contact block of contact arrangement can be made.
For switches with transformers or alternate action switches,up to
4-contact block can be made.
• Voltage
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
Without transformer 6V DC AD3 —
6V AC A3 —
5.5V AC/DC — Blank
12V AC/DC B3 —
15V AC/DC C3 C
20V AC/DC — D
24V AC/DC E3 E
With transformer 100-110V AC H3 H
115-127V AC L3 L
200-220V AC M3 M
230-254V AC Q3 Q
350-380V AC S3 S
400-440V AC T3 T
480V AC V3 V
500-550V AC W3 W

Button color Green
Code G
04CD/3/16
AH25
Type
Extended
square head
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
AH25-SL 10
AH25-SL 01
AH25-SL 11
AH25-SL 20
AH25-SL 02
AH25-SL 22
AH25-SL1 10
AH25-SL1 01
AH25-SL1 11
AH25-SL1 20
AH25-SL1 02
AH25-SL1 22
Notes: For SL,SL1,SL5 and SL6,switches with incandescent lamp only.
Alternate action
Type
Operator dimensions, mm
AH25-SL5 10
AH25-SL5 01
AH25-SL5 11
AH25-SL5 20
AH25-SL5 02
AH25-SL5 22
AH25-SL6 10
AH25-SL6 01
AH25-SL6 11
AH25-SL6 20
AH25-SL6 02
AH25-SL6 22
SG-144
Flush square
head
SG-139
22.3
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 3
33
29sq.
29sq.
24.5 18.5
49.5
26.5
Panel thickness
0.8 to 3
33
26.3sq.
32sq.
18.5 24.5 49.5
Operator Contact Type Operator dimensions,mm
Push-lock,
turn-reset
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO+2NC
AH25-VL 10
AH25-VL 01
AH25-VL 11
AH25-VL 20
AH25-VL 02
AH25-VL 22
AF89-413
Panel thickness
1 to 6
24.3
37
30
40
• Lens color
Red
R
Yellow
Y
Orange
O
Sky-blue
S
White
W
AH25-VL type : Red, yellow only
For illuminated pushbutton with LED lamp,sky-blue is not available.
Lens are transparent colored plastic.
• Contact block dimensions: See page 04CD/3/19.
• Up to 8-contact block of contact arrangement can be made.
For switches with transformers or alternate action switches,up to
4-contact block can be made. (Except AH25-VL type)
• AH25-VL type without transformer: Up to 4-contacts
AH25-VL type with transformer: Up to 2-contacts
• Voltage
Transformer Code
LED Incandescent
Without transformer 6V DC AD3 —
6V AC A3 —
5.5V AC/DC — Blank
12V AC/DC B3 —
15V AC/DC C3 C
20V AC/DC — D
24V AC/DC E3 E
With transformer 100-110V AC H3 H
115-127V AC L3 L
200-220V AC M3 M
230-254V AC Q3 Q
350-380V AC S3 S
400-440V AC T3 T
480V AC V3 V
500-550V AC W3 W

Without transformer (Except VL type) With transformer Without transformer (For VL type)
04CD/3/17
37
A*1 A*1
AH25
Without transformer
Contact block
Operator
1NO, 1NC 2NO, 2NC,
1NO+1NC
L
L5
L2,L3,L4
L6,L7
VL
SL,SL1
SL5,SL6
A
*1
64.5
86.5
63.5
85.5
48.5
66
88
70.5
3NO, 3NC
86.5
108.5
85.5
107.5
70.5
88
110
4NO, 4NC,
2NO+2NC
92.5
A*2
3NO+3NC
108.5
–
107.5
–
–
110
–
4NO+4NC
130.5
–
129.5
–
–
132
–
With transformer
Contact block
Operator
1NO, 1NC 2NO, 2NC
1NO+1NC
L
L5
L2,L3,L4
L6,L7
VL
SL,SL1
SL5,SL6
A
*2
81
103
80
102
62
83
105
86.5
108.5
85.5
107.5
70.5
88
110
3NO, 3NC
108.5
130.5
107.5
129.5
–
110
132
4NO, 4NC
2NO+2NC
130.5
152.5
129.5
151.5
–
132
154
Notes: • Up to 8-contact block of contact arrangement can be made.
For switches with transformers or alternate action switches, up to 4-
contact block of contact arrangement can be made. (Except AH25-VL)
• Type AH25-VL without transformer: 4 contact Max.
with transformer: 2 contact Max.
*1 When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of externals
increase 1.5mm.
*2 When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of externals
increase 1.5mm. (Except for 1NO and 1NC)
Terminal screw M3.5
37
24.5 18.5
Lamp terminal M3.5 Lamp terminal (AHX291L)
Transformer

04CD/3/18
Left Right
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Selector Switches
AH25
Operator Operation Type Contact operation (Example)
Contact
arrangement
Operator position
1NO (1) Upper contact
Knob
Maintained
Spring return
Maintained
Spring return
90°
Maintained
Maintained
Spring return
90°
Maintained
Contact
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
1NO
1NC
1NO+1NC
2NO
2NO+2NC
• 1 – 2 , 3 – 4 : Contact block terminal No.
• , , ( ) and contact arrangements: See page 04CD/3/19
AH25-P2 10
AH25-P2 01
AH25-P2 11
AH25-P2 20
AH25-P2 22
AH25-P0 10
AH25-P0 01
AH25-P0 11
AH25-P0 20
AH25-P0 22
AH25-PW2 10
AH25-PW2 01
AH25-PW2 11
AH25-PW2 20
AH25-PW2 22
AH25-PW0 10
AH25-PW0 01
AH25-PW0 11
AH25-PW0 20
AH25-PW0 22
AH25-SP2 10
AH25-SP2 01
AH25-SP2 11
AH25-SP2 20
AH25-SP2 22
AH25-J2 10( )
AH25-J2 01( )
AH25-J2 11( )
AH25-J2 20( )
AH25-J2 22( )
AH25-J0 10( )
AH25-J0 01( )
AH25-J0 11( )
AH25-J0 20( )
AH25-J0 22( )
AH25-SJ2 10( )
AH25-SJ2 01( )
AH25-SJ2 11( )
AH25-SJ2 20( )
AH25-SJ2 22( )
SG-188
SP-1007
Lever
SG-196
Key
SG-233
SG-226
➂ ➃
1NC (1) Upper contact
➀ ➁
1NO+1NC
(1)
Upper contact
➂ ➃
(2)
Lower contact
➀ ➁
2NO+2NC
(1)
Upper contact
➂ ➃
(3) ➂ ➃
(2)
Lower contact
➀ ➁
(4) ➀ ➁
Name plate side
Upper contact
Lower contact
Operator
each 90°
90°
each 90°
each 90°
each 90°
each 90°
• 2-position

04CD/3/19
• Operator dimensions, mm
AH25-J AH25-SJ
• Knob color
Replace the mark by the following knob color code
Knob color
Green
Code G
Code A D B
45°
45°
Selector Switches
AH25
AH25-P
AH25-SP AH25-PW
22
23
30
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
33
41
19.5
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 2
33
41
29sq.
49.5
23
28
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
33
26
41
30
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
41
33
43
19
23
18
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 2
33
23
29sq.
41
42
30
49.5
Replace the ( ) mark by the following code No.
Contact block
Operator
1NO, 1NC,
2NO, 2NC,
1NO+1NC
3NO, 3NC,
4NO, 4NC,
2NO+2NC
P0, P2, PW0, PW2
SP2
SJ2
J0, J2
A
*
AH25 53.5
55.5
52.5
51.5
75.5
77.5
74.5
73.5
3NO+3NC
97.5
99.5
96.5
95.5
4NO+4NC
119.5
121.5
118.5
117.5
Notes: * When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of externals
increase 1.5mm.
• Key code No.
Replace the with the key code No. A, B, C, D, E or F.
Removable
position
J2
J0
SJ2
– –
45°
45°
45°
45°
The standard knob color is black.
Red
R
Black
B
Terminal screw M3.5
37
A*

04CD/3/20
Selector Switches
AH25
• 3-position
Operator Operation AH25
Type
Knob Maintained
Spring return
Maintained
each 60°
each 45°
Spring return
Maintained
Maintained
each 45°
each 60°
each 45°
each 45°
Maintained
Contact
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
1NO+1NC
2NC+2NC
AH25-P3 11
AH25-P3 22
AH25-P5 11
AH25-P5 22
AH25-P6 11
AH25-P6 22
AH25-P1 22
AH25-PW3 11
AH25-PW3 22
AH25-PW5 11
AH25-PW5 22
AH25-PW6 11
AH25-PW6 22
AH25-PW1 22
AH25-SP3 11
AH25-SP3 22
AH25-J3 11( )
AH25-J3 22( )
AH25-J5 11( )
AH25-J5 22( )
AH25-J6 11( )
AH25-J6 22( )
AH25-SJ3 11( )
AH25-SJ3 22( )
SG-193
AF89-602
Lever operated
AF88-599
SG-364
Key
AF89-609
Notes: • , , ( ) and contact arrangements: See page 04CD/3/21
• Operator dimensions: See page 04CD/3/19
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°
each 45°

04CD/3/21
1NO, 1NC
2NO, 2NC
1NO+1NC
3NO, 3NC
4NO, 4NC
2NO+2NC
P3, P5, P6, PW3, PW5, PW6
SP3
SJ3
J3, J5, J6
P1, PW1
J1
45°
45°
P6, PW6,
J6
P1, PW1
Operator position
L C R L C R
Contact
arrange-ment
➂
➃
➀
➁
➂
➃
➀
➁
➀
➁
➀
➁
➂
➃
➂
➃
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Selector Switches
AH25
Contact
block
Operator
Notes : * When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of externals increase 1.5mm.
For spring return switches, up to 4-contact block can be made.
A*
AH25 53.5
55.5
52.5
51.5
–
–
75.5
77.5
74.5
73.5
75.5
73.5
3NO+3NC
97.5
99.5
96.5
95.5
–
–
4NO+4NC
119.5
121.5
118.5
117.5
–
–
• Contact operation (Example)
3-position
Terminal screw M3.5
37
A*
Replace the ( ) mark by the following code No.
Code A B C D E F G
Removable
position
J3, SJ3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
J5 – – – ● ● ● –
J6 ● – – – ● – ●
45°
45°
45°
45°
45°45°
45°
45°
45°45°
45°
45°
Type
P3, PW3,
SP3, J3,
SJ3, P5,
PW5, J5
1NO+1NC
(1) (2)
Upper contact Lower contact
1NO+1NC
(1) (2)
2NO+2NC
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
Contact closed
Note: ➀-➁,➂-➃ : Contact block terminal No.
For P1, PW1 types, up to 4-contact block can be made.
Name plate side
Upper contact
Lower contact
Operator
• Key code No.
Replace the with the key code No. A, B, C, D, E or F.
• Knob color
Replace the mark by the following knob color code
Knob color
Green
Code G
The standard knob color is black.
Red
R
Black
B

Operation Code Operation
Maintained Maintained
04CD/3/22
• Dimensions, mm
Selector Switches
AH25
3-position
key removable arrangement
position (2NO+2NC only)
Knob Maintained Replace the AH25-PCB
mark by type
arrangement code
(shown on under table). AH25-PCR
AH25-PCG
Color code:
B: Black
(Standard)
Color other than
above are
available
G: Green
R: Red
each 60°
AF89-596
Contact operation
Contact operation
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
13
24
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
Code
012
032
052
072
092
112
132
152
172
192
212
022
042
062
082
102
122
142
162
182
202
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
1324
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
13
24
13
24
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
each 60° each 60°
Contact closed
Contact operation (2NO+2NC)
Name plate side
Upper contact
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Lower contact
Operator
23
30
Panel thickness
0.8 to 6
41
33
83* 22
Terminal screw M3.5
Notes : • (1) to (4) : Contact block mounting position
• 1 - 2 , 3 - 4 : Contact block terminal No.
* When attaching the terminal cover, the dimmension of externals increase1.5mm.

04CD/3/23
Spring return AH25-PL0 11
each 45°
each 45°
Switch: with transformer Switch: without transformer
Contact
block
Operator
1NO, 1NC 1NO+1NC
2NO, 2NC
Without transformer
With transformer
AH25
Knob 1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
Operation
Maintained
each 90°
90°
AH25-PL2 11
AH25-PL2 22
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
AF89-622 AH25-PL0 22
• 2-position
• 3-position
Knob 1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
Operation
Maintained
Notes: • , and contact arrangements: See page 04CD/3/24
• 3-position, spring return type is not available.
AH25-PL3 11
AH25-PL3 22
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
Manual/
spring return
AH25-PL6 11
AH25-PL6 22
1NO+1NC
2NO+2NC
Manual/
spring return
AH25-PL7 11
AH25-PL7 22 AF89-415
each 45°
Notes: • *1 When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of external increase 1.5mm.
*2 When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of external increase 1.5mm. (Except for 1NO and 1NC)
A*
1
*2
AH25
-PL
48.5
62
70.5
70.5
3NO, 3NC
70.5
92.5
2NO+2NC
4NO, 4NC
92.5
114.5
3NO+3NC
114.5
–
• Operator dimensions, mm
23.5
30
25
Panel thickness
1 to6
30
37
Lamp terminal
33
Lamp terminal (AHX291L)
37
A*1
24.5 18.5
A*2
Transformer

04CD/3/24
For illuminated selector switch with LED lamp, sky-blue is not available.
(4) (3) (2) (1)
AH25
• Replace the mark by the following lamp voltage code
LED Incandescent
Without 5.5V AC/DC – Blank
6V DC AD3 –
6V AC A3 –
12V AC/DC B3 –
15V AC/DC C3 C
20V AC/DC – D
24V AC/DC E3 E
With 100-110V AC H3 H
115-127V AC L3 L
200-220V AC M3 M
230-254V AC Q3 Q
350-380V AC S3 S
400-440V AC T3 T
480V AC V3 V
500-550V AC W3 W
Color Green Red White Sky-blue Yellow Orange
Code G R W S Y O
2-position
arrangement
position
(2) NC ● –
(2) NO – ●
(2) NO – ●
*1 (2) NC ● –
(3) NO – ●
(4) NC ● –
*1 (2) NC ● –
(3) NO – ●
(4) NO – ●
Notes: *1 : AH25-PL2
Without transformer
3-position
arrangement
position
*1 (2) NC – – ●
1NO+1NC (1) NO – – ●
*2 (2) NC ● – –
2NO+2NC (1) NO ● – –
*3 (2) NC – – ●
(3) NO ● – –
(4) NC – – ●
*1 (2) NO ● – –
1NO+1NC (1) NC ● – –
*2 (2) NO – – ●
2NO+2NC (1) NC – – ●
*3 (2) NC – – ●
(3) NO ● – –
(4) NO ● – –
Notes: *1 : AH25-PL3, PL6 *3 : AH25-PL3
*2 : AH25-PL7
With transformer
(3) (1)
Lamp terminal (AHX291L)
(4) (2)
Transformer

04CD/3/25
Lamp voltage
Without
transformer
Button color Green
Code G
Red
R
Yellow
Y
Pilot Lights
AH25
Lens Type
Dome 15V DC
24V DC
110V AC
220V AC
15V DC
24V DC
110V AC
220V AC
15V DC
24V DC
110V AC
220V AC
15V DC
24V DC
110V AC
220V AC
110V AC
220V AC
With
transformer
AH25-ZM
AH25-ZM E
AH25-ZM H
AH25-ZM M
AH25-ZK
AH25-ZK E
AH25-ZK H
AH25-ZK M
AH25-ZS
AH25-ZS E
AH25-ZS H
AH25-ZS M
AH25-ZN
AH25-ZN E
AH25-ZN H
AH25-ZN M
AH25-ZM H8
AH25-ZM M8
SF-1095
Faceted Without
transformer
With
transformer
SF-1094
Extended
square
Without
transformer
With
transformer
SF-1093
Flush square, with
legend plate
Without
transformer
With
transformer
SF-1092
Dome/short-body with
transformer
SH-971
• LED lamp
Lens Type
Dome 12V DC
Lamp voltage
Without
transformer
24V DC
110V AC
220V AC
12V DC
24V DC
110V AC
220V AC
110V AC
220V AC
With
transformer
AH25-ZM B3
AH25-ZM E3
AH25-ZM H3
AH25-ZM M3
AH25-ZK B3
AH25-ZK E3
AH25-ZK H3
AH25-ZK M3
AH25-ZM H9
AH25-ZM M9
SF-1095
Faceted Without
transformer
With
transformer
SF-1094
Dome/
short-body with
transformer
SH-971
• Lens color
Pilot light with LED lamp, sky-blue is not available.
Orange
O
Sky-blue
S
White
W
• Voltage
Description
Without transformer
With transformer
With resistor unit
Voltage
5.5V AC/DC
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
20V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
100-110V AC
115-127V AC
200-220V AC
230-254V AC
350-380V AC
400-440V AC
480V AC
500-550V AC
110V DC
Code
Standard type
LED
–
A3
AD3
B3
C3
–
E3
H3
L3
M3
Q3
S3
T3
V3
W3
H7
Incandescent
Blank
–
–
–
C
D
E
H
L
M
Q
S
T
V
W
–

04CD/3/26
18.5 16.5 Lamp
BA 9 S/13
Pilot Lights
AH25
■ Dimensions, mm
Type Without transformer With transformer
AH25-ZM
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
22.5*2 22
22
20
20
30
30
59*1
33
29
18.5 16.5
Lamp
BA9S/13
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
50 22
29
18.5 16.5
33
20
30
Terminal screw M3.5
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
22.5*2 22
29
18.5 16.5
59*1 22
Lamp
BA 9 S/13
33
20
30
20
30
Panel thickness
15
0.8 t o 6
31*2 69
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
Panel thickness
0.8 t o 6
Lamp
BA 9 S/13
11
31*2 69
15
11
18.5 16.5
49.5
29sq.
Legend plate Legend plate
49.5
29sq.
AH25-ZM8
AH25-ZK
AH25-ZS
AH25-ZN
Note: *1 Same as the resistor unit type.
*2 When attaching the terminal cover, the dimension of externals increase 1.0mm.

*1 G, G5 type: 42
*2 This dimension applies SF, SF5, SE, SE5, SL, SL5, SL1, SL6, SP,
SJ types.
*3 L, SL type: 44 (not meet with the live section.)
04CD/3/27
Without transformer With transformer
AH25
Notes on use
Notes on use
■ Mounting space, mm
• Switch
F, F5, E, E5, G, G5, G1, G6, M,
M5, U, S1~S6, SF, SF5, SE,
SE5, L, L5, L3, L2, L4, SL, SL5,
SL1, SL6, P, PW, SP, J, SJ, PC,
PL
• Push-lock type
V, VL
• Pilot light
ZM, ZK,
ZS, ZN
25.5
4.5
+0.5
0
34
50
*1
*3
50
50
*2
42
42
45
34
50
45
36
34
42
36
45
34
34
53
50
*4
*4
Note: If key-washer or legend plate are not used,
4.5mm dia. location holes sown and the same pilot
light type ZS, ZN need not cutout.
*4 ZS, ZN type: In case of horizontal mounting

04CD/3/28
Insufficient mounting
Packing
5mm
Cap
AH25
Notes on use
■ Replace buttons
(1) To replace AH25 type F, E and G
buttons with a different color, insert a
flat-blade screwdriver into the gloove on
the button. To install them, align the
button projection and the recess on the
inner button and press them together
firmly.
(2) To replace the color tip of AH25 type
G (with half guard), do not make the trip
gloove face the guard.
(3) For AH25-M, V, VL, remove the
button and mount the switch to the
panel.
a) Tighten the button completely. The
button stroke is adjusted only when it is
completely tightened. If tightening is
insufficient, stroke increases and
destroys the contact.
b) Determine the panel thickness and
number of adjustment packings with the
table.
Do not adjust the button stroke with a
liner under the button.
■ Replace the contact block
(1) AH25 contacts can be increased
with snap-fitting contact block. To add a
contact block, push the additional
contact block straight in until it clicks.
When adding more than two contact
blocks, join the slots on both sides and
make sure that the contact blocks
facing each other are not open. After
addition or replacement, operate the
switches a few times to check that they
work correctly.
(2) To remove a contact block, use a
screwdriver to slightly open the
mounting leg, and remove the contact
block from the side of the opening leg.
When two contact blocks are mounted
release one a little, and then the other,
and remove both at the same time. The
same thing goes for transformers joined
to contact blocks. Be careful not to
force the mounting leg. Using a special
tool (AHX321), the units can be
removed more easily.
The chip can
be replaced.
The chip cannot
be replaced.
Open
N.O. N.C.
N.O. N.C.
■ Exchange of transformer
(1) A transformer can be easily snap-fitted
to an AH25 pilot light. When a
transformer is added to a pilot light
without a transformer, attach a cover to
the terminal of the pilot light to avoid
wiring errors.
(2) The capacity of the transformer is
set for the lamp. No other load can be
applied.
■ Adjustment packing
Four 1.6mm packings (molded as one)
are included. Based on the thickness of
the mounting panel, adjust the number
as shown in the table. To mount to a
panels thinner than 1.6mm, one 1.6mm
packing is needed (Purchased
separately).
Mounting panel thickness and number
of packings (reference)
Wiring error
prevention
cover AHX306
Mounting panel
thickness (mm)
Number of packings
0.8 to 2.0 5
2.0 to 3.2 4
3.2 to 4.5 3
4.5 to 6.0 2
Notes:
1. When using a key washer or legend plate,
decrement one from the numbers in the above
table.
2. When more than four packings are needed, these
are bought separately.
Groove
Applicable type:
Water-proof cap AHX106, 155
Dust-proof cap AHX025, 026, 027
AHX046, 047, 048
AHX105, 112, 114
When attached to the panel in
combination with a water-proof or dust-proof
cap, the water-proof cap or dust-proof
cap may sink downward and
prevent the depressed button from
returning to its original position.
As shown in the following figure, cut an
approximately 5-mm air outlet in the
portion of the ring packing touching the
panel surface. Also, reduce the number of
packing rings by one below the standard
number. The clamp ring tightening torque
is 1.5 to 2.5 N•m.
The water-proof cap or dust-proof cap
seals the panel surface to provide IP65
protection.

04CD/3/29
(Without transformer)*
Name plate Name plate
3 4
Resister unit (AHX519)
Voltage stabilizing unit (AHX518)
Flicker unit (AHX516)
AH25
Notes on use
■ Terminal layout
X1 X2 X1 X2
X1 X2
Terminal No.X1,X2
Terminal No.X1 (-),X2 (+)
Black
1 2
Brown
Name plate
Lamp terminal(AHX291L)
Brown
+ – X2( ) X1( )
1NO(AHX290,2901 to 2902) 1NC(AHX291,2911 to 2914)
Pilot light
Illuminated selector switch (PL)
Illuminated push-lock switch (VL)
Transformer(AHX511- )
+ –
+ –
Notes: * The positive and negative terminals are used for 6V DC applications.
see page 04/53 to 04/57.

04CD/3/30
Description Type
F, F5, S1-S6 type
E, E5, G, G5, G1,
G6 type
F, F5, S1-S6 type
E, E5, G, G5,
G1, G6 type
Replace the mark by the following color
code.
code.
Green
Used with
AHX066- F, F5 type
AHX067- E, E5 type
code.
Color: Silver (metal)
Dimensions, mm
AHX046
AHX047
AHX048
AHX025
AHX026
AHX027
AHX105-R
AHX105-G
AHX105-B
AHX105-Y
AHX105-W
AHX112-R
AHX112-G
AHX112-B
AHX114-R
AHX114-G
AHX114-B
AHX001
AHX003
Wrench
Panel plug
Dust-tight cap
(indoor use)
Dust-tight cap
(outdoor use)
Water-tight cap
Lamp changer
F type
E type
M type
F type
E type
E type
L type
3 1
Dimensions, mm
34×17.3
Dimensions, mm
34×17.3
Dimensions,
mm
45×25
Dimensions,
mm
34×17.3
Dimensions,
mm
34×17.3
Dimensions, mm 31×18
Dimensions, mm 31×25.5
Red
Green
Black
Red
Green
Black
Red
Green
Black
Yellow
White
Red
Green
Black
Red
Green
Black
Description Type
Button
SC993
SC992
SC-993
Y-1559
Y-1990
AF95-22
Y-1541
Y-1542
SC-1094
SC-1012
AF87-522
T-1995
T-1993
AHX106
AHX155
AHX029
AHX790
Standard
Engraving
Mushroom head
pushbutton
Symbol mark button
pushbutton
M, M5 type AHX065-
AHX061-
AHX062-
AHX063-
AHX064-
For Incandescen lamp
For LED lamp
AHX029
AHX790
Note:
Button color Green
Code G
Red
R
Black
B
Button color
Code
Yellow
Y
Dark green
D
White
W
Button color
Code
Orange
O
Sky-blue
S
Button color Green
Code G
Red
R
Black
B
Symbol mark
Symbol mark color
Button
Code
Red
White Black White
Black
E F H J
Button color
Code
Yellow
Y
Dark green
D
White
W
Button color
Code
Orange
O
Sky-blue
S
Type
V type
VL type
AHX769-
AHX755-
Panel plug Packing
Nut
M5
20
31
35
Note: Replace the mark by the following color
code.
Symbol mark
Symbol mark color
Button
Code
Green
White Black
T U
Button color
Code
Red
R
Black*
B
Yellow
Y
* Except VL type.
AH25
Accessories
■ Accessories

Used with
code
color
Code Y R G
Lens color Y R G
color
Code A O S
Lens color O W S
04CD/3/31
ZM type
ZK type
AF88-613
code.
AH25
Accessories
Pilot light round lens
Pilot light faceted lens
Pilot light square lens
Pilot light and
illuminated
pushbutton square
lens
Legend plate
L, L5, L2, L6,
L3, L7, L4 type
*For LED lamp only
*For LED lamp only
*For LED lamp only
ZS type
Green
Red
Clear
Orange
Yellow
Sky-blue
White
Green
Red
Clear
Orange
Yellow
Sky-blue
White
Green
Red
Clear
Orange
Yellow
Sky-blue
White
Green
Red
Clear
Orange
Yellow
Sky-blue
White
AHX068-G, LG*
AHX068-R, LR*
AHX068-C
AHX068-O
AHX068-Y
AHX068-S
AHX068-W, LW*
AHX123-G, LG*
AHX123-R, LR*
AHX123-C
AHX123-O
AHX123-Y
AHX123-S
AHX123-W, LW*
AHX124-G, LG*
AHX124-R, LR*
AHX124-C
AHX124-O
AHX124-Y
AHX124-S
AHX124-W, LW*
AHX125-G
AHX125-R
AHX125-C
AHX125-O
AHX125-Y
AHX125-S
AHX125-W
AHX126-
AHX241-W
ZN, SL1, SL6 type
ZN, SL1, SL6 type
Dimensions, mm 21.7sq.×2
SC-1001
SC-1002
SC-1009
SC-1011
SF-1114
LED lamp Type
SG-370
APX508-6
APX508-D6
APX508-12
APX508-15
APX508-24
APX508 APX510
1NO
1NC
20
Lamp voltage
ø10
AHX290
AHX291
Contact block
6V AC
6V DC
12V AC/DC
15V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
Pilot Lights*
APX510-6
6V AC
APX510-D6
6V DC
APX510-12
12V AC/DC
APX510-15
15V AC/DC
APX510-24
24V AC/DC
* When the pilot lights code is W (white), use an
LED lamp (APX510- O)
Illuminated
pushbuttons,
Illuminated
sellectors
Note: Some models use dedicated contact blocks,
so this may not be used. Contact FUJI.
Lens color Green
Code G
Red
R
Clear
C
Sky-blue
S
Lens color
Code
Yellow
Y
Orange
O
White
W
Incandescent lamp
KKD06-307
voltage consumption
1W
1W
1W
1W
Dimensions, mm:
Lamp base: BA9s/13
Lamp base: BA9s/13
Dimensions, mm:
24
ø11.6
19
ø10
KKD06-208

Short-body transformer
for ZM 8 and ZM 9
type
Base unit for
transformer separate
mounting
04CD/3/32
Type
AHX083
Used with
AH25
Accessories
Note:The locking nut is made of aluminum
Lamp terminal unit
SG-370
Type
AHX291L
Used with
VL, PL
Lamp terminal: for without transformer
Transformer 100 to 110V AC
115 to 127V AC
200 to 220V AC
230 to 254V AC
350 to 380V AC
400 to 440V AC
480V AC
500 to 550V AC
AHX511-H
AHX511-L
AHX511-M
AHX511-Q
AHX511-S
AHX511-T
AHX511-V
AHX511-W
100 to 110V AC
115 to 127V AC
200 to 220V AC
230 to 254V AC
350 to 380V AC
400 to 440V AC
480V AC
500 to 550V AC
AHX513-H
AHX513-L
AHX513-M
AHX513-Q
AHX513-S
AHX513-T
AHX513-V
AHX513-W
SI-8
SH-183
AF89-824
AHX305
SG-842
AHX426
AF92-339
AHX376
SG-5
AHX326
Combining the base unit with a standard
transformer makes a separate mounting
type transformer. It can be mounted to the
panel with screw or rails.
* Not aproved
Secondary side terminal cover need to order.
Type
AHX305
Used with
Dimensions, mm
27.5×31×8
Terminal cover
Contact block,
lamp terminal
unit
23.5×27.5×16
AHX426 Pilot lights
AHX376 Transformer
Short-body
transformer
Resistor unit
13×29×6.5
SG-842
AHX306
For pilot lights and AH326 (base unit)
Dimensions, mm
Terminal cover
SC-1016
SF-1113
SC-1148
SC-1000
SC-998
SH-154
Key washer
Packing Rubber
Resin (Standard)
AHX151
AHX283
Nut (Resin) For F, E, L, L5
type
For ZM, ZK type
For P, J, M,
S1-S6, G, G5
Red
Black
White
Dark green
* Chrome-plate
Chrome-plate
Red
Black
White
Dark green
* Chrome-plate
Nut (aluminum) For F, E
For M, P
AHX050
AHX051
Full guard ring For G1, G6 type
For L2, L6 type
For L3, L7 type
For L4 type
Dust-tight cap for knob
operated selector s
witch
AHX323
Dust-tight case
AHX055
AHX058
AHX059
AHX060
AHX094
AHX095
AHX096
AHX097
AHX098
AHX098-1
AHX099
AHX100
AHX101
AHX102
AHX103
Illuminated type
Use rubber packing for mounting on plastic
panels or panels painted with natural dry
paint.
Note: Chrome-plated products marked with
asterisk (*) are made of metal.
In combination with this cap, the knob
operated selector switch can be used as a
dust-proof type.
Used with AHX315
(1NO+1NC)
AHX316
(2NO+2NC)
AH25
F, E, G1, M, U
S1-S6, SF, SE,
P, PW, J, PC
SJ, SP
SG-1050 SG-1051
25.5
8.5
Thickness: 0.5mm
Color : Black

04CD/3/33
Locks the button as it is pressed, easily
attached and removed with the nut.
Special tool AHX321
Pushbutton switch Selector switch
ON
OFF-ON
OFF
START
STOP
Note: Put in the ( ) ordering word as shown in the upper table
AH25
Accessories
Description Type
Locking attachment
for E type
AF89-613
AHX053
This is a special tool for removing contact
blocks and transformers.
It can also remove round color lens.
AHX351( )
SG-873
Y-1545
AF-87-49
Legend plate
(Standard)
Legend plate
(Unprinted)
Unprinted aluminume
Unprinted aluminume, short
size
Black
Black, short size
AHX351-A
AHX351-AS
AHX351-B
AHX351-BS
Example: In case of STOP
AHX351(STOP)

04CD/3/34
AH25
Mass
■ Mass, gram
AH25 series
Type
AH25- F
E
M
G
G1
SF
SE
U
S1–S6
V
AH25- F5
E5
M5
G5
G6
SF5
SE5
AH25- L
L • T
L2
L2 • T
L3
L3 • T
L4
L4 • T
SL
SL • T
SL1
SL1 • T
VL
VL • T
AH25- L5
L5 • T
L6
L6 • T
L7
L7 • T
SL5
SL5 • T
SL6
SL6 • T
42
44
48
51
53
80
82
80
–
55
59
61
65
68
70
97
99
61
131
74
144
78
148
57
127
99
169
80
150
72
129
81
151
94
164
98
168
116
186
97
167
56
58
62
65
67
94
96
94
–
69
73
75
79
82
84
111
113
75
143
88
156
92
160
71
139
113
181
94
162
84
141
95
163
108
176
112
180
130
198
111
179
80
82
86
89
91
118
120
118
133
93
97
99
103
106
108
135
137
99
167
112
180
116
184
95
163
137
205
118
186
108
–
119
187
132
200
136
204
154
222
135
203
104
106
110
113
115
142
144
142
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
123
–
136
–
140
–
119
–
161
–
142
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
128
130
134
137
139
166
168
166
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
147
–
160
–
164
–
143
–
185
–
166
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Type
AH25- F5/F5
F5/E5
F5/M5
1NO(1NC)/1NO(1NC)
151
153
157
2NO(2NC)/2NO(2NC)
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
175
177
181
Type
AH25- P2, P0
P3, P5, P6
P1
PW2, PW0
PW3, PW5, PW6
PW1
SP2
SP3
PC
J2, J0
J3, J5, J6
SJ2
SJ3
AH25- PL2, PL0
PL2, PL0 • T
PL3, PL6, PL7
PL3, PL6, PL7 • T
62
–
–
67
–
–
89
–
–
88
–
115
–
71
128
–
–
76
76
128
81
81
133
103
103
–
102
102
129
129
83
140
83
140
100
100
152
105
105
157
127
127
108
126
126
153
153
107
164
107
164
124
124
–
129
129
–
151
151
–
150
150
177
177
131
–
131
–
148
148
–
153
153
–
175
175
–
174
174
201
201
–
–
–
–
AH25- ZM
ZM • T
ZM 8, 9
ZK
ZK • T
ZS
ZS • T
ZN
ZN • T
29
99
101
29
99
62
132
62
132
Note • T: With transformer
1NO
(1NC)
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
2NC
+
2NO
3NC
+
3NO
4NC
+
4NO
1NO
(1NC)
2NO
(2NC)
(1NO+1NC)
2NC
+
2NO
3NC
+
3NO
4NC
+
4NO

04CD/4/1
Command boxes
AHX9
■ Description
• Enclosed type
Enclosed type steel boxes finished respectively
with one to five holes.Rounded, smooth design.
Selectable from the 22mm, 25mm, and 30mm dia.
series command switches according to the
application.
• Dust protected type, protected against water jets
Made of lightweight, strong aluminum die-casting.
Rounded, smooth design.
Series of models finished respectively with one to
four holes. (Note: Only 22 dia. series models
incorporate four holes.)
AF92-388
AF92-277
AHX 9 0 1 A
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃
AHX: Type
➁ Size of mounting hole
2: 22mm dia. series
1: 25mm dia. series
0: 30mm dia. series
9: without hole
➂Number of mounting hole
•Enclosed type
1: 1 hole*1
2: 2 holes
3: 3 holes
4: 4 holes
5: 5 holes
•Dust protected type, protected against water jets
1: 1 hole*2
2: 2 holes
3: 3 holes
4: 4 hole*3
9: 1 hole*1
Notes: *1 Dedicated box with one hole
*2 Same as the box for two holes in external dimension
*3 Only 22mm dia. series can be manufactured
➃ Degree of protection
A: Enclosed type
W: Dust protected type, protected against water jets
Dgree of Protection
Enclosed-type
Dust protected type,
protected against
water jets
Type
AHX9 1A
AHX9 2A
AHX9 3A
AHX9 4A
AHX9 5A
AHX929W
AHX919W
AHX909W
AHX9 1W
AHX9 2W
AHX9 3W
AHX924W
Dedicated box with
one hole.
Replace the mark the Size of mounting hole code

Command boxes
AHX9
Specifications
Description
Degree of Protection
Material
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Applicable type *1
Depth
Laed hole
Options
Mounting bracket: A mounting
bracket is available, with which
the command box can be
mounted vertical or at an angle
of 15 (see page 04CD/4/4)
Command boxes incorporating switches are available
Note: *1 Check the effective depth of the box when selecting mountable switches.
04CD/4/2
Dust protected type, protected against water jets
IP65(IEC 60529)
Aluminum die cast
45 to 85% RH(with in -5 to +40 C)
22, 25, 30mm dia.Command switch series
AK22, RC310-F Cam type
selector switch
30mm dia. short-body type meter
73mm
Knockout hole (22mm dia. top side , 27mm dia. bottom side)
See the description in the bellow:
Mountable switches and degree of protection
Enclosed type
IP40(IEC 60529)
Steel
-25 to +50 C
84mm
■ Mountable switches and degree of protection (Dust
protected type, protected against water jets)
The degree of protection of the command box is IP65, which,
however, changes according to the device to which the command
box is mounted. Check the depth of the command box when
selecting the device. Consult your Fuji Electric FA representative
when using the command box outdoors (e.g., plating factory yards,
seashores, and places exposed to special cutting oil).
Conforms to IEC standard IP65 (Dust protected type, protected
against water jets)
•25mm dia. 30mm dia. series pushbuttons.*
Note: *Except for conform to IEC standard IP40 (Enclosed type)
Pushbutton switches, illuminated pushbutton switches,
selector switches, pilot lights, and joy stick selector switches.
•22mm dia. series pushbuttons.
Pushbutton switches, illuminated pushbutton switches,
selector switches, pilot lights, and joy stick selector switches.
•Cam switch
AK22 series (22mm dia.), RC310F series (30mm dia.).
Conforms to IEC standard IP40 (Enclosed type)
Sqare head pushbutton switch, illuminated sqare head
pushbutton switch, sqare head selector switches, sqare
head pilot lights, sqare head pilot lights with legend plate.
Illuminated pushbutton switches(push-pull type), pilot lights with
dome with dimmer control.

0.5
0 0.5
04CD/4/3
Note on use
■ Dimensions, mm:
1 hole 2 to 5 holes
2-M3 6
Mounting screw Mounting screw
100
75
1 hole
86
60 4- 5.5
60
1 to 2 holes
86
60 4- 5.5
2-M3 6
3 holes
86
60
60
5 8 (D)
4- 5.5
50
Mounting hole Mounting hole Mounting hole Mounting hole
64
100 30
50
114
150 30
50 50
30
164
200
(4- 5.5)
4 holes (22mm dia. series only)
86
60 4- 5.5
164
200 30
36 36 36
84
77
PF3/4
(provided with
screw for
22-mm conduit)
30
63
87
30
30
30
63
63
63
87
87
87
Earth terminal M4 Earth terminal M4 Earth terminal M4 Earth terminal M4
80
22/ 27Knockout hole
Earth terminal M4
Earth terminal M4
80
75
8
5
A
C
B
22/ 27Knockout hole
5 8 (A)
D
Bottom view Bottom view
Number of
holes
2
3
4
5
Dimension : mm
A
50
50
50
50
B
100
150
200
250
C
150
200
250
300
Enclosures
13
Fig.1
Panel
Fig.2
■ Precautions for panel (wall) mounting (Dust
protected type, protected against water jets)
• Do not insert M4 screws into the waterproof bushings
that are press-fit into the four mounting holes of the
casing and hit the screws with a hammer, or
otherwise the screws will break through the
waterproof bushings (see fig. 1).
• Insert the screws into the panel mounting holes and
secure the screws with nuts (see fig. 2). The
waterproof performance of the casing remains
unchanged when the screws are inserted into the
bushings.
•Enclosed type
•Dust protected type, protected against water jets
Command boxes
AHX9
•Panel drilling (Enclosed type, Dust protected type, protected against water jets)
4 22.5 0.5
0
13
3.5 25.5
4.5 30.5
14.5
17
22mm dia. series 25mm dia. series 30mm dia. series
0
0.5
0
0.5
0
0.5
0

Command boxes
AHX9
■ Accessories (for Enclosed type)
• Mounting bracket
04CD/4/4
15
Mounting bracket
(Vertical type)
Mounting bracket
(Angle type)
Number of
holes
1
2
3
4
5
Mounting method
Vertical type
Angle type
Vertical type
Angle type
Vertical type
Angle type
Vertical type
Angle type
Vertical type
Angle type
Type
AJ91S
AJ91K
AJ92S
AJ92K
AJ93S
AJ93K
AJ94S
AJ94K
AJ95S
AJ95K
Type
AJ91S
AJ91K
AJ92S
AJ92K
AJ93S
AJ93K
AJ94S
AJ94K
AJ95S
AJ95K
Dimension:mm
A B C
90 50 90
90 50 105
140 100 90
140 100 105
190 150 90
190 150 105
240 200 90
240 200 105
290 250 90
290 250 105
C5
A
B 20
C5 23
4-M4
60
C
76
5
43 5.5
60
4.5
Dimensions, mm:

04CD/4/5
Mass, gram
Type
AHX901A
AHX902A
AHX903A
AHX904A
AHX905A
AHX911A
AHX912A
AHX913A
AHX914A
AHX915A
AHX921A
AHX922A
Mass
300
410
500
650
770
300
410
510
660
770
300
410
Type
AHX923A
AHX924A
AHX925A
AHX901W
AHX902W
AHX903W
AHX911W
AHX912W
AHX913W
AHX921W
AHX922W
AHX923W
Mass
520
660
780
480
480
600
490
490
590
490
490
610
Type
AHX924W
AHX992W
AHX993W
AHX909W
AHX919W
AHX929W
AHX999W
AHX991A
AHX992A
AHX993A
AHX994A
AHX995A
Mass
610
490
620
390
390
390
400
310
420
520
670
790
Command boxes
AHX9

Catalog Disclaimer
The information contained in this catalog does not constitute an express or implied warranty of quality, any warranty of
merchantability of fitness for a particular purpose is hereby disclaimed.
Since the user's product information, specific use application, and conditions of use are all outside of Fuji Electric FA
Components Systems'control, it shall be the responsibility of the user to determine the suitability of any of the
products mentioned for the user's application.
One Year Limited Warranty
The products identified in this catalog shall be sold pursuant to the terms and conditions identified in the
Conditions of Sale issued by Fuji Electric FA with each order confirmation.
Except to the extent otherwise provided for in the Conditions of Sale issued by Fuji Electric FA, Fuji Electric FA
warrants that the Fuji Electric FA products identified in this catalog shall be free from significant defects in materials
and workmanship provided the product has not been: 1) repaired or altered by others than Fuji Electric FA; 2) subjected
to negligence, accident, misuse, or damage by circumstances beyond Fuji Electric FA's control; 3) improperly operated,
maintained or stored; or 4) used in other than normal use or service. This warranty shall apply only to defects appearing
within one (1) year from the date of shipment by Fuji Electric FA, and in such case, only if such defects are reported
to Fuji Electric FA within thirty (30) days of discovery by purchaser. Such notice should be submitted in writing to Fuji
Electric FA at 5-7, Nihonbashi Odemma-cho, Chuo-ku, Tokyo, Japan. The sole and exclusive remedy with respected to
the above warranty whether such claim is based on warranty, contract, negligence, strict liability or any other theory,
is limited to the repair or replacement of such product or, at Fuji Electric FA's option reimbursement by Fuji Electric
FA of the purchase price paid to Fuji Electric FA for the particular product. Fuji Electric FA does not make any other
representations or warranties, whether oral or in writing, expressed or implied, including but not limited to any
warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Except as provided in the Conditions of
Sale, no agent or representative of Fuji Electric FA is authorized to modify the terms of this warranty in writing or orally.
In no event shall Fuji Electric FA be liable for special, indirect or consequential damages, including but not limited to,
loss of use of the product, other equipment, plant and power system which is installed with the product, loss of profits
or revenues, cost of capital, or claims against the purchaser or user of the product by its customers resulting from
the use of information, recommendations and descriptions contained herein. The purchaser agrees to pass on to its
customers and users, in writing at the time inquiries and orders are received by buyer, Fuji Electric FA's warranty as set
forth above.
Caution Safety precautions
• Operate (keep) in the environment specified in the operating instructions and manual. High temperature, high
humidity, condensation, dust, corrosive gases, oil, organic solvents, excessive vibration or shock might cause electric
shock, fire, erratic operation or failure.
• Follow the regulations of industrial wastes when the product is to be discarded.
• The products covered in this catalogs have not been designed or manufactured for use in equipment or systems
which, in the event of failure, can lead to loss of human life.
• If you intend to use the products covered in this catalog for special applications, such as for nuclear energy control,
aerospace, medical, or transportation, please consult our Fuji Electric FA agent.
• Be sure to provide protective measures when using the product covered in these catalogs in equipment which, in the
event of failure, may lead to loss of human life or other grave results.
• Follow the directions of the operating instructions when mounting the product.

DC CATALOG DIGEST INDEX
Individual LOW VOLTAGE PRODUCTS Up to 600 Volts
catalog No.
01 Magnetic Contactors and Starters
Thermal Overload Relays, Solid-state Contactors
02
Manual Motor Starters and Contactors
Combination Starters
Industrial Relays, Industrial Control Relays
Annunciator Relay Unit, Time Delay Relays
Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, Pilot Lights
Rotary Switches, Cam Type Selector Switches
Panel Switches, Terminal Blocks, Testing Terminals
Limit Switches, Proximity Switches
Photoelectric Switches
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Air Circuit Breakers
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
Earth Leakage Protective Relays
Circuit Protectors
Low Voltage Current-Limiting Fuses
Measuring Instruments, Arresters, Transducers
Power Factor Controllers
Power Monitoring Equipment (F-MPC)
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
AC Power Regulators
Noise Suppression Filters
Control Power Transformers
HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCTS Up to 36kV
11 Disconnecting Switches, Power Fuses
Air Load Break Switches
Instrument Transformers — VT, CT
12 Vacuum Circuit Breakers, Vacuum Magnetic Contactors
Protective Relays
INDIVIDUAL CATALOG from DC CATALOG 20th Edition 04
5-7, Nihonbashi Odemma-cho, Chuo-ku, Tokyo, 103-0011, Japan
URL http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/fcs/eng
Information in this catalog is subject to change without notice.
2010-09 PDF FOLS DEC2004

04 - Driver Components - Fuji Electric

More Related Content

Viewers also liked (20)

Similar to 04 - Driver Components - Fuji Electric (20)

More from CTY TNHH HẠO PHƯƠNG (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

04 - Driver Components - Fuji Electric